Technical reference manual Line distance protection IED REL 670 ANSI

Innovation

from

ABB

Technical reference manual

Line distance protection IED REL 670

About this manual

Document No: 1MRK 506 275-UUS Issued: March 2007 Product version: 1.1 Revision:

Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved.

COPYRIGHT WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT THAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED. THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN CASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESS BELOW. THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN THE INTERESTS OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SW PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT. Manufacturer:
ABB Inc. 3450 Harvester Road Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada Phone: (905) 639-8840 Fax: (905) 333-7565 ABB Inc. 7036 Snowdrift Road Allentown, PA 18106, USA Phone: (610) 395-7333 Toll Free: (800) 634-6005 Fax: (610) 395-1055

Contents

Chapter
Chapter 1

Page
Introduction ..................................................................... 1
Introduction to the technical reference manual.................................... 2 About the complete set of manuals for an IED ............................... 2 About the technical reference manual ............................................ 3 Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM) .......................... 4 Introduction................................................................................ 4 Principle of operation................................................................. 4 Input and output signals ............................................................ 7 Function block ........................................................................... 7 Setting parameters .................................................................... 7 Technical data ........................................................................... 7 Intended audience .......................................................................... 7 General...................................................................................... 7 Requirements ............................................................................ 8 Related documents......................................................................... 8 Revision notes ................................................................................ 9

Chapter 2

Local human-machine interface .................................. 11

Medium size graphic HMI .................................................................. 12 Design .......................................................................................... 12 Keypad............................................................................................... 17 LHMI related functions....................................................................... 19 Introduction ................................................................................... 19 General setting parameters .......................................................... 19 Status indication LEDs ................................................................. 19 Design ..................................................................................... 19 Function block ......................................................................... 20 Input and output signals .......................................................... 20 Indication LEDs ............................................................................ 20 Introduction.............................................................................. 20 Design ..................................................................................... 21 Function block ......................................................................... 28 Input and output signals .......................................................... 28 Setting parameters .................................................................. 29

Chapter 3

Basic IED functions ...................................................... 33

Analog inputs ..................................................................................... 34 Introduction ................................................................................... 34 Principle of operation .................................................................... 34 Function block .............................................................................. 35 Output signals............................................................................... 36 Setting parameters ....................................................................... 38

Contents

Authorization ...................................................................................... 44 Authorization handling in the tool.................................................. 44 Authorization handling in the IED ................................................. 50 Self supervision with internal event list .............................................. 51 Introduction ................................................................................... 51 Principle of operation .................................................................... 51 Internal signals ........................................................................ 52 Run-time model ....................................................................... 54 Function block............................................................................... 56 Output signals............................................................................... 56 Setting parameters ....................................................................... 56 Technical data .............................................................................. 56 Time synchronization ......................................................................... 57 Introduction ................................................................................... 57 Principle of operation .................................................................... 57 General concepts .................................................................... 57 Real Time Clock (RTC) operation............................................ 58 Synchronization alternatives.................................................... 59 Function block............................................................................... 62 Output signals............................................................................... 62 Setting parameters ....................................................................... 62 Technical data .............................................................................. 65 Parameter setting groups .................................................................. 66 Introduction ................................................................................... 66 Principle of operation .................................................................... 66 Function block............................................................................... 67 Input and output signals................................................................ 68 Setting parameters ....................................................................... 68 Test mode functionality ...................................................................... 70 Introduction ................................................................................... 70 Principle of operation .................................................................... 70 Function block............................................................................... 71 Input and output signals................................................................ 71 Setting parameters ....................................................................... 72 IED identifiers .................................................................................... 73 Introduction ................................................................................... 73 Setting parameters ....................................................................... 73 Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) ............................................... 74 Introduction ................................................................................... 74 Principle of operation .................................................................... 74 Function block............................................................................... 74 Input and output signals................................................................ 74 Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) ........................................... 76 Introduction ................................................................................... 76 Principle of operation .................................................................... 76 Function block............................................................................... 76 Input and output signals................................................................ 76 Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) ................................................... 78 Introduction ................................................................................... 78 Principle of operation .................................................................... 78 Function block............................................................................... 78 Input and output signals................................................................ 78 Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI) .............................................. 79

Contents

Introduction ................................................................................... 79 Principle of operation .................................................................... 79 Function block .............................................................................. 79 Input and output signals ............................................................... 80 Setting parameters ....................................................................... 81 Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)................................................ 83 Introduction ................................................................................... 83 Principle of operation .................................................................... 83 Function block .............................................................................. 83 Input and output signals ............................................................... 83 Setting parameters ....................................................................... 84 Authority status (AUTS) ..................................................................... 85 Introduction ................................................................................... 85 Principle of operation .................................................................... 85 Function block .............................................................................. 85 Output signals............................................................................... 85 Setting parameters ....................................................................... 85 Goose binary receive......................................................................... 86 Function block .............................................................................. 86 Input and output signals ............................................................... 87 Setting parameters ....................................................................... 88

Chapter 4

Differential protection ................................................... 89

High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)............................. 90 Introduction ................................................................................... 90 Principle of operation .................................................................... 90 Logic diagram .......................................................................... 90 Function block .............................................................................. 91 Input and output signals ............................................................... 91 Setting parameters ....................................................................... 92 Technical data .............................................................................. 92

Chapter 5

Impedance protection................................................... 93
Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)... 94 Introduction ................................................................................... 94 Principle of operation .................................................................... 95 Full scheme measurement ...................................................... 95 Impedance characteristic......................................................... 95 Minimum operating current...................................................... 99 Measuring principles.............................................................. 100 Directional lines ..................................................................... 102 Simplified logic diagrams....................................................... 104 Function block ............................................................................ 108 Input and output signals ............................................................. 109 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 110 Technical data ............................................................................ 111 Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS) ................................................. 113

Contents

Introduction ................................................................................. 113 Principle of operation .................................................................. 113 Full scheme measurement .................................................... 113 Impedance characteristic....................................................... 114 Minimum operating current .................................................... 118 Measuring principles.............................................................. 118 Directionality for series compensation ................................... 121 Simplified logic diagrams ....................................................... 123 Function block............................................................................. 127 Input and output signals.............................................................. 128 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 129 Technical data ............................................................................ 130 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21....... 132 Introduction ................................................................................. 132 Principle of operation .................................................................. 133 Full scheme measurement .................................................... 133 Impedance characteristic....................................................... 133 Basic operation characteristics .............................................. 134 Theory for operation .............................................................. 136 Function block............................................................................. 147 Input and output signals.............................................................. 148 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 149 Technical data ............................................................................ 151 Mho impedance supervision logic.................................................... 152 Introduction ................................................................................. 152 Principle of operation .................................................................. 152 Fault inception detection........................................................ 152 Function block............................................................................. 153 Input and output signals.............................................................. 154 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 154 Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)....................... 156 Introduction ................................................................................. 156 Principle of operation .................................................................. 156 Phase-to-ground fault ............................................................ 158 Phase-to-phase fault ............................................................. 160 Three phase faults ................................................................. 161 Load encroachment ............................................................... 162 Minimum operate currents ..................................................... 166 Simplified logic diagrams ....................................................... 166 Function block............................................................................. 171 Input and output signals.............................................................. 171 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 172 Technical data ............................................................................ 173 Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho ................... 174 Introduction ................................................................................. 174 Principle of operation .................................................................. 174 Full scheme measurement .................................................... 174 Impedance characteristic....................................................... 175 Minimum operating current .................................................... 177 Measuring principles.............................................................. 177 Directional lines ..................................................................... 180 Simplified logic diagrams ....................................................... 182 Function block............................................................................. 184

Contents

Input and output signals ............................................................. 184 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 185 Technical data ............................................................................ 186 Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21) .... 187 Introduction ................................................................................. 187 Principle of operation .................................................................. 187 The phase selection function................................................. 187 Function block ............................................................................ 199 Input and output signals ............................................................. 199 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 200 Technical data ............................................................................ 201 Directional impedance Mho (RDIR) ................................................. 202 Introduction ................................................................................. 202 Principle of operation .................................................................. 202 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic, ZDM 202 Additional distance protection directional function for ground faults, ZDA ........................................................... 205 Function block ............................................................................ 207 Input and output signals ............................................................. 207 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 208 Phase preference logic .................................................................... 210 Introduction ................................................................................. 210 Principle of operation .................................................................. 210 Function block ............................................................................ 213 Input and output signals ............................................................. 213 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 214 Power swing detection (RPSB, 78).................................................. 215 Introduction ................................................................................. 215 Principle of operation .................................................................. 215 Resistive reach in forward direction....................................... 217 Resistive reach in reverse direction....................................... 217 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction ................... 218 Basic detection logic.............................................................. 218 Operating and inhibit conditions ............................................ 220 Function block ............................................................................ 221 Input and output signals ............................................................. 221 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 222 Technical data ............................................................................ 223 Power swing logic (RPSL, 78) ......................................................... 224 Introduction ................................................................................. 224 Principle of operation .................................................................. 224 Communication and tripping logic ......................................... 224 Blocking logic......................................................................... 225 Function block ............................................................................ 227 Input and output signals ............................................................. 227 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 228 Technical data ............................................................................ 228 Pole Slip protection (PPAM, 78) ...................................................... 229 Introduction ................................................................................. 229 Principle of operation .................................................................. 229 Function block ............................................................................ 233 Input and output signals ............................................................. 233 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 234

Contents

Technical data ............................................................................ 235 Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (SFCV) .............................................................. 236 Introduction ................................................................................. 236 Principle of operation .................................................................. 236 Function block............................................................................. 238 Input and output signals.............................................................. 238 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 238 Technical data ............................................................................ 239

Chapter 6

Current protection ....................................................... 241

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50) ................. 242 Introduction ................................................................................. 242 Principle of operation .................................................................. 242 Function block............................................................................. 242 Input and output signals.............................................................. 243 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 243 Technical data ............................................................................ 244 Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67).................. 245 Introduction ................................................................................. 245 Principle of operation .................................................................. 245 Function block............................................................................. 249 Input and output signals.............................................................. 250 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 251 Technical data ............................................................................ 258 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N) ............ 260 Introduction ................................................................................. 260 Principle of operation .................................................................. 260 Function block............................................................................. 261 Input and output signals.............................................................. 261 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 261 Technical data ............................................................................ 262 Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)........... 263 Introduction ................................................................................. 263 Principle of operation .................................................................. 263 Operating quantity within the function ................................... 264 Internal polarizing facility of the function................................ 264 External polarizing facility for Ground Fault function ............. 266 Base quantities within the function ........................................ 267 Internal Ground Fault function structure ............................... 267 Four residual overcurrent stages ........................................... 267 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparision stage ............................. 268 Second harmonic blocking element....................................... 270 Switch on to fault feature ....................................................... 272 Function block............................................................................. 276 Input and output signals.............................................................. 276 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 277 Technical data ............................................................................ 285 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and

Contents

power protection (PSDE, 67N) ...................................................... 286 Introduction ................................................................................. 286 Principle of operation .................................................................. 287 Introduction............................................................................ 287 Function block ............................................................................ 293 Input and output signals ............................................................. 293 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 296 Technical data ............................................................................ 300 Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)........... 302 Introduction ................................................................................. 302 Principle of operation .................................................................. 302 Function block ............................................................................ 306 Input and output signals ............................................................. 306 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 307 Technical data ............................................................................ 308 Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)......................................... 309 Introduction ................................................................................. 309 Principle of operation .................................................................. 309 Function block ............................................................................ 312 Input and output signals ............................................................. 313 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 313 Technical data ............................................................................ 314 Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB) ...................................................... 315 Introduction ................................................................................. 315 Principle of operation .................................................................. 315 Function block ............................................................................ 316 Input and output signals ............................................................. 316 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 317 Technical data ............................................................................ 317 Pole discrepancy protection (RPLD, 52PD)..................................... 318 Introduction ................................................................................. 318 Principle of operation .................................................................. 318 Pole discrepancy signalling from circuit breaker ................... 321 Unsymmetrical current detection ........................................... 321 Function block ............................................................................ 321 Input and output signals ............................................................. 322 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 322 Technical data ............................................................................ 323 Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)................................ 324 Introduction ................................................................................. 324 Principle of operation .................................................................. 325 Low pass filtering................................................................... 327 Calibration of analog inputs ................................................... 327 Function block ............................................................................ 329 Input and output signals ............................................................. 329 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 330 Technical data ............................................................................ 331 Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32).................................. 332 Introduction ................................................................................. 332 Principle of operation .................................................................. 333 Low pass filtering................................................................... 335 Calibration of analog inputs ................................................... 335 Function block ............................................................................ 337

Contents

Input and output signals.............................................................. 337 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 338 Technical data ............................................................................ 339 Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46) ............................................... 340 Introduction ................................................................................. 340 Principle of operation .................................................................. 340 Function block............................................................................. 341 Input and output signals.............................................................. 341 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 342 Technical data ............................................................................ 342

Chapter 7

Voltage protection ....................................................... 343

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)................................. 344 Introduction ................................................................................. 344 Principle of operation .................................................................. 344 Measurement principle .......................................................... 345 Time delay ............................................................................. 345 Blocking ................................................................................. 348 Design ................................................................................... 350 Function block............................................................................. 352 Input and output signals.............................................................. 352 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 353 Technical data ............................................................................ 356 Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)................................... 357 Introduction ................................................................................. 357 Principle of operation .................................................................. 357 Measurement principle .......................................................... 358 Time delay ............................................................................. 358 Blocking ................................................................................. 360 Design ................................................................................... 361 Function block............................................................................. 363 Input and output signals.............................................................. 363 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 364 Technical data ............................................................................ 367 Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)................... 368 Introduction ................................................................................. 368 Principle of operation .................................................................. 368 Measurement principle .......................................................... 368 Time delay ............................................................................. 368 Blocking ................................................................................. 372 Design ................................................................................... 373 Function block............................................................................. 374 Input and output signals.............................................................. 374 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 375 Technical data ............................................................................ 377 Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24) .............................................. 378 Introduction ................................................................................. 378 Principle of operation .................................................................. 378 Measured voltage .................................................................. 381 Operate time of the overexcitation protection. ....................... 381

Contents

Cooling .................................................................................. 385 OEX protection function measurands.................................... 385 Overexcitation alarm.............................................................. 386 Logic diagram ........................................................................ 387 Function block ............................................................................ 388 Input and output signals ............................................................. 388 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 388 Technical data ............................................................................ 390 Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60) ....................................... 391 Introduction ................................................................................. 391 Principle of operation .................................................................. 391 Function block ............................................................................ 392 Input and output signals ............................................................. 393 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 393 Technical data ............................................................................ 394 Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27) ................................................... 395 Introduction ................................................................................. 395 Principle of operation .................................................................. 395 Function block ............................................................................ 397 Input and output signals ............................................................. 397 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 397

Chapter 8

Frequency protection ................................................. 399

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)............................................ 400 Introduction ................................................................................. 400 Principle of operation .................................................................. 400 Measurement principle .......................................................... 400 Time delay ............................................................................. 400 Voltage dependent time delay ............................................... 401 Blocking ................................................................................. 402 Design ................................................................................... 403 Function block ............................................................................ 404 Input and output signals ............................................................. 404 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 405 Technical data ............................................................................ 405 Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81) ............................................. 407 Introduction ................................................................................. 407 Principle of operation .................................................................. 407 Measurement principle .......................................................... 407 Time delay ............................................................................. 407 Blocking ................................................................................. 408 Design ................................................................................... 408 Function block ............................................................................ 409 Input and output signals ............................................................. 409 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 409 Technical data ............................................................................ 410 Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81) ........................... 411 Introduction ................................................................................. 411 Principle of operation .................................................................. 411 Measurement principle .......................................................... 411

Contents

Time delay ............................................................................. 412 Blocking ................................................................................. 412 Design ................................................................................... 412 Function block............................................................................. 413 Input and output signals.............................................................. 414 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 414 Technical data ............................................................................ 415

Chapter 9

Multipurpose protection ............................................. 417

General current and voltage protection (GAPC) .............................. 418 Introduction ................................................................................. 418 Inadvertent generator energization........................................ 418 Principle of operation .................................................................. 419 Measured quantities within the function................................. 419 Base quantities for GF function ............................................. 421 Built-in overcurrent protection steps ...................................... 421 Built-in undercurrent protection steps .................................... 427 Built-in overvoltage protection steps...................................... 428 Built-in undervoltage protection steps.................................... 428 Inadvertent generator energization........................................ 428 Logic diagram ........................................................................ 430 Function block............................................................................. 436 Input and output signals.............................................................. 437 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 439 Technical data ............................................................................ 448

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision.................................. 451

Current circuit supervision (RDIF).................................................... 452 Introduction ................................................................................. 452 Principle of operation .................................................................. 452 Function block............................................................................. 454 Input and output signals.............................................................. 454 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 455 Technical data ............................................................................ 455 Fuse failure supervision (RFUF) ...................................................... 456 Introduction ................................................................................. 456 Principle of operation .................................................................. 456 Zero sequence ...................................................................... 456 Negative sequence ................................................................ 459 du/dt and di/dt ........................................................................ 459 Operation modes ................................................................... 460 Dead line detection ................................................................ 461 Function block............................................................................. 461 Input and output signals.............................................................. 461 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 462 Technical data ............................................................................ 463

Contents

Chapter 11 Control ......................................................................... 465

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25) . 466 Introduction ................................................................................. 466 Principle of operation .................................................................. 466 Basic functionality.................................................................. 466 Logic diagrams ...................................................................... 467 Function block ............................................................................ 477 Input and output signals ............................................................. 478 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 481 Technical data ............................................................................ 483 Autorecloser (RREC, 79) ................................................................. 485 Introduction ................................................................................. 485 Principle of operation .................................................................. 485 Logic Diagrams...................................................................... 485 Auto-reclosing operation Off and On ..................................... 485 Auto-reclosing mode selection .............................................. 485 Initiate auto-reclosing and conditions for initiation of a reclosing cycle .............................................. 486 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1................. 487 Long trip signal ...................................................................... 487 Time sequence diagrams ...................................................... 493 Function block ............................................................................ 497 Input and output signals ............................................................. 497 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 499 Technical data ............................................................................ 501 Apparatus control (APC).................................................................. 503 Introduction ................................................................................. 503 Principle of operation .................................................................. 503 Bay control (QCBAY).................................................................. 504 Introduction............................................................................ 504 Principle of operation............................................................. 504 Function block ....................................................................... 505 Input and output signals ........................................................ 506 Setting parameters ................................................................ 506 Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl) ............... 506 Introduction............................................................................ 506 Principle of operation............................................................. 506 Function block ....................................................................... 508 Input and output signals ........................................................ 508 Setting parameters ................................................................ 509 Switch controller (SCSWI) .......................................................... 510 Introduction............................................................................ 510 Principle of operation............................................................. 510 Function block ....................................................................... 516 Input and output signals ........................................................ 516 Setting parameters ................................................................ 517 Circuit breaker (SXCBR)............................................................. 518 Introduction............................................................................ 518 Principle of operation............................................................. 518 Function block ....................................................................... 522

Contents

Input and output signals ........................................................ 523 Setting parameters ................................................................ 524 Circuit switch (SXSWI)................................................................ 524 Introduction ............................................................................ 524 Principle of operation ............................................................. 524 Function block ....................................................................... 529 Input and output signals ........................................................ 529 Setting parameters ................................................................ 530 Bay reserve (QCRSV) ................................................................ 530 Introduction ............................................................................ 530 Principle of operation ............................................................. 530 Function block ....................................................................... 533 Input and output signals ........................................................ 533 Setting parameters ................................................................ 534 Reservation input (RESIN) ......................................................... 534 Introduction ............................................................................ 534 Principle of operation ............................................................. 535 Function block ....................................................................... 536 Input and output signals ........................................................ 537 Setting parameters ................................................................ 537 Interlocking ...................................................................................... 538 Introduction ................................................................................. 538 Principle of operation .................................................................. 538 Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)......................................... 541 Introduction ............................................................................ 541 Principle of operation ............................................................. 541 Function block ....................................................................... 542 Input and output signals ........................................................ 542 Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) .......................................... 543 Introduction ............................................................................ 543 Function block ....................................................................... 544 Logic diagram ........................................................................ 545 Input and output signals ........................................................ 551 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)................................ 553 Introduction ............................................................................ 553 Function block ....................................................................... 555 Logic diagram ........................................................................ 556 Input and output signals ........................................................ 561 Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)............................ 563 Introduction ............................................................................ 563 Function block ....................................................................... 565 Logic diagram ........................................................................ 566 Input and output signals ........................................................ 569 Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)......................... 571 Introduction ............................................................................ 571 Function block ....................................................................... 572 Logic diagram ........................................................................ 573 Input and output signals ........................................................ 576 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) ................ 577 Introduction ............................................................................ 577 Function block ....................................................................... 578 Logic diagram ........................................................................ 579 Input and output signals ........................................................ 580

Contents

Interlocking for busbar grounding switch (BB_ES) ..................... 581 Introduction............................................................................ 581 Function block ....................................................................... 581 Logic diagram ........................................................................ 582 Input and output signals ........................................................ 582 Interlocking for double CB bay (DB) ........................................... 582 Introduction............................................................................ 582 Function block ....................................................................... 583 Logic diagrams ...................................................................... 585 Input and output signals ....................................................... 594 Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter (BH) ...................... 597 Introduction............................................................................ 597 Function blocks...................................................................... 599 Logic diagrams ...................................................................... 602 Input and output signals ........................................................ 612 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking .............. 617 Function block ....................................................................... 617 Input and output signals ........................................................ 618 Setting parameters ................................................................ 619 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO) ................................................... 620 Introduction ................................................................................. 620 Principle of operation .................................................................. 620 Functionality and behaviour .................................................. 621 Graphical display ................................................................... 622 Function block ............................................................................ 624 Input and output signals ............................................................. 626 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 627 Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) ....................................................... 628 Introduction ................................................................................. 628 Principle of operation .................................................................. 628 Function block ............................................................................ 629 Input and output signals ............................................................. 629 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 630 Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) ........................ 631 Introduction ................................................................................. 631 Principle of operation .................................................................. 631 Function block ............................................................................ 631 Input and output signals ............................................................. 632

Chapter 12 Scheme communication............................................. 633

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85) ............................. 634 Introduction ................................................................................. 634 Principle of operation .................................................................. 634 Blocking scheme ................................................................... 634 Permissive underreach scheme ............................................ 635 Permissive overreach scheme .............................................. 635 Unblocking scheme ............................................................... 635 Intertrip scheme..................................................................... 636

Contents

Simplified logic diagram......................................................... 636 Function block............................................................................. 638 Input and output signals.............................................................. 638 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 639 Technical data ............................................................................ 639 Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85) ................................................ 640 Introduction ................................................................................. 640 Principle of operation .................................................................. 640 Blocking scheme ................................................................... 641 Permissive underreach scheme ............................................ 641 Permissive overreach scheme............................................... 642 Unblocking scheme ............................................................... 642 Intertrip scheme ..................................................................... 642 Simplified logic diagram......................................................... 642 Function block............................................................................. 644 Input and output signals.............................................................. 644 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 646 Technical data ............................................................................ 646 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85) .................................................. 647 Introduction ................................................................................. 647 Principle of operation .................................................................. 647 Current reversal logic............................................................. 647 Weak end infeed logic ........................................................... 648 Function block............................................................................. 649 Input and output signals.............................................................. 650 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 651 Technical data ............................................................................ 651 Local acceleration logic (PLAL) ....................................................... 652 Introduction ................................................................................. 652 Principle of operation .................................................................. 652 Zone extension ...................................................................... 652 Loss-of-load acceleration ...................................................... 653 Function block............................................................................. 654 Input and output signals.............................................................. 654 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 655 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)................................ 656 Introduction ................................................................................. 656 Principle of operation .................................................................. 656 Blocking scheme ................................................................... 657 Permissive under/overreach scheme .................................... 657 Unblocking scheme ............................................................... 658 Function block............................................................................. 660 Input and output signals.............................................................. 660 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 661 Technical data ............................................................................ 661 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)................................ 662 Introduction ................................................................................. 662 Principle of operation .................................................................. 662 Directional comparison logic function .................................... 662

Contents

Fault current reversal logic .................................................... 663 Weak and infeed logic ........................................................... 663 Function block ............................................................................ 664 Input and output signals ............................................................. 665 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 665 Technical data ............................................................................ 666 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (PSCH) .................................. 667 Introduction ................................................................................. 667 Principle of operation .................................................................. 667 Current reversal logic ........................................................... 667 Function block ............................................................................ 669 Input and output signals ............................................................. 670 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 671 Technical data ............................................................................ 671

Chapter 13 Logic............................................................................. 673

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94) ................................................................ 674 Introduction ................................................................................. 674 Principle of operation .................................................................. 674 Logic diagram ........................................................................ 675 Function block ............................................................................ 680 Input and output signals ............................................................. 680 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 681 Technical data ............................................................................ 682 Trip matrix logic (GGIO)................................................................... 683 Introduction ................................................................................. 683 Principle of operation .................................................................. 683 Function block ............................................................................ 685 Input and output signals ............................................................. 685 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 687 Configurable logic blocks (LLD)....................................................... 688 Introduction ................................................................................. 688 Inverter function block (INV) ....................................................... 688 OR function block (OR)............................................................... 688 AND function block (AND) .......................................................... 689 Timer function block (Timer) ....................................................... 690 Pulse timer function block (PULSE)............................................ 690 Exclusive OR function block (XOR) ............................................ 691 Set-reset with memory function block (SRM) ............................. 691 Controllable gate function block (GT) ......................................... 692 Settable timer function block (TS)............................................... 693 Technical data ............................................................................ 694 Fixed signal function block (FIXD) ................................................... 695 Introduction ................................................................................. 695 Principle of operation .................................................................. 695 Function block ............................................................................ 695 Input and output signals ............................................................. 696 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 696 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I............................................ 697

Contents

Introduction ................................................................................. 697 Principle of operation ............................................................. 697 Function block ....................................................................... 697 Input and output signals ........................................................ 698 Setting parameters ................................................................ 698 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation (B16IGGIO)...................................................................................... 699 Introduction ................................................................................. 699 Principle of operation .................................................................. 699 Function block............................................................................. 699 Input and output signals.............................................................. 700 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 700 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16) ......................................... 701 Introduction ................................................................................. 701 Principle of operation .................................................................. 701 Function block............................................................................. 701 Input and output signals.............................................................. 701 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 702 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation (IB16GGIO)...................................................................................... 703 Introduction ................................................................................. 703 Function block............................................................................. 703 Input and output signals.............................................................. 703 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 704

Chapter 14 Monitoring .................................................................... 705

Measurements (MSQI)..................................................................... 706 Introduction ................................................................................. 707 Principle of operation .................................................................. 708 Measurement supervision...................................................... 708 Service values (MMXU, SVR)................................................ 712 Current Phasors (MMXU, CP) ............................................... 718 Voltage phasors (MMXU, VN and VP)................................... 718 Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ) ........................ 718 Function block............................................................................. 718 Input and output signals.............................................................. 720 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 723 Technical data ............................................................................ 738 Event counter (GGIO) ...................................................................... 739 Function block............................................................................. 739 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 739 Event function (EV) .......................................................................... 740 Introduction ................................................................................. 740 Principle of operation .................................................................. 740 Function block............................................................................. 742 Input and output signals.............................................................. 742 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 743 Fault locator (RFLO) ........................................................................ 746 Introduction ................................................................................. 746 Principle of operation .................................................................. 746

Contents

Measuring principle ............................................................... 747 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault ...... 747 The non-compensated impedance model ............................. 751 IEC 60870-5-103 ................................................................... 752 Function block ............................................................................ 752 Input and output signals ............................................................. 752 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 753 Technical data ............................................................................ 754 Measured value expander block...................................................... 755 Introduction ................................................................................. 755 Principle of operation .................................................................. 755 Function block ............................................................................ 756 Input and output signals ............................................................. 756 Disturbance report (RDRE).............................................................. 757 Introduction ................................................................................. 757 Principle of operation .................................................................. 757 Function block ............................................................................ 765 Input and output signals ............................................................. 767 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 769 Technical data ............................................................................ 781 Sequence of events (RDRE) ........................................................... 783 Introduction ................................................................................. 783 Principle of operation .................................................................. 783 Function block ............................................................................ 783 Input signals ............................................................................... 783 Technical data ............................................................................ 784 Indications (RDRE) .......................................................................... 785 Introduction ................................................................................. 785 Principle of operation .................................................................. 785 Function block ............................................................................ 786 Input signals ............................................................................... 786 Technical data ............................................................................ 786 Event recorder (RDRE).................................................................... 787 Introduction ................................................................................. 787 Principle of operation .................................................................. 787 Function block ............................................................................ 787 Input signals ............................................................................... 787 Technical data ............................................................................ 788 Trip value recorder (RDRE) ............................................................. 789 Introduction ................................................................................. 789 Principle of operation .................................................................. 789 Function block ............................................................................ 789 Input signals ............................................................................... 790 Technical data ............................................................................ 790 Disturbance recorder (RDRE).......................................................... 791 Introduction ................................................................................. 791 Principle of operation .................................................................. 791 Memory and storage.............................................................. 792 IEC 60870-5-103 ................................................................... 793 Function block ............................................................................ 793 Input and output signals ............................................................. 793 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 794 Technical data ............................................................................ 794

Contents

Chapter 15 Metering ....................................................................... 795

Pulse counter logic (GGIO).............................................................. 796 Introduction ................................................................................. 796 Principle of operation .................................................................. 796 Function block............................................................................. 798 Input and output signals.............................................................. 798 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 799 Technical data ............................................................................ 799 Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)............................. 800 Introduction ................................................................................. 800 Principle of operation .................................................................. 800 Function block............................................................................. 801 Input and output signals.............................................................. 801 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 802

Chapter 16 Station communication............................................... 805

Overview .......................................................................................... 806 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol........................................... 807 Introduction ................................................................................. 807 Generic single point function block (SPGGIO) ........................... 807 Introduction ............................................................................ 807 Principle of operation ............................................................. 807 Function block ....................................................................... 807 Input and output signals ........................................................ 808 Setting parameters ................................................................ 808 Generic double point function block (DPGGIO).......................... 808 Introduction ............................................................................ 808 Principle of operation ............................................................. 809 Function block ....................................................................... 809 Input and output signals ........................................................ 809 Setting parameters ................................................................ 809 Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO).................. 809 Introduction ............................................................................ 809 Principle of operation ............................................................. 809 Function block ....................................................................... 810 Input and output signals ........................................................ 810 Setting parameters ................................................................ 810 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 811 Technical data ............................................................................ 811 LON communication protocol........................................................... 812 Introduction ................................................................................. 812 Principle of operation .................................................................. 812 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 829 Technical data ............................................................................ 829 SPA communication protocol........................................................... 830 Introduction ................................................................................. 830 Principle of operation .................................................................. 830 Communication ports............................................................. 838 Design......................................................................................... 839

Contents

Setting parameters ..................................................................... 839 Technical data ............................................................................ 840 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol ...................................... 841 Introduction ................................................................................. 841 Principle of operation .................................................................. 841 General.................................................................................. 841 Communication ports............................................................. 851 Function block ............................................................................ 851 Input and output signals ............................................................. 854 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 859 Technical data ............................................................................ 862 Automation bits (AUBI) .................................................................... 863 Introduction ................................................................................. 863 Principle of operation .................................................................. 863 Function block ............................................................................ 864 Input and output signals ............................................................. 864 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 866 Single command, 16 signals (CD) ................................................... 878 Introduction ................................................................................. 878 Principle of operation .................................................................. 878 Function block ............................................................................ 878 Input and output signals ............................................................. 879 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 879 Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT)........................ 880 Introduction ................................................................................. 880 Principle of operation .................................................................. 880 Design ........................................................................................ 880 General.................................................................................. 880 Function block ............................................................................ 881 Input and output signals ............................................................. 881 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 883

Chapter 17 Remote communication ............................................. 885

Binary signal transfer to remote end................................................ 886 Introduction ................................................................................. 886 Principle of operation .................................................................. 886 Function block ............................................................................ 887 Input and output signals ............................................................. 889 Setting parameters ..................................................................... 890

Chapter 18 Hardware...................................................................... 895

Overview.......................................................................................... 896 Variants of case- and HMI display size....................................... 896 Case from the rear side .............................................................. 897 Hardware modules........................................................................... 902 Overview..................................................................................... 902 Combined backplane module (CBM).......................................... 903 Introduction............................................................................ 903

Contents

Functionality .......................................................................... 903 Design ................................................................................... 903 Universal backplane module (UBM) ........................................... 905 Introduction ............................................................................ 905 Functionality .......................................................................... 905 Design ................................................................................... 905 Power supply module (PSM) ...................................................... 908 Introduction ............................................................................ 908 Design ................................................................................... 908 Technical data ....................................................................... 908 Numeric processing module (NUM)............................................ 909 Introduction ............................................................................ 909 Functionality .......................................................................... 909 Block diagram ........................................................................ 910 Local human-machine interface (LHMI)...................................... 910 Transformer input module (TRM) ............................................... 911 Introduction ............................................................................ 911 Design ................................................................................... 911 Technical data ....................................................................... 911 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM) ............................................. 912 Introduction ............................................................................ 912 Design ................................................................................... 912 Binary input module (BIM) .......................................................... 914 Introduction ............................................................................ 914 Design ................................................................................... 914 Technical data ....................................................................... 918 Binary output modules (BOM) .................................................... 918 Introduction ............................................................................ 918 Design ................................................................................... 919 Technical data ....................................................................... 921 Static binary output module (SOM)............................................. 921 Introduction ............................................................................ 921 Design ................................................................................... 921 Technical data ....................................................................... 923 Binary input/output module (IOM)............................................... 923 Introduction ............................................................................ 923 Design ................................................................................... 924 Technical data ....................................................................... 926 Line data communication module (LDCM) ................................. 928 Introduction ............................................................................ 928 Design ................................................................................... 928 Technical data ....................................................................... 930 Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM) ................................................ 931 Introduction ............................................................................ 931 Design ................................................................................... 931 Technical data ....................................................................... 933 Galvanic RS485 communication module.................................... 934 Introduction ............................................................................ 934 Design ................................................................................... 934 Technical data ....................................................................... 936 Optical ethernet module (OEM) .................................................. 936

Contents

Introduction............................................................................ 936 Functionality .......................................................................... 936 Design ................................................................................... 936 Technical data ....................................................................... 937 mA input module (MIM) .............................................................. 937 Introduction............................................................................ 937 Design ................................................................................... 937 Technical data ....................................................................... 939 GPS time synchronization module (GSM) .................................. 939 Introduction............................................................................ 939 Design ................................................................................... 939 Technical data ....................................................................... 942 GPS antenna .............................................................................. 942 Introduction............................................................................ 942 Design ................................................................................... 942 Technical data ....................................................................... 944 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B .............................. 945 Introduction............................................................................ 945 Design ................................................................................... 945 Technical data ....................................................................... 946 Dimensions ...................................................................................... 947 Case without rear cover.............................................................. 947 Case with rear cover................................................................... 948 Flush mounting dimensions ........................................................ 949 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions .................................... 950 Wall mounting dimensions.......................................................... 952 External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection . 953 Mounting alternatives....................................................................... 954 Flush mounting ........................................................................... 954 Overview................................................................................ 954 Mounting procedure for flush mounting ................................. 955 19 panel rack mounting ............................................................. 956 Overview................................................................................ 956 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting.................. 957 Wall mounting ............................................................................. 957 Overview................................................................................ 957 Mounting procedure for wall mounting .................................. 958 How to reach the rear side of the IED ................................... 958 Side-by-side 19 rack mounting .................................................. 959 Overview................................................................................ 959 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting ............. 960 IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case .................................. 960 Side-by-side flush mounting ....................................................... 961 Overview................................................................................ 961 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting............. 962 Technical data ................................................................................. 963 Enclosure.................................................................................... 963 Connection system ..................................................................... 963 Influencing factors ...................................................................... 964 Type tests according to standard ............................................... 965

Contents

Chapter 19 Labels ........................................................................... 967

Different labels ................................................................................. 968

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams.................................................. 971 Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics ...................................... 987
Application ....................................................................................... 988 Principle of operation ....................................................................... 992 Mode of operation....................................................................... 992 Inverse characteristics ..................................................................... 999

Chapter 22 Glossary ..................................................................... 1011

Glossary......................................................................................... 1012

About this chapter

Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction
About this chapter This chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and provides information necessary to understand the contents of the manual.

Introduction to the technical reference manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

1
1.1

Introduction to the technical reference manual

About the complete set of manuals for an IED
The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:

Application manual

Technical reference manual

Installation and commissioning manual

Operators manual

Engineering guide

en06000097.vsd

The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The manual should also be used when calculating settings. The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service. The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned. The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operators manual can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault. The IED 670 Engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer the IED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED 670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to read disturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The third part is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670 products and the PCM 600 tool. The IEC 61850 Station Engineering guide contains descriptions of IEC 61850 station engineering and process signal routing. The manual presents the PCM 600 and CCT tool used for station engineering. It describes the IEC 61850 attribute editor and how to set up projects and communication.

Introduction to the technical reference manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.2

About the technical reference manual

The technical reference manual contains the following chapters: The chapter Local human-machine interface describes the control panel on the IED. Display characteristics, control keys and various local human-machine interface features are explained. The chapter Basic IED functions presents functions that are included in all IEDs regardless of the type of protection they are designed for. These are functions like Time synchronization, Self supervision with event list, Test mode and other functions of a general nature. The chapter Distance protection describes the functions for distance zones with their quadrilateral characteristics, phase selection with load encroachment, power swing detection and similar. The chapter Current protection describes functions such as overcurrent protection, breaker failure protection and pole discordance. The chapter Voltage protection describes functions like undervoltage and overvoltage protection as well as residual overvoltage protection. The chapter Frequency protection describes functions for overfrequency, underfrequency and rate of change of frequency. The chapter Multipurpose protection describes the general protection function for current and voltage. The chapter Secondary system supervision includes descriptions of functions like current based Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure supervision. The chapter Control describes the control functions. These are functions like the Synchronization and energizing check as well as several others which are product specific. The chapter Scheme communication describes among others functions related to current reversal and weak end infeed logic. The chapter Logic describes trip logic and related functions. The chapter Monitoring describes measurement related functions used to provide data regarding relevant quantities, events, faults and the like. The chapter Metering describes primarily Pulse counter logic. The chapter Station communication describes Ethernet based communication in general including the use of IEC61850, and horizontal communication via GOOSE. The chapter Remote communication describes binary and analog signal transfer, and the associated hardware. The chapter Hardware provides descriptions of the IED and its components. The chapter Connection diagrams provides terminal wiring diagrams and information regarding connections to and from the IED. The chapter Time inverse characteristics describes and explains inverse time delay, inverse time curves and their effects. The chapter Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.

Introduction to the technical reference manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.3

Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM)

The description of each IED related function follows the same structure (where applicable). The different sections are outlined below.

1.3.1

Introduction Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function. Principle of operation Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms and measurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality. Logic diagrams Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered by dashed lines. Signal names Input and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes. The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name for the corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of the particular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR in figure 4 is as follows: BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command from the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).

1.3.2

Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed. Input and output signals In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch the outer border of the diagram. Input and output signals can be configured using the CAP531 tool. They can be connected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs. Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signals are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3. Setting parameters Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting parameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their values are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes. Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value. Internal signals Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately. 2 mm from the frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues, see figure 3.

Introduction to the technical reference manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

BLKTR TEST TEST AND Block TUV=Yes BLOCK VTSU BLOCK-int. PU_V_A BLOCK-int. PU_V_B BLOCK-int. PU_V_C AND AND OR AND AND 0-t 0 TRIP PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C OR BLOCK-int.

xx04000375_ansi.vsd

Figure 1:

Logic diagram example with -int signals

External signals Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram have the suffix -cont., see figure 2 and figure 3.

Introduction to the technical reference manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

OR PHSEL AND AND AND AND AND AND OR

STZMPP-cont.

PUND_AB-cont. PUND_BC-cont. PUND_CA-cont. PUND_AG-cont. PUND_BG-cont. PUND_CG-cont. PUND_GND-cont.

AB BC CA AG BG CG

OR LOVBZ 1--BLOCK OR AND PU_ND BLK-cont.

xx04000376_ansi.vsd

Figure 2:

Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal

STND_AG-cont. STND_BG-cont. STND_CG-cont. STND_AB-cont. STND_BC-cont. STND_CA-cont.

or AND or AND AND AND

0

PU_A PU_B PU_C PICKUP

15 ms
0

15 ms
0

or or

15 ms
0

15 ms

BLK-cont.
Xx04000377_ansi.vsd

Figure 3:

Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal

Introduction to the technical reference manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.3.3

Input and output signals Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists of two columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second column contains the description of the signal. Function block Each function block is illustrated graphically. Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available. These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme, and are therefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but described in the settings table.

1.3.4

CAP531 Name Inputs

U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2

IEC 61850 - 8 -1 Logical Node

TUV1PH2PUVM TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 en05000330.vsd

Outputs

Diagram Number

Figure 4: 1.3.5

Example of a function block

Setting parameters These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the function in question. Technical data The technical data section provides specific technical information about the function or hardware described.

1.3.6

1.4
1.4.1

Intended audience
General This manual addresses system engineers, installation and commissioning personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.

Introduction to the technical reference manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.4.2

Requirements The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.

1.5

Related documents
Documents related to REL 670 Operators manual Installation and commissioning manual Technical reference manual Application manual Buyers guide Connection diagram, Single breaker arr. Three-pole tripping arr. Connection diagram, Single breaker arr. Single-pole tripping arr. Connection diagram, Multi breaker arr. Three-pole tripping arr. Connection diagram, Multi breaker arr. Single-pole tripping arr. Configuration diagram A, Single breaker with single or double busbar, 3 pole tripping (A31) Configuration diagram B, Single breaker with single or double busbar, 1/3 pole tripping (A32) Identity number 1MRK 506 276-UUS 1MRK 506 277-UUS 1MRK 506 275-UUS 1MRK 506 278-UUS 1MRK 506 280-BUS 1MRK 002 801-BA 1MRK 002 801-CA 1MRK 002 801-DA 1MRK 002 801-EA 1MRK 004 500-86 1MRK 004 500-87

Configuration diagram C, Multi breaker such as breaker-and-a-half or ring bus- 1MRK 004 500-88 bar arr. 3 pole tripping (B31) Configuration diagram D, Multi breaker such as breaker-and-a-half or ring bus- 1MRK 004 500-89 bar arr. 1/3 pole tripping (B32) Setting example 1, 400 kV Long overhead power line with breaker-and-a-half CB arr. Quadrilaterial characteristic. Setting example 2, Setting example 1, 400 kV Long overhead power line with breaker-and-a-half CB arr. Mho characteristic. Setting example 3, 230 kV Extremely long overhead power line, double bus, single CB arr. Quadrilaterial characteristic. Setting example 4, 230 kV Extremely long overhead power line, double bus, single CB arr. Mho characteristic. Setting example 5, 132 kV Short overhead power line, double bus, single CB arr. Quadrilaterial characteristic. Setting example 6, 132 kV Short overhead power line, double bus, single CB arr. Mho characteristic. 1MRK 506 267-WEN 1MRK 506 291-WEN 1MRK 506 268-WEN 1MRK 506 292-WEN 1MRK 506 269-WEN 1MRK 506 290-WEN

Setting example 7, 70 kV power line on a resonance earth system. Double bus, 1MRK 506 293-WEN single breaker arrangement. Setting example 8, 400 kV long series compensated line. breaker-and-a-half arrangement. 1MRK 506 294-WEN

Introduction to the technical reference manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

Connection and Installation components Test system, COMBITEST Accessories for IED 670 Getting started guide IED 670 SPA and LON signal list for IED 670, ver. 1.1 IEC 61850 Data objects list for IED 670, ver. 1.1 Generic IEC 61850 IED Connectivity package Protection and Control IED Manager PCM 600 Installation sheet Engineering guide IED 670 products

1MRK 013 003-BEN 1MRK 512 001-BEN 1MRK 514 012-BEN 1MRK 500 080-UUS 1MRK 500 083-WEN 1MRK 500 084-WEN 1KHA001027-UEN 1MRS755552 1MRK 511 179-UEN

Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation

1.6

Revision notes
Revision Description First release

Introduction to the technical reference manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

10

About this chapter

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

About this chapter This chapter describes the structure and use of the Local human machine interface (LHMI) or in other words, the control panel on the IED.

11

Medium size graphic HMI

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

1
1.1

Medium size graphic HMI

Design
The different parts of the medium size LHMI is shown in figure 5The LHMI, exists in an IEC version and in an ANSI version. The difference is on the keypad operation buttons and the yellow LED designation.

12

Medium size graphic HMI

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Status indication LEDs LCD Indication LEDs Label Local/Remote LEDs RJ45 port Communication indication LED Keypad

Figure 5:

Medium size graphic HMI

13

Keypad

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

Keypad
The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same look and feel in all IEDs in the IED 670 series. LCD screens and other details may differ but the way the keys function is identical. The keypad is illustrated in figure 6.

Figure 6:

The HMI keypad.

The keys used to operate the IED are described below in table 1.

14

Keypad

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

Table 1:
Key

HMI keys on the front of the IED

Function

This key closes (energizes) a breaker or disconnector.

This key opens a breaker or disconnector.

The help key brings up two submenus. Key operation and IED information.

This key is used to clear entries, It cancels commands and edits.

Opens the main menu, and used to move to the default screen.

The Local/Remote key is used to set the IED in local or remote control mode.

This key opens the reset screen.

The E key starts editing mode and confirms setting changes when in editing mode.

The right arrow key navigates forward between screens and moves right in editing mode.

The left arrow key navigates backwards between screens and moves left in editing mode.

The up arrow key is used to move up in the single line diagram and in menu tree.

The down arrow key is used to move down in the single line diagram and in menu tree.

15

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

3
3.1

LHMI related functions

Introduction
The adaptation of the LHMI to the application and user preferences is made with: function block LHMI (LocalHMI) function block HLED (LEDMonitor) setting parameters

3.2

General setting parameters

Table 2:
Parameter Language DisplayTimeout AutoRepeat ContrastLevel DefaultScreen EvListSrtOrder SymbolFont

Basic general settings for the localHMI (LHM1-) function

Range English OptionalLanguage 10 - 120 Disabled Enabled -10 - 20 0-0 Latest on top Oldest on top IEC ANSI Step 10 1 1 Default English 60 Enabled 0 0 Latest on top IEC Unit Min % Description Local HMI language Local HMI display timeout Activation of auto-repeat (On) or not (Off) Contrast level for display Default screen Sort order of event list Symbol font for Single Line Diagram

3.3
3.3.1

Status indication LEDs

Design The function block LHMI (LocalHMI) controls and supplies information about the status of the status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LHMI are configured with the PCM 600 tool. The function block can be used if any of the signals are required in a configuration logic. See section 3.4 for information about the LEDs.

16

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

3.3.2

Function block
LHMILocalHMI RSTLEDS HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F RSTPULSE LEDSRST en05000773_ansi.vsd

Figure 7: 3.3.3

LHMI function block

Input and output signals

Table 3:
Signal RSTLEDS

Input signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block

Description Input to reset the LCD-HMI LEDs

Table 4:
Signal HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F RSTPULSE LEDSRST

Output signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block

Description Backlight of the LCD display is active Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing A reset pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are cleared Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not ON

3.4
3.4.1

Indication LEDs
Introduction The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED are configured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selected individually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 16) for trip indications are red and LEDs (number 715) for pickup indications are yellow. Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality. The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F). For details, refer to Technical reference manual.

17

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

3.4.2

Design The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED in some of the modes of the HLED. The latest LED picture appears immediately after the IED is successfully restarted. Operating modes Collecting mode - LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system. Re-starting mode - In the re-starting mode of operation each new pickup resets all previous active LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset From local HMI - The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is performed via the Reset-button and menus on the LHMI. For details, refer to the Operators manual. From function input - The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input, RESET, to the function. This input can for example be configured to a binary input operated from an external push button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed. Automatic reset - The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequences The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it is reset.

18

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash. At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selected sequence diagrams below. In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics shown in figure 8.

= No indication

= Steady light

= Flash
en05000506.vsd

Figure 8:

Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S) This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

Activating signal

LED
en01000228.vsd

Figure 9:

Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)

Sequence 2 (Follow-F) This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing steady light. Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.

19

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

Activating signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd

Figure 10:

Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been alternated. Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset i.e. immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

Activating signal

LED

Reset
en01000235.vsd

Figure 11:

Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)

Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S) In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual reset, i.e. immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.

20

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

Definition of a disturbance A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and some signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does not restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when all signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shown in figure 12.

From disturbance length control per LED set to sequence 6

OR

OR

New disturbance

AND

tRestart 0 0-100s

OR

AND OR

AND

en01000237_ansi.vsd

Figure 12:

Activation of new disturbance

In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition of a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i diagram in figure 13.

Activating signal

To LED

AND 0-tMax 0

To disturbance length control

en05000507_ansi.vsd

Figure 13:

Length control of activating signals

Timing diagram for sequence 6 Figure 14 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

21

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000239.vsd

Figure 14:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance

Figure 15 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.

22

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

Disturbance t Restart

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000240.vsd

Figure 15:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 16 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

23

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000241.vsd

Figure 16:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 17 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

24

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000242.vsd

Figure 17: 3.4.3

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

Function block
HLEDLEDMonitor BLOCK RESET LEDTEST NEWIND ACK

en05000508.vsd

Figure 18: 3.4.4

HLED function block

Input and output signals

Table 5:
Signal BLOCK RESET LEDTEST

Input signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block

Description Input to block the operation of the LED-unit Input to acknowledge/reset the indications of the LED-unit Input for external LED test

25

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

Table 6:
Signal NEWIND ACK

Output signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block

Description A new signal on any of the indication inputs occurs A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged

3.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 7:
Parameter Operation tRestart tMax

Basic general settings for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function

Range Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0 Step 0.1 0.1 Default Disabled 0.0 0.0 Unit s s Description Operation mode for the LED function Defines the disturbance length Maximum time for the definition of a disturbance Sequence type for LED 1

SeqTypeLED1

Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

SeqTypeLED2

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 2

SeqTypeLED3

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 3

SeqTypeLED4

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 4

SeqTypeLED5

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 5

26

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

Parameter SeqTypeLED6

Range Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S

Step -

Default Follow-S

Unit -

Description Sequence type for LED 6

SeqTypeLED7

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 7

SeqTypeLED8

Follow-S

sequence type for LED 8

SeqTypeLED9

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 9

SeqTypeLED10

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 10

27

LHMI related functions

Chapter 2 Local human-machine interface

Parameter SeqTypeLED11

Range Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S

Step -

Default Follow-S

Unit -

Description Sequence type for LED 11

SeqTypeLED12

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 12

SeqTypeLED13

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 13

SeqTypeLED14

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 14

SeqTypeLED15

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 15

28

About this chapter

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

About this chapter This chapter presents functions that are basic to all REx670 IEDs. Typical functions in this category are time synchronization, self supervision and test mode.

29

Analog inputs

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

1
1.1

Analog inputs
Introduction
In order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operations the analog input channels must be configured and properly set. For power measuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED 670 are using primary system quantities and the set values are done in primary quantities as well. Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers. In order to make Service Values reading easier it is possible to define a reference PhaseAngleRef. Then this analog channels phase angle will be always fixed to zero degree and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be freely change in order to facilitate testing and service values reading.

Note!
VT inputs are sometimes not available depending on ordered type of Transformer Input Module (TRM).

1.2

Principle of operation
The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically star (WYE) connected and can be connected with the Star (WYE) point to the object or from the object. This information must be set to the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current, power etc. means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negative value means direction out from the object. For directional functions the direction into the object is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object is defined as Reverse, see figure 19

30

Analog inputs

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Definition of direction for directional functions Reverse Forward

Definition of direction for directional functions Forward Reverse

Protected Object Line, transformer, etc

e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CT_WyePoint Correct Setting is "ToObject" e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CT_WyePoint Correct Setting is "FromObject"

Figure 19:

en05000456_ansi.vsd Internal convention of the directionality in IED 670

With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject or ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a direction defined as Forward always is looking towards the object. To be able to use primary system quantities for settings and calculation in the IED the ratios of the main CTs and VTs must be known. This information is given to the IED by setting of the rated secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs. The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under General settings/Analog module in the parameter settings tool PST.

1.3

Function block
Dependent on ordered IED 670 type.

TB40ANALOGIN6I ERROR CH1 NAMECH1 CH2 NAMECH2 CH3 NAMECH3 CH4 NAMECH4 CH5 NAMECH5 CH6 NAMECH6 en05000712.vsd

31

Analog inputs

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

TC40ANALOGIN9I3U ERROR NAMECH1 CH1 CH2 NAMECH2 NAMECH3 CH3 CH4 NAMECH4 NAMECH5 CH5 CH6 NAMECH6 NAMECH7 CH7 CH8 NAMECH8 NAMECH9 CH9 CH10 NAMECH10 NAMECH11 CH11 CH12 NAMECH12 en05000713.vsd

TD40ANALOGIN6I6U ERROR NAMECH1 CH1 CH2 NAMECH2 NAMECH3 CH3 CH4 NAMECH4 NAMECH5 CH5 CH6 NAMECH6 NAMECH7 CH7 CH8 NAMECH8 NAMECH9 CH9 CH10 NAMECH10 NAMECH11 CH11 CH12 NAMECH12 en05000714.vsd

1.4

Output signals
Dependent on ordered IED 670 type.

32

Analog inputs

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Table 8:
Signal ERROR CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12

Output signals for the ANALOGIN12I (TA40-) function block

Description Analog input module status Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Analog input 3 Analog input 4 Analog input 5 Analog input 6 Analog input 7 Analog input 8 Analog input 9 Analog input 10 Analog input 11 Analog input 12

Table 9:
Signal ERROR CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12

Output signals for the ANALOGIN9I3U (TC40-) function block

Description Analog input module status Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Analog input 3 Analog input 4 Analog input 5 Analog input 6 Analog input 7 Analog input 8 Analog input 9 Analog input 10 Analog input 11 Analog input 12

33

Analog inputs

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Table 10:
Signal ERROR CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12

Output signals for the ANALOGIN6I6U (TD40-) function block

Description Analog input module status Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Analog input 3 Analog input 4 Analog input 5 Analog input 6 Analog input 7 Analog input 8 Analog input 9 Analog input 10 Analog input 11 Analog input 12

1.5

Setting parameters
Dependent on ordered IED 670 type.
Table 11:
Parameter PhaseAngleRef

General settings for the AISERVAL (AISV-) function

Range 1 - 24 Step 1 Default 1 Unit Ch Description Reference channel for phase angle presentation

Table 12:
Parameter

Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN12I (TA40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite

CT_WyePoint1

CTsec1 CTprim1 CT_WyePoint2

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec2 CTprim2 CT_WyePoint3

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

34

Analog inputs

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Parameter CTsec3 CTprim3 CT_WyePoint4

Range 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999

Step 1 1 -

Default 1 3000 ToObject

Unit A A -

Description Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec4 CTprim4 CT_WyePoint5

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec5 CTprim5 CT_WyePoint6

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec6 CTprim6 CT_WyePoint7

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec7 CTprim7 CT_WyePoint8

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec8 CTprim8 CT_WyePoint9

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec9 CTprim9 CT_WyePoint10

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec10 CTprim10

1 1

1 3000

A A

35

Analog inputs

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Parameter CT_WyePoint11

Range FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999

Step -

Default ToObject

Unit -

Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec11 CTprim11 CT_WyePoint12

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec12 CTprim12

1 1

1 3000

A A

Table 13:
Parameter

Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN9I3U (TC40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current

CT_WyePoint1

CTsec1 CTprim1 CT_WyePoint2

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec2 CTprim2 CT_WyePoint3

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec3 CTprim3 CT_WyePoint4

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec4 CTprim4 CT_WyePoint5

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec5

36

Analog inputs

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Parameter CTprim5 CT_WyePoint6

Range 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00

Step 1 -

Default 3000 ToObject

Unit A -

Description Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage

CTsec6 CTprim6 CT_WyePoint7

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec7 CTprim7 CT_WyePoint8

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec8 CTprim8 CT_WyePoint9

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec9 CTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12

1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05

1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00

A A V kV V kV V kV

37

Analog inputs

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Table 14:
Parameter

Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN6I6U (TD40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject 1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage

CT_WyePoint1

CTsec1 CTprim1 CT_WyePoint2

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec2 CTprim2 CT_WyePoint3

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec3 CTprim3 CT_WyePoint4

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec4 CTprim4 CT_WyePoint5

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec5 CTprim5 CT_WyePoint6

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec6 CTprim6 VTsec7 VTprim7 VTsec8 VTprim8 VTsec9

1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001

1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000

A A V kV V kV V

38

Analog inputs

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Parameter VTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12

Range 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00

Step 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05

Default 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00

Unit kV V kV V kV V kV

Description Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage

39

Authorization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Authorization
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED 670 and the tools that are accessing the IED 670 are protected, subject of authorization handling. The concept of authorization, as it is implemented in the IED 670 and the associated tools is based on the following facts: There are two types of points of access to the IED 670: - local, through the local HMI - remote, through the communication ports There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of the IED and tools functionality; the pre-defined user types are defined as follows:

User type Guest SuperUser SPAGuest SystemOperator ProtectionEngineer DesignEngineer UserAdministrator

Access rights Read only Full access Read only + control Control from LHMI, no bypass All settings Application configuration (including SMT, GDE and CMT) User and password administration for the IED

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the User Management Tool (UMT) within PCM 600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the LHMI of the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on the IED LHMI.

2.1

Authorization handling in the tool

Upon the creation of an IED in the Plant Structure, the User Management Tool is immediately accessible, by right clicking with the mouse on that specific IED name:

40

Authorization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 20:

Right-clicking to get the User Management Tool IED Users.

By left-clicking on the IED Users submenu, the tool will open in the right-side panel:

41

Authorization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 21:

User Manager Tool opened in the right-side panel.

By default, the IEDs are delivered so that users are not required to log on to operate the IED. The default user is the SuperUser. Before doing any changes to the User Management in the IED it is recommendable that the administrator uploads the Users and Groups existent in the IED. If situation requires so, one can restore the factory settings, overwriting all existing settings in the User Management Tool database.

Note!
Even if the administrator empties the tool database, the users previously defined are still in the IED. They cannot be erased by downloading the empty list into the IED (the tool wont download an empty list), so it is strongly recommended that before you create any user you create one that belongs to the SuperUser group. If the administrator marks the check box User must logon to this IED, then the fields under the User Management tab are becoming accessible and one can add, delete and edit users. To add a new user, the administrator will press the button that is marked with a black arrow, see figure 22 on the User subtab:

42

Authorization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 22:

User subtab and creation of a new user.

Upon pressing this button, a window will appear, enabling the administrator to enter details about the user, assign an access password and (after pressing Next and advancing to the next window) assign the user to a group:

Figure 23:

Enter details about the user.

43

Authorization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 24:

Assign the user to a group.

Once the new user is created, it will appear in the list of users. Once in the list, there are several operations that can be performed on the users, shown in figure 25

No. 1 2 3

Description Delete selected user Change password Add another group to the user permissions

Figure 25:

Operations on users in the users list.

44

Authorization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

The Group subtab is displaying all the pre-defined groups and gives short details of the permissions allowed to the members of a particular group:

Figure 26:

The Groups subtab.

It also allows the administrator to add another (already created) user to a group, in the same way it could assign one more group to an user, on the Users subtab. The Functions subtab is a descriptional area, showing in detail what Read/Write permissions has each user group, in respect to various tools and components. Finally, after the desired users are created and permissions assigned to them by means of user groups, the whole list must be downloaded in the IED, in the same way as from the other tools:

45

Authorization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

No. 1 2

Description Upload from IED Download to IED

2.2

Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the superuser. No LogOn is required to operate the IED until a user has been created with the UMT(User Management Tool). See Application manual for more details. Once a user is created and downloaded into the IED, that user can perform a LogOn, introducing the password assigned in the tool. If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will cause the display to show a message box saying: No user defined! If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Settings\General Settings\HMI\Screen\ Display Timeout ) elapses, the IED will return to a Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes at delivery. If there are one or more users created with the UMT and downloaded into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a LogOn or when the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the LogOn window will appear The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, one can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following character will show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the pasword. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive!) choose OK and press E key again. If everything is O.K. at a voluntary LogOn the LHMI returns to the Authorization screen. If the LogOn is OK, when required to change for example a password protected setting, the LHMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the LogOn has failed, then the LogOn window will pop-up again, until either the user makes it right or presses Cancel.

46

Self supervision with internal event list

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

3
3.1

Self supervision with internal event list

Introduction
The self-supervision function listens and reacts to internal system events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in an internal event list.

3.2

Principle of operation
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes: Normal micro-processor watchdog function. Checking of digitized measuring signals. Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The self-supervision status can be monitored from the local HMI or a SMS/SCS system. Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Diagnostics\Internal Events or Diagnostics\IED Status\General. Refer to the Installation and Commissioning manual for a detailed list of supervision signals that can be generated and displayed in the local HMI. A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of this output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 28 and a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 27

Power supply fault

Power supply module

Fault

Watchdog TX overflow Master resp. Supply fault ReBoot I/O

I/O nodes

Fault
AND INTERNAL FAIL

Internal Fail (CPU)

CEM

Fault

I/O nodes = BIM, BOM, IOM xxxx = Inverted signal

en04000520_ansi.vsd

Figure 27:

Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact.

47

Self supervision with internal event list

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 28:

Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block.

Some signals are available from the IES (IntErrorSign) function block. The signals from this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The signals from the IES function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired. Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the Signal Matrix Tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the time synchronization block TIME. 3.2.1 Internal signals Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the IED. As they provide information about the internal life of the IED, they are also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups. One group handles signals that are always present in the IED; standard signals. Another group handles signals that are collected depending on the hardware configuration. The standard signals are listed in table 15. The hardware dependent internal signals are listed in table 16. Explanations of internal signals are listed in table 17.

48

Self supervision with internal event list

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Table 15:

Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Description Internal Fail status Internal Warning status CPU module Fail status CPU module Warning status Real Time Clock status Time Synchronization status Runtime Execution Error status IEC 61850 Error status SW Watchdog Error status LON/Mip Device Error status Runtime Application Error status Settings changed Setting groups changed Fault Tolerant Filesystem status

Name of signal FAIL WARNING NUMFAIL NUMWARNING RTCERROR TIMESYNCHERROR RTEERROR IEC61850ERROR WATCHDOG LMDERROR APPERROR SETCHGD SETGRPCHGD FTFERROR

Table 16:
Card ADxx BIM BOM IOM MIM LDCM

Self-supervision's HW dependent internal signals

Name of signal ADxx BIM-Error BOM-Error IOM-Error MIM-Error LDCM-Error Description Analog In Module Error status Binary In Module Error status Binary Out Module Error status In/Out Module Error status Millampere Input Module Error status Line Differential Communication Error status

49

Self supervision with internal event list

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Table 17:

Explanations of internal signals

Reasons for activation This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--NUMFAIL, INT--LMDERROR, INT--WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--RTEERROR, INT--FTFERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR, INT--TIMESYNCHERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--RTEERROR, INT--FTFERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the real time clock. This signal will be active when the source of the time synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a time reset. This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading of settings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups, loading or unloading of application threads. This signal will be active if the IEC61850 stack did not succeed in some actions like reading IEC61850 configuration, startup etc. This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under too heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems background task is used for the measurements. LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error state. This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, etc. This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if any settings are changed. This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if any setting groups are changed. This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup file are corrupted and can not be recovered.

Name of signal FAIL

WARNING

NUMFAIL

NUMWARNING RTCERROR TIMESYNCHERROR RTEERROR

IEC61850ERROR WATCHDOG

LMDERROR APPERROR

SETCHGD SETGRPCHGD FTFERROR

3.2.2

Run-time model The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see figure 29.

50

Self supervision with internal event list

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 29:

Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED670.

The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converters with different amplification makes it possible to supervise the incoming signals under normal conditions where the signals from the two converters should be identical. An alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion. The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the validation part, i.e. checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected. Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU, i.e. the signal that has the most suitable level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higherADx_HI. When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and an alarm will be given. The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

51

Self supervision with internal event list

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

3.3

Function block
IS--In tern alSig n al F AIL W AR N IN G C PU F AIL C PU W AR N TSYN C ER R R TC ER R en04000392.vsd

Figure 30:

IS function block

3.4

Output signals
Table 18:
Signal FAIL WARNING CPUFAIL CPUWARN TSYNCERR RTCERR

Output signals for the InternalSignal (IS---) function block

Description Internal fail Internal warning CPU fail CPU warning Time synchronization status Real time clock status

3.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

3.6

Technical data
Table 19:
Data Recording manner List size

Self supervision with internal event list

Value Continuous, event controlled 1000 events, first in-first out

52

Time synchronization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

4
4.1

Time synchronization
Introduction
Use the time synchronization source selector to select a common source of absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes comparison of events and disturbance data between all IEDs in a SA system possible.

4.2
4.2.1

Principle of operation
General concepts Time definitions The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is normally called the clock accuracy and means how much the error increases, i.e. how much the clock gains or loses time. A disciplined clock is a clock that knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them, i.e. a trained clock. Synchronization principle From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A module is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.

Syncronization from a higher level

Module

Optional syncronization of modules at a lower level

en05000206.vsd

Figure 31:

Synchronization principle

A module is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A module can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum errors, which gives the module the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as a function of: The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

53

Time synchronization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

4.2.2

The time since the last used synchronization message The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the module.

Real Time Clock (RTC) operation The IED has a built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) with a resolution of one nanosecond. The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2098. RTC at power off During power off, the time in the IED time is kept by a capacitor backed RTC that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will be lost completely. RTC at startup At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last up time, the time in the IED will be quite accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC power has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will start at 01-01-1970. For more information, please refer to section "Time synchronization startup procedure" and section "Example, binary synchronization". Time synchronization startup procedure The first message that contains full time (as for instance LON, SNTP, GPS etc.) will give an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time is thereafter set to the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three things will happen with each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as fine: If the synchronization message, that is similar to the other messages from its origin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for synchronization, that is for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other messages, a spike-filter in the IED will remove this time-message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following message also has a large offset, the spike filter will not act and the offset in the synchronization message will be compared to a threshold that defaults to 100 milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a safe state and the clock is thereafter set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the threshold, the clock will be adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it will take 100 seconds or 1.7 minutes to remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse will only be used for initial setting of the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds will reset the time. Rate accuracy In the REx670 IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is about 100 ppm, but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy will be approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant. Normally it will take 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.

54

Time synchronization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Time-out on synchronization sources All synchronization interfaces has a time-out, and a configured interface must receive time-messages regularly, in order not to give a TSYNCERR. Normally, the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR will be given. 4.2.3 Synchronization alternatives Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. Either the synchronization message is applied via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date and time or as a minute pulse, connected to a binary input, or via GPS. The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time in the IEDs. Synchronization via SNTP SNTP provides a Ping-Pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an SNTP-server, and the SNTP-server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in an IEC61850 network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be a SNTP-server present, preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that will give 1 ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as a SNTP-time server. Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM) On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent. Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, i.e. year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds. Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM). Synchronization via Built-in-GPS The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization Module (GSM). Synchronization via binary input The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated from e.g. station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as a fine signal. The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED. The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input. If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED. The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last flank. Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.

55

Time synchronization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Pulse data: Period time (a) should be 60 seconds. Pulse length (b): - Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms. - Maximum pulse length is optional. Magnitude (c) - please refer to section 2.9 "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

a b

c
en05000251.vsd

Figure 32:

Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given. If contact bounces occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce. If the minute pulses are perfect, e.g. it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the system. If contact bounces occurs more than 50 ms, e.g. it is less than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be accepted. Example, binary synchronization A IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and the minute pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the first minute pulse is not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that the fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed for instance for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will either synchronize the time, if the

56

Time synchronization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time, if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within 1.7 minutes. Synchronization via IRIG Synchronization with DNP3.0 The DNP3.0 communication can be ? to be the source of the Course time synchronisation. The fine synch source must be another when high accuracy time working is required. The IRIG interface to the IED supplies two possible synchronization methods, IRIG-B and PPS. IRIG-B IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there is a number of figures stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted. To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG module, one galvanic BNC connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a figure in the range 1-7. 00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz modulation is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector. If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information only contains the time within the year, and year information has to come from the tool or HMI. The IRIG Module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by many IRIG-B clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEE1344 is compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of time-zone. It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG module. In this case, also send the local time in the messages, as this local time plus the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times. PPS An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG module. The PPS signal is a transition from dark to light, that occurs 1 second +- 2 us after another PPS signal. The allowed jitter of 2 us is settable.

57

Time synchronization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

4.3

Function block
TIMETIME TSYNCERR RTCERR en05000425.vsd

Figure 33:

TIME function block

4.4

Output signals
Table 20:
Signal TSYNCERR RTCERR

Output signals for the TIME (TIME-) function block

Description Time synchronization error Real time clock error

4.5

Setting parameters
Path in local HMI: Setting/Time Path in PCM 600: Settings/Time/Synchronization
Table 21:
Parameter CoarseSyncSrc

Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function

Range Disabled SPA LON SNTP DNP Disabled SPA LON BIN GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP IRIG-B GPS+IRIG-B PPS Disabled SNTP-Server Step Default Off Unit Description Coarse time synchronization source

FineSyncSource

Off

Fine time synchronization source

SyncMaster

Off

Activate IEDas synchronization master

58

Time synchronization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Table 22:
Parameter

General settings for the TimeSynchBIN (TBIN-) function

Range 3 - 16 Step 1 Default 3 Unit Description Hardware position of IO module for time synchronization Binary input number for time synchronization Positive or negative edge detection

ModulePosition

BinaryInput BinDetection

1 - 16 PositiveEdge NegativeEdge

1 -

1 PositiveEdge

Table 23:
Parameter ServerIP-Add

General settings for the TimeSynchSNTP (TSNT-) function

Range 0 - 18 0 - 18 Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Unit Description Server IP-address Redundant server IP-address

RedServIP-Add

Table 24:
Parameter MonthInYear

General settings for the DaySumDSTBegin (TSTB-) function

Range January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 86400 Step Default March Unit Description Month in year when daylight time starts

DayInWeek

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time starts

WeekInMonth

Last

Week in month when daylight time starts

UTCTimeOfDay

3600

UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time starts

59

Time synchronization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Table 25:
Parameter MonthInYear

General settings for the DaySumTimeEnd (TSTE-) function

Range January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 86400 Step Default October Unit Description Month in year when daylight time ends

DayInWeek

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time ends

WeekInMonth

Last

Week in month when daylight time ends

UTCTimeOfDay

3600

UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time ends

Table 26:
Parameter

General settings for the TimeZone (TZON-) function

Range -24 - 24 Step 1 Default 0 Unit Description Number of half-hours from UTC

NoHalfHourUTC

60

Time synchronization

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Table 27:
Parameter SynchType TimeDomain Encoding

Basic general settings for the TimeSynchIRIGB (TIRI-) function

Range BNC Opto LocalTime UTC IRIG-B 1344 1344TZ MinusTZ PlusTZ Step Default Opto LocalTime IRIG-B Unit Description Type of synchronization Time domain Type of encoding

TimeZoneAs1344

PlusTZ

Time zone as in 1344 standard

4.6

Technical data
Table 28:
Function Time tagging resolution, Events and Sampled Measurement Values Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), Events and Sampled Measurement Values Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, Sampled Measurement Values

Time synchronization, time tagging

Value 1 ms 1.0 ms typically

1.0 ms typically

61

Parameter setting groups

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

5
5.1

Parameter setting groups

Introduction
Use the six sets of settings to optimize IED operation for different system conditions. By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the human-machine interface or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can cope with a variety of system scenarios.

5.2

Principle of operation
The ACGR function block has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are available for configuration purposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is always available. A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding input to the ACGR function block. Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the IED. To do this the PCM 600 configuration tool must be used. The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms. More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated. Every time the active group is changed, the output signal GRP_CHGD is sending a pulse. The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch between.

62

Parameter setting groups

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

ACTIVATE GROUP 6 ACTIVATE GROUP 5 ACTIVATE GROUP 4 ACTIVATE GROUP 3 ACTIVATE GROUP 2 +RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1 ACGRIOx-Bly1 IOx-Bly2 IOx-Bly3 IOx-Bly4 IOx-Bly5 IOx-Bly6 ActiveGroup ACTGRP1 GRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 ACTGRP5 ACTGRP6 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 GRP5 GRP6 GRP_CHGD

en05000119_ansi.vsd

Figure 34:

Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group that is active. The SGC function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the PST setting tool.

5.3

Function block
ACGRActiveGroup ACTGRP1 GRP1 ACTGRP2 GRP2 ACTGRP3 GRP3 ACTGRP4 GRP4 ACTGRP5 GRP5 ACTGRP6 GRP6 GRP_CHGD en05000433_ansi.vsd

Figure 35:

ACGR function block

63

Parameter setting groups

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

SGC-NoOfSetGrp MAXSETGR en05000716.vsd

5.4

Input and output signals

Table 29:
Signal ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 ACTGRP5 ACTGRP6

Input signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block

Description Selects setting group 1 as active Selects setting group 2 as active Selects setting group 3 as active Selects setting group 4 as active Selects setting group 5 as active Selects setting group 6 as active

Table 30:
Signal GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 GRP5 GRP6 GRP_CHGD

Output signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block

Description Setting group 1 is active Setting group 2 is active Setting group 3 is active Setting group 4 is active Setting group 5 is active Setting group 6 is active Pulse when setting changed

5.5

Setting parameters
Table 31:
Parameter t

General settings for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function

Range 0.0 - 10.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit s Description Pulse length of pulse when setting changed

64

Parameter setting groups

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Table 32:
Parameter ActiveSetGrp

General settings for the NoOfSetGrp (SGC--) function

Range SettingGroup1 SettingGroup2 SettingGroup3 SettingGroup4 SettingGroup5 SettingGroup6 1-6 Step Default SettingGroup1 Unit Description ActiveSettingGroup

NoOfSetGrp

No

Number of possible setting groups to switch between

65

Test mode functionality

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

6
6.1

Test mode functionality

Introduction
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local HMI or PST. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.

6.2

Principle of operation
To be able to test the functions in the IED, you must set the terminal in the TEST mode. There are two ways of setting the terminal in the TEST mode: By configuration, activating the input of the function block TEST. By setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under the menu: TEST/IED test mode.

While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE output of the function block TEST is activated. The other two outputs of the function block TEST are showing which is the generator of the Test mode: On state input from configuration (OUTPUT output activated) or setting from LHMI (SETTING output activated). While the IED is in test mode, the yellow PICKUP LED will flash and all functions are blocked. Any function can be de-blocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling. Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (the output ACTIVE in function block TEST is set to true), see example in figure 36. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are possible. The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockings were not reset. The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs will be activated. The TEST function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) or an FT switch finger can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TEST function block. Each of the protection functions includes the blocking from TEST function block. A typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 36. The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events e.g. during a maintenance test.

66

Test mode functionality

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Disconnection

Normal voltage Pickup1 Pickup2

tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min IntBlkStVal1 IntBlkStVal2 Time Block step 1 Block step 2
en05000466_ansi.vsd

tBlkUV2 < t2,t2Min

Figure 36:

Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection function.

6.3

Function block
TESTTest INPUT ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING en05000443.vsd

Figure 37:

TEST function block

6.4

Input and output signals

Table 33:
Signal INPUT

Input signals for the Test (TEST-) function block

Description Sets terminal in test mode when active

67

Test mode functionality

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Table 34:
Signal ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING NOEVENT

Output signals for the Test (TEST-) function block

Description IED in test mode when active Test input is active Test mode setting is (Enabled) or not (Disabled) Event disabled during testmode

6.5

Setting parameters
Table 35:
Parameter TestMode

Basic general settings for the Test (TEST-) function

Range Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Step Default Off Unit Description Test mode in operation (Enabled) or not (Disabled) Event disable during testmode Command bit for test required or not during testmode

EventDisable CmdTestBit

Off Off

68

IED identifiers

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

7
7.1

IED identifiers
Introduction
There are two functions that allow you to identify each IED individually: ProductInformation function has seven pre-set, settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important: IED Type ProductDef FirmwareVer IEDMainFunType SerialNo. Ordering No. ProductionDate.

The settings are visable on the local HMI, under: Diagnostics/IED Status/ProductIdentifiers They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance). TerminalID function is allowing you to identify the individual IED in your system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

7.2

Setting parameters
Table 36:
Parameter StationName StationNumber ObjectName ObjectNumber UnitName UnitNumber

General settings for the TerminalID (TEID-) function

Range 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default Station name 0 Object name 0 Unit name 0 Unit Description Station name Station number Object name Object number Unit name Unit number

69

Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

8
8.1

Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)

Introduction
The SMBI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way binary inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.

8.2

Principle of operation
The SMBI function block, see figure 38, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, named BI1 to BI10. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBI function block.

8.3

Function block
SI01SMBI INSTNAME BI1NAME BI2NAME BI3NAME BI4NAME BI5NAME BI6NAME BI7NAME BI8NAME BI9NAME BI10NAME BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10

en05000434.vsd

Figure 38:

SI function block

8.4

Input and output signals

Table 37:
Signal BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5

Output signals for the SMBI (SI01-) function block

Description Binary input 1 Binary input 2 Binary input 3 Binary input 4 Binary input 5

70

Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Signal BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10

Description Binary input 6 Binary input 7 Binary input 8 Binary input 9 Binary input 10

71

Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

9
9.1

Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)

Introduction
The SMBO function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way binary outputs are sent from one IED 670 configuration.

9.2

Principle of operation
The SMBO function block, see figure 39, receives logical signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the SMT. The inputs in the SMBO are named BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO.

9.3

Function block
SO01SMBO BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 INSTNAME BO1NAME BO2NAME BO3NAME BO4NAME BO5NAME BO6NAME BO7NAME BO8NAME BO9NAME BO10NAME en05000439.vsd

Figure 39:

SO function block

9.4

Input and output signals

Table 38:
Signal BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5

Input signals for the SMBO (SO01-) function block

Description Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool

72

Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Signal BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10

Description Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool

73

Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

10
10.1

Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)

Introduction
The SMMI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED670 configuration.

10.2

Principle of operation
The SMMI function block, see figure 40, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) mA inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT. The outputs on the SMMI are normally connected to the MVGGIO function block for further use of the mA signals.

10.3

Function block
SMI1SMMI INSTNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI5NAME AI6NAME AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6

en05000440.vsd

Figure 40:

SMI function block

10.4

Input and output signals

Table 39:
Signal AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6

Output signals for the SMMI (SMI1-) function block

Description Analog milliampere input 1 Analog milliampere input 2 Analog milliampere input 3 Analog milliampere input 4 Analog milliampere input 5 Analog milliampere input 6

74

Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

11
11.1

Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)

Introduction
The SMAI function block (or the pre-processing function block, as it is also known) is used within the PCM 600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way analog inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.

11.2

Principle of operation
Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 41 and figure 42. The outputs of the SMAI are giving information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the outputs of the function block. The output singal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the in SMT connected input to AI1 to AI4. AIN is always the neutral current, calculated residual sum or the signal connected to AI4. Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the input is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions (HEDIF, BBDIF) shall always be connected to AI3P.

11.3

Function block
PR01SMAI BLOCK DFTSPFC GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME TYPE SYNCOUT SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN NOSMPLCY en05000705.vsd

Figure 41:

PR01 function block

PR02SMAI BLOCK GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME TYPE AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN en07000130.vsd

Figure 42:

PR0212 function block

75

Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

11.4

Input and output signals

Table 40:
Signal BLOCK DFTSYNC DFTSPFC

Input signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block

Description Block group 1 Synchronisation of DFT calculation Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation

Table 41:
Signal SYNCOUT SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

Output signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block

Description Synchronisation signal from internal DFT reference function Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT reference function Group 1 analog input 3-phase group Group 1 analog input 1 Group 1 analog input 2 Group 1 analog input 3 Group 1 analog input 4 Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance recorder

Table 42:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block

Description Block group 2

Table 43:
Signal AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

Output signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block

Description Group 2 analog input 3-phase group Group 2 analog input 1 Group 2 analog input 2 Group 2 analog input 3 Group 2 analog input 4 Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance recorder

76

Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

11.5

Setting parameters Note!

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal frequency DFT reference is then the reference.
Table 44:
Parameter DFTRefExtOut

Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function

Range InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph 1-2 Step Default InternalDFTRef Unit Description DFT reference for external output

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

ConnectionType TYPE

Ph-N 1

Ch

Input connection type 1=Voltage,2=Current

77

Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Table 45:
Parameter Negation

Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function

Range Disabled NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 0.05 - 2000.00 Step Default Disabled Unit Description Negation

MinValFreqMeas VBase

1 0.05

10 400.00

% kV

Limit for frequency calculation in % of VBase Base Voltage

Table 46:
Parameter

Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function

Range InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph 1-2 Step Default InternalDFTRef Unit Description DFT reference

DFTReference

ConnectionType TYPE

Ph-N 1

Ch

Input connection type 1=Voltage,2=Current

Table 47:
Parameter Negation

Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function

Range Disabled NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 0.05 - 2000.00 Step Default Off Unit Description Negation

MinValFreqMeas VBase

1 0.05

10 400.00

% kV

Limit for frequency calculation in % of VBase Base Voltage

78

Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

12
12.1

Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)

Introduction
The SUM3Ph function block is used in order to get the sum of two sets of 3 ph analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

12.2

Principle of operation
The summation block receives the 3ph signals from the SMAI blocks, see figure 43. In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the outputs of the function block.

12.3

Function block
SU01Sum3Ph BLOCK DFTSYNC DFTSPFC G1AI3P G2AI3P AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 en05000441.vsd

Figure 43:

SU function block

12.4

Input and output signals

Table 48:
Signal BLOCK DFTSYNC DFTSPFC G1AI3P G2AI3P

Input signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block

Description Block Synchronisation of DFT calculation Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation Group 1 analog input 3-phase group Group 2 analog input 3-phase group

Table 49:
Signal AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4

Output signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block

Description Group analog input 3-phase group Group 1 analog input Group 2 analog input Group 3 analog input Group 4 analog input

79

Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

12.5

Setting parameters Note!

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
Table 50:
Parameter SummationType

Basic general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function

Range Step Default Group1+Group2 Unit Description Summation type

Group1+Group2 Group1-Group2 Group2-Group1 -(Group1+Group2) InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 External DFT ref -

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

Table 51:
Parameter

Advanced general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function

Range 5 - 200 Step 1 Default 10 Unit % Description Magnitude limit for frequency calculation in % of Vbase Base voltage

FreqMeasMinVal

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

0.05

400.00

kV

80

Authority status (AUTS)

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

13
13.1

Authority status (AUTS)

Introduction
The AUTS function block (or the authority status function block) is an indication function block, which informs about two events related to the IED and the user authorization: the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked (the output USRBLKED) the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

13.2

Principle of operation
Whenever on of the two events described above happens, the specific output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON) will be activated. The output can e.g. be connected on Event function block for LON/SPA. The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus.

13.3

Function block
AUTSAuthStatus USRBLKED LOGGEDON en06000503.vsd

Figure 44:

AUTS function block

13.4

Output signals
Table 52:
Signal USRBLKED LOGGEDON

Output signals for the AuthStatus (AUTS-) function block

Description At least one user is blocked by invalid password At least one user is logged on

13.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

81

Goose binary receive

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

14
14.1

Goose binary receive

Function block
GB01GooseBinRcv BLOCK INSTNAME OUT1 OUT1VAL OUT2 OUT2VAL OUT3 OUT3VAL OUT4 OUT4VAL OUT5 OUT5VAL OUT6 OUT6VAL OUT7 OUT7VAL OUT8 OUT8VAL OUT9 OUT9VAL OUT10 OUT10VAL OUT11 OUT11VAL OUT12 OUT12VAL OUT13 OUT13VAL OUT14 OUT14VAL OUT15 OUT15VAL OUT16 OUT16VAL OUT1NAM OUT2NAM OUT3NAM OUT4NAM OUT5NAM OUT6NAM OUT7NAM OUT8NAM OUT9NAM OUT10NAM OUT11NAM OUT12NAM OUT13NAM OUT14NAM OUT15NAM OUT16NAM en07000047.vsd

Figure 45:

GB function block

82

Goose binary receive

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

14.2

Input and output signals

Table 53:
Signal BLOCK INSTNAME

Input signals for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function block

Description Block of output signals Instance name in Signal Matrix Tool

Table 54:
Signal OUT1 OUT1VAL OUT2 OUT2VAL OUT3 OUT3VAL OUT4 OUT4VAL OUT5 OUT5VAL OUT6 OUT6VAL OUT7 OUT7VAL OUT8 OUT8VAL OUT9 OUT9VAL OUT10 OUT10VAL OUT11 OUT11VAL OUT12 OUT12VAL OUT13 OUT13VAL OUT14 OUT14VAL OUT15 OUT15VAL OUT16

Output signals for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function block

Description Binary output 1 Valid data on binary output 1 Binary output 2 Valid data on binary output 2 Binary output 3 Valid data on binary output 3 Binary output 4 Valid data on binary output 4 Binary output 5 Valid data on binary output 5 Binary output 6 Valid data on binary output 6 Binary output 7 Valid data on binary output 7 Binary output 8 Valid data on binary output 8 Binary output 9 Valid data on binary output 9 Binary output 10 Valid data on binary output 10 Binary output 11 Valid data on binary output 11 Binary output 12 Valid data on binary output 12 Binary output 13 Valid data on binary output 13 Binary output 14 Valid data on binary output 14 Binary output 15 Valid data on binary output 15 Binary output 16

83

Goose binary receive

Chapter 3 Basic IED functions

Signal OUT16VAL OUT1NAM OUT2NAM OUT3NAM OUT4NAM OUT5NAM OUT6NAM OUT7NAM OUT8NAM OUT9NAM OUT10NAM OUT11NAM OUT12NAM OUT13NAM OUT14NAM OUT15NAM OUT16NAM

Description Valid data on binary output 16 Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool

14.3

Setting parameters
Table 55:
Parameter Operation

Basic general settings for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function

Range Disabled Enabled Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Disabled/Enabled

84

About this chapter

Chapter 4 Differential protection

Chapter 4 Differential protection

About this chapter This chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used in differential protection.

85

High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)

Chapter 4 Differential protection

High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)

Function block name: HZDxANSI number: 87 IEC 61850 logical node name: HZPDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

IdN

1.1

Introduction
The high impedance differential protection can be used when the involved CT cores have the same turn ratio and similar magnetizing characteristic. It utilizes an external summation of the phases and neutral current and a series resistor and a voltage dependent resistor externally to the relay.

1.2

Principle of operation
The high impedance differential function is based on one current input with external stabilizing resistors and voltage dependent resistors. Three functions can be used to provide a three phase differential protection function. The stabilizing resistor value is calculated from the relay operating value V TripPickup calculated to achieve through fault stability. The supplied stabilizing resistor has a link to allow setting of the correct resistance value. Refer to Application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

1.2.1

Logic diagram The logic diagram see figure 46 shows the operation principles for the high impedance differential protection function. It is a basically a simple one step relay with an additional lower alarm level. The function can be totally blocked totally or only tripping, can be blocked, by activating inputs from external signals.

86

High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)

Chapter 4 Differential protection

AlarmPickup 0-tAlarm 0

AlarmPickup 0.03s 0

en05000301_ansi.vsd

Figure 46:

Logic diagram for High impedance differential protection.

1.3

Function block
HZD1HZPDIF_87 ISI BLOCK BLKTR TRIP ALARM MEASVOLT en05000363_ansi.vsd

Figure 47:

HZD function block

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 56:
Signal ISI BLOCK BLKTR

Input signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Block of function Block of trip

87

High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)

Chapter 4 Differential protection

Table 57:
Signal TRIP ALARM MEASVOLT

Output signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block

Description Trip signal Alarm signal Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

1.5

Setting parameters
Table 58:
Parameter Operation AlarmPickup tAlarm TripPickup

Basic parameter group settings for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function

Range Disabled Enabled 2 - 500 0.000 - 60.000 5 - 900 Step 1 0.001 1 Default Off 10 5.000 100 Unit V s V Description Disable/Enable Operation Alarm voltage level on CT secondary Time delay to activate alarm Pickup voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Value of series resistor in Ohms

R series

10 - 20000

250

ohm

1.6

Technical data
Table 59:
Function Operate voltage

High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)

Range or value (20-400) V Accuracy 1.0% of Vn for V < Vn 1.0% of V for V >Vn 2

Reset ratio Maximum continuous voltage Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time

>95% V>TripPickup /series resistor 200 W 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Vd 90 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Vd 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Vd

88

About this chapter

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

About this chapter This chapter describes distance protection and associated functions. It includes function blocks, logic diagrams and data tables with information about distance protection, automatic switch onto fault, weak end in-feed and other associated functions. Quadrilateral characteristics are also covered.

89

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Function block name: ZMQANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMQPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

1.1

Introduction
The line distance protection is a five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to ground fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths. Mho alternative Quad characteristic is available. The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines (see figure 48).

X(Ohm)

ZL

R(Ohm)

en06000375.vsd

Figure 48:

Typical Mho distance protection zone with load encroachment function activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single phase auto-reclosing.

90

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to ground faults on heavily loaded power lines. The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.

1.2
1.2.1

Principle of operation
Full scheme measurement The execution of the different fault loops within the IED670 are of full scheme type, which means that each fault loop for phase to ground faults and phase to phase faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel. Figure 49 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five, impedance-measuring zones l.

A-G

B-G

C-G

A-B

B-C

C-A

Zone 1

A-G

B-G

C-G

A-B

B-C

C-A

Zone 2

A-G

B-G

C-G

A-B

B-C

C-A

Zone 3

A-G

B-G

C-G

A-B

B-C

C-A

Zone 4

A-G

B-G

C-G

A-B

B-C

C-A

Zone 5

en05000458_ansi.vsd

Figure 49:

The different measuring loops at line-ground fault and phase-phase fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements. 1.2.2 Impedance characteristic The distance measuring zone include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as three-phase faults. The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 50 and figure 51. The phase-to-ground characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents the per-phase reach.

91

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X RFPG R1+Rn RFPG

Xn =
X1+Xn

X0 X1 3

Rn = f N f N

R0 R1 3

R (Ohm/loop)

RFPG

RFPG

X1+Xn

RFPG

R1+Rn

RFPG
en05000661_ansi.vsd

Figure 50:

Characteristic for the phase-to-ground measuring loops, ohm/loop domain.

92

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X RFPP 2R1

(Ohm/phase)
RFPP

2X1

R (Ohm/phase) RFPP RFPP

2X1

RFPP

2R1

RFPP
en05000662.vsd

Figure 51:

Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 52. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

93

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Ip VA

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-ground element

Phase-to-ground fault in phase A

RFPG (Arc + tower resistance) 0 IN (R0-R1)/3 + j (X0-X1)/3 )

IA VA Phase-to-phase fault in phase A-B VB

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-phase element A-B RFPP

IB R1 + j X1

(Arc resistance)

IA VA Three-phase fault VC

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

Phase-to-phase element A-C

IC R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
en05000181_ansi.vsd

where: n m designates anyone of the three phases (1, 2 or 3) and represents the phase that is leading phase n with 120 degrees (i.e. 3, 1 or 2).

Figure 52:

Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 52 represents the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location. The RFPG and RFPP is the eventual fault resistance in the fault place.

94

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 52, there is of course fault current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase. The theoretical parameters p and q outline the area of operation in quadrant 1 when varied from 0 to 1.0. That is, for any combination of p and q, where both are between 0 and 1.0, the corresponding impedance is within the reach of the characteristic. The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 53. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it is conform for forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.

Non-directional

Forward

Reverse

en05000182.vsd

Figure 53: 1.2.3

Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

Minimum operating current The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values. The phase-to-ground loop AG (BG or CG) is blocked if IA (IB or IC) < IMinPUPG. For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phase-to-ground loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIR, regardless of the phase currents. IA (IB or IC) is the RMS value of the current in phase IA (IB or IC). IN is the RMS value of the vector sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0.

95

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The phase-to-phase loop AB (BC or CA) is blocked if IAB (BC or CA)< IMinPUPP.

Note!
All three current limits IMinPUPG, IminOpIR and IMinPUPP are automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, i.e. OperationDir=Reverse. 1.2.4 Measuring principles Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 1 (example for a phase A to phase B fault).

Zapp =

VA - VB IA - IB
(Equation 1)

Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3) The return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-g faults (example for a phase A to ground fault) according to equation 2.

Z app =

V_A I _ A + IN KN
(Equation 2)

Where: V_A, I_A and IN KN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED is defined as:

KN =

X0 - X1 3X1

where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point to the fault on the protected line.

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same reach along the line for all types of faults. The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X.

96

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The formula given in equation 2 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications. When load is considered in the case of single line to ground fault, conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670 has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications. Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (V), current (I), and changes in current between samples (I) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter. The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop impedance according to equation 3,

V = R i +

0 t
(Equation 3)

in complex notation, or:

Re (V ) = R Re (I ) +

X 0

Re (I ) t
(Equation 4)

Im (V ) = R Im (I ) +

X 0

Im (I ) t
(Equation 5)

with
0 = 2 f 0
(Equation 6)

where: Re Im f0 designates the real component of current and voltage, designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and designates the rated system frequency

97

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:

Rm =

Im (V) Re (I) Re (V) lm(I) Re (I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I)

(Equation 7)

X m = 0 t

Re (V) lm(I) lm(V ) Re (I) Re (I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I)

(Equation 8)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors. The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point. 1.2.5 Directional lines The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZD. Equation 9 and equation 10 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-ground fault and phase-phase fault.

AngDir < ang

0.8V1A + 0.2V1AM IA

< AngNegRes
(Equation 9)

For the AB element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

98

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

AngDir < ang

0.8V1AB + 0.2V1ABM IAB

< AngNegRes
(Equation 10)

where: AngDir AngNegRes V1A V1AM IA V1AB V1ABM IAB is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 54. is positive sequence phase voltage in phase A is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A is phase current in phase A is voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A) is memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A) is current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively.(see figure 54) and it should not be changed unless system studies have shown the necessity. The ZD gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the evaluation where FWD_A=1 adds 1, REV_A=1 adds 2, FWD_B=1 adds 4 etc.

AngNegRes

AngDir

en05000722_ansi.vsd

Figure 54:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

99

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees. The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 4% of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults. For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination. The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After 100 ms, the following occurs: If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in. - If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. - If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation. If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

1.2.6

Simplified logic diagrams Distance protection zones The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring loops: phase-to-ground as well as phase-to-phase. Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG. The phase-to-phase signals are designated by AB, BC and CA. Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop: Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above. Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 55.

The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCDZ. The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall be configured to the STDIR output on the ZD block.

100

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

OR PHSEL AB BC CA AG BG CG AND AND AND AND AND AND OR

PUZMPP

NDIR_AB NDIR_BC NDIR_CA NDIR_A NDIR_B NDIR_C STNDPE

OR LOVBZ BLOCK OR AND PHPUND BLK

99000557_ansi.vsd

Figure 55:

Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL

Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-directional mode, is presented in figure 56.

101

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

NDIR_A NDIR_B NIDR_C NDIR_AB NDIR_BC NDIR_CA

OR AND OR AND AND AND

0 15ms 0 15ms 0 15ms 0 15ms

PU_A PU_B PU_C PICKUP

OR OR

BLK
en00000488_ansi.vsd

Figure 56:

Composition of pickup signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 57.

102

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

NDIR_A DIR_A NDIR_B DIR_B NDIR_C DIR_C NDIR_AB DIR_AB NDIR_BC DIR_BC NDIR_CA DIR_CA

AND OR AND OR AND 0 15 ms PU_A AND PU_ZMPG

AND

AND

OR

AND

0 15 ms

PU_B

AND OR AND OR AND 0 15 ms PU_C

AND

PU_ZMPP

BLK

OR

AND

0 15 ms

PICKUP

en05000778_ansi.vsd

Figure 57:

Composition of pickup signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 58.

103

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Timer tPP=Enable PUZMPP Timer tPG=Enable PUZMPG BLKTR AND 0-tPG 0 AND 0 15 ms TRIP AND 0-tPP 0 OR

PU_A

AND

TR_A

PU_B

AND

TR_B

PU_C

AND

TR_C

en00000490_ansi.vsd

Figure 58:

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

1.3

Function block
ZM01ZMQPDIS_21 I3P V3P BLOCK LOVBZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C PHPUND en06000256_ansi.vsd

Figure 59:

ZM function block

104

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

ZD01ZDRDIR I3P V3P STDIR

en05000681_ansi.vsd

Figure 60:

ZD function block

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 60:
Signal I3P V3P BLOCK LOVBZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND

Input signals for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition Blocks all trip outputs Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector External directional condition

Table 61:
Signal TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C PHPUND

Output signals for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function block

Description General Trip, issued from any phase or loop Trip signal from phase A Trip signal from phase B Trip signal from phase C General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop Pickup signal from phase A Pickup signal from phase B Pickup signal from phase C Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase or loop

Table 62:
Signal I3P V3P

Input signals for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function block

Description Group connection Group connection

105

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Table 63:
Signal STDIR

Output signals for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function block

Description All output signals binary coded

1.5

Setting parameters
Table 64:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase OperationDir

Basic parameter group settings for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function

Range Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 Forward Unit A kV Description Disable/Enable Operation Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev

X1 R1

0.01 0.01

30.00 5.00

ohm/p ohm/p

Positive sequence reactance reach Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Zero sequence reactance reach Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase-Phase loops Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone timer, Ph-Ph Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase-Ground loops

X0 R0 RFPP RFPG OperationPP

0.10 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00 1.00 - 3000.00 1.00 - 9000.00 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Enabled

0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 -

100.00 15.00 30.00 100.00 On

ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l ohm/l -

Timer tPP

On

tPP OperationPG

0.001 -

0.000 On

s -

106

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Parameter Timer tPG

Range Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30

Step -

Default On

Unit -

Description Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G Time delay of trip, Ph-G Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to-ground loops Minimum operate residual current for Phase-Ground loops

tPG IMinPUPP

0.001 1

0.000 20

s %IB

IMinPUPG

10 - 30

20

%IB

IMinOpIR

5 - 30

%IB

Table 65:
Parameter AngNegRes

Parameter group settings for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function

Range 90 - 175 Step 1 Default 115 Unit Deg Description Angle to blinder in second quadrant for forward direction measured counter clockwise Angle to blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction measured clockwise Minimum operate current in % of IBase Base Current Base Voltage

AngDir

5 - 45

15

Deg

IMinOp IBase VBase

1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00

1 1 0.05

10 3000 400.00

%IB A kV

1.6

Technical data
Table 66:
Function Number of zones Minimum operate current Positive sequence reactance Positive sequence resistance Zero sequence reactance Zero sequence resistance Fault resistance, phase-ground Fault resistance, phase-phase

Distance measuring zone, Quad (PDIS, 21)

Range or value 5 with selectable direction (10-30)% of Ibase (0.50-3000.00) /phase (0.10-1000.00) /phase (0.50-9000.00) /phase (0.50-3000.00) /phase (1.00-9000.00) /loop (1.00-3000.00) /loop Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

107

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Function Dynamic overreach Impedance zone timers Operate time Reset ratio Reset time

Range or value

Accuracy

<5% at 85 degrees measured with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30 (0.000-60.000) s 24 ms typically 105% typically 30 ms typically 0.5% 10 ms -

108

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)
Function block name: ZMC ANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMCPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

2.1

Introduction
The line distance protection is a five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to ground fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths. Quad characteristic is available. The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines. The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single phase auto-reclosing. Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the quadrilateral function prevents overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to ground faults on heavily loaded power lines. The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.

2.2
2.2.1

Principle of operation
Full scheme measurement The execution of the different fault loops within the IED670 are of full scheme type, which means that each fault loop for phase to ground faults and phase to phase faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel. Figure 61 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five, impedance-measuring zones.

109

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

A-G

B-G

C-G

A-B

B-C

C-A

Zone 1

A-G

B-G

C-G

A-B

B-C

C-A

Zone 2

A-G

B-G

C-G

A-B

B-C

C-A

Zone 3

A-G

B-G

C-G

A-B

B-C

C-A

Zone 4

A-G

B-G

C-G

A-B

B-C

C-A

Zone 5

en05000458_ansi.vsd

Figure 61:

The different measuring loops at line-ground fault and phase-phase fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements. 2.2.2 Impedance characteristic The distance measuring zone include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as three-phase faults. The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 62 and figure 63. The phase-to-ground characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents the per-phase reach.

110

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X RFRVG

(Ohm/loop)

R1+Rn RFFWPG
X 0 PG X 1RVPG XNRV = X 0 PE X 1RVPE XNRV = 33

X1FWPG+XNFW

XX 0 PE X FWPE 0 PG 1X 1FWPG XNFW XNFW== 3 3

N
R (Ohm/loop)

RFRVG

RFFWPG

X1RVPG+XNRV

RFRVG

R1+Rn RFFWPG
en07000061.vsd

Figure 62:

Characteristic for the phase-to-ground measuring loops, ohm/loop domain.

111

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase) RFVPP
2

R1PP

RFFWPP
2

X1FWPP

X 0PE X 1RVPE XNRV =X X 0PG 1 X 1RVPG RVPE XNRV = 0PE X3 XNRV = 3 3 X PE X 1 X 00 PE X FWPE X 0 PG 1 X 1FWPE FWPG XNFW = XNFW XNFW== 33 3

R (Ohm/phase)

RFRVPP
2

RFFWPP
2

X1RVPP

RFVPP
2

R1PP

RFFWPP
2
en07000062.vsd

Figure 63:

Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 64. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

112

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Ip VA

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-ground element

Phase-to-ground fault in phase A

RFPG (Arc + tower resistance) 0 IN (R0-R1)/3 + j (X0-X1)/3 )

IA VA Phase-to-phase fault in phase A-B VB

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-phase element A-B RFPP

IB R1 + j X1

(Arc resistance)

IA VA Three-phase fault VC

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

Phase-to-phase element A-C

IC R1 + j X1 0.5RFPP
en05000181_ansi.vsd

where: n m designates anyone of the three phases (1, 2 or 3) and represents the phase that is leading phase n with 120 degrees (i.e. 3, 1 or 2).

Figure 64:

Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 64 represents the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location. The RFPG and RFPP is the eventual fault resistance in the fault place.

113

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 64, there is of course fault current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase. The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 65. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is symmetric, forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.

Non-directional

Forward

Reverse

en05000182.vsd

Figure 65: 2.2.3

Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

Minimum operating current The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values. The phase-to-ground loop AG (BG or CG) is blocked if IA (IB or IC) < IMinPUPG. For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phase-to-ground loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIR, regardless of the phase currents. IA (IB or IC) is the RMS value of the current in phase IA (IB or IC). IN is the RMS value of the vector sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0. The phase-to-phase loop AB (BC or CA) is blocked if IAB (BC or CA)< IMinPUPP.

Note!
All three current limits IMinPUPG, IminOpIR and IMinPUPP are automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, i.e. OperationDir=Reverse.

114

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

2.2.4

Measuring principles Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 11 (example for a phase A to phase B fault).

Zapp =

VA - VB IA - IB
(Equation 11)

Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase. The return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-g faults (example for a phase A to ground fault) according to equation 12.

Z app =

V_A I _ A + IN KN
(Equation 12)

Where: V_A, I_A and IN KN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED is defined as:

KN =

X0 - X1 3X1 where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point to the fault on the protected line.

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current at the relay point. This results in the same reach along the line for all types of faults. The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X. The formula given in equation 12 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications. When load is considered in the case of single line to ground fault, conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670 has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications. Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (V), current (I), and changes in current between samples (I) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

115

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop impedance according to equation 13,

V = R i +

0 t
(Equation 13)

in complex notation, or:

Re (V ) = R Re (I ) +

X 0

Re (I ) t
(Equation 14)

Im (V ) = R Im (I ) +

Im (I ) t
(Equation 15)

with
0 = 2 f 0
(Equation 16)

where: Re Im f0 designates the real component of current and voltage, designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:

Rm =

Im (V) Re (I) Re (V) lm(I) Re (I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I)

(Equation 17)

116

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X m = 0 t

Re (V) lm(I) lm(V ) Re (I) Re (I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I)

(Equation 18)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors. The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point. 2.2.5 Directionality for series compensation In the basic distance protection function, the control of the memory for polarizing voltage is performed by an under voltage control. In case of series compensated line, a voltage reversal can occur with a relatively high voltage also when the memory must be locked. Thus, a simple undervoltage type of voltage memory control can not be used in case of voltage reversal. In the option for series compensated network the polarizing quantity and memory are controlled by an impedance measurement criterion. The polarizing voltage is a memorized positive sequence voltage. The memory is continuously synchronized via a positive sequence filter. The memory is starting to run freely instantaneously when a voltage change is detected in any phase. A non-directional impedance measurement is used to detect a fault and identify the faulty phase or phases. At a three phase fault when no positive sequence voltage remains (all three phases are disconnected) the memory is used for direction polarization during 100 ms. The memory predicts the phase of the positive sequence voltage with the pre-fault frequency. This extrapolation is made with a high accuracy and it is not the accuracy of the memory that limits the time the memory can be used. The network is at a three phase fault under way to a new equilibrium and the post-fault condition can only be predicted accurately for a limited time from the pre-fault condition. In case of a three phase fault after 100 ms the phase of the memorized voltage can not be relied upon and the directional measurement has to be blocked. The achieved direction criteria are sealed-in when the directional measurement is blocked and kept until the impedance fault criteria is reset (the direction is stored until the fault is cleared). This memory control allows in the time domain unlimited correct directional measurement for all unsymmetrical faults also at voltage reversal. Only at three phase fault within the range of the set impedance reach of the criteria for control of the polarization voltage the memory has to be used and the measurement is limited to 100 ms and thereafter the direction is sealed-in. The special impedance measurement to control the polarization voltage is set separately and has only to cover (with some margin) the impedance to fault that can cause the voltage reversal.

117

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDS. Equation 19 and equation 20 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-ground fault and phase-phase fault.

AngDir < a n g

V 1AM < AngNeg Re s IA

(Equation 19)

For the AB element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

AngDir < a n g

V 1ABM < AngNeg Re s I AB

(Equation 20)

where: AngDir AngNegRes V1AM IA V1ABM IAB is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 66. is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A is phase current in phase A is memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A) is current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively.(see figure 66) and it should not be changed unless system studies have shown the necessity. The ZDS gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the evaluation where FWD_A=1 adds 1, REV_A=1 adds 2, FWD_B=1 adds 4 etc.

118

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

AngNegRes

AngDir

en05000722_ansi.vsd

Figure 66:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees. 2.2.6 Simplified logic diagrams Distance protection zones The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring loops: phase-to-ground as well as phase-to-phase. Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG. The phase-to-phase signals are designated by AB, BC and CA. Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop: Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above. Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 67.

The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCDZ.

119

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall be configured to the STDIR output on the ZDS block.

OR PHSEL AB BC CA AG BG CG AND AND AND AND AND AND OR

PUZMPP

NDIR_AB NDIR_BC NDIR_CA NDIR_A NDIR_B NDIR_C STNDPE

OR LOVBZ BLOCK OR AND PHPUND BLK

99000557_ansi.vsd

Figure 67:

Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL

Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-directional mode, is presented in figure 68.

120

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

NDIR_A NDIR_B NIDR_C NDIR_AB NDIR_BC NDIR_CA

OR AND OR AND AND AND

0 15ms 0 15ms 0 15ms 0 15ms

PU_A PU_B PU_C PICKUP

OR OR

BLK
en00000488_ansi.vsd

Figure 68:

Composition of pickup signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 69.

121

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

NDIR_A DIR_A NDIR_B DIR_B NDIR_C DIR_C NDIR_AB DIR_AB NDIR_BC DIR_BC NDIR_CA DIR_CA

AND OR AND OR AND 0 15 ms PU_A AND PU_ZMPG

AND

AND

OR

AND

0 15 ms

PU_B

AND OR AND OR AND 0 15 ms PU_C

AND

PU_ZMPP

BLK

OR

AND

0 15 ms

PICKUP

en05000778_ansi.vsd

Figure 69:

Composition of pickup signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 70.

122

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Timer tPP=Enable PUZMPP Timer tPG=Enable PUZMPG BLKTR AND 0-tPG 0 AND 0 15 ms TRIP AND 0-tPP 0 OR

PU_A

AND

TR_A

PU_B

AND

TR_B

PU_C

AND

TR_C

en00000490_ansi.vsd

Figure 70:

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

2.3

Function block
ZMC1ZMCPDIS_21 I3P V3P BLOCK LOVBZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C PHPUND en07000036_ansi.vsd

Figure 71:

ZMC function block

123

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

ZDS1ZDSRDIR I3P V3P PUFW PUREV STDIRCND en07000035_ansi.vsd

Figure 72:

ZDS function block

2.4

Input and output signals

Table 67:
Signal I3P V3P BLOCK LOVBZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND

Input signals for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition Blocks all trip outputs Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector External directional condition

Table 68:
Signal TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C PHPUND

Output signals for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function block

Description General Trip, issued from any phase or loop Trip signal from phase A Trip signal from phase B Trip signal from phase C General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop Pickup signal from phase A Pickup signal from phase B Pickup signal from phase C Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase or loop

Table 69:
Signal I3P V3P

Input signals for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function block

Description Group connection for current Group connection for voltage

124

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Table 70:
Signal PUFW PUREV STDIRCND

Output signals for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function block

Description Pickup in forward direction Pickup in reverse direction Binary coded directional information per measuring loop

2.5

Setting parameters
Table 71:
Parameter Operation IBase VBase OperationDir

Basic parameter group settings for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function

Range Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse Disabled Enabled 0.50 - 3000.00 Step 1 0.05 Default Enabled 3000 400.00 Forward Unit A kV Description Disable/Enable Operation Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev

OperationPP

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase-Phase loops Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph, forward Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-Ph Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone timer, Ph-Ph Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase-Ground loops Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G, forward

X1FwPP

0.01

30.00

ohm/p

R1PP

0.10 - 1000.00

0.01

5.00

ohm/p

RFltFwdPP X1RvPP

1.00 - 3000.00 0.50 - 3000.00

0.01 0.01

30.00 30.00

ohm/l ohm/p

RFltRevPP Timer tPP

1.00 - 3000.00 Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Enabled 0.50 - 3000.00

0.01 -

30.00 Enabled

ohm/l -

tPP OperationPG

0.001 -

0.000 Enabled

s -

X1FwPG

0.01

30.00

ohm/p

125

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Parameter X1FwPG

Range 0.10 - 1000.00

Step 0.01

Default 5.00

Unit ohm/p

Description Positive seq. resistance for characteristic angle, Ph-G Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle, Ph-G Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G Time delay of trip, Ph-G Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to-ground loops Minimum operate residual current for Phase-Ground loops

X0PG R0PG

0.50 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00

0.01 0.01

100.00 47.00

ohm/p ohm/p

RFltFwdPG X1RvPG

1.00 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00

0.01 0.01

100.00 30.00

ohm/l ohm/p

RFltRevPG Timer tPG

1.00 - 9000.00 Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30

0.01 -

100.00 Enabled

ohm/l -

tPG IMinPUPP

0.001 1

0.000 20

s %IB

IMinPUPG

10 - 30

20

%IB

IMinOpIR

5 - 30

%IB

2.6

Technical data
Table 72:
Function Number of zones Minimum operate current Positive sequence reactance Positive sequence resistance Zero sequence reactance Zero sequence resistance Fault resistance, phase-ground Fault resistance, phase-phase

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS, 21)
Range or value 5 with selectable direction (10-30)% of Ibase (0.50-3000.00) /phase (0.10-1000.00) /phase (0.50-9000.00) /phase (0.50-3000.00) /phase (1.00-9000.00) /loop (1.00-3000.00) /loop Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

126

Distance protection zones, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines (PDIS)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Function Dynamic overreach Impedance zone timers Operate time Reset ratio Reset time

Range or value

Accuracy

<5% at 85 degrees measured with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30 (0.000-60.000) s 24 ms typically 105% typically 30 ms typically 0.5% 10 ms -

127

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Function block name: ZMHx-ANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMHPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3.1

Introduction
The numerical mho line distance protection is a five zone full scheme protection for detection of short circuit and earth faults. The full scheme technique provides protection of power lines with high sensitivity and low requirement on remote end communication. The five zones have fully independent measuring and settings which gives high flexibility for all types of lines. The modern technical solution offers fast operating time down to 3/4 cycles. The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is suitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines and multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping is one, two-, and/or three pole. The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single phase auto-reclosing. Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines, see figure 73.

128

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

jX

Operation area

Operation area

Operation area

No operation area

No operation area

en07000117.vsd

Figure 73:

Load encroachment influence on the offset mho characteristic

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc. The possibility to use the phase-to-earth quadrilateral impedance characteristic together with the mho characteristic increases the possibility to overcome eventual lack of sensitivity of the mho element due to the shaping of the curve at remote end faults. The integrated control and monitoring functions offers effective solutions for operating and monitoring all types of transmission and sub transmission lines.

3.2
3.2.1

Principle of operation
Full scheme measurement The execution of the different fault loops within the REx 6xx are of full scheme type, which means that each fault loop for phase to ground faults and phase to phase faults are executed in parallel. The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compare to switched schemes which mostly uses a phase selector element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements.

3.2.2

Impedance characteristic The distance function consists of five instances. Each instance can be selected to be either forward or reverse with cross polarized mho characteristic alternatively self polarized offset Mho characteristics with reverse offset. The operating characteristic is in accordance to figure 74 below where zone5 is selected offset Mho.

129

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

jX Mho, zone4

Mho, zone3

Zs=0
Mho, zone2

R
Mho, zone1

Zs=Z1
R

Zs=2Z1
Offset mho, zone5

en06000400.vsd

Figure 74:

Mho, offset Mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the Mho characteristic

The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead of crossing the origin as for the offset mho in the left figure 74, which is only valid where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates of the negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown in the right figure 74. The polarisation quantities used for the mho circle is 100% memorized positive sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much with high loading and mild power swing conditions. The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cut off a section of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the setting parameter LoadEnchMode to On. Enabling of the load encroachment function increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the load impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the PHSM function, where also the relevant settings can be found. Information about the load encroachment from the PHS to the zone measurement is given in binary format to the input signal LDCND. 3.2.3 Basic operation characteristics Each impedance zone can be switched On and Off by the setting parameter Operation. Each zone can also be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter DirMode . The operation for phase to ground and phase to phase fault can be individually switched On and Off by the setting parameter OpModePG and OpModePP.

130

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is possible to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to Underreach. In this mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by 20% and the filtering is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring. If the ReachMode is set to Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced. The latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3 elements and reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either because of less likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally. The offset mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a directional line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from the directional element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal to the input DIRCND. The zone reach for phase to ground fault and phase to phase fault is set individually in polar coordinates. The impedance is set by the parameters ZPG and ZPP and the corresponding angles by the parameters ZAngPG and ZAngPP. Compensation for ground return path for faults involving ground is done by setting the parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the ground return path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPG. KNMag and KNAng are defined according to equation 21 and equation 22.

KNMag =

Z0-Z1 3 Z1
(Equation 21)

Z 0 Z1 KNAng = ( ZAngPG ) ang 3 Z1

(Equation 22)

Where: Z0 Z1 ZAngP G is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in ohm/phase is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in ohm/phase line angle of the positive line impedance

The phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed individually by setting the parameter tPG and tPP respectively. To release the time delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPG and OpModetPP, has to be set to On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation. The function can be blocked in the following ways:

131

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based algorithm activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the high speed part of the algorithm for high SIR values activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals activating the input BLKPG blocks the phase-to-ground fault loop outputs activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs

The activation of signal BLKZ can either be by external fuse failure function or from the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In both cases the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the input BLKZ in the Mho distance function block (ZMHODIS 21). The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been detected by the Mho supervision logic to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be connected to the BLKZMTD output signal at the Mho supervision function. At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built in resonance circuit in the CVT which reduce the secondary voltage for a while. The input BLKHSIR shall be connected to the output signal HSIR on the Mho supervision logic for increasing of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when permissive underreach scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach. 3.2.4 Theory for operation The Mho algorithm is based on phase comparison of a operating phasor and a polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference phasor by more than 90 degrees, the function will operate and give a trip output. Phase-to-phase fault Mho The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as figure 75The condition for deriving the angle is according to equation 23.

= ang (V AB I AB ZPP ) ang (V po

(Equation 23)

132

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

where: the voltage vector difference between phases A and B

V AB
the current vector difference between phases A and B

I AB
ZPP Vpol the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault is the polarizing voltage

The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage (VAB for phase A to B fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of the Mho circle for close in faults. Operation occurs if 90270

IABX

Vcomp=VAB - IAB ZPP

I AB ZPP

V pol
V AB

IABR

en07000109_ansi.vsd

Figure 75:

Simplified mho characteristic and vectordiagram for phase A to B fault.

133

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Offset Mho The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180. The condition for operation at phase to phase fault is that the angle between the two compensated voltages Vcomp1 and Vcomp2 is greater or equal to 90 figure 76. The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle. The angle for A to B fault can be defined according to equation 24.

= arg

V -(-IAB ZRevPP) V -IAB ZPP

(Equation 24)

where: = is the VAB voltage

V
ZRevPP = is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault in reverse direction

134

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

IABjX

V comp1 = VAB - IAB ZPP

I AB ZPP

Vcomp2 = V

=IFZF =VAB

IABR

- I AB

Z Re vPP
en07000110_ansi.vsd

Figure 76:

Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase A to B fault.

For operation the angle should be 90<<270. Offset Mho, forward direction When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria beside the one for offset mho equation 25 is introdced, that is the angle between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and fourth quadrant. See figure 77 below. So the condition for operation will be

90 < < 270

(Equation 25)

and

ArgDir < < ArgNegR e s

(Equation 26)

135

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

where ArgDir ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant is calculated according to equation 24

The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the mho directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See chapter Mho directional element for information about the mho directionalety element.

IABjX

ZPP

VAB

ArgNegRes

IAB
ArgDir

en07000111_ansi

Figure 77:

Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase A to B fault.

Offset Mho, reverse direction The operation area for offset Mho in reverse direction is according to figure 78. The operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180. The conditions for operation are

90 < < 270

(Equation 27)

136

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

and

180 ArgDir < < ArgNeg Re s + 180

(Equation 28)

The is derived according to equation 24 for the mho circle and is the angle between the voltage and current.

X ZPP

ArgNegRes

IAB

ArgDir
VAB

ZRevPP
en06000469_ansi.eps

Figure 78:

Operation characteristice for reverse phase Aphase B fault.

Phase-to-ground fault Mho The measuring of ground faults uses ground return compensation applied in a conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence from the ground return path. For a ground fault in phase L1A, we can derive the compensation voltage Vcomp see figure 79 as

137

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Vcomp = V

pol

I A Z loop
(Equation 29)

where Vpol Zloop is the polarizing voltage (memorized VA for Phase A to ground fault) is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as

Z1+ZN = Z 1 1 + KN
where Z1 KN

positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase) zero sequence compensator factor

The angle between the Vcomp and the polarize voltage Vpol for a A to ground fault is

= arg V A I A + IN KN ZPE arg(Vp

(Equation 30)

where: VA IA IN = phase voltage in faulty phase A = phase current in faulty phase A = zero sequence current in faulty phase A (3I0)

KN
Vpol

Z0-Z1 the setting parameter for the zero swquence compensation consisting of the magni3 Z1 tude KN and the angle KNAng.

= 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage VA

It is to be noted that the angle KNAng is the difference angle between the positive sequence impedance ZPE and the impedance ZN for the ground return path see figure 79

138

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

IAX

KNAng IAZN

V comp

I A Z loop
IAZPE Vpol f IA (Ref) IAR

en06000472_ansi.vsd

Figure 79:

Simplified offset mho characteristic and vectordiagram for phase A to ground fault.

Operation occurs if

90 270
(Equation 31)

Offset Mho The characteristic for offset mho at ground fault is a circle containing the two vectors from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the settting reach for the positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The vector ZPE in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPE+180 The condition for operation at phase to ground fault is that the angle between the two compensated voltages Vcomp1 and Vcomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see 80. The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle. The angle for A to ground fault can be defined as

= arg
= arg

UL1-(- IL1 Z Re vPE )

UL1- IL1L ZPE

VL1-(- IL1 Z Re vPE ) VL1- IL1L ZPE

(Equation 32)

139

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

where is the phase A phase voltage

VA

IABjX

V comp1 = VA - I A ZPE

IA ZPE

VA

V comp2 = VA - (-IA ZRevPE)

I AB R

- IA Z RevPe
en 06000465 _ansi. vsd

Figure 80:

Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase A to B fault.

Operation occurs if

90 270
(Equation 33)

Offset Mho, forward direction In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset mho will introduce an extra criteria for operation. Beside the basic criteria for offset mho according to equations 32 and 33, also the criteria that the angle between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. See figure 81. The condition for operation will hereby be 90<<270 and ArgDir<<ArgNegRes.

140

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

where ArgDir ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant. is calculated according to equation 32

IA jX

VA

ArgNegRes

IA
ArgDir

IAR

en 06000466 _ansi.vsd

Figure 81:

Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for A to ground fault.

Offset mho, reverse direction In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in reverse direction will introduce an extra criteria for operation compare to the normal offset Mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the fault current shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The operation area in second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180 -ArgDir and in fourth quadrant ArgNegRes+180, see figure 82 The conditions for operation of offset Mho in reverse direction for A to ground fault will be 90<<270 and 180-Argdir<<ArgNegRes+180. The is derived according to equation 32 for the offset Mho circle and is the angle between the voltage and current.

141

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X ZPE

ArgNegRes

IL1 ArgDir UL1 ZRevPE R

en06000470.eps

142

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X ZPE

ArgNegRes

IA ArgDir VA ZRevPE R

en06000470_ansi.eps

Figure 82:

Simplified characteristic for offset Mho in reverse direction for A to ground fault.

3.3

Function block
ZMH1ZMHPDIS_21 I3P V3P CURR_INP VOLT_INP POL_VOLT BLOCK BLKZ BLKZMTD BLKHSIR BLKTRIP BLKPG BLKPP DIRCND PHSEL LDCND TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C TRPE TRPP PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C PHG_FLT PHPH_FLT

en06000423_ansi.vsd

Figure 83:

ZMH function block

143

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

3.4

Input and output signals

Table 73:
Signal I3P V3P CURR_INP VOLT_INP POL_VOLT BLOCK BLKZ BLKZMTD BLKHSIR BLKTRIP BLKPG BLKPP DIRCND PHSEL LDCND

Input signals for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function block

Description Connection for current sample signals Connection for voltage sample signals Connection for current signals Connection for voltage signals Connection for polarizing voltage Block of function Block due to fuse failure Block signal for blocking of time domaine function Blocks time domain function at high SIR Blocks all operate output signals Blocks phase-to-earth operation Blocks phase-to-phase operation External directional condition Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector External load condition (loop enabler)

Table 74:
Signal TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C TRPE TRPP PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C PHG_FLT PHPH_FLT

Output signals for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function block

Description Trip General Trip phase A Trip phase B Trip phase C Trip phase-to-ground Trip phase-to-phase Pickup General Pickup phase A Pickup phase B Pickup phase C Pickup phase-to-ground Pickup phase-to-phase

144

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

3.5

Setting parameters
Table 75:
Parameter Operation IBase VBase DirMode

Basic parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function

Range Disabled ON 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Disabled Offset Forward Reverse Disabled ON OverReach Underreach Disabled ON 0.005 - 3000.000 Step 1 0.05 Default ON 3000 400.00 Forward Unit A kV Description Operation Enable/Disable Base current Base voltage Direction mode

LoadEnchMode ReachMode OpModePG

Off OverReach ON

Load enchroachment mode Off/On Reach mode Over/Underreach Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase-Ground loops Positive sequence impedance setting for Phase-Ground loop Angle for positive sequence line impedance for Phase-Ground loop Magnitud of ground return compensation factor KN Angle for earth return compensation factor KN Reverse reach of the phase to ground loop(magnitude) Delay time for operation of phase to ground elements Minimum operation phase to ground current Operation mode Disable/Enable of Phase-Phase loops

ZPG

0.001

30.000

ohm/p

ZAngPG

10 - 90

80

Deg

KN

0.00 - 3.00

0.01

0.80

KNAng ZRevPG

-180 - 180 0.005 - 3000.000

1 0.001

-15 30.000

Deg ohm/p

tPG

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

IMinPUPG OpModePP

10 - 30 Disabled ON

1 -

20 ON

%IB -

145

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Parameter ZPP

Range 0.005 - 3000.000

Step 0.001

Default 30.000

Unit ohm/p

Description Impedance setting reach for phase to phase elements Angle for positive sequence line impedance for Phase-Phase elements Reverse reach of the phase to phase loop(magnitude) Delay time for operation of phase to phase Minimum operation phase to phase current

ZAngPP

10 - 90

85

Deg

ZRevPP

0.005 - 3000.000

0.001

30.000

ohm/p

tPP IMinPUPP

0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30

0.001 1

0.000 20

s %UB

Table 76:
Parameter OffsetMhoDir

Advanced parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function

Range Non-directional Forward Reverse Disabled ON Disabled ON Step Default Non-directional Unit Description Direction mode for offset mho Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-ph

OpModetPG

ON

OpModetPP

ON

Table 77:
Parameter IBase VBase PilotMode Zreach IMinOp

Basic parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Disabled Enabled 0.1 - 3000.0 10 - 30 Step 1 0.05 0.1 1 Default 3000 400.00 Off 38.0 20 Unit A kV ohm %IB Description Base value for current measurement Base value for voltage measurement Pilot mode Off/On Line impedance Minimum operating current for SIR measurement

146

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Table 78:
Parameter DeltaI

Advanced parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function

Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 10 Unit %IB Description Current change level in %IB for fault inception detection Zero seq current change level in % of IB Voltage change level in %UB for fault inception detection Zero seq voltage change level in % of UB Settable level for source impedance ratio

Delta3I0 DeltaU

0 - 200 0 - 100

1 1

10 5

%IB %VB

Delta3U0 SIRLevel

0 - 100 5 - 15

1 1

5 10

%VB -

3.6

Technical data
Table 79:
Function Number of zones with selectable directions Minimum operate current Positive sequence impedance, phaseground loop Positive sequence impedance angle, phaseground loop Reverse reach, phaseground loop (Magnitude) Impedance reach for phasephase elements Angle for positive sequence impedance, phasephase elements Reverse reach of phasephase loop Magnitude of ground return compensation factor KN Angle for ground compensation factor KN Dynamic overreach Timers Operate time Reset ratio Reset time

Full-scheme distance protection, Mho characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Range or value 5 with selectable direction (1030)% of IBase (0.0053000.000) /phase (1090) degrees (0.0053000.000) /phase (0.0053000.000) /phase (1090) degrees Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

(0.0053000.000) /phase (0.003.00) (-180180) degrees <5% at 85 degrees measured with CVTs and 0.5<SIR<30 (0.000-60.000) s 15 ms typically (with static outputs) 105% typically 30 ms typically 0.5% 10 ms -

147

Mho impedance supervision logic

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

4
4.1

Mho impedance supervision logic

Introduction
The Mho impedance supervision logic includes features for fault inception detection and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss of potential logic as well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme. The Mho Impedance Supervision logic can mainly be decomposed in two different parts: 1. A fault inception detection logic 2. High SIR detection logic

4.2
4.2.1

Principle of operation
Fault inception detection The aim for the fault inception detector is to very fast detect that a fault has occurred on the system. The fault inception detection detects instantaneous changes in any phase currents or zero sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding phase voltage or zero sequence voltage. If the change of any phase current and corresponding phase voltage or 3U0 and 3I0 exceeds the setting parameters DeltaI and DeltaU respectively Delta3U0 and Delta3I0 and the input signal BLOCK is not activated, the ouput signal FLTDET is activated indicating that a system fault has occoured. If the setting pilotMode is set to On in Blocking scheme and the fault inception function has detected a system fault, a block signal BLKCHST will be issued and send to remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to be fulfilled for sending the BLKCHST signal: 1. The setting parameter pilotMode has to be set to On 2. The breaker has to be closed, i.e. the input signal CBOPEN has to be deactivated 3. A reverse fault should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not blocked, i.e. input signal REVSTART is activated and input signal BLOCKCS is not activated OR A fault inception is detected If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the BLKCHST signal, the function will issue a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote end. The criteria that have to be fulfilled for this are: 1. The function has to be in pilot mode, i.e. the setting parameter pilotMode has to be set to On 2. The carrier send signal should be blocked, i.e. input signal BLOCKCS is On and,

148

Mho impedance supervision logic

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

3. A reverse fault should not have been detected while the carrier send signal was not blocked, i.e.input signals REVSTART and BLOCKCS is not activated. The function has a built in loss of voltage detection based on the evaluation of the change in phase voltage or the change in zero sequence voltage (3U0). It operates if the change in phase voltages exceeds the setting dULevel or 3U0 exceeds the setting dU0Level. If loss of voltage is detected, but not a fault inception, the distance protection function will be blocked. This is also the case if a fuse failure is detected by the external fuse failure function and activate the input FUSEFAIL. Those blocks are generated by activating the output BLKZ, which shall be connected to the input BLKZ on the distance Mho function block. During fault inception a lot of transients will be developed which in turn might cause the distance function to overreach. The Mho supervision logic will increase the filtering during the most transient period of the fault. This is done by activating the output BLKZMD, which shall be connected to the input BLKZMTD on mho distance function block. High SIR detection High SIR values increases the likelihood that CVT will introduce a prolonged and distorted transient, increasing the risk for overreach of the distance function. The SIR function calculates the SIR value as the source impedance divided by the setting Zreach and activates the output signal HSIR if the calculated value for any of the six basic shunt faults exceed the setting parameter SIRLevel.The HSIR signal is intended to block the delta based mho impedance function.

4.3

Function block
ZSM1ZSMGAPC I3P BLKZMTD U3P BLKCHST BLOCK CHSTOP REVSTART HSIR BLOCKCS CBOPEN en06000426.vsd

ZSM1ZSMGAPC I3P V3P BLOCK REVSTART BLOCKCS CBOPEN BLKZMTD BLKCHST CHSTOP HSIR

en06000426_ansi.vsd

Figure 84:

ZSM1 function block

149

Mho impedance supervision logic

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

4.4

Input and output signals

Table 80:
Signal I3P V3P BLOCK REVSTART BLOCKCS CBOPEN

Input signals for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function block

Description Three phase current samples and DFT magnitude Three phase phase-neutral voltage samples and DFT magnitude Block of the function Indication of reverse start Blocks the blocking carrier signal to remote end Indicates that the breaker is open

Table 81:
Signal BLKZMTD BLKCHST CHSTOP HSIR

Output signals for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function block

Description Block signal for blocking of time domained mho Blocking signal to remote end to block overreaching zone Stops the blocking signal to remote end Indication of source impedance ratio above set limit

4.5

Setting parameters
Table 82:
Parameter IBase VBase PilotMode Zreach IMinOp

Basic parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Disabled Enabled 0.1 - 3000.0 10 - 30 Step 1 0.05 0.1 1 Default 3000 400.00 Off 38.0 20 Unit A kV ohm %IB Description Base value for current measurement Base value for voltage measurement Pilot mode Off/On Line impedance Minimum operating current for SIR measurement

150

Mho impedance supervision logic

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Table 83:
Parameter DeltaI

Advanced parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function

Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 10 Unit %IB Description Current change level in %IB for fault inception detection Zero seq current change level in % of IB Voltage change level in %VB for fault inception detection Zero seq voltage change level in % of VB Settable level for source impedance ratio

Delta3I0 DeltaV

0 - 200 0 - 100

1 1

10 5

%IB %UB

Delta3V0 SIRLevel

0 - 100 5 - 15

1 1

5 10

%UB -

151

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Function block name: PHSANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: FDPSPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Z<phs

5.1

Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement of the power system is reduced e.g. difficulties to get permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurately and reliable classify the different types of fault so that single pole tripping and auto-reclosing can be used plays an important roll in this matter. The phase selection function is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type. The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with the load. The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.

5.2

Principle of operation
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase-selection measuring elements is the same as for the distance-measuring function (see section 1 "Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)"). The "phase selection" includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults. The difference, compared to the zone measuring elements, is in the combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of faults. The characteristic is basically non-directional, but the PHS function uses information from the directional function block to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or reverse. The directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line" in the figures below.

The pickup condition PHSELZ is essentially based on the following criteria: 1. Residual current criteria, i.e. separation of faults with and without ground connection 2. Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic

152

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

3. Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by selecting a high setting. The current pickup condition PHSELI is based on the following criteria: 1. Residual current criteria 2. No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by the minimum operating current limits. 3. Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting. The PHSELI-output described above is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the distance zones direction function block. There are still output from the function that indicate whether a pickup is in forward or reverse direction, or in between those (e.g. FWD_A and REV_A, and STNDL1). These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional function and the impedance setting of the phase selection function. Their operate characteristics are illustrated in figure 85.

60 R 60

60 R 60

Non-directional (ND)

Forward (FWD)

Reverse (REV)
en05000668_ansi.vsd

Figure 85:

Characteristic for non-directional, forward and reverse operation of PHS

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating characteristic, (for more information, refer to section 5.2.4 "Load encroachment"). The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming from the directionality block. It shall be connected to the STDIR output on the ZD block. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the distance measuring zones, i.e. the ZM block. The code built up for the directionality is as follows: STDIR=FWD_A*1+FWD_B*4+FWD_C*16+FWD_AB*64+FWD_BC*256+FWD_CA*102 4+REV_A*2+REV_B*8+REV_C*32+REV_AB*128+REV_BC*512+REV_CA*2048

153

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have pickup in forward direction in phase A. If the binary code is 5 then we have pickup in forward direction in phase A and B etc. The PHSEL (Z or I) output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the PHSEL input on the ZM blocks. The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows: PHSEL = AG*1+BG*2+CG*4+AB*8+BC*16+CA*32 5.2.1 Phase-to-ground fault
ZPHSn =
VA( B , C ) IA( B , C )
(Equation 34)

where: n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

The characteristic for the PHS function at phase to ground fault is according to figure 86. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first quadrant of 60. The resistance RN and reactance XN is the impedance in the ground return path defined according to equation 35 and equation 36.

RN =

R0 R1 3
(Equation 35)

XN =

X 0 X1 3
(Equation 36)

154

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X (ohm/loop) Kr(X1+XN)
RFItRevPG RFItFwdPG

X1+XN
RFItFwdPG

60 deg

RFItRevPG

R (Ohm/loop) X1+XN Kr =

60 deg 1 tan(60 deg)

RFItRevPG

RFItFwdPG

Kr(X1+XN)
en06000396_ansi.vsd

Figure 86:

Characteristic of PHS for phase to ground fault (setting parameters in italic), ohm/loop domain

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to equation 37 and equation 38.
3 I 0 0.5 IM in O p
(Equation 37)

3 I0

3I 0 Enable _ PG 100

Iph max
(Equation 38)

where: IMinOp 3I0Enable_PG Iphmax is the minimum operation current for forward zones, is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the ph-G fault loops (in %) and is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

155

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

5.2.2

Phase-to-phase fault For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured by the PHS function will be according to equation 39.

ZPHS =

Vm Vn 2 In
(Equation 39)

The operation characteristic is shown in figure 87.

X (ohm/phase) 0.5RFltRevPP KrX1 0.5RFltFwdPP

X1 0.5RFltFwdPP 60 deg

R (ohm/phase) 60 deg 0.5RFltRevPP X1 Kr = 1 tan(60 deg)

KrX1 0.5RFltRevPP 0.5RFltFwdPP

en05000670_ansi.vsd

Figure 87:

The operation characteristic for PHS at phase-to-phase fault (setting parameters in Italic), ohm/phase domain

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-ground fault, there are current conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are according to equation 40 or equation 41.

156

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

3I 0 < 3I 0Enable _ PG
(Equation 40)

3I 0 < 3I 0BLK _ PP
(Equation 41)

where: 3I0Enable_P is 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-ground measuring loops, G 3I0BLK_PP Iphmax is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

5.2.3

Three phase faults The operation condition for three phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase fault i.e. equation 39, equation 40 and equation 41 are used to release the operation of the function. However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all directions. At the same time the apparent impedance is rotated 30 degrees, counter-clockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 88.

157

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X (ohm/phase) 4 X1 3 90 deg

0.5RFltFwdPPK3 X1K3
4 RFltFwdPP 6

R (ohm/phase) 0.5RFltRevPPK3 K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)

30 deg

en05000671_ansi.vsd

Figure 88: 5.2.4

The characteristic of PHS for three phase fault (setting parameters in italic)

Load encroachment Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting. The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 89. As illustrated, the resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.

158

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

RLdFwd LdAngle LdAngle R

LdAngle RLdRev

LdAngle

en05000196_ansi.vsd

Figure 89:

Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function depending on the operation characteristic is dependent on the chosen operation mode of the PHS function. When selection mode is PHSELZ, the characteristic for the PHS (and also zone measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment characteristic (see figure 90, left illustration). When PHSELI is selected the operation characteristic will be as the right illustration in figure 90. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current and the distance measuring zones.

159

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

PHSELZ

PHSELI
en05000197_ansi.vsd

Figure 90:

Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode when load encroachment is activated

When the "phase selection" is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the resultant operate characteristic could look something like in figure 91. The figure shows a distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operate area is highlighted in black.

160

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X "Phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment characteristic R Directional line

en05000673.vsd

Figure 91:

Operation characteristic in forward direction when load encroachment is enabled

Figure 91 is valid for phase-to-ground as well as phase-to-phase faults. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the "quadrilateral" phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the operate area is transformed according to figure 92. Notice in particular what happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" characteristic. Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90 degrees instead of the original 60 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.

161

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X (ohm/phase) Phase selection Quadrilateral zone

Distance measuring zone

R (ohm/phase)

en05000674.vsd

Figure 92:

Operation characteristic for PHS in forward direction for three-phase fault, ohm/phase domain

5.2.5

Minimum operate currents The operation of the PHS function is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold values. The phase-to-ground loop n is blocked if In<IMinPUPG, where In is the RMS value of the current in phase n (A or B or C). The phase-to-phase loop mn is blocked if (2In<IMinOpPPIMinPUPP).

5.2.6

Simplified logic diagrams Figure 93 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and logic circuits, when only a phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase measurement is available within the terminal.

162

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Load encroachment block IA IMinOpPG & 3I0 3I0Enable_PG/100 Iphmax BLOCK IA > 0.5 IMinOpPP
AND AND 0 15ms

IRELPG STPG PHSELI

Bool to integer STPP IRELPP

AND

&
10ms 0 0 20ms

0 15ms

or 3I0 < INBlockPP Iphmax

en05000249_ansi.vsd

Figure 93:

Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground operating conditions (residual current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A PHSEL output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 93. This signal can be configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the ph-ph and ph-G zone measuring elements and their phase related pickup and tripping signals. Figure 94 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective signals PHS--NDIR_A (B or C). Signals ZMn and ZMmn (m and n change between A, B and C according to the phase) represent the fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element (i.e. within the "quadrilateral" characteristic.

163

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

INDIR_A INDIR_B INDIR_C

OR IRELPG ZMA ZMB ZMC ZMAB ZMBC3 ZMCA IRELPP AND OR AND AND OR

0 15ms

PHSEL_G

0 15ms

PHSEL_A

0 15ms

PHSEL_B

AND AND AND

OR INDIR_AB INDIR_BC INDIR_CA

0 15ms

PHSEL_C

en00000545_ansi.vsd

Figure 94:

Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is presented schematically in figure 96 and figure 95. The directional criteria appears as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network configurations. Signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW (figure 96) represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV (figure 95) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor. Figure 95 presents additionally a composition of a PHSELZ output signal, which is created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured to PHSEL functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the ph-ph and ph-G zone measuring elements and their phase related pickup and tripping signals.

164

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

INDIR_A DRV_A INDIR_AB DRV_AB INDIR_CA DRV_CA INDIR_B DRV_B INDIR_AB AND INDIR_BC DRV_BC INDIR_C DRV_C INDIR_BC AND INDIR_CA AND OR
0 15ms

AND REV_A

AND

OR

0 15ms

AND OR AND REV_B REV_G

0 15ms

OR

0 15ms

AND

AND

INDIR_A INDIR_B INDIR_C INDIR_AB INDIR_BC INDIR_CA

Bool to integer

PHSELZ

REV_C

en00000546_ansi.vsd

Figure 95:

Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

165

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

AND INDIR_A DFW_A INDIR_AB DFW_AB INDIR_CA DFW_CA INDIR_B DFW_B INDIR_AB AND INDIR_BC DFW_BC INDIR_C DFW_C INDIR_BC AND INDIR_CA AND OR AND
0 15ms

AND AND AND OR AND AND OR AND AND OR AND AND OR

15ms 0 0 15ms 0 15ms

OR

15ms 0

0 15ms 0 15ms

STFW1PH STFWL1

STFWPE

STFWL2

0 15ms

STFW2PH

AND

AND
0 15ms

STFWL3

STFW3PH

en05000201_ansi.vsd

Figure 96:

Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

166

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

5.3

Function block
PHS1FDPSPDIS_21 I3P V3P BLOCK DIRCND TRIP RI FWD_A FWD_B FWD_C FWD_G REV_A REV_B REV_C REV_G NDIR_A NDIR_B NDIR_C NDIR_G FWD_1PH FWD_2PH FWD_3PH PHG_FLT PHPH_FLT PHSELZ PHSELI en06000258_ansi.vsd

Figure 97:

PHS function block

5.4

Input and output signals

Table 84:
Signal I3P V3P BLOCK DIRCND

Input signals for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function External directional condition

Table 85:
Signal FWD_A FWD_B FWD_C FWD_G REV_A REV_B REV_C REV_G NDIR_A NDIR_B

Output signals for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function block

Description Fault detected in phaseA - forward direction Fault detected in phase B - forward direction Fault detected in phase C - forward direction Ground fault detected in forward direction Fault detected in phase A- reverse direction Fault detected in phase B - reverse direction Fault detected in phase C - reverse direction Ground fault detected in reverse direction Non directional fault detected in Phase A Non directional fault detected in Phase B

167

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Signal NDIR_C NDIR_G FWD_1PH FWD_2PH FWD_3PH PHG_FLT PHPH_FLT PHSELZ

Description Non directional fault detected in Phase C Non directional phase-to-ground fault detected Single phase-to-ground fault in forward direction Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction Three phase fault in forward direction Release condition to enable phase-ground measuring elements Release condition to enable phase-phase measuring elements Composite data containing faulted phase loop selections based on impedance loop measurement, current measurement and load emcrochment for input to distance protection PHSELCT Composite data containing faulted phase loop selections based on current measurement and load emcrochment for input to distance protection PHSELCT

PHSELI

5.5

Setting parameters
Table 86:
Parameter IBase 3I0BLK_PP

Basic parameter group settings for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function

Range 1 - 99999 10 - 100 Step 1 1 Default 3000 40 Unit A %IPh Description Base current for current settings 3I0 limit for disabling phase-to-phase measuring loops 3I0 pickup for releasing phase-to-ground measuring loops Forward resistive reach for the load impedance area Reverse resistive reach for the load impedance area Load angle determining the load impedance area Positive sequence reactance reach Zero sequence reactance reach Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward

3I0Enable_PG

10 - 100

20

%IPh

RLdFwd

1.00 - 3000.00

0.01

80.00

ohm/p

RldRev

1.00 - 3000.00

0.01

80.00

ohm/p

LdAngle X1 X0 RFltFwdPP

5 - 70 0.50 - 3000.00 0.50 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00

1 0.01 0.01 0.01

30 40.00 120.00 30.00

Deg ohm/p ohm/p ohm/l

168

Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Parameter RFltRevPP RFltFwdPG RFltRevPG IMinPUPP

Range 0.50 - 3000.00 1.00 - 9000.00 1.00 - 9000.00 5 - 30

Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 1

Default 30.00 100.00 100.00 10

Unit ohm/l ohm/l ohm/l %IB

Description Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to-ground loops

IMinPUPG

5 - 30

%IB

5.6

Technical data
Table 87:
Function Minimum operate current Reactive reach, positive sequence, forward and reverse Resistive reach, positive sequence Reactive reach, zero sequence, forward and reverse Resistive reach, zero sequence Fault resistance, phase-ground faults, forward and reverse Fault resistance, phase-phase faults, forward and reverse Load encroachment criteria: Load resistance, forward and reverse Safety load impedance angle Reset ratio 105% typically (1.003000.00) /phase (5-70) degrees

Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Range or value (5-30)% of Ibase (0.503000.00) /phase (0.101000.00) /phase (0.509000.00) /phase (0.503000.00) /phase (1.009000.00) /loop (0.503000.00) /loop Accuracy 1.0% of In 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

169

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Function block name: ZMMx-ANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMMPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

6.1

Introduction
The line distance protection is a five zone protection with three fault loops for phase to ground fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths. The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines. The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in applications with single phase auto-reclosing. Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to ground faults on heavily loaded power lines. The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.

6.2
6.2.1

Principle of operation
Full scheme measurement The different fault loops within the IED 670 are operating in parallel in the same principle as a full scheme measurement.. Figure 98 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five, impedance-measuring zones l.

170

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

A-G

B-G

C-G

Zone 1

A-G

B-G

C-G

Zone 2

A-G

B-G

C-G

Zone 3

A-G

B-G

C-G

Zone 4

A-G

B-G

C-G

Zone 5

en07000080_ansi.vsd

Figure 98: 6.2.2

The different measuring loops at line-ground fault and phase-phase fault.

Impedance characteristic The distance measuring zone include three impedance measuring loops; one fault loop for each phase. The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 99. The characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach.

171

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X RFPG R1+Rn RFPG

Xn =
X1+Xn

X0 X1 3

Rn = f N f N

R0 R1 3

R (Ohm/loop)

RFPG

RFPG

X1+Xn

RFPG

R1+Rn

RFPG
en05000661_ansi.vsd

Figure 99:

Characteristic for the phase-to-ground measuring loops, ohm/loop domain.

The fault loop reach may also be presented as in figure 100.

IA VA

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-ground element

Phase-to-ground fault in phase A

RFPG (Arc + tower resistance) 0 IN (R0-R1)/3 + j (X0-X1)/3 )

en06000412_ansi.vsd

Figure 100: Fault loop model

172

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The R1 and jX1 in figure 100 represents the positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location. The RFPG is presented in order to convey the fault resistance reach. The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 101. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it is conform for forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.

Non-directional

Forward

Reverse

en05000182.vsd

Figure 101: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone 6.2.3 Minimum operating current The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values. The phase-to-ground loop AG (BG or CG) is blocked if IA (IB or IC) < IMinPUPG. For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phase-to-ground loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIR, regardless of the phase currents. IA (IB or IC) is the RMS value of the current in phase IA (IB or IC). IN is the RMS value of the vector sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0.

Note!
Both current limits IMinPUPG and IMinOpIR are automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, i.e. OperationDir=Reverse. 6.2.4 Measuring principles Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits.

173

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase A, B or C. The calculation of the apparant impedances at phase-to-ground fault follow equation 42 The return compensation applies in a conventional manner.

Z app =

VA IA + I N KN
(Equation 42)

Where: VA, IA and IN KN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED is defined as:

KN =

X0 - X1 3X1

where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point to the fault on the protected line.

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same reach along the line for all types of faults. The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X. The formula given in equation 42 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications. When load is considered in the case of single line to ground fault, conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670 has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications. Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (V), current (I), and changes in current between samples (I) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter. The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop impedance according to equation 43,

V = R i +

0 t
(Equation 43)

174

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

in complex notation, or:

Re (V ) = R Re (I ) +

X 0

Re (I ) t
(Equation 44)

Im (V ) = R Im (I ) +

X 0

Im (I ) t
(Equation 45)

with
0 = 2 f 0
(Equation 46)

where: Re Im f0 designates the real component of current and voltage, designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:

Rm =

Im (V) Re (I) Re (V) lm(I) Re (I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I)

(Equation 47)

X m = 0 t

Re (V) lm(I) lm(V ) Re (I) Re (I) lm(I) lm(I) Re (I)

(Equation 48)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.

175

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point. 6.2.5 Directional lines The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDM. Equation 49 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-ground fault.

AngDir < Ang

0.85 V 1A + 0.15 V 1 AM IA

< AngNeg Re s
(Equation 49)

where: AngDir AngNegRes V1A V1AM IA is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 102. is positive sequence phase voltage in phase A is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A is phase current in phase A

The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively (see figure 102) and it should not be changed unless system studies have shown the necessity. The ZDM gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIRCND depending on the evaluation where FWD_A=1 adds 1, REV_A=1 adds 2, FWD_B=1 adds 4 etc.

176

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

AngNegRes

AngDir

en05000722_ansi.vsd

Figure 102: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees. The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults. For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination. The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After 100 ms, the following occurs: If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in. - If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. - If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation. If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

177

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

6.2.6

Simplified logic diagrams Distance protection zones The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring: phase-to-ground loops. Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG. Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical signal for each separate measuring loop: Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above. Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 103.

The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCNDZ. The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on the DIRCND input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall be configured to the DIRCND output on the ZDM block.

PHSEL NDIR_A NDIR_B NDIR_C OR NDIR_G

AG BG CG

AND AND AND

OR LOVBZ BLOCK OR AND PHPUND BLK

en06000408_ansi.vsd

Figure 103: Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-directional mode, is presented in figure 104.

178

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

NDIR_A AND NDIR_B AND NDIR_C AND AND

0 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 15 ms 0 15 ms

PU_A PU_B PU_C

PICKUP

OR BLK

en06000409_ansi.vsd

Figure 104: Composition of pickup signals in non-directional operating mode Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 105.

NDIR_A DIR_A NDIR_B DIR_B NDIR_C DIR_C

AND OR AND
0 15 ms

&

PU_2MPG

AND

&

PU_A

&

0 15 ms

PU_B

& BLK

0 15 ms

PU_C

OR

&

0 15 ms

PICKUP

en07000081_ansi.vsd

Figure 105: Composition of pickup signals in directional operating mode Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in figure 106.

179

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Timer tPG=Enable PUZMPG BLKTR AND 0-tPG 0 AND 0 15 ms TRIP

PU_A

AND

TR_A

PU_B

AND

TR_B

PU_C

AND

TR_C

en07000082_ansi.vsd

Figure 106: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

6.3

Function block
ZMM1ZMMPDIS_21 I3P V3P BLOCK BLKZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C PHPUND en06000454_ansi.vsd

Figure 107: ZMM function block

6.4

Input and output signals

Table 88:
Signal I3P V3P

Input signals for the ZMMPDIS_21 (ZMM1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input

180

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Signal BLOCK BLKZ BLKTR PHSEL DIRCND

Description Block of function Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition Blocks all trip outputs Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase selector External directional condition

Table 89:
Signal TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C PICKUP PU_A PU_B PU_C PHPUND

Output signals for the ZMMPDIS_21 (ZMM1-) function block

Description General Trip, issued from any phase or loop Trip signal from phase A Trip signal from phase B Trip signal from phase C General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop Pickup signal from phase A Pickup signal from phase B Pickup signal from phase C Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase or loop

6.5

Setting parameters
Table 90:
Parameter Operation IBase Vbase OperationDir

Basic parameter group settings for the ZMMPDIS_21 (ZMM1-) function

Range Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse 0.50 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 Step 1 0.05 Default Enabled 3000 400.00 Forward Unit A kV Description Disable/Enable Operation Base current, i.e. rated current Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage Operation mode of directionality NonDir / Forw / Rev

X1 R1

0.01 0.01

30.00 5.00

ohm/p ohm/p

Positive sequence reactance reach Positive seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle Zero sequence reactance reach Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic angle

X0 R0

0.50 - 9000.00 0.50 - 3000.00

0.01 0.01

100.00 15.00

ohm/p ohm/p

181

Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Parameter RFPG Timer tPG

Range 1.00 - 9000.00 Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000 10 - 30

Step 0.01 -

Default 100.00 Enabled

Unit ohm/l -

Description Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer, Ph-G Time delay of trip, Ph-G Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to-ground loops Minimum operate residual current for Phase-Ground loops

tPG IMinPUPG

0.001 1

0.000 20

s %IB

IMinOpIR

5 - 30

%IB

6.6

Technical data
Table 91:
Function Number of zones Minimum operate current Positive sequence reactance Positive sequence resistance Zero sequence reactance Zero sequence resistance Fault resistance, phase-ground

Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for mho

Range or value 5 with selectable direction (10-30)% of Ibase (0.50-3000.00) /phase (0.10-1000.00) /phase (0.50-9000.00) /phase (0.50-3000.00) /phase (1.00-9000.00) /loop Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy 2.0 degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Dynamic overreach Impedance zone timers Operate time Reset ratio Reset time

<5% at 85 degrees measured with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30 (0.000-60.000) s 24 ms typically 105% typically 30 ms typically 0.5% 10 ms -

182

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Function block name: PHMx ANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: FMPSPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

7.1

Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement of the power system is reduced e.g. difficulties to get permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurate and reliable classifying the different types of fault so that single pole tripping and auto-reclosing can be used plays an important roll in this matter. The phase selection function is design to accurate select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type. The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted operation. Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the measuring zones without interfering with the load. The output signals from the phase selection function produce important information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis as well.

7.2
7.2.1

Principle of operation
The phase selection function The phase selection function can be decomposed into four different parts: 1. A high speed delta based current phase selector 2. A high speed delta based voltage phase selector 3. A symmetrical components based phase selector 4. Fault evaluation and selection logic 5. A load enchroachment logic 6. A blinder logic The function can be de-activated and activated by setting the parameter Operation Off/On The total function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK. Figure 1 (kommer senare)

183

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Delta based current and voltages The delta based fault detection function uses adaptive technique and is based on patent US4409636. It is a well proven technique that goes back to the beginning of 1980, used with very good experience in highly proven ABB distance relay RALZA. The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho element and as well as is essential to Directional Comparison Blocking scheme (DCB), which uses Power Line Carrier (PLC) communication system across the protected line. The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that filters out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when no fault is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault occurs, currents and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the current and voltages resulting in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line. At this point the notch filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output is processed by the delta function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship between phases to determine if a fault has occurred, and determines the faulty phases. The current and voltage delta phase selector gives a real output signal if the following criteria is fulfilled (only phase A shown): Max(VA,VB,VC)>DeltaVMinOp Max(IA,IB,IC)>DeltaIMinOp
where: VA, VB and VC DeltaVMinOp and DeltaIMinOp are the voltage change between sample t and sample t-1 are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current filters to decide that a fault has occured indeed. A slow evolving fault may not produce sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a case speed is no longer the issue and the sequence components phase selector will operate.

The delta voltages VA(B,C) and delta current IA(B,C) are the voltage and current between sample t and sample t-1. The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type. The logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing by the largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The condition for fault type classification for the voltage and currents can be expressed as

FaultType =

( VA, VB , VC ) Max ( IA, IB , IC )

(Equation 50)

184

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

FaultType =

( IA, IB , IC ) Max ( IA, IB , IC )

(Equation 51)

The value of FaultType for different shunt faults are as follows:

Under ideal conditions: (Patent pending) Single line ground fault; Phase to phase fault 3-phase fault; FaultType=1 FaultType=2 FaultType=3

The output signal is 1 for single line to ground fault, 2 for phase to phase fault and 3 for three phase fault. At this point the filer does not know if ground was involved or not. Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType over its entire range. When a single fault has been detected, the logic determines the largest quantity, and asserts that phase. If phase to phase fault is detected, the two largest phase quantities will be detected and asserted as outputs. The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the waveshape. The output is forcet to wait a certain time. If the timer expires, if no other fault detection on the other phases is not detected, the fault is deemed as phase-to-ground. This way a premature single phase to ground fault detection is not released for a phase-phase fault. If, however, ground current is detected before the timer expires, the phase to ground fault is released sooner. If another phase picks up during the delay, the wait time is reduced by a certain amount. Each detection of either ground or additional phases further reduce the initial wait time and allow the delta phase selector output to be asserted sooner. There is not wait time, if for example, all three phases are faulty. The delta function is released if the input DELTAREL is activated at the same time as input DELTABLK is not activated. Activating the DELTABLK input will block the delta function. The release signal has an internal pulse timer of 100 ms. When the DELTAREL signal has disappeared the delta logic is reset. In order not to get too abrupt change, the reset is decayed in pre-defined steps. Symmetrical component based phase selector The sequence component phase selector uses preprocessed calculated sequence voltages and currents as inputs. It also uses sampled values of the phase currents. All the sequence quantities mentioned further in this section are with reference to phase A.

185

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The function is made up of four main parts:

A B C D Detection of the presence of ground fault A phase to phase logic block based on V2/V1 angle relationship A phase to ground component based on patent US5390067 where the angle relationships between V2/I0 and V2/V1 is evaluated to determine ground fault or phase to phase to ground fault Logic for detection of three phase fault

A. Presence of ground detection The detection of ground fault is done in two ways, one by evaluation of the magnitude of zero sequence current and secondly by the evaluation of the zero and negative sequence voltage. The evaluation of the zero sequence current is done both with a separate complementary function outside the main sequence based evaluation function. The complementary based zero sequence current function evaluates the presence of ground fault by calculating the 3I0 and comparing the result with the setting parameter INtoMaxI. The output signal is used to release the ground fault loop. It is a complement to the ground fault signal built-in in the sequence based phase selector. The condition for releasing the phase to ground loop are as follows: |3I0|>maxIph INto Im ax
where: |3I0| maxIph INtoImax is the magnitude of the zero sequence current 3I0 is the maximum magnitude of the phase currents is a setting parameter for the relation between the magnitude of 3I0 and the maximum phase current

The ground fault loop is also released if the evaluation of the zero sequence current by the main sequence function meets the following conditions: |3I0|>IMinOp k1 |3I0|>maxIph INRelPG
where: IMinOp INRelPG k1 IBase is the settings of the minimum operate phase current is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-ground measuring loop in % of IBase is a design parameter is the setting of the base current (A)

186

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of zero sequence current may not be secure. In those cases the sequence based phase selector will automatically change from evaluation of zero sequence current to evaluation of zero and negative sequence voltage. So the release of ground fault loop can also be done if the following conditions are fulfilled: |3V0|>V2*k2 |3V0|>V1*k3 |V1|>k and 3I0<IMinOp*k5 OR 3I0<ILmax INRelPG
where: 3V0 V2 k2, k3, k4 and k5 ILmax IMinOp is the magnitude of the zero sequence voltage is the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage at the relay measuring point of phase A are design parameters is the maximal phase current is the setting of minimum operate phase current in % of IBase

B Phase to phase fault detection The detection of phase to phase fault is performed by evaluation of the angle difference between the sequence voltages V2 and V1.

187

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

UL3 L3-L1 sector 180 UL2

60

0 L2-L3 sector

U1L1 (Ref)

L1-L2 sector UL1 300

en06000383.vsd

Figure 108: Definition of fault sectors for phase to phase fault The phase to phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle between the sequence voltages V2 and V1 lies within the sector defined according to figure 108 and the following conditions are fulfilled: |V2|>V2MinOp |V1|>V1MinOP
where: V1MinOP and V2MinOp are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence minimum operate voltage

The positive sequence voltage V1A in figure 108 above is reference. If there is a three phase fault, there will not be any release of the individual phase signals, even if the general conditions for V2 and V1 are fulfilled. C. Phase to ground and phase to phase to ground detection The detection of phase to ground and phase to phase to ground fault (US patent 5390067) is based on two conditions: 1. Angle relationship between V2 and I0 2. Angle relationship between V2 and V1 The first condition determines faulty phase at single line to ground fault by determine the angle between V2 and I0.

188

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

80

BG sector

CG sector
V2A (Ref)

200

AG sector
320

en06000384_ansi.vsd

Figure 109: Definition of faulty phase sector as angle between V2 and I0 The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in radians as input to the V2I0 function block. The input angle is released only if the fault is in forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault is classified as forward direction if the angle between V0 and I0 lies between 20 to 200 degrees see figure 110.

Forward

20

200

Reverse

en06000385.vsd

Figure 110: Directional element used to release the measured angle between V2 and I0 The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If the angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that sector will be active see figure 109. Only one sector signal is allowed to be activated at the same time.

189

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The sector function for condition1 has an internal release signal which is active if the main sequence function has classified the angle between V0 and I0 as valid. The following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals: |V2|>V2MinOp |3I0|>IMinOp 0.5 |3I0|>ILmax INRelPG
where: V2 and IN V2MinOp IMinOp are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zero sequence current (3I0) is the setting parameter for minimum operate negative sequence voltage is the setting parameter for minimum operate phase current

The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse direction. The condition2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence voltage V2 and the positive sequence voltage V1. Since this is a phase to phase voltage relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse direction. A phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same angle boarders as for condition1. If the calculated angle between V2 and V1 lies within one sector, the corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The condition2 is released if both the following conditions are fulfilled: |V2|>U2MinOp |V1|>U1MinOP
where: |U1| and |U2| V1MinOP and U2MinOpV2MinOP are the magnitude of the positive and negative sequence voltage are the setting parameter for positive sequence and negative sequence minimum operate voltage.

190

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

140

CG sector
20 V1A (Ref)

AG sector BG sector

260

en06000413_ansi.vsd

Figure 111: Condition 2: V2 and V1 angle relationship If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single phase to ground. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be the complement of the second condition, i.e. a phase to phase to ground fault.
E.g. Condition 1 CG BG Condition 2 CG AG Fault type CG BCG

The sequence phase selector is blocked when groundis not involved or if a three phase fault is detected. D. Three phase fault detection The function classify the fault as three phase fault if the following conditions are fulfilled: |V1|>V1Level |I1|>I1Level or |I1|>IMaxLoad
where: V1 and I1 V1Level and I1Level are the positive sequence voltage and current magnitude are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current

191

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The output signal for detection of three phase fault is only released if not ground fault and phase to phase fault in the main sequence function is detected. The conditions for not detecting ground fault are the inverse of equation 5 to10. The condition for not detecting phase to phase faults is determined by three conditions. Each of them gives condition for not detecting phase to phase fault. Those are:
Condition1: ground fault is detected or |IN|>IMinOP*k2 and |IN|>ILmax*INRelPG Condition2: Condition2 for phase to ground and phase to phase faults are not fulfilled and ILmax<IMinOp and |I2|<ILmax*I2ILmax Condition3: |IN|>maxIL*3I0BLK_PP or |I2|<maxIL*I2maxIL

where: ILmax INRelPG |I2| I2ILmax 3I0BLK_P P is the maximum of the phase currents IA, IB and IC is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for release of phase to groundfault loops is the magnitude of the negative sequence current is the setting parameter for the relation between negative sequence current to the maximum phase current in percent of IBase is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for blocking phase to phase measuring loops

Fault evaluation and selection logic The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified according to figure 112. Only phase A is shown in the figure. If the internal signal 3Phase fault is activated, all three outputs PU_A, PU_B and PU_Cwill be activated.

192

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

DeltaIA DeltaVA
Sequence based function

a b

a>b then c=a else c=a

FaultPriority Adaptive release dependent on result from Delta logic

a
OR

AB fault AG fault 3 Phase fault

a<b then c=b else c=a

c
OR

IA Valid BLOCK

&

PU_A

en06000386_ansi.vsd

Figure 112: Simplified diagram for fault evaluation, phase A Load encroachment logic Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always activated in the PHSM function but the influence on the zone measurement can be switched on/off in the respective Zm function. The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 113. As illustrated, the resistive reach are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by the load encroachment function, see right figure 113.

193

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

jX

Operation area RLd LdAngle LdAngle R LdAngle RLd LdAngle

Operation area

Operation area

No operation area

No operation area

en06000414_ansi.vsd

Figure 113: Influence on the characteristic by load encroachment logic. Outputs The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic phase selector activates the output signal(s) STL1, STL2 and STL3PU_A, PU_B and PU_C. If the phase to ground loop have been released, then the signal STE will be activated as well. The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone measuring element for opening the correct measuring loop(s). This is done by the signal PHSEL. If only one phase is enable (A, B or C), the corresponding phase to ground element is enabled as well. Earth is expected to be made available for two and three phase faults for the correct output to be asserted. The fault loop is indicated by one of the decimal numbers below:
0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8= 9= 10= 11= no faulted phases AG BG CG -ABG -BCG -L3L1N-CAG -ABCG -AB -BC -CA ABC

194

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

An additional logic is applied to handle the cases when phase to groundoutputs are to be asserted when the ground input G is not asserted. The output signal STCNDPLE is activated when the load encroachment is operating. STCNDPLE shall be connected to the input STCND for selected quadrilateral impedance measuring zones (ZM0x) to be blocked. The signal STCNDLE shall be connected to the input LDCND for selected Mho impedans measuring zones (ZMMx)

Note!
The load encroachment at the measuring zone must be activated to release the blocking from the load encroachment function.

7.3

Function block
PHMFMPSPDIS I3P V3P BLOCK ZSTART TR3PH 1POLEAR PU_A PU_B PU_C PHG_FLT PHSCND PLECND DLECND PICKUP en06000429_ansi.vsd

Figure 114: PHM function block

7.4

Input and output signals

Table 92:
Signal I3P V3P BLOCK ZSTART TR3PH 1POLEAR

Input signals for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function block

Description Group signal for current Group signal for voltage Block of function Start from underimpdeance function Three phase tripping initiated Single pole autoreclosing in progress

195

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Table 93:
Signal PU_A PU_B PU_C PHG_FLT PHSCND PLECND DLECND PICKUP

Output signals for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function block

Description Fault detected in phase A Fault detected in phase B Fault detected in phase C Ground fault detected Binary coded starts from phase selection Binary coded starts from ph sel with load encroachment Binary coded starts from load encroachment only Indicates that something has picked up

7.5

Setting parameters
Table 94:
Parameter IBase VBase IMaxLoad

Basic parameter group settings for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 10 - 5000 Step 1 0.05 1 Default 3000 400.00 200 Unit A kV %IB Description Base current Base voltage Maximum load for identification of three phase fault in % of IBase Load encroachment resistive reach in ohm/phase Load encroachment inclination of load angular sector

RLd

1.00 - 3000.00

0.01

80.00

ohm/p

LdAngle

5 - 70

20

Deg

Table 95:
Parameter DeltaIMinOp DeltaVMinOp V1Level

Advanced parameter group settings for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function

Range 5 - 100 5 - 100 5 - 100 Step 1 1 1 Default 10 20 80 Unit %IB %UB %UB Description Delta current level in % of IBase Delta voltage level in % of UBase Pos seq voltage limit for identification of 3-ph fault

196

Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS, 21)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Parameter I1LowLevel

Range 5 - 200

Step 1

Default 10

Unit %IB

Description Pos seq current level for identification of 3-ph fault in % of IBase Minimum operate positive sequence voltage for ph sel Minimum operate negative sequence voltage for ph sel 3I0 limit for release ph-g measuring loops in % of max phase current 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loops in % of max phase current

V1MinOp

5 - 100

20

%UB

V2MinOp

1 - 100

%UB

INRelPE

10 - 100

20

%IB

3I0BLK_PP

10 - 100

40

%IB

7.6

Technical data
Table 96:
Function Minimum operate current Load encroachment criteria: Load resistance, forward and reverse

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)

Range or value (5-30)% of Ibase (0.53000) /phase (570) degrees Accuracy 1.0% of In 2.0% static accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.11.1) x Vn Current range: (0.530) x In Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

197

Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Function block name: ZDMANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZDMRDIR IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: ZDAANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZDARDIR

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

8.1

Introduction
The phase-to-ground impedance elements can be optionally supervised by a phase unselective directional function (phase unselective, because it is based on symmetrical components).

8.2
8.2.1

Principle of operation
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic, ZDM The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDM. Equation 52 and equation 53 are used to classify that the fault is in the forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and phase-phase fault respectively.

AngDir < Ang

0.85 V 1A + 0.15 V 1 AM IA

< AngNeg Re s
(Equation 52)

AngDir < Ang

0.85 V 1 AB + 0.15 V 1ABM IAB

< AngNeg Re s
(Equation 53)

198

Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Where: AngDir AngNegRes V1A V1AM IA V1AB V1ABM IAB Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 115 Positive sequence phase voltage in phase A Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A Phase current in phase A Voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A) Memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A) Current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

The default settings for AngDir and AngNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively (see figure 115) and they should not be changed unless system studies show the necessity. The directional lines are computed by means of a comparator-type calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of infinite radius).

X Zset reach point

AngNegRes

-AngDir

-Zs
en06000416_ansi.vsd

Figure 115: Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees. The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

199

Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination. The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After 100ms, the following occurs: If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the condition seals in. - If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. - If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation. If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, no directional indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

The directional function block ZDM has the following output signals: The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation and is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:
bit 11 (2048) REV_CA1=1 bit 5 (32) FWD_CA=1 bit 10 (1024) REV_BC=1 bit 4 (16) FWD_BC=1 bit 9 (512) REV_AB=1 bit 3 (8) FWD_AB=1 bit 8 (256) REV_C=1 bit 2 (4) FWD_C=1 bit 7 (128) REV_B=1 bit 1 (2) FWD_B=1 bit 6 (64) REV_A=1 bit 0 (1) FWD_A=1

The PUFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an OR-function of all the forward starting conditions, i.e. FWD_A, FWD_B, FWD_C, FWD_AB, FWD_BC and RWD_CA. The PUREV output is similar to the PUFW output, the only difference being that it is made up as an OR-function of all the reverse starting conditions, i.e. REV_A, REV_B, REV_C. REV_AB, REV_BC and REV_CA. Values for the following parameters are calculated, and may be viewed as service values: resistance phase A reactance phase A resistance phase B reactance phase B resistance phase C reactance phase C direction phase A direction phase B direction phase C

200

Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

8.2.2

Additional distance protection directional function for ground faults, ZDA A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage for its operation. The positive-sequence memory-polarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include: The greatest amount of expansion for improved resistive coverage. These elements always expand back to the source. Memory action for all fault types. This is very important for close-in 3-phase faults. A common polarizing reference for all six distance-measuring loops. This is important for single-pole tripping, during a pole-open period.

There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse phase to phase faults and double phase to ground faults during high load periods. To solve these, additional directional element is used. For phase to ground faults, directional elements using sequence components are very reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one of following types of polarization: Zero-sequence voltage Negative-sequence voltage Zero-sequence current

These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the function block ZDA. Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero-sequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection. The measurement principle is illustrated in figure 116.

- 3V 0
AngleOp AngleRCA

3I0
en06000417_ansi.vsd

Figure 116: Principle for zero-sequence voltage polarized additional directional element

201

Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Negative-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current at the location of the protection. Zero-sequence current polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection and some reference zero-sequence current, for example the current in the neutral of a power transformer. The principle of zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current compensation is described in figure 117. The same also applies for the negative-sequence function.

Z0 SA

I0

Z0 Line

Z0SB V0

I0
Characteristic angle

V0

K*I0 V0 + K*I0 IF
en06000418_ansi.vsd

Figure 117: Principle for zero sequence compensation Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the normal directional element that works on a per phase base. The release signals are per phase and to have a release of a measuring element in a specific phase both the additional directional element, and the normal directional element, for that phase must indicate correct direction.

Normal directional element A, B, C Additional directional element

Release of distance measuring element A, B, C AND AND per phase

en06000419_ansi.vsd

Figure 118: Ground distance element directional supervision

202

Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

8.3

Function block
ZDM1ZDMRDIR I3P V3P DIR_CURR DIR_VOLT DIR_POL PUFW PUREV STDIRCND en06000422_ansi.vsd

Figure 119: ZDM function block

ZDA1ZDARDIR I3P V3P I3PPOL DIRCND FWD_G REV_G DIREFCND

en06000425_ansi.vsd

Figure 120: ZDA function block

8.4

Input and output signals

Table 97:
Signal I3P V3P

Input signals for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function block

Description group connection for current abs 1 group connection for voltage abs 1

Table 98:
Signal DIR_CURR DIR_VOLT DIR_POL PUFW PUREV STDIRCND

Output signals for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function block

Description Group connection Group connection Group connection Pickup in forward direction Pickup in reverse direction Binary coded directional information per measuring loop

203

Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Table 99:
Signal I3P V3P I3PPOL DIRCND

Input signals for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function block

Description Current signals Voltage signals Polarisation current signals Binary coded directional signal

Table 100: Output signals for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function block
Signal FWD_G REV_G DIREFCND Description Forward start signal from phase-to-ground directional element Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground directional element Pickuo direction Binary coded

8.5

Setting parameters
Table 101: Basic parameter group settings for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function
Parameter IBase VBase DirEvalType Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Impedance Comparator Imp/Comp 90 - 175 Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Comparator Unit Description Base setting for current level Base setting for voltage level Directional evaluation mode Impedance / Comparator Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward direction Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-to-ground loops Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

AngNegRes

115

Deg

AngDir

5 - 45

15

Deg

IMinPUPG

5 - 30

%IB

IMinPUPP

5 - 30

10

%IB

204

Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Table 102: Basic parameter group settings for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function
Parameter IBase VBase PolMode Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 -3U0 -V2 IPol Dual -3U0Comp -V2comp -90 - 90 1 - 200 1 - 100 5 - 100 Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 -3U0 Unit A kV Description Base setting for current values Base setting for voltage level in kV Polarization quantity for opt dir function for P-G faults

AngleRCA IPickup VPolPU IPolPU

1 1 1 1

75 5 1 10

Deg %IB %VB %IB

Characteristic relay angle (= MTA or base angle) Minimum operation current in % of IBase Minimum polarizing voltage in % of VBase Minimum polarizing current in % of IBase

Table 103: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function
Parameter AngleOp Kmag Range 90 - 180 0.50 - 3000.00 Step 1 0.01 Default 160 40.00 Unit Deg ohm Description Operation sector angle Boost-factor in -V0comp and -V2comp polarization

205

Phase preference logic

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Phase preference logic

Function block name: PPL ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: PPLPHIZ IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

9.1

Introduction
Phase Preference Logic (PPL) is intended to be used in isolated or high impedance grounded networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the faulty lines at cross-country fault. The phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single-phase-to-ground faults in isolated and high impedance-grounded networks, where such faults are not to be cleared by distance protection. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or the lagging phase-ground loop for measurement and initiates tripping of the preferred fault based on the selected phase preference. A number of different phase preference combinations are available for selection.

9.2

Principle of operation
The phase preference logic can be activated or deactivated by setting the parameter Operation to On or Off. The function has 10 operation modes which can be set by the parameter Mode. The different modes and their explanation are shown in table 104 below.
Table 104: Operation modes for phase preference logic
Operation Mode 0 Description No filter, phase-to-phase measuring loops are not blocked during single phase-to-ground faults. Tripping is allowed without any particular phase preference at cross-country faults No preference, trip is blocked during single phase-to-ground faults, trip is allowed without any particular phase preference at cross-country fault Cyclic 1231c; A before B before C before C Cyclic 1321c; A before C before B before A Acyclic 123a; A before B beforeC Acyclic 132a;A before C beforeB Acyclic 213a; B before A before C Acyclic 231a; B before C beforeA Acyclic 312a; C before B beforeA Acyclic 321a; C before B before A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

206

Phase preference logic

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The function can be divided into two parts; one labeled Voltage and Current Discrimination and the second one labeled Phase Preference Evaluation, see figure 121. The aim with the voltage and current discrimination part is to discriminate faulty phases and to determine if there is a cross country fault. If cross country fault is detected, an internal signal Detected cross country fault is created and sent to the phase preference part to be used in the evaluation process for determining the condition for trip. The voltage discrimination part gives phase segregated pickup signals STVA, STVB or STVC if the respective measured phase voltage is below the setting parameter PU27PN at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the setting parameter 3V0Pickup, see figure 121. The internal signal for detection of cross country fault, DetectCrossContry, that come from the voltage and current discrimination part of the function can be achieved in three different ways: 1. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN for a time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tIN 2. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN at the same time as the magnitude of 3V0 has been above the setting parameter 3V0Pickup during a time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tVN 3. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN at the same time as one of the following conditions are fulfilled: the measured phase-to phase voltage in at least one of the phase combinations has been below the setting parameter PU27PP for more than 20 ms. At least one of the phase voltages are below the setting parameter PU27PN for more than 20 ms The second part, Phase preference evaluation, uses the internal signal DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the input signal STCND and the information from the setting parameter OperMode to determine the condition for trip. To release the phase preference logic at least two out of three phases must be faulty. The fault classification whether it is a single line to earth or cross country fault and which phase to be tripped at cross country fault is converted into a binary coded signal and sent to the distance protection measuring zone to release the correct measuring zone according to the setting of OperMode. This is done by activating the output ZREL and it shall be connected to the input STCND on the distance zone measuring element. The input signal PHSELC consist of binary information of fault type and is connected to the Phase selector output STCND. The fault must be activated in at least two phases to be classified as a cross country fault in the phase preference part of the logic. The input signals RELLx are additional fault release signals that can be connected to external protection functions through binary input. The trip output can be blocked by setting the parameter Blk1PhTr to On. The output pickup and trip signals can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK

207

Phase preference logic

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

V_A V_B V_C V_AB V_BC V_CA IN VN PU27PN PU27PP INPICKUP VNPICKUP Detect CrossCountry fault Voltage Discrimination OR AND PICKUP AND STVB AND STVA

AND

STVC

AND OperatingMode REL_AG REL_BG REL_CG STNDC Phase Preference Evaluation AND TR_C AND AND TR_A TR_B

AND AND AND Blk1PhTr BLOCK OR AND

en06000323_ansi.vsd

Figure 121: Simplified block diagram for phase preference logic

208

Phase preference logic

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

9.3

Function block
PPL1PPLPHIZ I3P V3P BLOCK RELAG RELBG RELCG PHSEL BFI_3P ZREL

en07000029_ansi.vsd

Figure 122: PPL function block

9.4

Input and output signals

Table 105: Input signals for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function block
Signal I3P V3P BLOCK RELAG RELBG RELCG PHSEL Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Release condition for the A to ground loop Release condition for the B to ground loop Release condition for the C to ground loop Integer coded external release signals

Table 106: Output signals for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function block
Signal BFI_3P ZREL Description Indicates start for earth fault(s), regardless of direction Integer coded output release signal

209

Phase preference logic

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

9.5

Setting parameters
Table 107: Basic parameter group settings for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function
Parameter IBase VBase OperMode Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 No Filter NoPref 1231c 1321c 123a 132a 213a 231a 312a 321a 10.0 - 100.0 Step 1 0.01 Default 3000 400.00 No Filter Unit A kV Description Base current Base voltage Operating mode (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)

PU27PN

1.0

70.0

%VB

Pickup value of phase undervoltage (% of VBase) Pickup value of line to line undervoltage (% of VBase) Pickup value of residual voltage (% of VBase) Pickup value of residual current (% of IBase) Pickup-delay for residual voltage Dropoff-delay for residual voltage Pickup-delay for residual current

PU27PP

10.0 - 100.0

1.0

50.0

%VB

3V0PU Pickup_N tVN tOffVN tIN

5.0 - 70.0 10 - 200 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

1.0 1 0.001 0.001 0.001

20.0 20 0.100 0.100 0.150

%VB %IB s s s

210

Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

10

Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Function block name: PSD-ANSI number: 78 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMRPSB IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Zpsb

10.1

Introduction
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big generation plants. Power swing detection function is used to detect power swings and initiate block of selected distance protection zones. Occurrence of ground fault currents during a power swing can block the power swing detection function to allow fault clearance.

10.2

Principle of operation
The PSD function comprises an inner and an outer quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment, see figure 123. Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a power swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the outer and the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times longer than a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance measuring principle is the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The impedance and the characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases separately. One-out-of-three or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to the specific system operating conditions.

211

Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

X1OutFw X1InFw

jX

ZL

R1LIn

Fw

Rv
LdAngle

R1FInRv

R1FInFw

Rv Fw Fw

Fw
LdAngle

R
Rv
RLdInRv RLdInFw

Fw Fw

Rv Rv

RLdOutRv RLdOutFw X1InRv X1OutRv

en05000175_ansi.vsd

Figure 123: Operating characteristic for the PSD function The impedance measurement within the PSD function is performed by solving equation 54 and equation 55(Typical equations are for phase A, similar equations are applicable for phases B and C as well).
VA Re Rset IA
(Equation 54)

V A Im Xset IA
(Equation 55)

The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries which are more explained in the following sections.

212

Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

10.2.1

Resistive reach in forward direction To avoid load encroachment the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive load boundary value while the inner resistive boundary is calculated according to equation 56.

RLdInFw = kLdRFw RLdOutFw

(Equation 56)

where: kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting the parameter LdAngle. The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first quadrant (same LdAngle and RLdOutFw and calculated RLdInFw). The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better adaptation to the distance zones. The angle is the same as the line angle and derived from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance for the inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is set by the parameter R1FInFw. From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance between the inner and outer boundary, Fw, is calculated. This value is valid for R direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and second quadrant.
10.2.2 Resistive reach in reverse direction To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction the resistive reach is limited by setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment cone. The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by using the setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 57.

RLdInRv = kLdRRv RLdOutRv

(Equation 57)

From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv a distance between the inner and outer boundary, Rv, is calculated. This value is valid for R direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and fourth quadrant. The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of Rv+R1FInRv.

213

Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load encroachment zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line resistance R1LIn. The angle of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted lines in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and outer boundary is the same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction i.e. Rv.
10.2.3 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to the setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + Fw,
where: Fw = RLdOutFw - KLdRFw RLdOutFw

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined as X1InRv + Rv.
where: Rv = RLdOutRv - KLdRRv RLdOutRv

10.2.4

Basic detection logic The operation of the function is only released if the magnitude of the current is above the setting of the min operating current, IMinPUPG.

The PSD function can operate in two operating modes: The "1-of-3" operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of the three phases. Figure 124 presents a composition of a detection signal PSD-DET-A in this particular phase. The "2-of-3" operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least two out of three phases. Figure 125 presents a composition of the detection signals DET1of3 and DET2of3.

Signals (external boundary) and ZINL1ZIN_A (internal boundary) in figure 124 are related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase separately. They are internal signals, calculated by the PSD-function. The tP1 timer in figure 124 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate area and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part of figure 124 (input signal ZOUT_A, ZIN_A, AND-gates and tP-timers etc.) are duplicated for phase B and C. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the same settings.

214

Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

ZOUTA ZINA

AND

0-tP1 0

OR -loop -loop AND OR AND PSD-DET-A

AND

0-tP2 0

ZOUTB ZOUTC

OR

PSD -detected

0 0-tW en05000113_ansi.vsd

Figure 124: Detection of power-swing in phase A

PSD-DET-A PSD-DET-B PSD-DET-C

OR

DET1of3 - int.

AND DET2of3 - int.

AND

OR

AND

en01000057_ansi.vsd

Figure 125: Detection of power-swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode

215

Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

ZOUT_A ZOUT_B ZOUT_C

OR ZIN_A AND ZIN_B ZIN_C OR

ZOUT

ZIN

TRSP I0CHECK

0 0-tGF

AND

BLK_I0

AND

10ms 0

OR

AND -loop BLK_SS BLOCK -loop DET1of3 - int. REL1PH BLK1PH DET2of3 - int. REL2PH BLK2PH EXT_PSD AND 0 0-tH

0-tR1 0

OR

INHIBIT

AND OR AND OR AND PICKUP 0-tH 0

en05000114_ansi.vsd

Figure 126: PSD function-simplified block diagram

10.2.5 Operating and inhibit conditions Figure 126 presents a simplified logic diagram for the PSD function. The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic diagrams in figure 124 and figure 125 respectively.

Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the functional input signals REL1PH, BLK1PH, REL2PH, and BLK2PH. The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter OperationLdCh = Off, but notice that the Fw and Rv will still be calculated. The characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral. There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:

216

Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output PICKUP signal instantaneously. The INHIBIT internal signal is activated, if the power swing has been detected and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLK_SS functional input. The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer, if an ground fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and the power swing has been detected before the ground fault (activation of the signal I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLK_I0 functional input. The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input I0CHECK appears within the time delay, set on tGF timer and the impedance has been seen within the outer characteristic of the PSD operate characteristic in all three phases. This function prevents the operation of the PSD function in cases, when the circuit breaker closes onto persistent single-phase fault after single-pole auto-reclosing dead time, if the initial single-phase fault and single-pole opening of the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phases.

10.3

Function block
PSD1ZMRPSB_78 I3P V3P BLOCK BLK_SS BLK_I0 BLK1PH REL1PH BLK2PH REL2PH I0CHECK TRSP EXT_PSD PICKUP ZOUT ZIN

en06000264_ansi.vsd

Figure 127: PSD function block

10.4

Input and output signals

Table 108: Input signals for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function block
Signal I3P V3P BLOCK BLK_SS BLK_I0 Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block inhibit of start output for slow swing condition Block inhibit of start output for subsequent residual current detection

217

Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Signal BLK1PH REL1PH BLK2PH REL2PH I0CHECK TRSP EXT_PSD

Description Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit power swing detection output Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping function Input for external detection of power swing

Table 109: Output signals for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function block
Signal PICKUP ZOUT ZIN Description Power swing detected Measured impedance within outer impedance boundary Measured impedance within inner impedance boundary

10.5

Setting parameters
Table 110: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function
Parameter Operation X1InFw R1LIn R1FInFw Range Disabled Enabled 0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 0.10 - 1000.00 Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 Default Off 30.00 30.00 30.00 Unit ohm ohm ohm Description Disbled/Enabled operation Inner reactive boundary, forward Line resistance for inner characteristic angle Fault resistance coverage to inner resistive line, forward Inner reactive boundary, reverse Fault resistance line to inner resistive boundary, reverse Operation of load discrimination characteristic Outer resistive load boundary, forward Load angle determining load impedance area Outer resistive load boundary, reverse

X1InRv R1FInRv

0.10 - 3000.00 0.10 - 1000.00

0.01 0.01

30.00 30.00

ohm ohm

OperationLdCh RLdOutFw LdAngle RLdOutRv

Disabled Enabled 0.10 - 3000.00 5 - 70 0.10 - 3000.00

0.01 1 0.01

On 30.00 25 30.00

ohm Deg ohm

218

Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Parameter kLdRFw

Range 0.50 - 0.90

Step 0.01

Default 0.75

Unit Mult

Description Multiplication factor for inner resistive load boundary, forward Multiplication factor for inner resistive load boundary, reverse Timer for overcoming single-pole reclosing dead time Minimum operate current in % of IBase Base setting for current level settings

kLdRRv

0.50 - 0.90

0.01

0.75

Mult

tGF

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

IMinPUPG IBase

5 - 30 1 - 99999

1 1

10 3000

%IB A

Table 111: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function
Parameter tP1 tP2 Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 Default 0.045 0.015 Unit s s Description Timer for detection of initial power swing Timer for detection of subsequent power swings Waiting timer for activation of tP2 timer Timer for holding power swing PICKUP output Timer giving delay to inhibit by the residual current Timer giving delay to inhibit at very slow swing

tW tH tR1

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.250 0.500 0.300

s s s

tR2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

10.6

Technical data
Table 112: Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)
Function Reactive reach Range or value (0.10-3000.00) /phase Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In Resistive reach Timers (0.101000.00) /loop (0.000-60.000) s Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees 0.5% 10 ms

219

Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

11

Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)

Function block name: PSL-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMRPSL IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

11.1

Introduction
Power Swing Logic (RPSL) is a complementary function to Power Swing Detection (PSD) function. It provides possibility for selective tripping of faults on power lines during system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when the distance protection function should normally be blocked. The complete logic consists of two different parts: Communication and tripping part. It provides selective tripping on the basis of special distance protection zones and a scheme communication logic, which are not blocked during the system oscillations. Blocking part. It blocks unwanted operation of instantaneous distance protection zone 1 for oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the adjacent power lines and other primary elements.

11.2
11.2.1

Principle of operation
Communication and tripping logic Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection zones is schematically presented in figure 128.

220

Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

PUDOG AR1P1 PUPSD BLOCK CSUR

AND
CS

AND

0-tCS 0

AND

AND
0-tTrip 0 0 0-tBlkTr

BLKZMUR

PLTR_CRD CR

AND

OR

TRIP

en06000236_ansi.en

Figure 128: Simplified logic diagram power swing communication and tripping logic The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one on the BLOCK functional input signal. Presence of the logical one on the PUDOG functional input signal also blocks the logic as long as this block is not released by the logical one on the AR1P1 functional input signal. The functional output signal BLKZMUR remains logical one as long as the function is not blocked externally (BLOCK is logical zero) and the ground-fault is detected on protected line (PUDOG is logical one), which is connected in three-phase mode (AR1P1 is logical zero). Timer tBlkTr prolongs the duration of this blocking condition, if the measured impedance remains within the operate area of the PSD function (PUPSD input active). The BLKZMUR can be used to block the operation of the power-swing zones. Logical one on functional input CSUR, which is normally connected to the TRIP functional output of a power swing carrier sending zone, activates functional output CS, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions. It also activates the TRIP functional output. Initiation of the CS functional output is possible only, if the PUPSD input has been active longer than the time delay set on the security timer tCS. Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals CACC and CR (local trip condition) also activates the TRIP functional output, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions and the PUPSD signal has been present longer then the time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.
11.2.2 Blocking logic Figure 129 presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of the underreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their clearance on the remote power lines.

221

Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

AND AND
PUZMUR BLOCK PUZMOR PUZMPSD PUPSD BLKZMOR

AND AND

0-tZL 0 0-tDZ 0

AND OR

OR

PUZMURPS

AND
-loop

en06000237_ansi.vsd

Figure 129: Control of underreaching distance protection (Zone 1) at power swings caused by the faults and their clearance on adjacent lines and other system elements The logic is disabled by a logical one on functional inputBLOCK. It can start only if the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled: PUPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that the PSD function must not detect power swinging over the protected power line. PUZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the impedance must be detected within the external boundary of the PSD function. PUZMOR functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault must be detected by the overreaching distance protection zone, for example zone 2.

The PUZMLL functional output, which can be used in complete terminal logic instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes active under the following conditions: If the PUZMUR signal appears at the same time as the PUZMOR or if it appears with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer tDZ. If the PUZMUR signal appears after the PUZMOR signal with a time delay longer than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the time delay set on the tZL timer.

The BLKZMH functional output signal can be used to block the operation of the higher distance protection zone, if the fault has moved into the zone 1 operate area after tDZ time delay.

222

Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

11.3

Function block
PSL1ZMRPSL BLOCK PUZMUR PUZMOR PUPSD PUDOG PUZMPSD PLTR_CRD AR1P1 CSUR CR TRIP PUZMURPS BLKZMUR BLKZMOR CS

en07000026_ansi.vsd

Figure 130: PSL function block

11.4

Input and output signals

Table 113: Input signals for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function block
Signal Description

BLOCK PUZMUR PUZMOR PUPSD PUDOG PUZMPSD PLTR_CRD AR1P1 CSUR CR

Block of function Pickup of the underreaching zone Pickup of the overreaching zone Power swing detected Pickup from ground Fault Protection in forward or reverse direction Operation of Power Swing Detection external characteristic Overreaching ZM zone to be accelerated Single pole auto-reclosing in progress Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing zone Carrier receive signal during power swing detection operation

Table 114: Output signals for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP PUZMURPS BLKZMUR BLKZMOR CS

Trip through Power Swing Logic Pickup of Underreaching zone controlled by PSL to be used in configuration Block trip of underreaching impedance zone Block trip of overreaching distance protection zones Carrier send signal controlled by the power swing

223

Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

11.5

Setting parameters
Table 115: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation tDZ

Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000

0.001

Off 0.050

Disable/Enable Operation Permitted max oper time diff between higher and lower zone Delay for oper of underreach zone with detected diff in oper time Conditional timer for sending the CS at power swings Conditional timer for tripping at power swings Timer for blocking the overreaching zones trip

tDZMUR

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

tCS

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

tTrip tBlkTr

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

0.100 0.300

s s

11.6

Technical data

224

Pole Slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

12

Pole Slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Function block name: ANSI number: 78 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

<

12.1

Introduction
Sudden events in an electrical power system such as large changes in load, fault occurrence or fault clearance, can cause power oscillations referred to as power swings. In a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of the pole slip protection is to detect, evaluate, and take the required action for pole slipping occurrences in the power system. The electrical system parts swinging to each other can be separated with the line/s closest to the centre of the power swing allowing the two systems to be stable as separated islands.

12.2

Principle of operation
If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the impedance and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signalled. If the generator is slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring is signalled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor). The movements in the impedance plain can be seen in figure 131. The transient behaviour is described by the transient e.m.f's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the transient system impedance Z S.

225

Pole Slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Zone 1 EB Xd REG 670 jX XT

Zone 2 XS EA

A XS

Pole slip impedance movement

XT

Apparent generator impedance

Xd B

en06000437.vsd

where: X'd XT ZS = = = transient reactance of the generator short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer impedance of the power system A

Figure 131: Movements in the impedance plain The detection of rotor angle is enabled when: the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general setting). the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 UBase

226

Pole Slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an angular velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and the corresponding direction is not blocked.

en07000004.vsd

Figure 132: Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the equivalent generators An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds the angle set for 'WarnAngle'. Slipping is detected when: a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.

When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone 1 when 'EnableZone1' is enabled (external device detects the direction of the centre of slipping). After the first slip, the signals 'Zone1' or 'Zone2' and depending on the direction of slip - either 'Generator' or 'Motor' are issued. Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.

227

Pole Slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of rotor movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite direction within ZA-ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip. The 'Trip1' tripping command and signal are generated after n1 slips in zone 1, providing the rotor angle is less than 'TripAngle'. The 'Trip2' signal is generated after n2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than 'TripAngle'. All signals are reset if: the direction of movement reverses the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or no rotor relative movement was detected during the time 't-Reset'.

Imin > 0.10 IBase

Vcos < 0.92 VBase

AND AND PICKUP

0.2 Slip.Freq. 8 Hz

startAngle ZONE1

Z cross line ZA - ZC

AND

Z cross line ZC - ZB

AND

ZONE2

Counter N1Limit a b ab AND TRIP1

tripAngle Counter N2Limit a b ab AND

OR

TRIP

TRIP2

en07000005_ansi.vsd

Figure 133: Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection

228

Pole Slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

12.3

Function block
PSP1PSPPPAM_78 I3P V3P BLOCK BLKGEN BLKMOTOR EXTZONE1 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 PICKUP ZONE1 ZONE2 GEN MOTOR SFREQ SLIPZOHM SLIPZPER UCOSKV UCOSPER en07000030_ansi.vsd

Figure 134: PSP function block

12.4

Input and output signals

Table 116: Input signals for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P V3P BLOCK BLKGEN BLKMOTOR EXTZONE1

Current group connection Voltage group connection Block of function Block operation in generating direction Block operation in motor direction Extension of zone1 with zone2 region

Table 117: Output signals for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 PICKUP ZONE1 ZONE2 GEN MOTOR

Common trip signal Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1 Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2 Common start signal First slip in zone1 region First slip in zone2 region Generator is faster then the system Generator is slower then the system

229

Pole Slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Signal

Description

SFREQ SLIPZOHM SLIPZPER VCOSKV VCOSPER

Slip frequency Slip impedance in ohms Slip impedance in percent of ZBase VCosPhi voltage in kV VCosPhi voltage in percent of VBase

12.5

Setting parameters
Table 118: Basic general settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

IBase

0.1 - 99999.9

0.1

3000.0

Base Current (primary phase current in Amperes) Base Voltage (primary phase-to-phase voltage in kV) Measuring mode (PosSeq, AB, BC, CA)

Vbase

0.1 - 9999.9

0.1

20.0

kV

MeasureMode

PosSeq AB BC CA No Yes

PosSeq

InvertCTcurr

No

Invert current direction

Table 119: Basic parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation OperationZ1 OperationZ2 ImpedanceZA ImpedanceZB ImpedanceZC

Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled 0.00 - 1000.00 0.00 - 1000.00 0.00 - 1000.00

0.01 0.01 0.01

Disabled Enabled Enabled 10.00 10.00 10.00

% % %

Operation Enable / Disable Operation Enable/Disable zone Z1 Operation Enable/Disable zone Z2 Forward impedance in % of Zbase Reverse impedance in % of Zbase Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase

230

Pole Slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

AnglePhi StartAngle TripAngle N1Limit N2Limit

72.00 - 90.00 0.0 - 180.0 0.0 - 180.0 1 - 20 1 - 20

0.01 0.1 0.1 1 1

85.00 110.0 90.0 1 3

Deg Deg Deg -

Angle of the slip impedance line Rotor angle for the pickup signal Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals Count limit for the trip1 signal Count limit for the trip2 signal

Table 120: Advanced parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

ResetTime

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Time without slip to reset all signals

12.6

Technical data
Table 121: Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)
Function Range or value Accuracy 2.0% of Vn/In 5.0 degrees 5.0 degrees

Impedance reach Characteristic angle Start and trip angles Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters

(0.001000.00)% of Zbase (72.0090.00) degrees (0.0180.0) degrees (1-20)

231

Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (SFCV)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

13

Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (SFCV)
Function block name: SFV-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ZCVPSOF

13.1

Introduction
Automatic switch onto fault logic is a function that gives an instantaneous trip at closing of breaker onto a fault. A dead line detection check is provided to activate the function when the line is dead. Mho distance protections can not operate for switch on to fault condition when the phase voltages are close to zero. An additional logic based on VI Level is used for this purpose.

13.2

Principle of operation
The switch-onto-fault function (SFV) can be activated externally by Breaker Closed Input or internally (automatically) by using VI Level Based Logic see figure 135. The activation from the DLD function is released if the internal signal DeadLine from the VILevel function is activated at the same time as the input ZACC is not activated during at least for a duration tDLD and the setting parameter AutoInit is set to On. When the setting AutoInit is Off the function is activated by an external binary input BC. To get a trip also one of the following operation modes must be selected by the parameter Mode: Mode = Impedance; trip is released if the input ZACC is activated (normal connected to non directional distance protection zone) Mode = VILevel; trip is released if VILevel detector is activated Mode = Both; trip is initiated based on impedance measured criteria or VILevel detection The internal signal DeadLine from the VILevel detector is activated if all three phase currents and voltages are below the setting IPhPickup and UVPickup. VI Level based measurement detects the switch onto fault condition even though the voltage is very low. The logic is based on current change for activation, current level and voltage level. The internal signal SOTFLevel is activated if the phase voltage and corresponding phase current is below the setting IPhPickup and UVPickup in any phase. First of all AutoInit= On is not needed (or in some cases not even wanted) for external activation and secondly the information is already present in the first sentence of "Principle of operation" The function is released during a settable time tSOTF.

232

Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (SFCV)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

The function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

BLOCK
AND 0
15

TRIP

BC

AutiInit=On ZACC
OR

AND

200 0

0 1000

IL1 IL2 IL3 VA VB VC IphPickup

VILevel detector

deadLine

SOTFVILevel

VphPickup

AND

Mode = Impedance

AND

Mode = UILevel
OR

OR

AND

Mode = UILvl&Imp

en07000084_ansi.vsd

233

Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (SFCV)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Figure 135: Simplified logic diagram for current and voltage based switch onto fault logic.

13.3

Function block
SFV1ZCVPSOF I3P V3P BLOCK BC ZACC TRIP

en06000459_ansi.vsd

Figure 136: SFV1 function block

13.4

Input and output signals

Table 122: Input signals for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P V3P BLOCK BC ZACC

Current DFT Voltage DFT Block of function External enabling of SOTF Distance zone to be accelerated by SOTF

Table 123: Output signals for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP

Trip by pilot communication scheme logic

13.5

Setting parameters
Table 124: Basic parameter group settings for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase VBase Mode

Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Impedance VILevel VILvl&Imp Disabled Enabled

1 0.05 -

Enabled 3000 400.00 VILevel

A kV -

Disable/Enable Operation Base current (A) Base voltage Ph-Ph (kV) Mode of operation of SOTF Function Automatic switchonto fault initialization

AutoInit

Disabled

234

Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (SFCV)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

IphPickup

1 - 100

20

%IB

Current level for detection of dead line in % of IBase Voltage level for detection of dead line in % of VBase Time delay for VI detection (s) Drop off delay time of switch onto fault function Delay time for activation of dead line detection

UVPickup

1 - 100

70

%VB

tDuration tSOTF tDLD

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.020 1.000 0.200

s s s

13.6

Technical data
Table 125: Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (PSOF)
Parameter Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of Vn 1.0% of In 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

Operate voltage, detection of dead line Operate current, detection of dead line

(1100)% of Vbase (1100)% of Ibase

Delay following dead line detection input before SOTF (0.00060.000) s function is automatically enabled Time period after circuit breaker closure in which SOTF function is active (0.00060.000) s

235

Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (SFCV)

Chapter 5 Impedance protection

236

About this chapter

Chapter 6 Current protection

Chapter 6 Current protection

About this chapter This chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions like Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection, Pole discrepancy protection and Residual overcurrent protection.

237

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)

Function block name: IOCxANSI number: 50 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

PHPIOC

3I>>

1.1

Introduction
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the fault current line at minimum source impedance.

1.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the IOC function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (50). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TR_x(x=A, B or C) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases. There is an operation mode (OpModeSel) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip. There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current (MultPU) via a binary input (MULTPU). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

1.3

Function block
IOC1PHPIOC_50 I3P BLOCK MULTPU TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C

en04000391_ansi.vsd

Figure 137: IOC function block

238

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)

Chapter 6 Current protection

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 126: Input signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P BLOCK MULTPU

Three phase current Block of function Enable current pickup value multiplier

Table 127: Output signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C

Trip signal from any phase Trip signal from phase A Trip signal from phase B Trip signal from phase C

1.5

Setting parameters
Table 128: Basic parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase OpModeSel Pickup

Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 2 out of 3 1 out of 3 1 - 2500

1 1

Off 3000 1 out of 3 200

A %IB

Disable/Enable Operation Base current Select operation mode (2 of 3 / 1 of 3) Phase current pickup in % of IBase

Table 129: Advanced parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

MultPU

0.5 - 5.0

0.1

1.0

Multiplier for operate current level

239

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)

Chapter 6 Current protection

1.6

Technical data
Table 130: Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In

Operate current

(1-2500)% of lbase > 95% 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset < 5% at = 100 ms

Reset ratio Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Dynamic overreach

240

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Function block name: TOCxANSI number: 51/67 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

OC4PTOC

3I> 4 4 alt

2.1

Introduction
The four step phase overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately. All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined time characteristic. The function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.

2.2

Principle of operation
The function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x an operation mode is set (DirModeSelx, x=1, 2, 3 or 4): Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. The protection design can be decomposed in four parts: The direction element, indicates the over current fault direction The harmonic Restraint Blocking function The 4 step over current function The Mode Selection

Note!
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, func parameter DirModeSelx shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

241

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

faultState I3P V3P

Direction Element

dirPhAFlt dirPhBFlt dirPhCFlt

4 step over current element One element for each step

faultState

PICKUP

TRIP

I3P

Harmonic Restraint Element

harmRestrBlock

enableDir Mode Selection enableStep1-4 DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740_ansi.vsd

Figure 138: Functional overview of TOC. A common setting for all steps, StPhaseSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a pre-processing function blocks. By a parameter setting within the general settings for the TOC function it is then possible to select type of measurement which shall be used by TOC function for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filer (RMS). If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values are fed to the TOC function. In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3, Pickup4). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase and step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal Pickup for this phase/step, the Pickup signal common for all three phases for this step and a common Pickup signal. It shall be noted that the selection of measured value (i.e. DFT or

242

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

RMS) do not influence the operation of directional part of TOC function. Service value for individually measured phase currents are available from the TOC function. This feature simplifies testing, commissioning and in service operational checking of the function. A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain current level. The function can use a directional option. The direction of the fault current is given as current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
Vref_AB = VA-VB Idir_AB = IA-IB Vref_BC = VB-VC Idir_BC = IB-IC Vref_CA = VCVA Idir_CA = IC-IA

Phase-ground short circuit:

Vref_A = VA Idir_A = IA Vref_B = VB Idir_B = IB Vref_C = VC IdirC = IC

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an angle window AngleROA.

243

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Reverse

Vref RCA

ROA

ROA

Forward

Idir

en05000745_ansi.vsd

Figure 139: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle sector from AngleRCA for directional borders. A minimum current for directional phase pickup current signal can be set: PUMinOpPhSel. If no blockings are given the pickup signals will start the timers of the step. The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type of inverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter 21 "Time inverse characteristics". Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter21 "Time inverse characteristics". There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (,MultiPUx, x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state. The function can be

244

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The pickup signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLK. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

2.3

Function block
TOC1OC4PTOC_51_67 I3P V3P BLOCK BLKTR BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK4 MULTPU1 MULTPU2 MULTPU3 MULTPU4 TRIP TRST1 TRST2 TRST3 TRST4 TR_A TR_B TR_C TRST1_A TRST1_B TRST1_C TRST2_A TRST2_B TRST2_C TRST3_A TRST3_B TRST3_C TRST4_A TRST4_B TRST4_C PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST2 PU_ST3 PU_ST4 PU_A PU_B PU_C PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C PU_ST3_A PU_ST3_B PU_ST3_C PU_ST4_A PU_ST4_B PU_ST4_C 2NDHARM DIR_A DIR_B DIR_C en06000187_ansi.vsd

Figure 140: TOC function block

245

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

2.4

Input and output signals

Table 131: Input signals for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P V3P BLOCK BLKTR BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK4 MULTPU1 MULTPU2 MULTPU3 MULTPU4

Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of trip Block of Step1 Block of Step2 Block of Step3 Block of Step4 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step2 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step3 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step4

Table 132: Output signals for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP TRST1 TRST2 TRST3 TRST4 TR_A TR_B TR_C TRST1_A TRST1_B TRST1_C TRST2_A TRST2_B TRST2_C TRST3_A TRST3_B TRST3_C TRST4_A TRST4_B TRST4_C PICKUP

Trip Common trip signal from step1 Common trip signal from step2 Common trip signal from step3 Common trip signal from step4 Trip signal from phase A Trip signal from phase B Trip signal from phase C Trip signal from step1 phase A Trip signal from step1 phase B Trip signal from step1 phase C Trip signal from step2 phase A Trip signal from step2 phase B Trip signal from step2 phase C Trip signal from step3 phase A Trip signal from step3 phase B Trip signal from step3 phase C Trip signal from step4 phase A Trip signal from step4 phase B Trip signal from step4 phase C General pickup signal

246

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Signal

Description

PU_ST1 PU_ST2 PU_ST3 PU_ST4 PU_A PU_B PU_C PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C PU_ST3_A PU_ST3_B PU_ST3_C PU_ST4_A PU_ST4_B PU_ST4_C 2NDHARM DIR_A DIR_B DIR_C

Common pickup signal from step1 Common pickup signal from step2 Common pickup signal from step3 Common pickup signal from step4 Pickup signal from phase A Pickup signal from phase B Pickup signal from phase C Pickup signal from step1 phase A Pickup signal from step1 phase B Pickup signal from step1 phase C Pickup signal from step2 phase A Pickup signal from step2 phase B Pickup signal from step2 phase C Pickup signal from step3 phase A Pickup signal from step3 phase B Pickup signal from step3 phase C Pickup signal from step4 phase A Pickup signal from step4 phase B Pickup signal from step4 phase C Block from second harmonic detection Direction for phase A Direction for phase B Direction for phase C

2.5

Setting parameters
Table 133: Basic general settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

MeasType

DFT RMS

DFT

Selection between DFT and RMS measurement

247

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 134: Basic parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase Vbase AngleRCA AngleROA NumPhSel

Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 40 - 65 40 - 89 Not Used 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500

1 0.05 1 1 -

Disabled 3000 400.00 55 80 1 out of 3

A kV Deg Deg -

Disable/Enable Operation Base current Base voltage Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Relay operation angle (ROA) Number of phases required for phase selection (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)

DirModeSel1

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 1 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

Characterist1

ANSI Def. Time

Pickup1

1000

%IB

Phase current operate level for step1 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1

t1 TD1

0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

0.001 0.01

0.000 0.05

s -

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

248

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

MultPU1 DirModeSel2

1.0 - 10.0 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500

0.1 -

2.0 Non-directional

Multiplier for current operate level for step 1 Directional mode of step 2 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)

Characterist2

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

Pickup2

500

%IB

Phase current operate level for step2 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Multiplier for current operate level for step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Directional mode of step 3 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)

t2 TD2

0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

0.001 0.01

0.400 0.05

s -

MultPU2 t2Min DirModeSel3

1.0 - 10.0 0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse

0.1 0.001 -

2.0 0.000 Non-directional

s -

249

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

Characterist3

ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 3

Pickup3

250

%IB

Phase current operate level for step3 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 3 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Multiplier for current operate level for step 3 Directional mode of step 4 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)

t3 TD3

0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

0.001 0.01

0.800 0.05

s -

t3Min MultPU3 DirModeSel4

0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse

0.001 0.1 -

0.000 2.0 Non-directional

s -

250

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

Characterist4

ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 4

Pickup4

175

%IB

Phase current operate level for step4 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 4 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 4 Multiplier for current operate level for step 4

t4 TD4

0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

0.001 0.01

2.000 0.05

s -

t4Min MultPU4

0.000 - 60.000 1.0 - 10.0

0.001 0.1

0.000 2.0

s -

251

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 135: Advanced parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

PUMinOpPhSel

1 - 100

%IB

Minimum current for phase selection in % of IBase Pickup of second harm restraint in % of Fundamental Selection of reset curve type for step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2

2ndHarmStab

5 - 100

20

%IB

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000

Instantaneous

tReset1

0.001

0.020

tPCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

tACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv1

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv1

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

HarmRestrain1 ResetTypeCrv2

Disabled Enabled Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000

Disabled Instantaneous

tReset2

0.001

0.020

tPCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

tACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

252

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

tBCrv2

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 3 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Enable block of step3 from harmonic restrain

tCCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv2

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

HarmRestrain2 ResetTypeCrv3

Disabled Enabled Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000

Disabled Instantaneous

tReset3

0.001

0.020

tPCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

tACrv3

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv3

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv3

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

HarmRestrain3

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

253

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

ResetTypeCrv4

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for step 4 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 4 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain

tReset4

0.001

0.020

tPCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

tACrv4

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv4

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv4

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

HarmRestrain4

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

2.6

Technical data
Table 136: Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51/67)
Function Setting range Accuracy 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In

Operate current

(1-2500)% of lbase > 95% (1-100)% of lbase (-70.0 -50.0) degrees (40.070.0) degrees (75.090.0) degrees (5100)% of fundamental (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s

Reset ratio Min. operating current Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Maximum forward angle Minimum forward angle Second harmonic blocking Independent time delay Minimum operate time

1.0% of In 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees 2.0% of In 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

254

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Function

Setting range

Accuracy

Inverse characteristics, see table 577 and table 578 Operate time, pickup function Reset time, pickup function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

19 curve types 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically

See table 577 and table 578 -

255

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)

Function block name: IEFxANSI number: 50N IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

EFPIOC

IN>>

3.1

Introduction
The single input overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping times to allow use for instantaneous earth fault protection, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance. The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.

3.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current the RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the IEF function. In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function (50N). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRIP. There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier ENMULT). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.

256

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

3.3

Function block
IEF1EFPIOC_50N I3P BLOCK BLKAR MULTPU TRIP

en06000269_ansi.vsd

Figure 141: IEF function block

3.4

Input and output signals

Table 137: Input signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P BLOCK BLKAR MULTPU

Three phase currents Block of function Block from auto recloser Enable current multiplier

Table 138: Output signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP

Trip signal

3.5

Setting parameters
Table 139: Basic parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase Pickup

Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 1 - 2500

1 1

Off 3000 200

A %IB

Disable/Enable Operation Base current Operate residual current level in % of IBase

Table 140: Advanced parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

MultPU

0.5 - 5.0

0.1

1.0

Multiplier for operate current level

257

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

3.6

Technical data
Table 141: Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In

Operate current

(1-2500)% of lbase > 95% 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset < 5% at = 100 ms

Reset ratio Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Dynamic overreach

258

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Function block name: TEFxANSI number:51N/ 67N IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

EF4PTOC

IN 4 4 alt

4.1

Introduction
The four step residual single input overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately. All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined characteristic. A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step. The function can be used as main protection for phase to ground faults. The function can be used to provide a system back-up e.g. in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure. Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication blocks into permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are available as well. The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input. The function can be selected to be voltage polarized, current polarized or dual polarized.

4.2

Principle of operation
This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool: 1. I3P, input for the function Operating Quantity. 2. V3P, input for the function Voltage Polarizing Quantity. 3. IP3P, input for the function Current Polarizing Quantity. These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the Configuration Tool within PCM.

259

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

4.2.1

Operating quantity within the function The function always uses Residual Current (i.e. 3Io) for its operating quantity. The residual current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF (Ground TOC) function input I3P). This dedicated IED 670 CT input can be for example connected to: parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases (well known Holm-Green connection). one single core balance, current instrument transformer (i.e. cable CT). one single current instrument transformer located between power system WYE point and ground (i.e. current transformer located in the neutral grounding of a WYE connected transformer winding). one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a protected object (i.e. current transformer located between two WYE points of double WYE shunt capacitor bank). 2. calculated from three phase current input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF (Ground TOC)function Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3Io from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

I op = 3 Io = IA + IB + IC
(Equation 58)

where: IA, IB, IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor magnitude is used within the TEF function to compare it with the set operation current value of the four stages (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal PICKUP for this step and a common PICKUP signal.
4.2.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function A polarizing quantity is used within the function in order to determine the direction of the ground fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse).

The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing. When Voltage Polarizing is selected the function will use the Residual Voltage (i.e. 3Vo) as polarizing quantity V3P. This voltage can be:

260

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

1. directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF function input V3P). This dedicated IED 670 VT input shall be then connected to open delta winding of a three phase main VT. 2. calculated from three phase voltage input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analogue Input V3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3Vo from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

VVPol = 3 Vo = VA + VB + VC
(Equation 59)

where: VA, VB, VC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

Note! In order to use this all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED 670 VT inputs.

The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived. This phasor is used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the direction of the ground fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter VpolMin. It shall be noted that 3Vo is used to determine the location of the ground fault.Thus the setting parameter ROT3V0, located under General Settings for Earth Fault function, has default value of ROT3V0=180 deg. This insures the required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the ground fault function. When Current Polarizing is selected the function will use the Residual Current (i.e. 3Io) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be: 1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF function input IP3P). This dedicated IED 670 CT input is then typically connected to one single current instrument transformer located between power system WYE point and ground (i.e. current transformer located in the WYE point of a WYE connected transformer winding). For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED 670 CT input can be connected to parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases (well known Holm-Green connection) 2. calculated from three phase current input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to (Ground TOC) function Analog Input IP3P is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3Io from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

261

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

I Pol = 3 Io = IA + IB + IC
where: IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents. However this option can be as well only used for some special line protection applications as explained in the Application Manual.

The residual polarizing current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. This phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent Zero Sequence Source Impedance in order to calculate equivalent Polarizing Voltage VIPol in accordance with the following formula:

VIPol = Zo S I Pol = ( RNPol + j XNPOL ) I Pol

(Equation 60)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the direction of the ground fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPollMin. When Dual Polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:

VTotPol = VVPol + VIPol = 3Vo + Zo S I Pol = 3Vo + ( RNPol + j XNPol ) I Pol

(Equation 61)

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage VTotPol will be used, together with the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the ground fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse).
4.2.3 External polarizing facility for Ground Fault function The individual stages within the function can be set as non-directional. When this setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKx(where x indicates the relevant step within the function) to provide external directional control (i.e. torque control) by for example using one of the following functions available in IED 670:

1. Distance protection directional unit. 2. Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose protection function.

262

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

4.2.4

Base quantities within the function The base quantities shall be entered as setting parameters for everyGF function. Base current shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes. Base voltage shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV. Internal Ground Fault function structure The function is internally divided into the following parts:

4.2.5

1. Four residual overcurrent stages. 2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent stages with integrated Directional Comparison stage for communication based ground fault protection schemes (i.e. permissive or blocking). 3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking during switching of parallel transformers. 4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence. Each part is described separately in the following paragraphs.
4.2.6 Four residual overcurrent stages Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity IOp (i.e. Residual Current) as measuring quantity. Every of the four residual overcurrent stage has the following built-in facilities:

Operating mode (i.e. Disabled / Non-directional / Forward / Reverse). By this parameter setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. It shall be noted that the directional decision (i.e. Forward/Reverse) is not made within residual overcurrent stage itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common Directional Supervision Element described in the next paragraph. Residual current pickup value. Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for ground fault function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to Chapter 21 "Time inverse characteristics" Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI Rest). By this parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For the complete list of available reset curves please refer to Chapter 21 "Time inverse characteristics" Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined. Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (i.e. Enable / Disable). By this parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the stage if the second harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the pre-set level. Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup value when function binary input MULTPUx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent stage is shown in the following figure:

263

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

BLKTR Characteristx=DefTime
a b AND a>b

|IOP| MULTPUx INxMult INxPU BLKx BLOCK 2ndH_BLOCK_Int HarmRestrain1=Disabled DirModex=Off DirModex=Non-directional DirModex=Forward DirModex=Reverse

tx 0

AND OR

TRINx

STINx

T F

Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

OR

OR

STAGEx_DIR_Int

FORWARD_Int

AND

OR

REVERSE_Int

AND

en07000064_ansi.vsd

Figure 142: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2 ,3 or 4 The function can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The pickup signals from the function for each stage can be blocked from the binary input BLKx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
4.2.7 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparision stage

Note!
It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent stages shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision element and the integrated directional comparison stage. The function has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current IOp is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways: 1. When polMethod=Voltage, VVPol will be used as polarizing quantity. 2. When polMethod=Current, VIPol will be used as polarizing quantity. 3. When polMethod=Dual, VTotPol will be used as polarizing quantity. The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown in the following figure, in order to determine the direction of the ground fault.

264

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Reverse Area

0.4*INDirPU

AngleRCA 0.4*INDirPU

Vpol=-3Vo

Forward Area Iop=3Io

en07000066_ansi.vsd

Figure 143: Operating characteristic for earth fault directional element Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are: Operating Current Pickup INDirPU . However it shall be noted that the directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as IOp cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger then 40% of INDirPU . Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of Forward & Reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional Comparison stage, built-in within directional supervision element, will set GF function output binary signal: 1. PUFW=1 when Operating Quantity magnitude is bigger than setting parameterINDirPU and directional supervision element detects fault in forward direction. 2. PUREV=1 when Operating Quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting parameter IN>DirINDirPU and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse direction. These signals shall be used for communication based ground fault teleprotection schemes (i.e. permissive or blocking).

265

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison stage is shown in the following figure:

|IOP|

a a>b b

REVERSE_Int

AND

PUREV

0.6

X
a a>b b

INDirPU

FORWARD_Int

AND

PUFW

0.4

FWD AND

PolMethod=Voltage PolMethod=Current PolMethod=Dual

OR

UPolMin
OR

VPol 0.0

IPolMin

T F

IOP VTotPol

IPol
RVS

Directional Characteristic

AngleRCA

FORWARD_Int

AND

REVERSE_Int

RNPol XNPol

COMPLEX NUMBER

VIPol 0.0

T F
STAGE1_DIR_Int STAGE2_DIR_Int STAGE3_DIR_Int STAGE4_DIR_Int

OR

BLOCK

AND

en07000067_ansi.vsd

Figure 144: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison stage
4.2.8 Second harmonic blocking element A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the pre-set level (defined by parameter setting 2ndHarmStab) any of the four residual overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active the ground fault function output signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value one.

266

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be required to stabilize the ground fault function during switching of parallel transformers in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers will be in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents will thus give a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current will however be significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, will be a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we will have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short period this current will however be small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking will reset. If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal will be latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level. This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-in feature will be activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled: 1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf=On. 2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70 ms. 3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set pickup value for one of the four residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting Use_PUValue it is possible to select which one of the four pickup values that will be used (i.e.Pickup1 or Pickup2 or Pickup3 or Pickup4). Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking signal will be sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by parameter setting Use_PUValue (see condition 3 above). Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in the following figure:

267

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

BLOCK 2ndHarmStab IOP

X
a b OR a>b

Extract second harmonic current component Extract fundamental current component

0-70ms 0 OR

2NDHARMD

q-1

AN D

OR

2ndH_BLOCK_Int

BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a b a>b

UseStartValue Pickup1 Pickup2 Pickup3 Pickup4

en07000068_ansi.vsd

Figure 145: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers feature
4.2.9 Switch on to fault feature Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic (SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the setting parameter t4U.

The SOTF logic uses the pickup signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The setting parameter SOTFSel can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current pickup from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 100 ms). The Under-Time logic always uses the pickup signal from the step 4. The Under-Time logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function. The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter ActUnder-

268

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Time. In case of a pickup from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discrepancy protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The Under-Time logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.

269

270
Setting tpulse posClsPls AND PwrMode tpulse SOTFActive operationMode AND AND closeCBPls OR AND AND TON IN Q PT ET step2Or3in AND Setting False PwrMode pickup Exec NOT tpulse posOpnPls cbClosed activationSOTF

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Exec

cbPosition

SOTF

Exec Exec Exec NOT Setting Setting PwrMode activationUnderTime switchOntoFaultDelayTime block

closeCB

PwrMode operate Exec

Under Time
tpulse UTimeActive

OR OR opnOrClsCBPls

onOrOffPos

Exec

AND Setting Exec Exec step4in AND harmonic2ndRestraint NOT cbSwitchingFaultDelayTime AND TON IN Q PT ET AND

Chapter 6 Current protection

en06000643_ansi.vsd

OR

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Figure 146: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features EF Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF function is shown in the following Figure 1:

Directional Check Element

signal to communication scheme

INPol 3V0 3I0

Direction Element

4 operatingCurrent ground FaultDirection angleValid

step over current element One element for each step

TRIP

DirModeSel enableDir

3I0

Harmonic Restraint Element

harmRestrBlock

or

pickup step 2 , 3 and 4 Blocking at parallel transformers SwitchOnToFault TRIP

DirModeSel Mode Selection enableDir 1-4 enableStep 1-4 DirectionalMode

CB pos or cmd

en 06000376 _ansi. vsd

Figure 147: Functional overview of Ground TOC

271

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

4.3

Function block
TEF1EF4PTOC_51N67N I3P V3P I3PPOL BLOCK BLKTR BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK4 MULTPU1 MULTPU2 MULTPU3 MULTPU4 52A CLOSECMD OPENCMD TRIP TRST1 TRST2 TRST3 TRST4 TRSOTF PICKUP PUST1 PUST2 PUST3 PUST4 PUSOTF PUFW PUREV 2NDHARMD

en06000424_ansi.vsd

Figure 148: TEF1 function block

4.4

Input and output signals

Table 142: Input signals for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P V3P I3PPOL BLOCK BLKTR BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK4 MULTPU1 MULTPU2 MULTPU3 MULTPU4 52a CLOSECMD OPENCMD

Current connection Polarizing voltage connection Polarizing current connection Block of function Block of trip Block of step 1 (Pickup and trip) Block of step 2 (Pickup and trip) Block of step 3 (Pickup and trip) Block of step 4 (Pickup and trip) When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step2 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step3 When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step4 Breaker position Breaker close command Breaker open command

272

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 143: Output signals for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP TRST1 TRST2 TRST3 TRST4 TRSOTF PICKUP PUST1 PUST2 PUST3 PUST4 PUSOTF PUFW PUREV 2NDHARMD

Trip Trip signal from step 1 Trip signal from step 2 Trip signal from step 3 Trip signal from step 4 Trip signal from switch onto fault function General pickup signal Pickup signal step 1 Pickup signal step 2 Pickup signal step 3 Pickup signal step 4 Pickup signal from switch onto fault function Forward directional pickup signal Reverse directional pickup signal 2nd harmonic block signal

4.5

Setting parameters
Table 144: Basic parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase VBase AngleRCA polMethod

Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 -180 - 180 Voltage Current Dual 1 - 100

1 0.05 1 -

Off 3000 400.00 65 Voltage

A kV Deg -

Disable/Enable Operation Base value for current settings Base value for voltage settings Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Type of polarization

VPolMin

%VB

Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of VBase Minimum current level for polarization in % of IBase Real part of source Z to be used for current polarisation

IPolMin RNPol

2 - 100 0.50 - 1000.00

1 0.01

5 5.00

%IB ohm

273

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

XNPol

0.50 - 3000.00

0.01

40.00

ohm

Imaginary part of source Z to be used for current polarisation Residual current level for Direction release in % of IBase Second harmonic restrain operation in % of IN magnitude Enable blocking at parallel transformers Current pickup blocking at parallel transf (step1, 2, 3 or 4) SOTF operation mode (Disabled/SOTF/Undertime/SOTF+undertime) Select signal that shall activate SOTF Selection of step used for SOTF Enable harmonic restrain function in SOTF Time delay for SOTF Switch-onto-fault active time Directional mode of step 1 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)

INDirPU

1 - 100

10

%IB

2ndHarmStab

5 - 100

20

BlkParTransf Use_PUValue

Disabled Enabled ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 Disabled SOTF UnderTime SOTF+UnderTime Open Closed CloseCommand Step 2 Step 3

Off IN4>

SOTF

Off

SOTFSel

Open

StepForSOTF

0.001 0.001 -

Step 2 Off 0.200 1.000 Non-directional

s s -

EnHarmRestSOTF Disabled Enabled tSOTF t4U DirModeSel1 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse

274

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

Characterist1

ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 1

Pickup1 t1 TD1

1 0.001 0.01

100 0.000 0.05

%IB s -

Residual current pickup for step 1 in % of IBase Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 2 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)

MultPU1

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t1Min HarmRestrain1 DirModeSel2

0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Enabled Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse

0.001 -

0.000 On Non-directional

s -

275

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

Characterist2

ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 2

Pickup2 t2 TD2

1 0.001 0.01

50 0.400 0.05

%IB s -

Residual current pickup for step 2 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 3 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)

MultPU2

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t2Min HarmRestrain2 DirModeSel3

0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Enabled Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse

0.001 -

0.000 On Non-directional

s -

276

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

Characterist3

ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 3

Pickup3 t3 TD3

1 0.001 0.01

33 0.800 0.05

%IB s -

Residual current pickup for step 3 in % of IBase Independent time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Enable block of step 3 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 4 (Disabled, Nondir, Forward, Reverse)

MultPU3

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t3Min HarmRestrain3 DirModeSel4

0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Enabled Disabled Non-directional Forward Reverse

0.001 -

0.000 On Non-directional

s -

277

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

Characterist4

ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 4

Pickup4 t4 TD4

1 0.001 0.01

17 1.200 0.05

%IB s -

Residual current pickup for step 4 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4 Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain

MultPU4

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t4Min HarmRestrain4

0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Enabled

0.001 -

0.000 On

s -

278

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 145: Advanced parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

ActUndrTimeSel

CB position CB command 0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000

CB position

Select signal to activate under time (CB Pos/CBCommand) Time delay for under time Reset curve type for step 1 Reset curve type for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Reset curve type for step 2 Reset curve type for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2

tUnderTime ResetTypeCrv1

0.001 -

0.300 Instantaneous

s -

tReset1 tPCrv1

0.001 0.001

0.020 1.000

s -

tACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv1

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv1

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000

Instantaneous

tReset2 tPCrv2

0.001 0.001

0.020 1.000

s -

tACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv2

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

279

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

tCCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Reset curve type for step 3 Reset curve type for step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Reset curve type for step 4 Reset curve type for step 4 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4

tPRCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv2

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

ResetTypeCrv3

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000

Instantaneous

tReset3 tPCrv3

0.001 0.001

0.020 1.000

s -

tACrv3

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv3

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv3

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

ResetTypeCrv4

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000

Instantaneous

tReset4 tPCrv4

0.001 0.001

0.020 1.000

s -

280

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

tACrv4

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve step 4

tBCrv4

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv4

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

4.6

Technical data
Table 146: Four step residual overcurrent protection (PEFM, 51N/67N)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In

Operate current

(1-2500)% of lbase > 95% (1100)% of lbase (0.000-60.000) s 19 curve types (5100)% of fundamental (-180 to 180) degrees (1100)% of Vbase (130)% of Ibase (0.503000.00) /phase 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically

Reset ratio Operate current for directional comparison Timers Inverse characteristics, see table 577 and table 578 Second harmonic restrain operation Relay characteristic angle Minimum polarizing voltage Minimum polarizing current RNS, XNS Operate time, pickup function Reset time, pickup function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

1.0% of In 0.5% 10 ms

See table 577 and table 578

2.0% of In 2.0 degrees 0.5% of Vn 0.25% of In

281

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Function block name: SDExANSI number: 67N IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

SDEPSDE

5.1

Introduction
In networks with high impedance grounding, the phase to ground fault current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for ground fault protection is that the magnitude of the phase to ground fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network. Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to ground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with an check of angle 3I0 and cos . Directional residual power can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to ground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual power component 3I0 3V0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. A normal undirectional residual current function can also be used and be with definite or inverse time delay. A back-up neutral point voltage function is also available for undirectional sensitive back-up protection. In an isolated network, i.e. the network is only coupled to ground via the capacitances between the phase conductors and ground, the residual current always has -90 phase shift compared to the reference residual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 in such a network. In resistance grounded networks or in Petersen coil, with a parallel resistor, the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the ground fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0. As the magnitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the selectivity of the ground fault protection is achieved by time selectivity. When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? We have the following facts to consider: Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better sensitivity

282

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance grounded networks, with large capacitive ground fault current In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used. Such a resistor will give a resistive ground fault current component of about 200 - 400 A at a zero resistive phase to ground fault. In such a system the directional residual power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time power characteristics.

5.2
5.2.1

Principle of operation
Introduction The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P and V3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from pre-processor blocks.

The sensitive directional ground fault protection has the following sub-functions included:
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 cos is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)-ang(Vref) ). Vref = -3V0 ejRCADir. RCAdir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance grounded network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCAdir is set equal to -90 in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0 cos gets larger than the set value.
Vref

RCA = 0, ROA = 90

3I0

= ang(3I0) - ang(3Vref) 3I0 cos -3V0=Vref

en06000648_ansi.vsd

Figure 149: RCADir set to 0

283

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Vref

RCA = -90, ROA = 90

3I0 3I0 cos = ang(3I0) ang(Vref) -3V0

en06000649_ansi.vsd

Figure 150: RCADir set to -90 For trip, both the residual current 3I0 cos and the release voltage 3V0, shall be larger than the set levels: INCosPhiPU and VNRelPU. Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR. When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time delay. There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle is larger than a set value as shown in the figure below. This is equivalent to blocking of the function if > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument transformers.

284

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

3I0

Operate area

3I0 cos ROA

-3V0=Vref

RCA = 0

en06000650_ansi.vsd

Figure 151: Characteristic with ROADir restriction The function will indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 cos ( + 180) the set value. It shall also be possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure below:

285

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Operate area

-3V0=Vref

RCA = 0

Instrument transformer angle error

RCAcomp Characteristic after angle compensation

3I0 (prim)

3I0 (to prot)

en06000651_ansi.vsd

Figure 152: Explanation of RCAcomp.

Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3V0 cos is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)ang(Vref) ). Vref = -3V0 ejRCA. The function operates when 3I03V0 cos gets larger than the set value.

For trip, both the residual power 3I0 3V0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3V0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN_PU, INRelPU and VNRelPU). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR. When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting TDSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as 3I03V0 cos ( + 180) 3 the set value. This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay.

286

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

The inverse time delay is defined as:

t inv =

TDSN (3I 0 3U 0 cos (reference)) 3I 0 3U 0 cos (measured)

(Equation 62)

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and The function will operate if the residual current is larger that the set value and the angle = ang(3I0)-ang(Vref) is within the sector RCADir ROADir
RCA = 0 ROA = 80

Operate area 3I0 80 -3V0

en06000652_ansi.vsd

Figure 153: Example of characteristic For trip, both the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3V0, shall be larger than the set levels (INDirPU and VNRelPU) and the angle shall be in the set sector (ROADir and RCADir). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR. When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The function indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir

287

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

This variant shall have definite time delay.

Directional functions For all the directional functions there are directional pickup signals PUFW: fault in the forward direction, and PUREV: Pickup in the reverse direction. Even if the directional function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse direction will give the pickup signal PUREV. Also if the directional function is set to operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will give the pickup signal PUFW. Non-directional ground fault current protection This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as alternative or back-up to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional ground fault current function via the input BLKNDN.

If available the non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country faults with high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive ground fault protection will saturate. This variant shall have the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay. The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3. For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set levels (INNonDirPU). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN. When the function is activated binary output signal PUNDIN is activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN are activated.
Residual overvoltage release and protection The directional function shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than a set level.

There shall also be a separate trip, with its own definite time delay, from this set voltage level. For trip, the residual voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the set levels (UN_PU). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKVN. When the function is activated binary output signal PUVN is activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tVNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 154.

288

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

INNonDirPU 0-t 0 UN_PU 0-t 0

OpMODE=INcosPhi

PUNDIN TRNDIN PUVN TRVN

Pickup_N

AND

INCosPhiPU

OpMODE=INVNCosPhi

AND INVNCosPhiPU

OR

AND
t

PUDIRIN

Phi in RCA +- ROA AND

TimeChar = DefTime

SN TimeChar = InvTime

AND

TRDIRIN

OpMODE=IN and Phi

AND

DirMode = Forw Forw DirMode = Rev Rev

AND

OR PUFW

AND

PUREV

en06000653_ansi.vsd

Figure 154: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive ground fault current protection

289

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

5.3

Function block
SDE1SDEPSDE_67N I3P V3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRDIR BLKNDN BLKVN TRIP TRDIRIN TRNDIN TRVN PICKUP PUDIRIN PUNDIN PUVN PUFW PUREV CND VNREL en07000032_ansi.vsd

Figure 155: SDE function block

5.4

Input and output signals

Table 147: Input signals for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P V3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRDIR BLKNDN BLKVN

Group signal for current Group signal for voltage Blocks all the outputs of the function Blocks the operate outputs of the function Blocks the directional operate outputs of the function Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs

Table 148: Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

IBase VBase SBase

1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 200000000.00

1 0.05 0.05

100 63.50 6350.00

A kV kVA

Base Current, in A Base Voltage, in kV Phase to Neutral Base Power, in kVA. IBase*VBase

290

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 149: Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation OpModeSel

Disabled Enabled 3I0Cosfi 3I03V0Cosfi 3I0 and fi Forward Reverse -179 - 180 -10.0 - 10.0 0 - 90

Disabled 3I0Cosfi

Operation Disabled/Enabled Selection of operation mode for protection Direction of operation forward or reverse Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg Relay characteristic angle compensation Relay open angle ROA used as release in phase mode, in deg Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over current, in %Ib Set level for 3I03V0cosFi, pickup inv time count, in %Sb Set level for directional residual over current prot, in %Ib Definite time delay directional residual overcurrent, in sec Reference value of res power for inverse time count, in %Sb Time multiplier setting for directional residual power mode Operation of non-directional residual overcurrent protection Set level for non directional residual over current, in %Ib Time delay for non-directional residual over current, in sec

DirMode RCADir RCAComp ROADir

1 0.1 1

Forward -90 0.0 90

Deg Deg Deg

INCosPhiPU

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

1.00

%IB

SN_PU

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

10.00

%SB

INDirPU

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

5.00

%IB

tDef

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

SRef

0.03 - 200.00

0.01

10.00

%SB

TDSN

0.00 - 2.00

0.01

0.10

OpINNonDir

Disabled Enabled 1.00 - 400.00

Disabled

INNonDirPU

0.01

10.00

%IB

tINNonDir

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

291

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

TimeChar

ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 2.00

IEC Norm. inv.

Operation curve selection for IDMT operation

t_MinTripDelay TDIN

0.001 0.01

0.040 1.00

s -

Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves, in sec IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current protection Operation of non-directional residual overvoltage protection Set level for non-directional residual over voltage, in %Vb Time delay for non-directional residual over voltage, in sec Residual release current for all directional modes, in %Ib Residual release voltage for all direction modes, in %Vb

OpVN

Disabled Enabled 1.00 - 200.00

Disabled

VN_PU

0.01

20.00

%VB

tVNNonDir

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

INRelPU

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

1.00

%IB

VNRelPU

0.01 - 200.00

0.01

3.00

%VB

Table 150: Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

RotResV

0 deg 180 deg

180 deg

Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if necessary

292

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 151: Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tReset tPCrv tACrv tBCrv tCCrv ResetTypeCrv

0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 Immediate IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 -

0.040 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 IEC Reset

s -

Time delay used for reset of definite timers, in sec Setting P for customer programmable curve Setting A for customer programmable curve Setting B for customer programmable curve Setting C for customer programmable curve Reset mode when current drops off. Setting PR for customer programmable curve Setting TR for customer programmable curve Setting CR for customer programmable curve

tPRCrv tTRCrv tCRCrv

0.001 0.001 0.1

0.500 13.500 1.0

5.5

Setting parameters
Table 152: Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

IBase VBase SBase

1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 200000000.00

1 0.05 0.05

100 63.50 6350.00

A kV kVA

Base Current, in A Base Voltage, in kV Phase to Neutral Base Power, in kVA. IBase*Vbase

293

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 153: Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation OpModeSel

Disabled Enabled 3I0Cosfi 3I03V0Cosfi 3I0 and fi Forward Reverse -179 - 180 -10.0 - 10.0 0 - 90

Off 3I0Cosfi

Operation Disable / Enable Selection of operation mode for protection Direction of operation forward or reverse Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg Relay characteristic angle compensation Relay open angle ROA used as release in phase mode, in deg Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over current, in %Ib Set level for 3I03V0cosFi, starting inv time count, in %Sb Set level for directional residual over current prot, in %Ib Definite time delay directional residual overcurrent, in sec Reference value of res power for inverse time count, in %Sb Time multiplier setting for directional residual power mode Operation of non-directional residual overcurrent protection Set level for non directional residual over current, in %Ib Time delay for non-directional residual over current, in sec

DirMode RCADir RCAComp ROADir

1 0.1 1

Forward -90 0.0 90

Deg Deg Deg

INCosPhiPU

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

1.00

%IB

SN_PU

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

10.00

%SB

INDirPU

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

5.00

%IB

tDef

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

SRef

0.03 - 200.00

0.01

10.00

%SB

TDSN

0.00 - 2.00

0.01

0.10

OpINNonDir

Disabled Enabled 1.00 - 400.00

Off

INNonDirPU

0.01

10.00

%IB

tINNonDir

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

294

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

TimeChar

ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 2.00

IEC Norm. inv.

Operation curve selection for IDMT operation

t_MinTripDelay TDIN

0.001 0.01

0.040 1.00

s -

Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves, in sec IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current protection Operation of non-directional residual overvoltage protection Set level for non-directional residual over voltage, in %Vb Time delay for non-directional residual over voltage, in sec Residual release current for all directional modes, in %Ib Residual release voltage for all direction modes, in %Vb

OpVN

Disabled Enabled 1.00 - 200.00

Off

VN_PU

0.01

20.00

%VB

tVNNonDir

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

INRelPU

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

1.00

%IB

VNRelPU

0.01 - 200.00

0.01

3.00

%VB

Table 154: Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

RotResV

0 deg 180 deg

180 deg

Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if necessary

295

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 155: Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tReset tPCrv tACrv tBCrv tCCrv ResetTypeCrv

0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0 Immediate IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 100.000 0.1 - 10.0

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1 -

0.040 1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0 IEC Reset

s -

Time delay used for reset of definite timers, in sec Setting P for customer programmable curve Setting A for customer programmable curve Setting B for customer programmable curve Setting C for customer programmable curve Reset mode when current drops off. Setting PR for customer programmable curve Setting TR for customer programmable curve Setting CR for customer programmable curve

tPRCrv tTRCrv tCRCrv

0.001 0.001 0.1

0.500 13.500 1.0

296

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

5.6

Technical data
Table 156: Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In

Operate level for 3I0 cos directional residual overcurrent

(0.25-200.00)% of lbase At low setting: (2.5-10) mA (10-50) mA

1.0 mA 0.5 mA 1.0% of Sn at S Sn 1.0% of S at S > Sn

Operate level for 3I03V0 cos directional residual power

(0.25-200.00)% of Sbase At low setting: (0.25-5.00)% of Sbase

10% of set value 1.0% of In at In 1.0% of I at I > In

Operate level for 3I0 and residual overcurrent

(0.25-200.00)% of Ibase At low setting: (2.5-10) mA (10-50) mA

1.0 mA 0.5 mA 1.0% of I at I In 1.0% of I at I > In

Operate level for non directional overcurrent

(1.00-400.00)% of Ibase At low setting: (10-50) mA

1.0 mA 0.5% of Vn at V Vn 0.5% of V at V > Vn 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In

Operate level for non directional residual overvoltage Residual release current for all directional modes

(1.00-200.00)% of Vbase (0.25-200.00)% of Ibase At low setting: (2.5-10) mA (10-50) mA

1.0 mA 0.5 mA 0.5% of Vn at V Vn 0.5% of V at > Vn

Residual release voltage for all directional modes Reset ratio Timers Inverse characteristics, see table 577 and table 578 Relay characteristic angle RCA

(0.01-200.00)% of Vbase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s 19 curve types (-179 to 180) degrees

0.5% 10 ms

See table 577 and table 578

2.0 degrees

297

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Function

Range or value

Accuracy 2.0 degrees

Relay open angle ROA Operate time, non directional residual over current

(0-90) degrees 60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Reset time, non directinal residual 60 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset over current Operate time, pickup function Reset time, pickup function 150 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 50 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset

298

Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)

Function block name: THLxANSI number: 49 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

LPTTR

6.1

Introduction
The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits have generated a need of a thermal overload function also for power lines. A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the introduction of the thermal overload function can allow the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits. The three phase current measuring function has an I2t characteristic with settable time constant and a thermal memory. An alarm pickup gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the line will be tripped.

6.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the THL function. From the largest of the three phase currents a final temperature is calculated according to the expression:

final

I = I ref

T ref
(Equation 63)

where: I Iref Tref is the largest phase current, is a given reference current and is steady state temperature corresponding to Iref

299

Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)

Chapter 6 Current protection

The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level a pickup output signal PICKUP is activated. The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

t n = n 1 + ( final n1 ) 1 e
(Equation 64)

where:
n n-1 final t

is the calculated present temperature, is the calculated temperature at the previous time step, is the calculated final temperature with the actual current, is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The ambient temperature can be given a constant value. The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure. When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set. There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current. This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature:

operate toperate = ln final final n

(Equation 65)

The calculated time to trip can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure TTRIP. After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection function, there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp. The time to lockout release is calculated, i.e. a calculation of the cooling time to a set value. The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.

300

Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)

Chapter 6 Current protection

lockout _ release tlockout _ release = ln final final n

(Equation 66)

Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature. The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure. In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option the input MULTPU must be activated. The function has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.

301

Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Final Temp > TripTemp

PICKUP

Calculation of actual temperature

actual temperature

I3P

Calculation of final temperature Actual Temp > AlarmTemp ALARM

TRIP Actual Temp > TripTemp S R Actual Temp < Recl Temp

LOCKOUT

Calculation of time to trip

time to trip

Calculation of time to reset of lockout

time to reset of lockout

en05000736_ansi.vsd

Figure 156: Functional overview of THL

302

Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)

Chapter 6 Current protection

6.3

Function block
THL1LPTTR_26 I3P BLOCK BLKTR MULTPU AMBTEMP SENSFLT RESET TRIP PICKUP ALARM LOCKOUT

en04000396_ansi.vsd

Figure 157: THL function block

6.4

Input and output signals

Table 157: Input signals for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P BLOCK BLKTR MULTPU AMBTEMP SENSFLT RESET

Group connection Block of function Block of trip Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor Validity status of ambient temperature sensor Reset of internal thermal load counter

Table 158: Output signals for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP PICKUP ALARM LOCKOUT

Trip Pickup Signal Alarm signal Lockout signal

303

Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)

Chapter 6 Current protection

6.5

Setting parameters
Table 159: Basic parameter group settings for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase TRef

Disabled Enabled 0 - 99999 0 - 600

1 1

Off 3000 90

A Deg

Disable/Enable Operation Base current in A End temperature rise above ambient of the line when loaded with IRef The load current (in % of IBase) leading to TRef temperature Current multiplier when function is used for two or more lines Time constant of the line in minutes. Temperature level for pickup (alarm) Temperature level for trip Temperature for reset of lockout after trip Operate pulse length. Minimum one execution cycle External temperature sensor availiable Ambient temperature used when AmbiSens is set to Off. Temperature raise above ambient temperature at startup

IRef

0 - 400

100

%IB

IMult

1-5

Tau AlarmTemp TripTemp ReclTemp tPulse

0 - 1000 0 - 200 0 - 600 0 - 600 0.05 - 0.30

1 1 1 1 0.01

45 80 90 75 0.1

Min Deg Deg Deg s

AmbiSens DefaultAmbTemp

Disabled Enabled -50 - 250

Off 20

Deg

DefaultTemp

-50 - 600

50

Deg

304

Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)

Chapter 6 Current protection

6.6

Technical data
Table 160: Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of In 1.0C

Reference current Pickup temperature reference Operate time:

(0-400)% of Ibase (0-400)C Ip = load current before overload occurs

2 2

IEC 60255-8, class 5 + 200 ms

I Ip t = ln 2 I Ib 2
I = Imeasured Alarm temperature Trip temperature Reset level temperature

Time constant = (01000) minutes

(0-200)C (0-400)C (0-400)C

2.0% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip

305

Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Function block name: BFPxANSI number: 50BF IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

CCRBRF

3I>BF

7.1

Introduction
The circuit breaker failure function ensures fast back-up tripping of surrounding breakers. The breaker failure protection operation can be current based, contact based or adaptive combination between these two principles. A current check with extremely short reset time is used as a check criteria to achieve a high security against unnecessary operation. The breaker failure protection can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single pole tripping applications. For the three-phase version of the breaker failure protection the current criteria can be set to operate only if two out of four e.g. two phases or one phase plus the residual current pickups. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip command. The function can be programmed to give a single- or three phase re-trip of the own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing.

7.2

Principle of operation
The breaker failure protection function is initiated from protection trip command, either from protection functions within the protection terminal or from external protection devices. The initiate signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective initiate signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current level. The initiate signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. If this initiate signal gets high at the same time as current is detected through the circuit breaker, the back-up trip timer is started. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by the function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adapted algorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, i.e. fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activated after an added settable time after the first back-up trip.

306

Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Further the following possibilities are available: The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker. In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection. The current detection for the residual current can be set different from the setting of phase current detection. It is possible to have different re-trip time delays for single phase faults and for multi-phase faults. The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this option activated for small load currents only. It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

Current AND BLOCK tp AND 0-t1 0 TRRET_A

PU_IA AND BFI_3P BFI_A OR

Current & Contact

OR TRRET

OR 52a_A AND Contact B C AND

en05000832_ansi.vsd

Figure 158: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip function

307

Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Chapter 6 Current protection

1 out of 3 Current AND BLOCK 1 out of 4 AND OR OR OR 1 of 4 OR 1 of 3

PU_A AND BFI_3P BFI_A

Current & Contact

CBCLDL1

AND Contact

AND AND

Current AND BLOCK Current & Contact AND

PU_B AND BFI_3P BFI_B OR

AND

AND

OR AND AND Contact AND Current AND BLOCK Current & Contact AND OR AND 2 out of 4 OR 2 of 4 AND

CBCLDL2

PU_C AND BFI_3P BFI_C OR

CBCLDL3

AND Contact

AND

Current AND BLOCK

PU_N AND BFI_3P en05000485_ansi.vsd

308

Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Figure 159: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function Internal logical signals PU_A, PU_B, PU_C have logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter Pickup_PH. Internal logical signal PU_N has logical value 1 when neutral current has magnitude larger than setting parameter Pickup_N.

More than 1 current high AND 1 of 3 0-t2MPh 0 tp OR TRBU

1 of 4

OR

0-t2 0 0-t3 0

tp TRBU2

2 of 3 AND 52FAIL 0-CBALARM 0 CBALARM

en06000223_ansi.vsd

Figure 160: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function

7.3

Function block
BFP1CCRBRF_50BF I3P BLOCK BFI_3P BFI_A BFI_B BFI_C 52A_A 52A_B 52A_C 52FAIL TRBU TRBU2 TRRET TRRET_A TRRET_B TRRET_C CBALARM

en06000188_ansi.vsd

Figure 161: BFP function block

309

Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Chapter 6 Current protection

7.4

Input and output signals

Table 161: Input signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P BLOCK BFI_3P BFI_A BFI_B BFI_C 52a_A 52a_B 52a_C 52FAIL

Current connection Block of function Three phase breaker failure initiation Phase A breaker failure initiation Phase B breaker failure initiation Phase C breaker failure initiation Circuit breaker closed in phase A Circuit breaker closed in phase B Circuit breaker closed in phase C CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantanously.

Table 162: Output signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block
Signal Description

TRBU TRBU2 TRRET TRRET_A TRRET_B TRRET_C CBALARM

Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection function Retrip by breaker failure protection function Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase A Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase B Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase C Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

7.5

Setting parameters
Table 163: Basic parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase FunctionMode

Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 Current Contact Current&Contact 2 out of 4 1 out of 3 1 out of 4 Retrip Off CB Pos Check No CBPos Check

1 -

Disabled 3000 Current

A -

Disable/Enable Operation Base current Detection principle for back-up trip Back-up trip mode

BuTripMode

1 out of 3

RetripMode

Retrip Off

Operation mode of re-trip logic

310

Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

Pickup_PH Pickup_N t1 t2 t2MPh tPulse

5 - 200 2 - 200 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

10 10 0.000 0.150 0.150 0.200

%IB %IB s s s s

Phase current pickup in % of IBase Operate residual current level in % of IBase Time delay of re-trip Time delay of back-up trip Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase pickup Trip pulse duration

Table 164: Advanced parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Pickup_BlkCont

5 - 200

20

%IB

Current for blocking of CB contact operation in % of IBase Additional time delay to 27P2TDLY for a second back-up trip Time delay for CB faulty signal

t3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.030

tCBAlarm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

7.6

Technical data
Table 165: Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In

Operate phase current

(5-200)% of lbase > 95% (2-200)% of lbase > 95% (5-200)% of lbase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s

Reset ratio, phase current Operate residual current

1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio, residual current Phase current pickup for blocking of contact function Reset ratio Timers

1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically Reset time for current detection 15 ms maximum

311

Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)

Function block name: STB-ANSI number: 50STB IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

STBPTOC

3I>STUB

8.1

Introduction
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked. The stub protection covers the zone between the current transformers and the open disconnector. The three phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a 89b auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.

8.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the STB function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the functionIPickup. If a phase current is larger than the set operation current the signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, in combination with the release signal from line disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer of this function. The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input. If the fault current remains during the set timer delayt the function gives a trip signal.

312

Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)

Chapter 6 Current protection

STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

BLOCK TRIP

PU_A OR

AND

PU_B

PU_C ENABLE

en05000731_ansi.vsd

Figure 162: Simplified logic diagram for the stub protection

8.3

Function block
STB1STBPTOC_50STB I3P BLOCK BLKTR ENABLE TRIP PICKUP

en05000678_ansi.vsd

Figure 163: STB function block

8.4

Input and output signals

Table 166: Input signals for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P BLOCK BLKTR ENABLE

Group signal for current input Block of function Block of trip Enable stub protection usually with open disconnect switch (89b)

313

Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 167: Output signals for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP PICKUP

Trip Pickup

8.5

Setting parameters
Table 168: Basic parameter group settings for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase EnableMode

Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 Release Continuous 1 - 2500

1 -

Off 3000 Release

A -

Disable/Enable Operation Base current Enable stub protection usually with open disconnect switch (89b) Pickup current level in % of IBase

IPickup

200

%IB

Table 169: Advanced parameter group settings for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay

8.6

Technical data
Table 170: Stub protection (PTOC, 50STB)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at I > In

Operate current

(1-2500)% of Ibase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically

Reset ratio Definite time Operate time, pickup function Reset time, pickup function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

0.5% 10 ms

314

Pole discrepancy protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Pole discrepancy protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Function block name: PDx-ANSI number: 50PD IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

CCRPLD

PD

9.1

Introduction
Single pole operated circuit breakers can due to electrical or mechanical failures end up with the different poles in different positions (close-open). This can cause negative and zero sequence currents which gives thermal stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current functions. Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct the positions. If the situation warrants, the remote end as well as the local bus breakers can be intertripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation. The pole discrepancy function operates based on information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase current when required.

9.2

Principle of operation
The detection of pole discrepancy can be made in two different ways. If the contact based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discrepancy is indicated. This is shown in figure 164

C.B.

52a 52a 52a 52b 52b 52b

poleDiscrepancy Signal from C.B.

ANSI_en05000287.vsd

Figure 164: Pole discrepancy external detection logic

315

Pole discrepancy protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Chapter 6 Current protection

This single binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set delay. There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED. This is shown in figure 165

C.B.

52a 52a 52a + 52b 52b 52b

poleOneClosed from C.B. poleTwoClosed from C.B. poleThreeClosed from C.B. poleOneOpened from C.B. poleTwoOpened from C.B. poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288_ansi.vsd

Figure 165: Pole discrepancy signals for internal logic In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole discrepancy the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. Pole discrepancy can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the PD (RPLD) function. The difference between the smallest and the largest phase current is derived. If this difference is larger than a set ratio the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. The current based pole discrepancy function can be set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command. The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing function, so that the pole discrepancy function can be blocked during sequences with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used. The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based pole discrepancy function is shown in figure 166.

316

Pole discrepancy protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Chapter 6 Current protection

BLOCK BLKDBYAR OR

PolPosAuxCont 52b_A 52a_A 52b_B 52a_B 52b_C 52a_C AND Pole Disc repancy detection 150 ms AND OR PD signal from CB EXTPDIND CLOSECMD OPENCMD OR AND Unsymmetry current detection en 05000747 _ansi.vsd AND 0- t 0 TRIP

t+ 200 ms

Figure 166: Simplified block diagram of pole discrepancy function - contact and current based The pole discrepancy function is disabled if: The terminal is in TEST mode (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockPD=Yes) The input signal BLOCK is high The input signal BLKDBYAR is high

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discrepancy function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discrepancy operation when a single phase autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal AR01-1PT1 if the autoreclosing function is integrated in the terminal; if the autoreclosing function is an external device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input of the terminal and this binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress from the external autoreclosing device. If the pole discrepancy function is enabled, then two different criteria will generate a trip signal TRIP: Pole discrepancy signalling from the circuit breaker.

317

Pole discrepancy protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Chapter 6 Current protection

9.2.1

Unsymmetrical current detection.

Pole discrepancy signalling from circuit breaker If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close (pole discrepancy status), then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole discrepancy signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval t (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the pole discrepancy function. Unsymmetrical current detection Unsymmetrical current detection is based on checking that:

9.2.2

any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymPU of the highest current in the remaining two phases the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelPU of the rated current

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay t (0-60 s) if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions. The pole discrepancy function is informed that a trip or close command has been given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field (i.e. from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (i.e. close command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

9.3

Function block
PD01CCRPLD_52PD I3P BLOCK BLKDBYAR CLOSECMD OPENCMD EXTPDIND 52B_A 52A_A 52B_B 52A_B 52B_C 52A_C TRIP PICKUP

en06000275_ansi.vsd

Figure 167: PD function block

318

Pole discrepancy protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Chapter 6 Current protection

9.4

Input and output signals

Table 171: Input signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block
Signal Description

I3P BLOCK BLKDBYAR CLOSECMD OPENCMD EXTPDIND 52b_A 52a_A 52b_B 52a_B 52b_C 52a_C

Group signal for current input Block of function Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing cycle Close command to CB Open command to CB Pole discrepancy signal from CB logic Phase A Pole opened indication from CB Phase A Pole closed indication from CB Phase B Pole opened indication from CB Phase B Pole closed indication from CB Phase C Pole opened indication from CB Phase C Pole closed indication from CB

Table 172: Output signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP PICKUP

Trip signal to CB Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

9.5

Setting parameters
Table 173: Basic parameter group settings for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase

Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999

Off 3000

Disable/Enable Operation Base current

319

Pole discrepancy protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

tTrip ContactSel

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.300 Off

s -

Time delay between trip condition and trip signal Contact function selection Current function selection

Disabled PD signal from CB Pole pos aux cont. Disabled CB oper monitor Continuous monitor 0 - 100 -

CurrentSel

Off

CurrUnsymPU

80

Unsym magn of lowest phase current compared to the highest. Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase

CurrRelPU

0 - 100

10

%IB

9.6

Technical data
Table 174: Pole discrepancy protection (RPLD, 52PD)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of In 0.5% 10 ms

Operate current Time delay

(0100)% of Ibase (0.000-60.000) s

320

Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

10

Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Function block name: ANSI number: 32 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

P><

10.1

Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy. Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system. Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself. Figure 168 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.

Underpower Relay Q

Overpower Relay Q

Operate Line Margin

Operate Line Margin

Operating point without turbine torque

Operating point without turbine torque

en06000315.vsd

Figure 168: Protection with underpower relay and overpower relay

321

Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

10.2

Principle of operation
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 169. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current phasors Complex power calculation

P Derivation of S(composant) in Char angle S(angle) S(angle) < Power1 t 0 Trip1 Pickup1

Chosen voltage phasors

S(angle) < Power2

t 0

Trip2 Pickup2

P = POWRE Q = POWIM

en06000438_ansi.vsd

Figure 169: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 175.

322

Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 175: Complex power calculation

Set value: measureMode Formula used for complex power calculation

A, B, C

S = V A I A* + VB I B* + VC I C *

Arone

S = VAB I A* VBC IC *

PosSeq

S = 3 VPosSeq I PosSeq*

AB

S = VAB ( I A* I B* )

BC

S = VBC ( I B* IC * )

CA

S = VCA ( I C * I A* )

S = 3 V A I A*

S = 3 VB I B*

S = 3 VC I C *

NegSeq

S = 3 VNegSeq I NegSeq *

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and fault recording. The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.

323

Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated. To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)). For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 pu of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2) For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 * Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value. If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out ant that the timer of the stage will reset.
10.2.1 Low pass filtering In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

S = k SOld + (1 k ) SCalculated
(Equation 67)

Where S Sold SCalculated k is a new measured value to be used for the protection function is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.14.
10.2.2 Calibration of analog inputs Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 170.

324

Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

% of In -10 IMagComp5 IMagComp30 IMagComp100

Magnitude compensation

Measured current 5 30 0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant 100 % of In

-10

Degrees -10 IAngComp30 IAngComp5 IAngComp100

Angle compensation

Measured current 5 -10 30 100 % of In

en05000652_ansi.vsd

Figure 170: Calibration curves The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals. Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as a MW value: P, or in percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as a Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.

325

Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

10.3

Function block
GUP1GUPPDUP_37 I3P V3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 PICKUP PICKUP1 PICKUP2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT en07000027_ansi.vsd

Figure 171: GUP function block

10.4

Input and output signals

Table 176: Input signals for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P V3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2

Current group connection Voltage group connection Block of function Block of stage 1 Block of stage 2

Table 177: Output signals for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 PICKUP PICKUP1 PICKUP2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT

Common trip signal Trip of stage 1 Trip of stage 2 Common pickup Pickup of stage 1 Pickup of stage 2 Active Power in MW Active power in % of SBASE Reactive power in Mvar Reactive power in % of SBASE

326

Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

10.5

Setting parameters
Table 178: Basic general settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

IBase VBase Mode

1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 A, B, C Arone Pos Seq AB BC CA A B C

1 0.05 -

3000 400.00 Pos Seq

A kV -

Current-Reference (primary current A) Voltage-Reference (primary voltage kV) Selection of measured current and voltage

Table 179: Basic parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation OpMode1 Power1 Angle1 TripDelay1 DropDelay1 OpMode2 Power2 Angle2 TripDelay2 DropDelay2

Disabled Enabled Disabled UnderPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Disabled UnderPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000

0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001

Off UnderPower 1.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 UnderPower 1.0 0.0 1.000 0.060

%SB Deg s s %SB Deg s s

Operation Disable / Enable Operation mode 1 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 1 Trip delay for stage 1 Drop delay for stage 1 Operation mode 2 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 2 Trip delay for stage 2 Drop delay for stage 2

327

Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 180: Advanced parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

TD

0.00 - 0.99

0.01

0.00

Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, P and Q Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of In Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of In Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of In Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Vn Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Vn Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Vn Angle calibration for current at 5% of In Angle calibration for current at 30% of In Angle calibration for current at 100% of In

Hysteresis1 Hysteresis2 IMagComp5 IMagComp30 IMagComp100

0.2 - 5.0 0.2 - 5.0 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.001

0.5 0.5 0.000 0.000 0.000

pu pu % % %

VMagComp5 VMagComp30

-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000

% %

VMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000 0.000

Deg Deg Deg

10.6

Technical data
Table 181: Directional underpower protection (PDUP)
Function Range or value Accuracy

Power level

(0.0500.0)% of Sbase At low setting: (0.5-2.5)% of Sbase (2.5-10)% of Sbase

< 0.5% of Sbase with calibration

< 20% of set value < 10% of set value 2 degrees

0.5% 10 ms

Characteristic angle Timers

(-180.0180.0) degrees (0.00-6000.00) s

328

Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

11

Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Function block name: GOPx ANSI number: 32 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

P><

GOPPDOP

11.1

Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy. Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system. Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself. Figure 172 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.

Underpower Relay Q

Overpower Relay Q

Operate Line Margin

Operate Line Margin

Operating point without turbine torque

Operating point without turbine torque

en06000315.vsd

Figure 172: Reverse power protection with underpower relay and overpower relay

329

Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

11.2

Principle of operation
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 173. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current phasors Complex power calculation

P Derivation of S(composant) in Char angle S(angle) S(angle) > Power1 t 0 Trip1 Pickup1

Chosen voltage phasors

S(angle) > Power2

t 0

Trip2 Pickup2

P = POWRE Q = POWIM

en06000567_ansi.vsd

Figure 173: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 182.

330

Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 182: Complex power calculation

Set value: measureMode Formula used for complex power calculation

A,B,C

S = V A IA + V B IB + V C IC
S = V AB I A V BC I C
* *

Arone

PosSeq

S = 3 V PosSeq I PosSeq
*

A,B

S = V AB (I A I B )

B,C

S = V BC (I B I C )

C,A

S = V CA (I C I A )

S = 3 V A IA

S = 3 V B IB

S = 3 V C IC

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and fault recording. The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated. The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

331

Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) drop-power1(2)). For generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 pu of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) Hysteresis1(2) For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 * Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value. If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out ant that the timer of the stage will reset.
11.2.1 Low pass filtering In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

S = k SOld + (1 k ) SCalculated
(Equation 68)

Where S Sold SCalculated

is a new measured value to be used for the protection function is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.14.
11.2.2 Calibration of analog inputs Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 174.

332

Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

% of In -10 IMagComp5 IMagComp30 IMagComp100

Magnitude compensation

Measured current 5 30 0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant 100 % of In

-10

Degrees -10 IAngComp30 IAngComp5 IAngComp100

Angle compensation

Measured current 5 -10 30 100 % of In

en05000652_ansi.vsd

Figure 174: Calibration curves The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals. Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as a MW value: P, or in percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as a Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.

333

Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

11.3

Function block
GOP1GOPPDOP_32 I3P V3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 PICKUP PICKUP1 PICKUP2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT en07000028_ansi.vsd

Figure 175: GOP function block

11.4

Input and output signals

Table 183: Input signals for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P V3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2

Current group connection Voltage group connection Block of function Block of stage 1 Block of stage 2

Table 184: Output signals for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 PICKUP PICKUP1 PICKUP2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT

Common trip signal Trip of stage 1 Trip of stage 2 Common pickup Pickup of stage 1 Pickup of stage 2 Active Power in MW Active power in % of SBASE Reactive power in Mvar Reactive power in % of SBASE

334

Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

11.5

Setting parameters
Table 185: Basic general settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

IBase VBase Mode

1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 A, B, C Arone Pos Seq AB BC CA A B C

1 0.05 -

3000 400.00 Pos Seq

A kV -

Current-Reference (primary current A) Voltage-Reference (primary voltage kV) Selection of measured current and voltage

Table 186: Basic parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation OpMode1 Power1 Angle1 TripDelay1 DropDelay1 OpMode2 Power2 Angle2 TripDelay2 DropDelay2

Disabled Enabled Disabled OverPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Disabled OverPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000

0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001

Off OverPower 120.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 OverPower 120.0 0.0 1.000 0.060

%SB Deg s s %SB Deg s s

Operation Disable / Enable Operation mode 1 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 1 Trip delay for stage 1 Drop delay for stage 1 Operation mode 2 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 2 Trip delay for stage 2 Drop delay for stage 2

335

Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 187: Advanced parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

0.00 - 0.99

0.01

0.00

Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, P and Q Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of Sbase Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of Sbase Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of In Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of In Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of In Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Vn Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Vn Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Vn Angle calibration for current at 5% of In Angle calibration for current at 30% of In Angle calibration for current at 100% of In

Hysteresis1 Hysteresis2 IMagComp5 IMagComp30 IMagComp100

0.2 - 5.0 0.2 - 5.0 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.001

0.5 0.5 0.000 0.000 0.000

pu pu % % %

VMagComp5 VMagComp30

-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000

% %

VMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000 0.000

Deg Deg Deg

11.6

Technical data
Table 188: Directional overpower protection (PDOP)
Function Range or value Accuracy

Power level

(0.0500.0)% of Sbase At low setting: (0.5-2.5)% of Sbase (2.5-10)% of Sbase

< 0.5% of Sbase with calibration

< 20% of set value < 10% of set value 2 degrees

0.5% 10 ms

Characteristic angle Timers

(-180.0180.0) degrees (0.00-6000.00) s

336

Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)

Chapter 6 Current protection

12

Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)

Function block name: BRC ANSI number: 46 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

BRCPTOC

12.1

Introduction
Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition. The broken conductor monitoring function (BRC), consisting of continuous current unsymmetry check on the line where the terminal is connected will give alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.

12.2

Principle of operation
The BRCPTOC function detects a broken conductor condition by detecting the unsymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring elements continuously measure the three-phase currents. The current unsymmetry signal output PICKUP is set on if : The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Pickup_ub of the highest phase current The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value Pickup_PH

The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines. If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line the parallel line will experience an increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first two conditions being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set time tOper the TRIP output is activated. The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in figure 176 The function is disabled (blocked) if: The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu (BlockBRC=Yes). The input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. The output trip signal TRIP is a three phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.

337

Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)

Chapter 6 Current protection

TEST TEST-ACTIVE AND BlockBRC = Yes BRC--START BRC--BLOCK Unsymmetrical Current Detection PU_ub IA<50%Pickup_PN IB<50%Pickup_PN IC<50%Pickup_PN
en07000123.vsd

OR

Function Enable AND 0-t 0 BRC--TRIP

OR

Figure 176: Simplified logic diagram for broken conductor check function.

12.3

Function block
BRC1BRCPTOC_46 I3P BLOCK BLKTR TRIP PICKUP

en07000034_ansi.vsd

Figure 177: BRC function block

12.4

Input and output signals

Table 189: Input signals for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P BLOCK BLKTR

Group signal for current input Block of function Blocks the operate output

338

Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)

Chapter 6 Current protection

Table 190: Output signals for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP PICKUP

Operate signal of the protection logic Pickup signal of the protection logic

12.5

Setting parameters
Table 191: Basic parameter group settings for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase Pickup_ub

Disabled Enabled 0 - 99999 50 - 90

1 1

Disabled 3000 50

A %IM

Operation Disable / Enable IBase Unbalance current operation value in percent of max current Minimum phase current for operation of pickup_ub> in % of Ibase Operate time delay

Pickup_PH

5 - 100

20

%IB

tOper

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Table 192: Advanced parameter group settings for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tReset

0.010 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Time delay in reset

12.6

Technical data
Table 193: Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)
Function Range or value Accuracy 0.1% of In 0.1% of In 0.5% 10 ms

Minimum phase current for opera- (5100)% of Ibase tion Unbalance current operation Timers (0100)% of maximum current (0.00-6000.00) s

339

Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)

Chapter 6 Current protection

340

About this chapter

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

About this chapter This chapter describes voltage related protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

341

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Function block name: TUVxANSI number: 27 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

UV2PTUV

3U<

1.1

Introduction
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. The function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed back-up to primary protection. The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

1.2

Principle of operation
The two-step undervoltage protection function (TUV) is used to detect low power system voltage. The function has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding pickup signal is issued. TUV can be set to pickup/trip based on "one out of three", "two out of three", or "three out of three" of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the function is blocked and no pickup or trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay. The undervoltage protection function can be set to measure phase to ground fundamental value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to ground RMS value or phase to phase RMS value. The choise of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType in PST or LHMI under Generall Settings/Voltage protection. The voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set i kV phase-phase voltage This means operation for phase to ground voltage under:

Vpickup < (%) VBase(kV

(Equation 69)

and operation for phase to phase voltage under:

342

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

U < (%) UBase(kV)

Vpickup < (%) VBase(kV)

(Equation 70)

1.2.1

Measurement principle All the three phase to ground voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, Pickup1< and Pickup2<. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the pickup outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3" phases have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding pickup signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output pickup signal, a hysteresis has been included.
1.2.2 Time delay The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time overcurrent (TOV). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, and a programmable inverse curve.

The type A curve is described as:

t=

TD

V Vpickup Vpickup
(Equation 71)

The type B curve is described as:

t=

TD 480

Vpickup < -V 0.5 32 Vpickup <

2.0

+ 0.05

(Equation 72)

The programmable curve can be created as:

TD A t= P Vpickup < V C B Vpickup

(Equation 73)

343

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup< down to Vpickup< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup<*(1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn C > 0 100

(Equation 74)

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 3 "Inverse characteristics". Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (TOV). If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding pickup output is reset. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the pickup condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the TOV reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 178 and figure 179.

344

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

tReset1 Voltage tReset1 PICKUP Hysteresis Measured Voltage TRIP

PICKUP1

Time PICKUP TRIP

t1

Time Integrator t1

Froozen Timer

Instantaneous Reset

Time
Linear Decrease en05000010_ansi.vsd

Figure 178: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and definite time delay

345

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Voltage PICKUP

tReset1 tReset1 PICKUP Hysteresis TRIP Measured Voltage

PICKUP1

Time PICKUP t1

TRIP

Time Integrator t1

Frozen Timer

Time Instantaneous Reset Linear Decrease en05000011_ansi.vsd

Figure 179: Voltage profile causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and definite time delay
1.2.3 Blocking The undervoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

346

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLK1: BLKTR2: BLK2:

blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the pickup outputs of step 1, are blocked. The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can also be set to "off" resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2. In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very low. The event will pickup both the under voltage function and the blocking function, as seen in figure 180. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.

347

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Disconnection

Normal voltage Pickup1 Pickup2

tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min IntBlkStVal1 IntBlkStVal2 Time Block step 1 Block step 2
en05000466_ansi.vsd

tBlkUV2 < t2,t2Min

Figure 180: Blocking function.

1.2.4 Design The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral voltages or the three phase to phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or RMS filters based on one fundamental cycle filter the input voltage signals. The voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to fulfill the pickup condition. The design of the TimeUnderVoltage function is schematically described in figure 181.

348

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

VL1

Comparator VL1 < V1< Comparator VL2 < V1< Comparator VL3 < V1<

ST1L1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3

Phase 1

ST1L2
Phase 2

VL2

ST1L3
Phase 3

VL3

PICKUP Time integrator t1 tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

Pickup & Trip Output Logic Step 1

OR

ST1 TR1L1 TR1L2

MinVoltSelector

TRIP TR1L3 TR1

OR

Comparator VL1 < V2< Comparator VL2 < V2< Comparator VL3 < V2<

ST2L1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 outof 3 3 out of 3

Phase 1

ST2L2
Phase 2

ST2L3
Phase 3

PICKUP Time integrator t2 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

Pickup & Trip Output Logic Step 2

OR

ST2 TR2L1 TR2L2

MinVoltSelector

TRIP TR2L3 TR2 OR PICKU P

OR

OR

TRIP

en05000012 ansi.vsd

Figure 181: Schematic design of the TUV function

349

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

1.3

Function block
TUV1UV2PTUV_27 V3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLK1 BLKTR2 BLK2 TRIP TRST1 TRST1_A TRST1_B TRST1_C TRST2 TRST2_A TRST2_B TRST2_C PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C PU_ST2 PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C en06000276_ansi.vsd

Figure 182: TUV function block

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 194: Input signals for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function block
Signal Description

V3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLK1 BLKTR2 BLK2

Three phase voltages Block of function Block of trip signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of trip signal, step 2 Block of step 2

Table 195: Output signals for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP TRST1 TRST1_A TRST1_B TRST1_C TRST2 TRST2_A

Trip Common trip signal from step1 Trip signal from step1 phase A Trip signal from step1 phase B Trip signal from step1 phase C Common trip signal from step2 Trip signal from step2 phase A

350

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Signal

Description

TRST2_B TRST2_C PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C PU_ST2 PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C

Trip signal from step2 phase B Trip signal from step2 phase C General pickup signal Common pickup signal from step1 Pickup signal from step1 phase A Pickup signal from step1 phase B Pickup signal from step1 phase C Common pickup signal from step2 Pickup signal from step2 phase A Pickup signal from step2 phase B Pickup signal from step2 phase C

1.5

Setting parameters
Table 196: Basic general settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

ConnType

PhG DFT PhPh RMS PhG RMS PhG DFT

PhG DFT

Group selector for connection type

Table 197: Basic parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation VBase OperationStep1 Characterist1

Disabled Enabled 0.05 - 2000.00 Disabled Enabled Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100

0.05 -

Disabled 400.00 Enabled Definite time

kV -

Disable/Enable Operation Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

OpMode1

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1 Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & Inverse-Time curve) in % of VBase, step 1 Definitive time delay of step 1

Pickup1

70

%VB

t1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

5.00

351

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

t1Min TD1

0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10

0.001 0.01

5.000 0.05

s -

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of VBase, step 1 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

IntBlkSel1

Disabled Block of trip Block all 1 - 100

Disabled

IntBlkStVal1

20

%VB

tBlkUV1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2

0.0 - 100.0 Disabled Enabled Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100

0.1 -

0.5 Enabled Definite time

%VB -

OpMode2

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2 Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & Inverse-Time curve) in % of VBase, step 2 Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of VBase, step 2 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 2

Pickup2

50

%VB

t2 t2Min TD2

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10

0.001 0.001 0.01

5.000 5.000 0.05

s s -

IntBlkSel2

Disabled Block of trip Block all 1 - 100

Disabled

IntBlkStVal2

20

%VB

tBlkUV2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

HystAbs2

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.5

%VB

352

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Table 198: Advanced parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of reset curve type for step 1 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. under voltage Inverse-Time curve, step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.001

Instantaneous

tIReset1

0.025

ACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

DCrv1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat1

0 - 100

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.001

Instantaneous

tIReset2

0.025

ACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

353

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. under voltage Inverse-Time curve, step 2

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

DCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat2

0 - 100

1.6

Technical data
Table 199: Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of Vn 1.0% of Vn 1.0% of Vn

Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Internal blocking level, low and high step Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 579 Definite time delays Minimum operate time, inverse characteristics Operate time, pickup function Reset time, pickup function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

(1100)% of Vbase (0100)% of Vbase (1100)% of Vbase (0.000-60.000) s (0.00060.000) s 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset 15 ms typically

See table 579

0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

354

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Function block name: TOVxANSI number: 59 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

OV2PTOV

3U>

2.1

Introduction
Overvoltages will occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines. The function can be used as open line end detector, normally then combined with directional reactive over-power function or as system voltage supervision, normally then giving alarm only or switching in reactors or switch out capacitor banks to control the voltage. The function has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed. The overvoltage function has an extremely high reset ratio to allow setting close to system service voltage.

2.2

Principle of operation
The two-step overvoltage protection function (TOV) is used to detect high power system voltage. The function has two steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding pickup signal is issued. TOV can be set to pickup/trip based on "one out of three", "two out of three", or "three out of three" of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay. The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase. The overvoltage protection function can be set to measure phase to ground fundamental value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to ground RMS value or phase to phase RMS value. The choise of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType in PST or LHMI under Generall Settings/Voltage protection. The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage. The function will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set base voltage VBase. This means operation for phase to ground voltage over:

355

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

V > ( % ) VBase ( kV ) 3
(Equation 75)

and operation for phase for phase voltage over:

U > (%) UBase(kV)

Vpickup > (%) VBase(kV)

(Equation 76)

2.2.1

Measurement principle All the three phase voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, PU_OverVolt1 and PU_OverVolt2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the pickup outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3" phases have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding pickup signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output pickup signal, a hysteresis has been included.
2.2.2 Time delay The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (TOV). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve.

The type A curve is described as:

t=

TD V V > V>
(Equation 77)

The type B curve is described as:

356

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

t=

k 480 U U > 0.5 32 U>

TD 480 V Vpickup 32 Vpickup 0.5 0.035
(Equation 78)
2.0

2.0

0.035

t=

The type C curve is described as:

t=

TD 480 V Vpickup 32 Vpickup 0.5 0.035

(Equation 79)
3.0

The programmable curve can be created as:

TD A

t=

V Vpickup C B Vpickup

+D

(Equation 80)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup down to Vpickup *(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup *(1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn C > 0 100

(Equation 81)

The highest phase (or phase to phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration, see figure 183. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 3 "Inverse characteristics".

357

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Voltage Inverse Time Voltage

VA VB VC

Time
en05000016_ansi.vsd

Figure 183: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration Trip signal issuing requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (TOV). If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding pickup output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the pickup condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable (HystAbs2) to allow an high and accurate reset of the function. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the TOV reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time..
2.2.3 Blocking The overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals where:

358

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLK1: BLKTR2: BLK2:

blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 2

2.2.4

Design The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-ground voltages or the three phase to phasel voltages. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to fulfill the pickup condition. The design of the TimeOverVoltage function is schematically described in figure 184.

359

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

VA

Comparator VA > Pickup1 Comparator VB > Pickup1 Comparator VC > Pickup1

PU_ST1_A Voltage Phase Selector OpMode 1 1 out of3 2 outof3 3 out of3
PhaseA

VB

PU_ST1_B
PhaseB

PU_ST1_C
PhaseC

VC

PICKUP Time integrator t1 tReset 1 ResetTypeCrv 1

Pickup & Trip Output Logic Step1

OR

PU_ST1 TRST1-A TRST1_B

MaxVoltSelect or

TRIP TRST1_C TRST1

OR Comparator VA > Pickup2 Comparator VB > Pickup2 Comparator VC > Pickup2

PU_ST2_A Voltage Phase Selector OpMode 2 1 out of3 2 outof3 3 out of3
PhaseA

PU_ST2_B
PhaseB

PU_ST2_C
PhaseC

PICKUP Time integrator t2 tReset 2 ResetTypeCrv 2

Pickup & Trip Output Logic Step2

OR

PU_ST2 TRST2-A TRST2-B

MaxVoltSelect or

TRIP TRST2-C TRST2

OR OR

PICKUP

OR

TRIP

en 05000013 _ ansi. vsd

Figure 184: Schematic design of the TimeOverVoltage function

360

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

2.3

Function block
TOV1OV2PTOV_59 V3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLK1 BLKTR2 BLK2 TRIP TRST1 TRST1_A TRST1_B TRST1_C TRST2 TRST2_A TRST2_B TRST2_C PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C PU_ST2 PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C en06000277_ansi.vsd

Figure 185: TOV function block

2.4

Input and output signals

Table 200: Input signals for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function block
Signal Description

V3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLK1 BLKTR2 BLK2

Group signal for three phase voltage input Block of function Block of trip signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of trip signal, step 2 Block of step 2

Table 201: Output signals for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP TRST1 TRST1_A TRST1_B TRST1_C TRST2 TRST2_A

Trip Common trip signal from step1 Trip signal from step1 phase A Trip signal from step1 phase B Trip signal from step1 phase C Common trip signal from step2 Trip signal from step2 phase A

361

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Signal

Description

TRST2_B TRST2_C PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST1_A PU_ST1_B PU_ST1_C PU_ST2 PU_ST2_A PU_ST2_B PU_ST2_C

Trip signal from step2 phase B Trip signal from step2 phase C General pickup signal Common pickup signal from step1 Pickup signal from step1 phase A Pickup signal from step1 phase B Pickup signal from step1 phase C Common pickup signal from step2 Pickup signal from step2 phase A Pickup signal from step2 phase B Pickup signal from step2 phase C

2.5

Setting parameters
Table 202: Basic general settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

ConnType

PhG PhPh PhG RMS PhPh RMS

PhG

Reference current signal input

Table 203: Basic parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation VBase OperationStep1 Characterist1

Disabled Enabled 0.05 - 2000.00 Disabled Enabled Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200

0.05 -

Disabled 400.00 Enabled Definite time

kV -

Disable/Enable Operation Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

OpMode1

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1 Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & Inverse-Time curve) in % of VBase, step 1 Definitive time delay of step 1

Pickup1

120

%VB

t1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

5.00

362

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

t1Min TD1

0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10

0.001 0.01

5.000 0.05

s -

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2

0.0 - 100.0 Disabled Enabled Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200

0.1 -

0.5 Enabled Definite time

%VB -

OpMode2

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2 Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & Inverse-Time curve) in % of VBase, step 2 Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 2

Pickup2

150

%VB

t2 t2Min TD2

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10

0.001 0.001 0.01

5.000 5.000 0.05

s s -

HystAbs2

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.5

%VB

363

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Table 204: Advanced parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of reset curve type for step 1 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for programmable over voltage TOV curve, step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.001

Instantaneous

tIReset1

0.025

ACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

DCrv1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat1

0 - 100

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.001

Instantaneous

tIReset2

0.025

ACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

364

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for programmable over voltage TOV curve, step 2

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

DCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat2

0 - 100

2.6

Technical data
Table 205: Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of Vn at V < Vn 1.0% of V at V > Vn 1.0% of Vn at V < Vn 1.0% of V at V > Vn

Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis

(1-200)% of Vbase (0100)% of Vbase (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset 15 ms typically

Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 580 Definite time delays Minimum operate time, Inverse characteristics Operate time, pickup function Reset time, pickup function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

See table 580

0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

365

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Function block name: TRVxANSI number: 59N IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ROV2PTOV

3U0

3.1

Introduction
Residual voltages will occur in the power system during ground faults. The function can be configured to calculate the residual voltage from the three phase voltage input transformers or from a single phase voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer. The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delayed.

3.2

Principle of operation
The two-step residual overvoltage protection function (TRV) is used to detect high single-phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3V0. The residual voltage can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three phase voltages and internally in the protection terminal calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to the TRV function block. The function has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase.

3.2.1

Measurement principle The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, PU_OverVolt1 and PU_OverVolt2.

To avoid oscillations of the output pickup signal, a hysteresis has been included.
3.2.2 Time delay The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (TOV). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve.

The type A curve is described as:

366

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

t=

TD V V > V>
(Equation 82)

The type B curve is described as:

t=

TD

V Vpickup Vpickup
(Equation 83)

The type C curve is described as:

t=

TD 480 V Vpickup 32 Vpickup 0.5 0.03

(Equation 84)
3.0

The programmable curve can be created as:

t=

TD A

V Vpickup C B Vpickup

+D

(Equation 85)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup up to Vpickup *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn C > 0 100

(Equation 86)

367

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in chapter 3 "Inverse characteristics". Trip signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (TOV). If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding pickup output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the pickup condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the TOV reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 186 and figure 187.

368

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

tReset 1 tReset1 Voltage PICKUP TRIP

Pickup1

Hysteresis

Measured Voltage

Time PICKUP t1

TRIP

Time Integrator Froozen Timer t1

Linear Decrease

Instantaneous Reset

Time
en 05000019 _ ansi. vsd

Figure 186: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and definite time delay

369

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Voltage PICKUP

tReset1 tReset1 PICKUP Hysteresis TRIP

Pickup1

Measured Voltage

Time PICKUP t1

TRIP

Time Integrator Frozen Timer

t1

Time Instantaneous Reset Linear Decrease

en 05000020_ansi.vsd

Figure 187: Voltage profile causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and definite time delay
3.2.3 Blocking The residual overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals where:

370

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLK1: BLKTR2: BLK2:

blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all pickuprip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all pickup and trip inputs related to step 2

3.2.4

Design The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design of the TRV function is schematically described in figure 188.

VN

Comparator VN > Pickup1 PICKUP

Phase 1 Pickup & Trip Output Logic Step 1

PU_ST1 TRST1

Time integrator t1 tReset1 ResetTypeCrv 1

TRIP

Comparator VN > Pickup2 PICKUP Time integrator t2 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv 2

PU_ST2 Phase 1 TRST2 Pickup & Trip Output Logic Step 2 OR

OR

PICKUP

TRIP

TRIP

en 05000748_ ansi. vsd

Figure 188: Schematic design of the TRV function

371

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

3.3

Function block
TRV1ROV2PTOV_59N V3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLK1 BLKTR2 BLK2 TRIP TRST1 TRST2 PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST2 en06000278_ansi.vsd

Figure 189: TRV function block

3.4

Input and output signals

Table 206: Input signals for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function block
Signal Description

V3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLK1 BLKTR2 BLK2

Three phase voltages Block of function Block of trip signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of trip signal, step 2 Block of step 2

Table 207: Output signals for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP TRST1 TRST2 PICKUP PU_ST1 PU_ST2

Trip Common trip signal from step1 Common trip signal from step2 General pickup signal Common pickup signal from step1 Common pickup signal from step2

372

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

3.5

Setting parameters
Table 208: Basic parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation VBase OperationStep1 Characterist1

Disabled Enabled 0.05 - 2000.00 Disabled Enabled Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 200

0.05 -

Disabled 400.00 Enabled Definite time

kV -

Disable/Enable Operation Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

Pickup1

30

%VB

Voltage setting/pickup value (DT & TOV), step 1 in % of VBase Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

t1 t1Min TD1

0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10

0.01 0.001 0.01

5.00 5.000 0.05

s s -

HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2

0.0 - 100.0 Disabled Enabled Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 100

0.1 -

0.5 Enabled Definite time

%VB -

Pickup2

45

%VB

Voltage setting/pickup value (DT & TOV), step 2 in % of VBase Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 2

t2 t2Min TD2

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.10

0.001 0.001 0.01

5.000 5.000 0.05

s s -

HystAbs2

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.5

%VB

373

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Table 209: Advanced parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of reset curve type for step 1 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for programmable over voltage TOV curve, step 1 Time delay in Definite-Time reset (s), step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2 Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.001

Instantaneous

tIReset1

0.025

ACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

DCrv1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat1

0 - 100

tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025 Instantaneous

s -

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.001

tIReset2

0.025

ACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

374

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for programmable over voltage TOV curve, step 2

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

DCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat2

0 - 100

3.6

Technical data
Table 210: Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of Vn at V < Vn 1.0% of V at V > Vn 1.0% of Vn at V < Vn 1.0% of V at V > Vn

Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis

(1-200)% of Vbase (0100)% of Vbase (0.00060.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset 15 ms typically

Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 581 Definite time setting Minimum operate time Operate time, pickup function Reset time, pickup function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

See table 581

0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

375

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Function block name: OEXxANSI number: 24 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

OEXPVPH

U/f >

4.1

Introduction
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time. Function has settable inverse operating curve and independent alarm stage.

4.2

Principle of operation
The importance of overexcitation protection is growing as the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate most of the time near their designated limits. Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types. This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if emergency that includes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged unless corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system. Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with below-normal frequency. Such condition may occur when a unit is on load, but are more likely to arise when it is on open circuit, or at a loss of load occurrence. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to experience overexcitation condition. It follows from the fundamental transformer equation, see equation 87, that peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f, and turns n.

E = 4.44 f n B max A
(Equation 87)

The relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is therefore according to equation 88.

M = relative

V = Hz

E/f (Vn) /(fn)

(Equation 88)

376

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9 Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core only but will extend into other (non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to Eddy current circulations. Overexcitation will result in: overheating of the non-laminated metal parts, a large increase in magnetizing currents, an increase in core and winding temperature, an increase in transformer vibration and noise.

Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative Volts per Hertz (V / Hz) ratio. The action of the protection is usually to initiate a reduction of excitation and, if this should fail, or is not possible, to trip the transformer after a delay which can be from seconds to minutes, typically 5 - 10 seconds. Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine. In such cases, the overexcitation protection may trip the field breaker during a start-up of a machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal from the transformer terminal. If this is not possible, the power transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal. The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers shall be capable of operating continuously at 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not exceed 1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained basis, see equation 89.

E f

1.1

Vn fn
(Equation 89)

or equivalently, with 1.1 Vn = PUV/Hz according to equation 90.

E f

PUV / Hz fn
(Equation 90)

where:
PUV/Hz

is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.

PUV/Hz is an OEX setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 150%. If the user does not know exactly what to set, then the standard IEC 60076 - 1, section 4.4, the default value PUV/Hz = 110% shall be used. In OEX protection function the relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is expressed according to equation 91.

377

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

M = relative

V = Hz

E/f Vn / fn
(Equation 91)

It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for any E and f, where the ratio E / f is equal to Vn/fn. A power transformer is not overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M PUV/Hz, PUV/Hz expressed in %. The relative overexcitation is thus defined as shown in equation 92.
overexcitation = M PUV / Hz
(Equation 92)

The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage V which is in general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage V which is measured and fed to OEX, depending on the direction of the power flow through the power transformer, the power transformer side where OEX is applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important to specify on the OEX function block in CAP 531 configuration tool worksheet on which side of the power transformer OEX is placed As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load, 0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided between the primary and the secondary winding: XLeakage = XLeakage1 = XLeakage2 = Xsc / 2 = 0.075 pu.. OEX calculates the internal induced voltage E if XLeakage (meaning the leakage reactance of the winding where OEX is connected) is known to the user. The assumption taken for 2-winding power transformers that XLeakage = Xsc / 2 is unfortunately most often not true. For a 2-winding power transformer the leakage reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance, then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to Xc/2. The OEX protection will then take the given measured terminal voltage V, as the induced voltage E. It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such as loss of load, etc. It will be observed that a high phase-to-ground voltage does not mean overexcitation. For example, in an ungrounded power system, a single-phase-to-ground fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases to ground, but no overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each winding.

378

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

4.2.1

Measured voltage If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where OEX protection is applied, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure this voltage, MeasuredV. The particular voltage which is used determines the two currents that must be used.This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.

Note!
It is extremely important that MeasuredV and MeasuredI is set to same value!

If, for example, voltage Vab is fed to OEX, then currents Ia, and Ib must be applied, etc. From these two input currents, current Iab = Ia - Ib is calculated internally by the OEX protection algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher than 70% of the rated value, otherwise the OEX protection algorithm is exited without calculating the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000. If three phase-to-ground voltages are available from the side where OEX is connected, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current are used by OEX protection. A check is made within OEX protection if the positive sequence voltage is higher than 70% rated phase-to-ground voltage; below this value, OEX is exited immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000. The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function is in operation for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 and 60 Hz respectively.
4.2.2

OEX protection function can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from the power flow. The side with a possible On-Load-Tap-Changer (OLTC) must not be used.

Operate time of the overexcitation protection. The operate time of the overexcitation protection is a function of the relative overexcitation. Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between:

the so called IEEE law, and a tailor-made law.

The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on analysis of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They can match well a transformer core capability. The square law is according to equation 93.

379

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

t op =

0.18 TD (M PUV / Hz)

2

0.18 TD overexcitation
2

(Equation 93)

where: M
PUV/Hz

is excitation, mean value in the interval from t = 0 to t = top is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and is time multiplier setting for inverse time functions, see figure 191. Parameter TD (time delay multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.

TD

An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to equation 94.

t op

( M(t) PUV / Hz )
0

dt 0.18 TD
(Equation 94)

A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (i.e. j = n) where it becomes true that:

( M( j) PUV / Hz )
j=k

0.18 TD
(Equation 95)

where:
t

is the time interval between two successive executions of overexcitation function and is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given as Vn/fn.

M(j) - PUV/Hz

As long as M > PUV/Hz (i.e. overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be tripped at j = n. Inverse delays as per figure 191, can be modified (limited) by two special definite delay settings, namely t_MaxTripDelay and t_MinTripDelay, see figure 190.

380

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

delay in s

t_MaxTripDelay

under excitation

inverse delay law

overexcitation t_MinTripDelay 0 M=V/Hz> V/Hz> M max - PUV/Hz Overexcitation M-PUV/Hz M max Emax Excitation M E (only if f = fn = const)

99001067_ansi.vsd

Figure 190: Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by t_MaxTripDelay, and t_MinTripDelay A definite maximum time, t_MaxTripDelay, can be used to limit the operate time at low degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than t_MaxTripDelay will not be allowed. In case the inverse delay is longer than t_MaxTripDelay, OEX trips after t_MaxTripDelay seconds. A definite minimum time, t_MinTripDelay, can be used to limit the operate time at high degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than t_MinTripDelay, OEX function trips after t_MinTripDelay seconds. Also, the inverse delay law is no more valid beyond excitation Mmax. Beyond Mmax (beyond overexcitation Mmax - PUV), the delay will always be tMin, no matter what overexcitation.

381

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Time (s)

IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES

1000

100 TD = 60

TD = 20

10

TD = 10 TD = 9 TD = 8 TD = 7 TD = 6 TD = 5 TD = 4 TD = 3 TD = 2

TD = 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40

OVEREXCITATION IN %

(M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373_ansi.vsd

Figure 191: Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation. The critical value of excitation Mmax is determined indirectly via OEX protection function setting Pickup2. Pickup2 can be thought of as a no-load-rated-frequency voltage, where the inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, t_MinTripDelay. If, for example, Pickup2 = 140 %, then Mmax is according to equation 96.

M max =

Pickup 2 / f Vn / fn

= 1.40
(Equation 96)

382

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this case the interval between M = PUV/Hz, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5, and t6) as shown in the figure 192. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.

delay in s

t_MaxTripDelay

underexcitation 0 Emaxcont

t_MinTripDelay Overexcitation M-E maxcont M max - E maxcont Excitation M M max 99001068_ansi.vsd

Figure 192: An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear interpolation. Should it happen that t_MaxTripDelay be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual delay would be t_MaxTripDelay. Above Mmax, the delay can only be t_MinTripDelay.
4.2.3 Cooling The overexcitation protection OEX is basically a thermal protection; therefore a cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied. Parameter Tcool is an OEX setting, with a default time constant tCoolingK of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times tCoolingK minutes. If an overexcitation condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be otherwise. OEX protection function measurands A service value data item called Time to trip, and designated on the display by tTRIP is available in seconds on the local HMI, or monitoring tool. This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip if the overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This information can be useful with small or moderate overexcitations. If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is t_MaxTripDelay, then the estimation of the remaining time to trip is done against t_MaxTripDelay.

4.2.4

The displayed relative excitation M, designated on the display by V/Hz is calculated from the expression:

383

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

M = relative

V = Hz

E/f Uf / fn
(Equation 97)

If less than V / Hz = PUV/Hz (in pu) is shown on the HMI display (or read via SM/RET521), the power transformer is underexcited. If the value of V/Hz is shown which is equal to PUV/Hz (in pu), it means that the excitation is exactly equal to the power transformer continuous capability. If a value higher than the value of PUV/Hz is shown, the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if V/Hz = 1.100 is shown, while PUV/Hz = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous excitation limit. The third item of the OEX protection service report is the thermal status of the protected power transformer iron core, designated on the display by ThermalStatus. This gives the thermal status in % of the trip value which corresponds to 100%. Thermal Status should reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some reason not switched off, the ThermalStaus shall go over 100%. If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by t_MaxTripDelay, and/or t_MinTripDelay, then the Thermal Status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long delay is limited by t_MaxTripDelay, then the OEX TRIP output signal will be set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.
4.2.5 Overexcitation alarm A separate step, AlarmPickup, is provided for alarming purpose. The voltages are normally set 2% lower and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator an early abnormal voltages warning.

384

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

OVEX: FS = 1 = 2*SI + SU BLOCK SIDE Prepool I SI1

Pickup1 M>Pickup1 0-tMax 0 Calculation of internal induced voltage Ei t>tMin

AlarmLevel 0-tMax 0 tAlarm t>tAlarm

&

ALARM

&

TRIP

t_MinTripDelay TD M OR

SI2

Ei

Prepool O

SU12

M= (Ei / f) (Vn / fn)

IEEE law

0-tMax M 0 Tailor-made law t_MaxTripDelay M>Pickup2 Xleak ERROR Pickup2

M = relative Pickup as service value

en05000162_ansi.vsd

Figure 193: A logic diagram over Overexcitation protection function.

4.2.6 Logic diagram

Figure 194: A simplified diagram of the OEX protection function

385

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.

4.3

Function block
OEX1OEXPVPH_24 I3P V3P BLOCK RESET TRIP PICKUP ALARM

en05000329_ansi.vsd

Figure 195: OEX function block

4.4

Input and output signals

Table 211: Input signals for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P V3P BLOCK RESET

Current connection Voltage connection Block of function Reset operation

Table 212: Output signals for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP PICKUP ALARM

Trip from overexcitation function Overexcitation above set trip pickup (instantaneous) Overexcitation above set alarm pickup (delayed)

4.5

Setting parameters
Table 213: Basic general settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

MeasuredV

PosSeq AB BC CA AB BC CA PosSeq

AB

Selection of measured voltage

MeasuredI

AB

Selection of measured current

386

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Table 214: Basic parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase VBase Pickup1

Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 100.0 - 180.0

1 0.05 0.1

Disabled 3000 400.00 110.0

A kV %VB/f

Disable/Enable Operation Base current (rated phase current) in A Base voltage (main voltage) in kV Operate level of V/Hz at no load and rated freq in % of (Vbase/frated) High level of V/Hz above which tMin is used, in % of (Vbase/fn) Winding leakage reactance in primary ohms Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec) Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec Transformer magnetic core cooling time constant, in sec Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor made Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve Alarm pickup level as % of Step1 trip pickup level Alarm time delay, in sec

Pickup2

100.0 - 200.0

0.1

140.0

%VB/f

XLeakage t_TripPulse t_MinTripDelay

0.000 - 200.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0.100 7.000

ohm s s

t_MaxTripDelay

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

1800.00

t_CoolingK

0.10 - 9000.00

0.01

1200.00

CurveType TDForIEEECurve AlarmPickup tAlarm

IEEE Tailor made 1 - 60 50.0 - 120.0 0.00 - 9000.00

1 0.1 0.01

IEEE 1 100.0 5.00

% s

387

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Table 215: Advanced parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

t1_UserCurve

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

7200.00

Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t3 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t4 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t5 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made curve, in sec

t2_UserCurve t3_UserCurve t4_UserCurve t5_UserCurve t6_UserCurve

0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00

0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01

3600.00 1800.00 900.00 450.00 225.00

s s s s s

4.6

Technical data
Table 216: Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of V 1.0% of Vn at V Vn 1.0% of V at V > Vn 1.0% of V

Pickup value, pickup Pickup value, alarm

(100180)% of (Vbase/fn) (50120)% of pickup level

Pickup value, high level Curve type

(100200)% of (Vbase/fn) IEEE or customer defined

Class 5 + 40 ms

IEEE : t =

(0.18 TD) ( M 1) 2

where M = relative (V/Hz) = (E/f)/(Vn/fn) Minimum time delay for inverse function Maximum time delay for inverse function Alarm time delay (0.00060.000) s (0.009000.00) s (0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

388

Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)

Function block name: VDC ANSI number: 60 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

VDCPTOV

5.1

Introduction
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one trip step. It can be used to supervise the voltage from two fuse groups or two different voltage transformers fuses as a fuse/MCB supervision function.

5.2

Principle of operation
The function is based on comparison of the magnitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase. Possible differences between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RF_X The voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level VDAlarm or trip level VDTrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings V1Low and V2Low. The outputs for loss of voltage V1LOW resp V2LOW will be activated. The V1 voltage is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the V2 voltage is supervised for loss of all three phases. Loss of one U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow=No. The function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary BLOCK input. It can e.g. be activated from a fuse failure supervision function block. To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance in normal service. The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 196.

389

Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

VDTrip_A

AND O R

VDTrip_B

AND

0 0-tReset

0-tTrip 0

AND

TRIP

VDTrip_C

AND AND PICKUP

VDAlarm_A

AND O R

VDAlarm_B

AND

0-tAlarm 0

AND

ALARM

VDAlarm_C

AND

V1Low_A V1Low_B V1Low_C BlkDiffAtULow V2Low_A V2Low_B V2Low_C BLOCK AND 0-t1 0 V2LOW OR OR 0-tAlarm 0 AND

AND

V1LOW

AND

en06000382_ansi.vsd

Figure 196: Principle logic for voltage differential function

5.3

Function block
VDC1VDCPTOV_60 V3P1 V3P2 BLOCK TRIP PICKUP ALARM V1LOW V2LOW VDIFF_A VDIFF_B VDIFF_C en06000528_ansi.vsd

Figure 197: VDC function block

390

Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

5.4

Input and output signals

Table 217: Input signals for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function block
Signal Description

V3P1 V3P2 BLOCK

Bus voltage Capacitor voltage Block of function

Table 218: Output signals for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP PICKUP ALARM V1LOW V2LOW VDIFF_A VDIFF_B VDIFF_C

Voltage differential protection operated Pickup of voltage differential protection Voltage differential protection alarm Loss of V1 voltage Loss of V2 voltage Differential Voltage phase A Differential Voltage phase B Differential Voltage phase C

5.5

Setting parameters
Table 219: Basic parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation VBase BlkDiffAtULow VDTrip tTrip

Disabled Enabled 0.50 - 2000.00 No Yes 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000

0.01 0.1 0.001

Off 400.00 Yes 5.0 1.000

kV %UB s

Operation Enable/Disable Base Voltage Block operation at low voltage Operate level, in % of VBase Time delay for voltage differential operate, in milliseconds Time delay for voltage differential reset, in seconds

tReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

391

Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

V1Low V2Low tBlock VDAlarm tAlarm

0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000

0.1 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001

70.0 70.0 0.000 2.0 2.000

%UB %UB s %UB s

Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of VBase Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of VBase Reset time for undervoltage block Alarm level, in % of VBase Time delay for voltage differential alarm, in seconds

Table 220: Advanced parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

RF_A

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Ratio compensation factor phase A VCap*RF_A=VBus_A Ratio compensation factor phase B VCap*RF_B=VBus_B Ratio compensation factor phase C VCap*RF_C=VBus_C

RF_B

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

RF_C

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

5.6

Technical data
Table 221: Voltage differential protection (PTOV)
Function Range or value Accuracy 0.5 % of Vn 0.5% of Vn 0.5% 10 ms

Voltage difference for alarm and trip Under voltage level Timers

(0.0100.0) % of Vbase (0.0100.0) % of Vbase (0.00060.000)s

392

Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)

Function block name: LOV ANSI number: 27 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

LOVPTUV

6.1

Introduction
The loss of voltage detection, (PTUV, 27), is suitable for use in networks with an automatic System restoration function. The function issues a three-pole trip command to the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.

6.2

Principle of operation
The operation of LOVPTUV function is based on line voltage measurement. The function is provided with a logic, which automatically recognises if the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. Pickup is available on outputPICKUP. Additionally, the function is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages have been detected low for more than tBlock. The LOVPTUV function operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the function block. Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length set by setting tPulse. The operation of the function is supervised by the fuse-failure function (VTSU input) and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit breaker. The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. The function is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (BlockLOV=Yes).

393

Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

LOV - LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

TEST TEST-ACTIVE AND BlockLOV = Yes

LOV--BLOCK

LOV-START OR Function Enable tPulse AND

0-tTrip 0

LOVTRIP

PU_V_A

PU_V_B Latched Enable

AND only 1 or 2 phases are low for at least 10 s (not three) AND

PU_V_C

OR

0-tBlock 0

LOV--CBOPEN OR LOV--VTSU OR Set Enable

Reset Enable AND

0-tRestore
0

OR Line restored for at least 3 s

en07000089_ansi.vsd

Figure 198: Simplified diagram of loss of voltage check protection function

394

Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

6.3

Function block
LOV1LOVPTUV_27 V3P BLOCK CBOPEN VTSU TRIP PICKUP

en07000039_ansi.vsd

Figure 199: LOV function block

6.4

Input and output signals

Table 222: Input signals for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function block
Signal Description

V3P BLOCK CBOPEN VTSU

Voltage connection Block the all outputs Circuit breaker open Block from voltage circuit supervision

Table 223: Output signals for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP PICKUP

Trip signal Pickup signal

6.5

Setting parameters
Table 224: Basic parameter group settings for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation VBase VPG tTrip

Disabled Enabled 0.1 - 9999.9 1 - 100 0.000 - 60.000

0.1 1 0.001

Off 400.0 70 7.000

kV %VB s

Operation Enable/Disable Base voltage Pickup voltage in % of base voltage Vbase Operate time delay

395

Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)

Chapter 7 Voltage protection

Table 225: Advanced parameter group settings for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

tPulse tBlock

0.050 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

0.150 5.000

s s

Duration of TRIP pulse Time delay to block when all 3ph voltages are not low Time delay for enable the function after restoration

tRestore

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

396

About this chapter

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

About this chapter This chapter describes the frequency protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

397

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Function block name: TUFxANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

SAPTUF

f<

1.1

Introduction
Underfrequency occurs as a result of lack of generation in the network. The function can be used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine start-up etc. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement.

1.2

Principle of operation
The underfrequency (TUF) function is used to detect low power system frequency. The function can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied the time delay will be longer if the voltage is higher and shorter if the voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage the function is blocked and no pickup or trip signal is issued.

1.2.1

Measurement principle The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, PUFrequency. The frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases the setting IntBlkPuVal, the underfrequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting VBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV.

To avoid oscillations of the output pickup signal, a hysteresis has been included.
1.2.2 Time delay The time delay for the underfrequency function can be either a settable definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tTrip sets the time delay

398

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings VNom, VMin, Exponent, t_MaxTripDelay and t_MinTripDelay set the time delay according to figure 200 and equation 98. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time delay to apply. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the pickup output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST. Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay. If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the pickup output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the pickup condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. On the output of the underfrequency function a 100 ms pulse is issued, after a time delay corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.
1.2.3 Voltage dependent time delay Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system, except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At constant voltage, V, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to equation 98. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage functions.

t=

V VMin VNom VMin

Exponent

( t _ MaxTripDelay t _ MinTripDelay ) + t _ MinTripDelay

(Equation 98)

where: t V Exponent VMin, VNom t_MaxTripDelay, t_MinTripDelay is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage), is the measured voltage is a setting, are voltage settings corresponding to are time settings.

The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 200, for:

399

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

VMin VNom

= 90% = 100%

t_MaxTripD = 1.0 s elay t_MinTripD elay Exponent = 0.0 s = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4

0 TimeDlyOperate [s] Exponenent 2 3

0.5

90

95

100

V [% of VBase]
en05000075_ansi.vsd

Figure 200: Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for the underfrequency function. The time delay to operate is plotted as a function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively.
1.2.4 Blocking The underfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: BLKTRIP: BLKREST: blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkPuVal, both the pickup and the trip outputs, are blocked.

400

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

1.2.5

Design The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay TimeDlyRestore. The design of the underfrequency function is schematically described in figure 201.

Block OR Comparator V < IntBlockLevel BLOCK BLKDMAGN

Voltage

Time integrator TimerOperation Mode Selector TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset PICKUP TRIP Pickup & Trip Output Logic PICKUP

Frequency

Comparator f < PuFrequency

TRIP

100 ms Comparator f > RestoreFreq TimeDlyRestore RESTORE

en05000726_ansi.vsd

Figure 201: Schematic design of the underfrequency function

401

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

1.3

Function block
TUF1SAPTUF_81 V3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST TRIP PICKUP RESTORE BLKDMAGN Frequency en06000279_ansi.vsd

Figure 202: TUF function block

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 226: Input signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block
Signal Description

V3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST

Voltage connection Block of function Blocking operate output. Blocking restore output.

Table 227: Output signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP PICKUP RESTORE BLKDMAGN Frequency

Operate/trip signal for frequency. Start/pick-up signal for frequency. Restore signal for load restoring purposes. Blocking indication due to low magnitude. Measured frequency

402

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

1.5

Setting parameters
Table 228: Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation Vbase PUFrequency IntBlockLevel TimeDlyOperate

Disabled Enabled 0.05 - 2000.00 35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000

0.05 0.01 1 0.001

Disabled 400.00 48.80 50 0.200

kV Hz %VB s

Disable/Enable Operation Base voltage Frequency setting pickup value. Internal blocking level in % of VBase. Operate time delay in over/under-frequency mode. Time delay for reset. Restore time delay. Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value. Setting for choosing timer mode. Nominal voltage in % of VBase for voltage based timer. Lower operation limit in % of VBase for voltage based timer. For calculation of the curve form for voltage based timer. Maximum time operation limit for voltage based timer. Minimum time operation limit for voltage based timer.

TimeDlyReset TimeDlyRestore RestoreFreq

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 45.00 - 65.00

0.001 0.001 0.01

0.000 0.000 50.10

s s Hz

TimerOperation VNom

Definite timer Volt based timer 50 - 150

Definite timer 100

%VB

VMin

50 - 150

90

%VB

Exponent

0.0 - 5.0

0.1

1.0

t_MaxTripDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

t_MinTripDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

1.6
Function

Technical data
Table 229: Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)
Range or value Accuracy 2.0 mHz

Operate value, pickup function

(35.00-75.00) Hz

403

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate time, pickup function Reset time, pickup function Operate time, definite time function Reset time, definite time function Voltage dependent time delay

100 ms typically 100 ms typically (0.000-60.000)s (0.000-60.000)s Settings: VNom=(50-150)% of Vbase

0.5% + 10 ms 0.5% + 10 ms

Class 5 + 200 ms

V VMin t= VNom VMin

Exponent

( t _ MaxTripDelay t _ MinTripDelay ) + t _ MinTripDelay

VMin=(50-150)% of Vbase Exponent=0.0-5.0 t_MaxTripDelay=(0.000-60.000) s t_MinTripDelay=(0.000-60.000)s

V=Vmeasured

404

Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)

Function block name: TOFxANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

SAPTOF

f>

2.1

Introduction
Overfrequency will occur at sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network. In some cases close to generating part governor problems can also cause overfrequency. The function can be used for generation shedding, remedial action schemes etc. It can also be used as a sub-nominal frequency stage initiating load restoring. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement.

2.2

Principle of operation
The Overfrequency (TOF) function is used to detect high power system frequency. The function has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage the function is blocked and no pickup or trip signal is issued.

2.2.1

Measurement principle The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, PUFrequency. The frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlkStVal, the overfrequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the VBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output pickup signal, a hysteresis has been included. Time delay The time delay for the overfrequency function is a settable definite time delay, specified by the setting tTrip. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the pickup output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST.

2.2.2

Trip signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay. If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the pickup output

405

Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the pickup condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
2.2.3 Blocking The overfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
TOF-BLOCK: TOF-BLKTRIP: blocks all outputs blocks the TOF-TRIP output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkPuVal, both the pickup and the trip outputs, are blocked.
2.2.4 Design The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of the overfrequency function is schematically described in figure 203.

BLOCK BLKTRIP OR Comparator V < IntBlockLevel Pickup & Trip Output Logic BLOCK BLKDMAGN

Voltage

Time integrator Definite Time Delay PICKUP

PICKUP

Frequency

Comparator f > PuFrequency

TimeDlyOperate TRIP TimeDlyReset TRIP

en05000735_ansi.vsd

Figure 203: Schematic design of the overfrequency function

406

Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

2.3

Function block
TOF1SAPTOF_81 V3P BLOCK BLKTRIP TRIP PICKUP BLKDMAGN FREQ en06000280_ansi.vsd

Figure 204: TOF function block

2.4

Input and output signals

Table 230: Input signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block
Signal Description

V3P BLOCK BLKTRIP

Voltage connection Block of function Blocking operate output.

Table 231: Output signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP PICKUP BLKDMAGN Frequency

Operate/trip signal for frequency. Start/pick-up signal for frequency. Blocking indication due to low magnitude. Measured frequency

2.5

Setting parameters
Table 232: Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation VBase PUFrequency IntBlockLevel TimeDlyOperate

Disabled Enabled 0.05 - 2000.00 35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000

0.05 0.01 1 0.001

Off 400.00 51.20 50 0.000

kV Hz %UB s

Disable/Enable Operation Base voltage Frequency setting pickup value. Internal blocking level in % of VBase. Operate time delay in over/under-frequency mode. Time delay for reset.

TimeDlyReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

407

Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

2.6

Technical data
Table 233: Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)
Function Range or value Accuracy 2.0 mHz

Operate value, pickup function Operate time, pickup function Reset time, pickup function Operate time, definite time function Reset time, definite time function

(35.00-75.00) Hz 100 ms typically 100 ms typically (0.000-60.000)s (0.000-60.000)s

0.5% + 10 ms 0.5% + 10 ms

408

Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)

Function block name: RCFxANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

SAPFRC

df/dt > <

3.1

Introduction
Rate of change of frequency function gives an early indication of a main disturbance in the system. The function can be used for generation shedding, load shedding, remedial action schemes etc. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement. Each step can discriminate between positive or negative change of frequency.

3.2

Principle of operation
The rate-of-change of frequency (RCF) function is used to detect fast power system frequency changes, increase as well as decrease, at an early stage. The function has a settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the trip signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage, the function is blocked and no pickup or trip signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.

3.2.1

Measurement principle The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, PUFreqGrad. The rate-of-change of frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, the rate-of-change of frequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting PUFreqGrad, controls if the rate-of-change of frequency function reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If the rate-of-change of frequency function is used for decreasing frequency, i.e. the setting PUFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of PUFreqGrad, sets the rate-of-change of frequency function to pickup and trip for frequency increases.

409

Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

To avoid oscillations of the output pickup signal, a hysteresis has been included.
3.2.2 Time delay The rate-of-change of frequency function has a settable definite time delay, tTrip. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the pickup output, in percent of the total operation time.

Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the pickup output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the pickup condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area. The RESTORE output of the rate-of-change of frequency function is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.
3.2.3 Blocking The rate-of-change of frequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: BLKTRIP: BLKREST: blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the pickup and the trip outputs, are blocked.
3.2.4 Design The rate-of-change of frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting PUFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign of the setting PUFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of the rate-of-change of frequency function is schematically described in figure 205.

410

Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKRESET OR BLOCK

Voltage

Comparator V < IntBlockLevel Pickup & Trip Output Logic

BLKDMAGN

Rate-of-Change of Frequency

Comparator If [PickupFreqGrad<0 PICKUP AND df/dt < PickupFreqGrad] OR [PickupFreqGrad>0 AND df/dt > PickupFreqGrad] Then PICKUP

Time integrator Definite Time Delay TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset

PICKUP

TRIP

100 ms Frequency Comparator f > RestoreFreq RESTORE

TimeDlyRestore

en05000835_ansi.vsd

Figure 205: Schematic design of the rate-of-change of frequency function

3.3

Function block
RCF1SAPFRC_81 V3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST TRIP PICKUP RESTORE BLKDMAGN en06000281_ansi.vsd

Figure 206: RCF function block

411

Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

3.4

Input and output signals

Table 234: Input signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block
Signal Description

V3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST

Group signal for voltage input Block of function Blocking operate output. Blocking restore output.

Table 235: Output signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP PICKUP RESTORE BLKDMAGN

Operate/trip signal for frequencyGradient Start/pick-up signal for frequencyGradient Restore signal for load restoring purposes. Blocking indication due to low magnitude.

3.5

Setting parameters
Table 236: Basic parameter group settings for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation VBase

Disabled Enabled 0.05 - 2000.00

0.05

Off 400.00

kV

Disable/Enable Operation Base setting for the phase-phase voltage in kV Frequency gradient start value. Sign defines direction. Internal blocking level in % of VBase. Operate time delay in pos./neg. frequency gradient mode. Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value (Hz) Restore time delay. Time delay for reset.

PUFreqGrad

-10.00 - 10.00

0.01

0.50

Hz/s

IntBlockLevel tTrip

0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000

1 0.001

50 0.200

%UB s

RestoreFreq

45.00 - 65.00

0.01

49.90

Hz

tRestore tReset

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000

s s

412

Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

3.6

Technical data
Table 237: Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)
Function Range or value Accuracy 10.0 mHz/s 1.0% of Vn

Operate value, pickup function Operate value, internal blocking level Operate time, pickup function

(-10.00-10.00) Hz/s (0-100)% of Vbase 100 ms typically

413

Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)

Chapter 8 Frequency protection

414

About this chapter

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

About this chapter This chapter describes Multipurpose protection and includes the General current and voltage function. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

415

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Function block name: GFxxANSI number: 46, 51, 67, 51N, 67N, 27, 59, 21, 40 IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

I<

I>

IEC 61850 logical node name: CVGAPC

U<

U>

1.1

Introduction
The function can be utilized as a negative sequence current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or unsymmetrical faults. The function can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive ground faults, outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are used which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This will give an independence from load currents and this phase selection will be used in conjunction with the detection of the ground fault from the directional ground fault protection function.

1.1.1

Inadvertent generator energization When the generator is taken out of service, and stand-still, there is a risk that the generator circuit breaker flashes over or is closed by mistake.

To prevent damages on the generator or turbine, it is essential that high speed tripping is provided in case of inadvertent energization of the generator. This tripping should be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms). There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be limited so that the normal overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect the dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long. For big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should, therefore, be included in the protective scheme.

416

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

1.2
1.2.1

Principle of operation
Measured quantities within the function The function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool.

The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 238.
Table 238: Current selection for the GF function
Set value for the parameter CurrentInput

Comment

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PhaseA PhaseB PhaseC PosSeq NegSeq 3ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh

GF function will measure the phase A current phasor GF function will measure the phase B current phasor GF function will measure the phase C current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase A current phasor and phase B current phasor (i.e. IA-IB) GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase B current phasor and phase C current phasor (i.e. IB-IC) GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase C current phasor and phase L1 current phasor (i.e. IC-IA) GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum magnitude GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time

10

PhaseA-PhaseB

11

PhaseB-PhaseC

12

PhaseC-PhaseA

13 14 15

MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph

417

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 239:
Table 239: Voltage selection for the GF function
Set value for the parameter VoltageInput

Comment

1 2 3 4 5

PhaseA PhaseB PhaseC PosSeq -NegSeq

GF function will measure the phase A voltage phasor GF function will measure the phase B voltage phasor GF function will measure the phase C voltage phasor GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase A voltage phasor and phase B voltage phasor (i.e. VA-VB) GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase B voltage phasor and phase C voltage phasor (i.e. VB-VC) GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase C voltage phasor and phase A voltage phasor (i.e. VC-VA) GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum magnitude GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time

-3ZeroSeq

7 8 9

MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh

10

PhaseA-PhaseB

11

PhaseB-PhaseC

12

PhaseC-PhaseA

13 14 15

MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 239 is always applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB & VC or three phase-to-phase voltages VAB, VBC & VCA). This information about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take automatic care about it.

418

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 240 for built-in current restraint feature:
Table 240: Restraint current selection for the GF function
Set value for the parameter RestrComment Curr

1 2 3 4

PosSeq NegSeq 3ZeroSeq MaxPh

GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude

1.2.2

Base quantities for GF function The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (i.e. 100%) for pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for every GF function.

Base current shall be entered as: 1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 238. 2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3 (i.e. 1,732 x Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 238. Base voltage shall be entered as: 1. rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 239. 2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 239.
1.2.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here.

Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 238) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.96. However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent step pickup signal. Pickup signal will only come if all of the enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.

419

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Second harmonic feature The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in the measured current quantity (see table 238). However it shall be noted that this feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:

PosSeq (i.e. positive sequence current) NegSeq (i.e. negative sequence current) UnbalancePh (i.e. unbalance phase current) UnbalancePh-Ph (i.e. unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step pickup if the second-to-first harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.
Directional feature The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent on the relevant phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 238) and measured voltage phasor (see table 239). In protection terminology it means that the PGPF function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current flow is in accordance with the set direction (i.e. Forward, which means towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 239) and measured current phasor (see table 238) will be used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. The PGPF function will NOT do this automatically. It will just simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria.

Table 241 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for these two quantities for traditional directional relays.
Table 241: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the parameter CurrentInput Set value for the parameter VoltageInput

Comment

PosSeq

PosSeq

Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power

420

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Set value for the parameter CurrentInput

Set value for the parameter VoltageInput

Comment

NegSeq

-NegSeq

Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power system voltage level (i.e. X/R ratio) Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to -90 depending on the power system grounding (i.e. solidly grounding, grounding via resistor, etc.) Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

3ZeroSeq

-3ZeroSeq

Phase1 Phase2 Phase3

Phase2-Phase3 Phase3-Phase1 Phase1-Phase2

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional feature is enabled. Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & V and IcosPhi&V. The first principle, referred to as "I & V" in the parameter setting tool, checks that: the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 207).

421

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

V=-3V0 RCADir Ipickup ROADir I=3Io

Operate region mta line

en05000252_anis.vsd

where:
RCADir ROADir

is -75 is 50

Figure 207: I & V directional operating principle for the GF function The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&V" in the parameter setting tool, checks that: that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle between the current phasor and the mta line that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 207).

422

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

RCADir Ipickup ROADir I=3Io

V=-3V0

Operate region mta line

en05000253_ansi.vsd

where: RCADir ROADir is -75 is 50

Figure 208: GF, IcosPhi&V directional operating principle Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-set value. User can select one of the following three options: Non-directional (i.e. operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Block (i.e. operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Memory (i.e. memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit.
Voltage restraint/control feature The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a measured voltage quantity (see table 239). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:

Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

423

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

PickupCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * PickupCurr_OC1

VLowLimit_OC1

VHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000324_ansi.vsd

Figure 209: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step has value = step)

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

PickupCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * PickupCurr_OC1

VHighLimit_OC1

Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323_ansi.vsd

Figure 210: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

424

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

This feature will simple change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves (i.e. overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage conditions).
Current restraint feature The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a restraining current quantity (see table 240). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the restraining current.

IMeasured
e at er p O ea ar
es I>R tr es *I r f f oe trC ain

IsetHigh

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff) Restraint
en05000255.vsd

Figure 211: Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step to pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude. When set, the pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.
1.2.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 238) with the set pickup level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its pickup signal to one if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The pickup signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the pickup signal

425

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

has value one for longer time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.
1.2.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here.

Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 239) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.99. The pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.
1.2.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here.

Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 239 with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 1.01. The pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.
1.2.7 Inadvertent generator energization The inadvertent energization function is realized by means of the general current and voltage protection function (CAGVPC). The function is configured as shown in figure 212.

426

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

CVGAPC 3IP 3VP TROC1

TROV1 or TRUV1 BLKOC1

en06000497_ansi.vsd

Figure 212: Configuration of the inadvertent energization function The setting of the general current and voltage function (typical values) is done as shown in table 242.
Table 242: The setting of the general current and voltage function
Measured Quantity UndervoltagePickup Pickup in % of generator rating Time delay in seconds

< 70% Maximum generator Phase to Phase voltage > 85% Maximum generator Phase to Phase voltage Maximum > 50% generator Phase current

10.0 s

Overvoltage Pickup

1.0 s

OvercurrentPickup

0.05 s

In normal operation the overvoltage trip signal is activated and the undervotage trip signal is deactivated. This means that the overcurrent function is blocked.

427

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

When the generator is taken out of service the generator voltage gets low. The overvoltage trip signal will be deactivated and the undervoltage trip signal will be activated after the set delay. At this moment the block signal to the overcurrent function will be deactivated. It the generator is energized at stand still conditions, i.e. when the voltage is zero, the overcurrent function will operate after the short set delay if the generator current is larger than the set value. When the generator is started the overvoltage trip signal will be activared the set time delay after the moment when the voltage has reached the set value. At this moment the blocking of the overcurrent function is activated. The delay of the undervoltage function will prevent false operation at short circuits in the external power grid.
1.2.8 Logic diagram The simplified internal logics, for the PGPF function are shown in the following figures.

REx670
ADM PGPF function
Current and voltage selection settings

52

Phasor calculation of individual currents

A/D conversion scaling with CT ratio

Phasors & samples

Selection of which current and voltage shall be given to the built-in protection elements

Selected current Selected voltage

Restraint current selection

A/D conversion scaling with CT ratio

Phasor calculation of individual voltages

Selection of restraint current

Selected restraint current

Phasors & samples

en05000169_ansi.vsd

Figure 213: Treatment of measured currents within IED for PGPF function Figure 213 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose protection function

428

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts. 1. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input. 2. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules. 3. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules. The multipurpose protection function: 1. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table 243) for internally measured current. 2. Selects one voltage from the three phase input system (see table 244) for internally measured voltage. 3. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table 244) for internally measured restraint current.

429

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

CURRENT

UC1
Selected current

2nd Harmonic restraint UC2 2 Harmonic restraint

nd

TRUC1

STUC2 TRUC2

STOC1

OC1 2nd Harmonic restraint

Selected restraint current

TROC1

BLK2ND

Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint

DIROC1

OC2 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint 1

STOC2 TROC2

UDIRLOW DIROC2

STOV1

OV1

TROV1 STOV2

OV2

TROV2 STUV1

Selected voltage

UV1

TRUV1 STUV2

UV2

TRUV2

VOLTAGE

en05000170.vsd

430

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

CURRENT

UC1
Selected current

2nd Harmonic restraint UC2 2nd Harmonic restraint OC1 2 Harmonic restraint
nd

TRUC1

PU_UC2 TRUC2

PU_OC1 TROC1 BLK2ND

OR

Selected restraint current

Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint

DIROC1

OC2 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint OR

PU_OC2 TROC2

VDIRLOW DIROC2

PU_OV1

OV1

TROV1 PU_OV2

OV2

TROV2 PU_UV1

Selected voltage

UV1

TRUV1 PU_UV2

UV2

TRUV2

VOLTAGE

en05000170_ansi.vsd

Figure 214: PGPF function main logic diagram for built in protection elements

431

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Logic in figure 214 can be summarized as follows: 1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its PICKUP and TRIP output signals. 2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following four figures 3. Common PICKUP and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

Enable second harmonic

Second harmonic check

NOT

DEF time selected

0-DEF 0
OR

BLKTROC1

AND

TROC1

Selected current

a a>b b

OC1=On BLKOC1

PickupCurr_OC1

AND

PU_OC1

Inverse Voltage control or restraint feature Directionality check DIR_OK Inverse time selected

Selected voltage

Selected restrain current

Current Restraint Feature Imeasured > k Irestraint

en05000831_ansi.vsd

Figure 215: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step i.e. OC1 (step OC2 has the same internal logic)

432

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current

a b>a b

PickupCurr_UC1

AND

0-DEF 0

AND

TRUC1

Operation_UC1=On Bin input: BLKUC1

PU_UC1

en05000750_ansi.vsd

Figure 216: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step i.e. UC1 (step UC2 has the same internal logic)

DEF time selected Selected voltage

0-DEF 0

BLKTROV1

AND

TROV1

OR
PU_OV1

a a>b b

PickupVolt_OV1

AND
Inverse

Operation_OV1=On BLKOV1 Inverse time selected

en05000751_ansi.vsd

Figure 217: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step i.e.OV1 (step OV2 has the same internal logic)

433

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

DEF time selected Selected voltage

0-DEF 0 OR

BLKTRUV1

AND

TRUV1

a b>a b

PickupVolt_UV1

AND

PU_UV1

Inverse Operation_UV1=On BLKUV1 Inverse time selected

en05000752_ansi.vsd

Figure 218: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step i.e.UV1 (step UV2 has the same internal logic)

1.3

Function block
GF01CVGAPC I3P V3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 PICKUP PU_OC1 PU_OC2 PU_UC1 PU_UC2 PU_OV1 PU_OV2 PU_UV1 PU_UV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 VDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE VIANGLE en05000372_ansi.vsd

Figure 219: GF function block

434

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 243: Input signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block
Signal Description

I3P V3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR

Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of over current function OC1 Block of trip for over current function OC1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1 Block of over current function OC2 Block of trip for over current function OC2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2 Block of under current function UC1 Block of trip for under current function UC1 Block of under current function UC2 Block of trip for under current function UC2 Block of over voltage function OV1 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1 Block of over voltage function OV2 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2 Block of under voltage function UV1 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1 Block of under voltage function UV2 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

Table 244: Output signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block
Signal Description

TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 PICKUP PU_OC1 PU_OC2

Common trip signal Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1 Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2 General pickup signal Pickup signal from overcurrent function OC1 Pickup signal from overcurrent function OC2

435

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Signal

Description

PU_UC1 PU_UC2 PU_OV1 PU_OV2 PU_UV1 PU_UV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 VDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE VIANGLE

Pickup signal from undercurrent function UC1 Pickup signal from undercurrent function UC2 Pickup signal from overvoltage function OV1 Pickup signal from overvoltage function OV2 Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV1 Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV2 Second harmonic block signal Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Low voltage for directional polarization Measured current value Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi) Measured voltage value Angle between voltage and current

436

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

1.5

Setting parameters
Table 245: Basic parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation CurrentInput

Disabled Enabled Phase A Phase B Phase C PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh Phase AB Phase BC Phase CA MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 1 - 99999 Phase A Phase B Phase C PosSeq -NegSeq -3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh Phase AB Phase BC Phase CA MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 0.05 - 2000.00 Disabled Enabled 10.0 - 50.0

Disabled MaxPh

Disable/Enable Operation Select current signal which will be measured inside function

IBase VoltageInput

1 -

3000 MaxPh

A -

Base Current Select voltage signal which will be measured inside function

VBase OperHarmRestr

0.05 -

400.00 Disabled

kV -

Base Voltage Disable/Enable operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Ratio of second to fundamental current harmonic in % Harm analyze disabled above this current level in % of Ibase Disable/Enable current restrain function

l_2nd/l_fund

1.0

20.0

BlkLevel2nd

10 - 5000

5000

%IB

EnRestrainCurr

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

437

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

RestrCurrInput

PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq Max 0.00 - 5.00 -180 - 180 1 - 90 0.0 - 5.0

PosSeq

Select current signal which will be used for current restrain Restraining current coefficient Relay Characteristic Angle Relay Operate Angle Below this level in % of Vbase setting ActLowVolt takes over Disable/Enable Operation of OC1 Pickup current for OC1 in % of Ibase Selection of time delay curve type for OC1

RestrCurrCoeff RCADir ROADir LowVolt_VM

0.01 1 1 0.1

0.00 -75 75 0.5

Deg Deg %VB

Operation_OC1 PickupCurr_OC1 CurveType_OC1

Disabled Enabled 2.0 - 5000.0 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00

1.0 -

Disabled 120.0 ANSI Def. Time

%IB -

tDef_OC1 TD_OC1

0.01 0.01

0.50 0.30

s -

Independent (definitive) time delay of OC1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC1 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC1 Control mode for voltage controlled OC1 function

tMin_OC1 VCntrlMode_OC1

0.00 - 6000.00 Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Disabled Step Slope

0.01 -

0.05 Disabled

s -

VDepMode_OC1

Step

Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step, slope)

438

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

VDepFact_OC1

0.02 - 5.00

0.01

1.00

Multiplying factor for current pickup when OC1 is voltage dependent Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of Vbase Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of Vbase Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandV or IcosPhiandV for OC1 Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1 (Nodir, Blk, Mem) Disable/Enable Operation od OC2 Pickup current for OC2 in % of Ibase Selection of time delay curve type for OC2

VLowLimit_OC1 VHighLimit_OC1 HarmRestr_OC1 DirMode_OC1

1.0 - 200.0 1.0 - 200.0 Disabled Enabled Non-directional Forward Reverse I&V IcosPhi&U Non-directional Block Memory Disabled Enabled 2.0 - 5000.0 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 0.05 - 999.00

0.1 0.1 -

50.0 100.0 Disabled Non-directional

%VB %VB -

DirPrinc_OC1 ActLowVolt1_VM

I&V Non-directional

Operation_OC2 PickupCurr_OC2 CurveType_OC2

1.0 -

Disabled 120.0 ANSI Def. Time

%IB -

tDef_OC2 TD_OC2

0.01 0.01

0.50 0.30

s -

Independent (definitive) time delay of OC2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC2 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC2

tMin_OC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

439

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

VCntrlMode_OC2

Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Disabled Step Slope 0.02 - 5.00

Disabled

Control mode for voltage controlled OC2 function

VDepMode_OC2 VDepFact_OC2

0.01

Step 1.00

Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for current pickup when OC2 is voltage dependent Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of Vbase Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of Vbase Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandV or IcosPhiandV for OC2 Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2 (Nodir, Blk, Mem) Disable/Enable operation of UC1 Enable internal low current level blocking for UC1 Internal low current blocking level for UC1 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC1 Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Disable/Enable operation of UC2 Enable internal low current level blocking for UC2

VLowLimit_OC2 VHighLimit_OC2 HarmRestr_OC2 DirMode_OC2

1.0 - 200.0 1.0 - 200.0 Disabled Enabled Non-directional Forward Reverse I&V IcosPhi&U Non-directional Block Memory Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled 0 - 150

0.1 0.1 -

50.0 100.0 Disabled Non-directional

%VB %VB -

DirPrinc_OC2 ActLowVolt2_VM

I&V Non-directional

Operation_UC1 EnBlkLowI_UC1

Disabled Disabled

BlkLowCurr_UC1

20

%IB

PickupCurr_UC1

2.0 - 150.0

1.0

70.0

%IB

tDef_UC1 tResetDef_UC1

0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00

0.01 0.01

0.50 0.00

s s

HarmRestr_UC1 Operation_UC2 EnBlkLowI_UC2

Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled

Disabled Disabled Disabled

440

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

BlkLowCurr_UC2

0 - 150

20

%IB

Internal low current blocking level for UC2 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC2 Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Disable/Enable operation of OV1 Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of Vbase Selection of time delay curve type for OV1

PickupCurr_UC2

2.0 - 150.0

1.0

70.0

%IB

tDef_UC2 HarmRestr_UC2 Operation_OV1 PickupVolt_OV1 CurveType_OV1

0.00 - 6000.00 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00

0.01 0.1 -

0.50 Disabled Disabled 150.0 Definite time

s %VB -

tDef_OV1

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1 Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves for OV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV1 Disable/Enable operation of OV2 Pickup voltage for OV2 in % of Vbase Selection of time delay curve type for OV2

tMin_OV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

TD_OV1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

Operation_OV2 PickupVolt_OV2 CurveType_OV2

Disabled Enabled 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00

0.1 -

Disabled 150.0 Definite time

%VB -

tDef_OV2

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves for OV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV2

tMin_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

TD_OV2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

441

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

Operation_UV1 PickupVolt_UV1

Disabled Enabled 2.0 - 150.0

0.1

Disabled 50.0

%VB

Disable/Enable operation of UV1 Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in % of Vbase Selection of time delay curve type for UV1

CurveType_UV1

Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00

Definite time

tDef_UV1

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves for UV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV1 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV1 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in % of Vbase Disable/Enable operation of UV2 Pickup undervoltage for UV2 in % of Vbase Selection of time delay curve type for UV2

tMin_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

TD_UV1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

EnBlkLowV_UV1

Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 5.0

Enabled

BlkLowVolt_UV1

0.1

0.5

%VB

Operation_UV2 PickupVolt_UV2 CurveType_UV2

Disabled Enabled 2.0 - 150.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00

0.1 -

Disabled 50.0 Definite time

%VB -

tDef_UV2

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves for UV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV2 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV2 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2 in % of Vbase

tMin_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

TD_UV2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

EnBlkLowV_UV2

Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 5.0

Enabled

BlkLowVolt_UV2

0.1

0.5

%VB

442

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Table 246: Advanced parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

MultPU_OC1

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC1 Selection of reset curve type for OC1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC2 Selection of reset curve type for OC2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC2

ResCrvType_OC1

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.00 - 6000.00

Instantaneous

tResetDef_OC1

0.01

0.00

P_OC1

0.0001 - 10.0000

0.0001 0.0200

A_OC1

0.0000 - 999.0000

0.0001 0.1400

B_OC1

0.0000 - 99.0000

0.0001 0.0000

C_OC1

0.0000 - 1.0000

0.0001 1.0000

PR_OC1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

TR_OC1

0.005 - 600.000

0.001

13.500

CR_OC1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

MultPU_OC2

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

ResCrvType_OC2

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.00 - 6000.00

Instantaneous

tResetDef_OC2

0.01

0.00

P_OC2

0.0001 - 10.0000

0.0001 0.0200

A_OC2

0.0000 - 999.0000

0.0001 0.1400

443

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

B_OC2

0.0000 - 99.0000

0.0001 0.0000

Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC2 Selection of reset curve type for OV1 Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1 Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time curves for OV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV1 Selection of reset curve type for OV2 Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2

C_OC2

0.0000 - 1.0000

0.0001 1.0000

PR_OC2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

TR_OC2

0.005 - 600.000

0.001

13.500

CR_OC2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tResetDef_UC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

ResCrvType_OV1

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01

Instantaneous

tResetDef_OV1

0.00

tResetIDMT_OV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

A_OV1

0.0050 - 999.0000

0.0001 0.1400

B_OV1

0.5000 - 99.0000

0.0001 1.0000

C_OV1

0.0000 - 1.0000

0.0001 1.0000

D_OV1

0.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

P_OV1

0.0001 - 10.0000

0.0001 0.0200

ResCrvType_OV2

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01

Instantaneous

tResetDef_OV2

0.00

444

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

tResetIDMT_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time curves for OV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV2 Selection of reset curve type for UV1 Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time curves for UV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV1 Selection of reset curve type for UV2 Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2

A_OV2

0.0050 - 999.0000

0.0001 0.1400

B_OV2

0.5000 - 99.0000

0.0001 1.0000

C_OV2

0.0000 - 1.0000

0.0001 1.0000

D_OV2

0.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

P_OV2

0.0001 - 10.0000

0.0001 0.0200

ResCrvType_UV1

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01

Instantaneous

tResetDef_UV1

0.00

tResetIDMT_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

A_UV1

0.0050 - 999.0000

0.0001 0.1400

B_UV1

0.5000 - 99.0000

0.0001 1.0000

C_UV1

0.0000 - 1.0000

0.0001 1.0000

D_UV1

0.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

P_UV1

0.0001 - 10.0000

0.0001 0.0200

ResCrvType_UV2

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01

Instantaneous

tResetDef_UV2

0.00

445

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

tResetIDMT_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time curves for UV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV2

A_UV2

0.0050 - 999.0000

0.0001 0.1400

B_UV2

0.5000 - 99.0000

0.0001 1.0000

C_UV2

0.0000 - 1.0000

0.0001 1.0000

D_UV2

0.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

P_UV2

0.0001 - 10.0000

0.0001 0.0200

1.6

Technical data
Table 247: General current and voltage protection (GAPC)
Function Range or value Accuracy

Measuring current input

Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, PosSeq, NegSeq, 3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, Phase A-Phase B, Phase B-Phase C, Phase C-Phase A, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph (1 - 99999) A Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, PosSeq, -NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, Phase A-Phase B, Phase B-Phase C, Phase C-Phase A, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph (0.05 - 2000.00) kV

Base current Measuring voltage input

Base voltage

1.0% of In for I<In 1.0% of I for I>In 1.0% of In for I<In 1.0% of I for I>In 0.5% 10 ms

Pickup overcurrent, step 1 and 2 (2 - 5000)% of Ibase Pickup undercurrent, step 1 and 2 Definite time delay (2 - 150)% of Ibase (0.00 - 6000.00) s

Operate time pickup overcurrent 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Reset time pickup overcurrent 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset

446

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate time pickup undercurrent Reset time pickup undercurrent See table 577 and table 578

25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Parameter ranges for customer defined characteristic no 17: TD: 0.05 - 999.00 A: 0.0000 - 999.0000 B: 0.0000 - 99.0000 C: 0.0000 - 1.0000 P: 0.0001 - 10.0000 PR: 0.005 - 3.000 TR: 0.005 - 600.000 CR: 0.1 - 10.0

See table 577 and table 578

Voltage level where voltage memory takes over

(0.0 - 5.0)% of Vbase

1.0% of Vn 1.0% of Vn for V<Vn 1.0% of V for V>Vn 1.0% of Vn for V<Vn 1.0% of V for V>Vn

Pickup overvoltage, step 1 and 2 (2.0 - 200.0)% of Vbase Pickup undervoltage, step 1 and 2 Operate time, pickup overvoltage Reset time, pickup overvoltage Operate time pickup undervoltage Reset time pickup undervoltage High and low voltage limit, voltage dependent operation Directional function Relay characteristic angle Relay operate angle Reset ratio, overcurrent Reset ratio, undercurrent Reset ratio, overvoltage Reset ratio, undervoltage Overcurrent: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Undercurrent: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 15 ms typically 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically (2.0 - 150.0)% of Vbase 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset 25 ms typically 2 to 0 x Vset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset (1.0 - 200.0)% of Vbase Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse (-180 to +180) degrees (1 to 90) degrees > 95% < 105% > 95% < 105%

1.0% of Vn for V<Vn 1.0% of V for V>Vn

2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees

447

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Chapter 9 Multipurpose protection

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Overvoltage: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Undervoltage: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset 15 ms typically 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset 15 ms typically -

448

About this chapter

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

About this chapter This chapter describes functions like Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure supervision. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

449

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)

Function block name: CCSxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CCSRDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

1.1

Introduction
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many protection functions such as differential, ground fault current and negative sequence current functions. It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurring open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will stress the secondary circuit. The current circuit supervision function compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer. A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block protection functions expected to give unwanted tripping.

1.2

Principle of operation
The supervision function compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 220. The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled: The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|. The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set operate value IMinOp. No phase current has exceeded >PUBlock during the last 10 ms. The current circuit supervision is enabled by setting Operation = Enable.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms a ALARM will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element(s) operate, e.g. during a fault.

450

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

I>Pickup_Block BLOCK
IA IB IC I ref IA IB IC I ref

+ + +

I>IMinOp + -

x 0,8

1,5 x Ir
OR

10 ms

AND

OR

FAIL

20 ms 100 ms

OPERATION BLOCK

150 ms

1s

ALARM

en05000463_ansi.vsd

Figure 220: Simplified logic diagram for the current circuit supervision The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 221.

451

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

| I phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Slope = 0.8 I MinOp

Operation area

| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd

Figure 221: Operate characteristics

Note!
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |Iphase | - |I ref | and | I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

1.3

Function block
CCS1CCSRDIF I3P IREF BLOCK FAIL ALARM

en05000389_ansi.vsd

Figure 222: CCS function block

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 248: Input signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P IREF BLOCK

Group signal for three phase current input Reference current signal input Block of function

452

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

Table 249: Output signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block
Signal Description

FAIL ALARM

Detection of current circuit failure Alarm for current circuit failure

1.5

Setting parameters
Table 250: Basic parameter group settings for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase IMinOp

Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 5 - 200

1 1

Off 3000 20

A %IB

Disable/Enable Operation IBase value for current pickup detectors Minimum operate current differential pickup in % of IBase

Table 251: Advanced parameter group settings for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Pickup_Block

5 - 500

150

%IB

Block of the function at high phase current, in % of IBase

1.6

Technical data
Table 252: Current circuit supervision (RDIF)
Function Range or value Accuracy 10.0% of In at I In 10.0% of I at I > In 5.0% of In at I In 5.0% of I at I > In

Operate current

(5-200)% of In (5-500)% of In

Block current

453

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Function block name: FSDxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SDDRFUF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

2.1

Introduction
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FSD) is to block voltage measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise might occur. The fuse failure supervision function basically has two different algorithms, negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm and an additional delta voltage and delta current algorithm. The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-impedance grounded networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2. The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance grounded networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3V0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0. A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations. For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation modes makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm.

2.2
2.2.1

Principle of operation
Zero sequence The function can be set in five different modes by setting the parameter OpModeSel. The zero sequence function continuously measure the internal currents and voltages in all three phases and calculate:

the zero-sequence voltage 3V0 the zero-sequence current 3I0.

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3V0Pickup and 3I0Pickup. The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured zero sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V0Pickup, the measured zero sequence current is below the set value 3I0Pickup and the operation mode selector OpModeSel) is set to 2 (zero sequence mode). This

454

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

will activate the output signal BLKV, intended to block voltage related protection functions in the IED. The output signal BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activaded at the same time. If the fuseFailDetected signal is present for more than 5 seconds at the same time as all phase voltages are below the set value VPPU and the setting parameter ISealIn is set to Enable, the function will activate the output signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ. The same signals will aslo be activated if all phase voltages are below the value VPPU, SealIn=On and any of the phase voltages below the setting value for more than 5 seconds. It is recommended to always set SealIn to Enable since this will secure that no unwanted operation of fuse failure will occur at closing command of breaker when the line is already energized from the other end. The system voltages shall be normal before fuse failure is allowed to be activated and initiate block of different protection functions. The output signal BLKV can also be activated if no phase voltages is below the setting VPPU for more than 60 seconds at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the set value 3V0Pickup for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the setting IDLDPU (operate level for dead line detection) and the circuit breaker is closed (input52a is activated). This condition covers for fuse failure at open breaker position. Fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored. Fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in the IED. In the new start-up procedure the IED checks the stored value in its non volatile memory and establishes the corresponding starting conditions.

455

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

20 ms STORE3PH From non volatile memory AND 1:All voltages are low AND OR

Store in non volatile (FUSE-STORE3PH)

3PH 0: All voltages are high (Reset Latch) OR OR

27PU_VA 27PU_VB PUDVDIA IA>IPPU PUDVDIB IB>IPPU PUDVDIC IC>IPPU OR OR AND OR OR STDVDI AND AND 52a 1:Function Enable 27PU_VC 1:Fuse Failure Detection

1:Fuse failure for more than 5 s - loop AND OR 5s 0 OR 0 150 ms Dead-Line Block 0 200 ms AND OR BLKZ BLKV

(Set Latch)

DLCND MCBOP DISCPOS BLKSP DISABLE OpMode = Off TEST OperationDVDI = On TEST-ACTIVE AND AND

OR

AND BlockFUSE= Yes

en05000655_ansi.vsd

Figure 223: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, zero sequence based
Input and output signals The output signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ can be blocked in the following conditions:

The input BLOCK is activated The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as the internal signal fufailStarted is not present The operation mode selector OpModeSel is set to Disable. The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The input BLKSP is intended to be connected to the trip output at any of the protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate.

456

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is activated. The block signal has a 200 ms drop-off time delay. The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpModeSel selector. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker. The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The 89b signal sets the output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause maloperation of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated. The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions (undervoltage protection, synchro-check etc.) except for the impedance protection. The function output BLKZ can be used for blocking the impedance protection function. The BLKZ will only be activated if not the internal dead line detection is activated at the same time. The fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored. When the output 3PH is activated, all three voltage are low.
2.2.2 Negative sequence The negative sequence operates in the same way as the zero sequence, but it calculates the negative sequence component of current and voltage.

the negative sequence current 3I2 the negative sequence voltage 3U2

The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V2PU, the measured negative sequence current is below the value 3I2PU and the operation mode selector (OpModeSel) is set to 1 (negative sequence mode).
2.2.3 du/dt and di/dt The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OperationDVDI to On. When it is selected On it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithm.

The current and voltage is continuously measured in all three phases and the following quantities are calculated: The change of voltage U/t The change of current I/t

457

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DIPU and DUPU. The delta current and delta voltage algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient negative change in voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in current amplitude is detected in each phase separately. This check is performed if the circuit breaker is closed. Information about the circuit breaker position is brought to the function input 52a through a binary input of the IED. There are two conditions for activating the internal STDU signal and set the latch: The magnitude of U is higher than the corresponding setting DUPU and I is below the setting DIPU in any phase at the same time as the circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = 1) The magnitude U is higher than the setting DUDP and the magnitude of I is below the setting DIPU in any phase at the same time as the magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting IPPU.

The first criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase at the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to bee an important disadvantage, connect the 52a input to FALSE. In this way only the second criterion can activate the delta function. The second criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high current for the same phase will set the latch. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain followed by current change and a false fuse failure might occur. To prevent that the phase current criterion is introduced. If the signal setLatchUI is set (see figure 223) and if all measured voltages are low (lower than the setting UPh>) the output 3PH will be activated indicating fuse failure in all three phases. The output BLKU and BLKZ will be activated as well. If the signal setLatchUI is activated but not all three phases are below the setting UPh> only BLKU will be activated. The BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activated.
2.2.4 Operation modes The fuse failure supervision function can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to Enable or Disable. Negative and zero sequence algorithm For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode selector, OperationMode has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithm. The different operation modes are:

OpModeSel = 0, the negative and zero sequence function is switched off OpModeSel = 1; Negative sequence is selected OpModeSel = 2; Zero sequence is selected OpModeSel = 3; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in parallel in an OR-condition

458

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

OpModeSel = 4; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in series (AND-condition for operation) OpModeOpModeSel = 5; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated).

du/dt and di/dt algorithm The U and I function can be switched on or off by the setting parameter OpDUDI to Enable or Disable. 2.2.5 Dead line detection The function input signal deadLineCondition (see figure 223) is related to the internal dead line detection function. This signal is activated from the dead line condition function when the voltage and the current in at least one phase is below their respective setting values VDLDPU and IDLDPU. It prevents the blocking of the impedance protection by a fuse failure detection during dead line condition (that occurs also during single pole auto-reclosing). The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead line condition after the line-energization in order to prevent the blocking of the impedance protection for unequal pole closing.

2.3

Function block
FSD1SDDRFUF I3P V3P BLOCK 52A MCBOP 89B BLKTRIP BLKZ BLKV 3PH DLD1PH DLD3PH

en05000700_ansi.vsd

Figure 224: FSD function block

2.4

Input and output signals

Table 253: Input signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block
Signal Description

I3P V3P BLOCK 52a MCBOP 89b BLKTRIP

Current connection Voltage connection Block of function Active when circuit breaker is closed Active when external Miniature Circuit Breaker opens protected voltage circuit Active when line disconnect switch is open Blocks operation of function when active

459

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

Table 254: Output signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block
Signal Description

BLKZ BLKV 3PH DLD1PH DLD3PH

Start of current and voltage controlled function General pickup Three-phase pickup Dead line condition in at least one phase Dead line condition in all three phases

2.5

Setting parameters
Table 255: Basic parameter group settings for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation IBase VBase OpModeSel

Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Disabled V2I2 V0I0 V0I0 OR V2I2 V0I0 AND V2I2 OptimZsNs 1 - 100

1 0.05 -

Enabled 3000 400.00 V0I0

A kV -

Disable/Enable Operation Base current Base voltage Operating mode selection

3V0PU

30

%VB

Pickup of residual overvoltage element in % of VBase Pickup of residual undercurrent element in % of IBase Pickup of negative sequence overvoltage element in % of VBase Pickup of negative sequence undercurrent element in % of IBase Operation of change based function Disable/Enable Pickup of change in phase voltage in % of VBase Pickup of change in phase current in % of IBase Pickup of phase voltage in % of VBase

3I0PU

1 - 100

10

%IB

3V2PU

1 - 100

30

%VB

3I2PU

1 - 100

10

%IB

OpDVDI

Disabled Enabled 1 - 100

Disabled

DVPU

60

%VB

DIPU

1 - 100

15

%IB

VPPU

1 - 100

70

%VB

460

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

IPPU SealIn VSealInPU IDLDPU

1 - 100 Disabled Enabled 1 - 100 1 - 100

1 1 1

10 Enabled 70 5

%IB %VB %IB

Pickup of phase current in % of IBase Seal in functionality Disable/Enable Pickup of seal-in phase voltage in % of VBase Pickup for phase current detection in % of IBase for dead line detection Pickup for phase voltage detection in % of VBase for dead line detection

VDLDPU

1 - 100

60

%VB

2.6

Technical data
Table 256: Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)
Function Range or value Accuracy 1.0% of Vn 1.0% of In 1.0% of Vn 1.0% of In 5.0% of Vn 5.0% of In

Operate voltage, zero sequence Operate current, zero sequence Operate voltage, negative sequence Operate current, negative sequence Operate voltage change pickup Operate current change pickup

(1-100)% of Vbase (1100)% of Ibase (1100)% of Vbase (1100)% of Ibase (1100)% of Vbase (1100)% of Ibase

461

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Chapter 10 Secondary system supervision

462

About this chapter

Chapter 11 Control

Chapter 11 Control
About this chapter This chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

463

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Function block name: SYNxANSI number: 25 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

SESRSYN

sc/vc

1.1

Introduction
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct moment including the breaker closing time. The systems can thus be reconnected after an auto-reclose or manual closing which improves the network stability. The synchronism check, enerigizing check function checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely. The function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and breaker-and-a-half or ring busbar arrangements. Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have different settings. For systems which are running asynchronous a synchronizing function is provided. The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. It is used for slip frequencies that are larger than those for synchronism check and lower than a set maximum level for the synchronizing function.

1.2
1.2.1

Principle of operation
Basic functionality The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are simultaneously within their set limits.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is only given when the actual measured quantities match the set conditions. The synchronizing measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and it also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is only given when all measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the closing circuit.

464

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

For single circuit breaker and breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangements, the SYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers The internal logic for each function block as well as the Input and Outputs and the setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For application related information, please refer to the Application manual.
1.2.2 Logic diagrams The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the Synchrocheck function components such as Synchronism check, Energizing check and Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function. Synchronism check The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for the Synchrocheck function for evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a setting, which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage.

When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start. The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for VHighBusSC and VHighLineSC. If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and VDiff. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different voltages on the Bus and Line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values. The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value. Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and used for the Manual closing and Auto-Reclose functions respectively as required. The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete Synchrocheck function and block of the Synchronism check function respectively. TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output Two outputs MANSYOK resp. AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANSYOK conditions and for AUTOSYOK. A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions. VOKSC shows that the voltages are high, VDIFFSC, FRDIFFM/A, PHDIFFM/A shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference conditions are met.

465

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

Synchronizing When the function is set to OperationSynch=On the measuring will be performed.

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch which is a supervision that the voltages are both live. If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, rate of change of frequency, phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiffMax, FreqDiffMin and UDiffSynch. Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function reset. The function will also reset if the syncronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This will then prevent that the functions is by mistake maintained in operation a long time waiting for conditions to be fulfilled. The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete function resp. of the Synchronizing part.

466

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

SYN1 OPERATION SYNCH OFF ON TEST MODE OFF ON

STARTSYN
AND

AND

SYNPROGR

BLKSYNCH OR

S R

UDiffSynch
50 ms

UHighBusSynch UHighLineSynch FreqDiffMax

AND

AND

SYNOK

t OR

AND

FreqDiffMin
tClose Pulse AND AND tMax Synch

OR

TSTSYNOK

FreqRateChange fBus&fLine 5 Hz PhaseDiff < 15 deg PhaseDiff=closing angle

SYNFAIL

en06000636.vsd

467

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

SYN1 OPERATION SYNCH OFF ON TEST MODE OFF ON

STARTSYN
AND

AND

SYNPROGR

BLKSYNCH OR

S R

VDiffSynch
50 ms

VHighBusSynch VHighLineSynch FreqDiffMax

AND

AND

SYNOK

t OR

AND

FreqDiffMin
tClose Pulse AND AND tMax Synch

OR

TSTSYNOK

FreqRateChange fBus&fLine 5 Hz PhaseDiff < 15 deg PhaseDiff=closing angle

SYNFAIL

en06000636_ansi.vsd

Figure 225: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

Energizing check Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation by the Synchronism check function. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral, (or the opposite) this needs to be compensated. This is done with a setting, which scales the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage.

The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values VHighBusEnerg and VLowBusEnerg for bus energizing and VHighBusEnergand VLowBusEnerg for line energizing.

468

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and shall not exceed a set value. The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANENOK conditions and for AUTOENOK. The Energizing direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE resp MENMODE, which e.g. can be connected to a Binary to Integer function block BI 16 (BAxx or BBxx). Integers supplied shall be 1=off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input with connection of INTZERO output from Fixed Signals function block will mean that the setting is done from PST tool. The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both. The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete Synchronism check function resp. block of the Energizing check function. TSTENOK will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.

469

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchronism check.

OperationSC = Enabled
AND AND

TSTAUTOSY

TSTSC BLKSC BLOCK

OR AND tSCA AND
0-60 ms 0

AND

AUTOSYOK

VDiffSC
AND
50 ms 0

VHighBusSC VHighLineSC
AND

VOKSC VDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA VDIFFME FRDIFFME

PHDIFFME

FreqDiffA PhaseDiffA voltageDifferenceValue frequencyDifferenceValue phaseAngleDifferenceValue

1 1

en07000114_ansi.vsd

Figure 226: Simplified logic diagram for the Synchronism check function
Voltage selection The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformer fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the Synchrocheck function and determines the parameters fed to the Synchronism check and Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and fuse supervision.

The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig. The different alternatives are described below.

470

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

If NoVoltageSel is set the default voltages used will be VLine1 and VBus1. This is also the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must also be connected. The voltage selection function selected voltages and fuse conditions are the Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs. For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but it is of course also possible to use an inverter for one of the positions.
Fuse failure supervision External fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of the Synchronism check functions in the terminal. Alternatively the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty.

The SYN1(2)-VB1/2OK and SYN1(2)-VB1/2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the SYN1(2)-VL1/2OK and SYN1(2)-VL1/2FF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check functions are blocked. The synchronism check requires full voltage on both sides and will be blocked automatically in the event of fuse failures.
Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts BUS1_OP-BUS1_CL for Bus 1, and BUS2_OP-BUS2_CL for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 2 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 1 is opened the bus 2 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 1 voltage. The Outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers. Inputs VB1OK-VB1FF supervise the fuse for Bus 1. VB2OK-VB2FF supervises the fuse for Bus 2 and VLN1OK-VLN1FF supervises the fuse for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage source an output signal VSELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure 227.

471

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

BUS1_OP BUS1_CL BUS2_OP BUS2_CL

AND AND

B1SEL

NOT

B2SEL

AND

invalidSelection busVoltage

bus1Voltage bus2Voltage

VB1OK VB1FF VB2OK VB2FF VL1OK VL1FF

OR

AND OR AND AND AND

selectedFuseOK VSELFAIL

OR

OR

BLOCK

en05000779_ansi.vsd

Figure 227: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars
Voltage selection for a breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangement Note that with breaker-and-a-half schemes two Synchronism check functions must be used in the IED (three for two IEDs in a complete bay). Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breakers is described.

This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the Synchrocheck (Synchronism and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the arrangement. Inputs LINE1_OP-LINE1_CL, BUS1_OP-BUS1_CL, BUS2_OP-BUS2_CL, LINE2_OP-LINE2_CL are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The Outputs L1SEL, L2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage. The fuse supervision is connected to VLNOK-VLNFF etc. and with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available for each of fuse (MCB).

472

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 on one side and the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2. Four different output combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line. The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed. The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit breaker is closed. The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed. The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 Circuit breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal VSELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in Figure 228: and for the tie circuit breaker in Figure 229:

473

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

LINE1_OP LINE1_CL BUS1_OP BUS1_CL LINE2_OP LINE2_CL BUS2_OP BUS2_CL

AND AND AND AND AND OR AND AND

L1SEL

L2SEL B2SEL invalidSelection

line1Voltage line2Voltage bus2Voltage VB1OK VB1FF VB2OK VB2FF VL1OK VL1FF

OR OR OR AND AND

lineVoltage

selectedFuseOK VSELFAIL

OR

AND

AND

VL2OK VL2FF BLOCK

OR

AND

en05000780_ansi.vsd

Figure 228: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a breaker-and-a-half arrangement.

474

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

LINE1_OP LINE1_CL
AND

L1SEL NOT B1SEL

AND

BUS1_OP BUS1_CL
AND

AND

line1Voltage bus1Voltage LINE2_OP LINE2_CL

AND

busVoltage

L2SEL NOT B2SEL

AND OR

BUS2_OP BUS2_CL
AND

invalidSelection

AND

line2Voltage bus2Voltage

lineVoltage

VB1OK VB1FF VB2OK VB2FF VL1OK VL1FF VL2OK VL2FF BLOCK

OR

AND OR AND

OR

AND

selectedFuseOK VSELFAIL

OR

AND

AND

OR

AND

en05000781_ansi.vsd

Figure 229: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in breaker-and-a-half arrangement.

1.3

Function block
The Synchrocheck function block is shown in Figure 230:. Tables describing the inputs, outputs and setting parameters of this function are presented in the following sections of this document. Refer to the Application manual for the use of inputs and outputs in your particular application.

475

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

SYN1SESRSYN_25 V3PB1 V3PB2 V3PL1 V3PL2 BLOCK BLKSYNCH BLKSC BLKENERG BUS1_OP BUS1_CL BUS2_OP BUS2_CL LINE1_OP LINE1_CL LINE2_OP LINE2_CL VB1OK VB1FF VB2OK VB2FF VL1OK VL1FF VL2OK VL2FF STARTSYN TSTSYNCH TSTSC TSTENERG AENMODE MENMODE SYNOK AUTOSYOK AUTOENOK MANSYOK MANENOK TSTSYNOK TSTAUTSY TSTMANSY TSTENOK VSELFAIL B1SEL B2SEL L1SEL L2SEL SYNPROGR SYNFAIL VOKSYN VDIFFSYN FRDIFSYN FRDIFFOK FRDERIVA VOKSC VDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFM VDIFFME FRDIFFME PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN

en06000534_ansi.vsd

Figure 230: SYN function block

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 257: Input signals for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block
Signal Description

V3PB1 V3PB2 V3PL1 V3PL2 BLOCK BLKSYNCH BLKSC BLKENERG BUS1_OP BUS1_CL BUS2_OP

Group signal for voltage input busbar 1 Group signal for voltage input busbar 2 Group signal for voltage input line 1 Group signal for voltage input line 2 General block Block synchronizing Block synchro check Block energizing check Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to bus1 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2

476

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

Signal

Description

BUS2_CL LINE1_OP LINE1_CL LINE2_OP LINE2_CL VB1OK VB1FF VB2OK VB2FF VL1OK VL1FF VL2OK VL2FF STARTSYN TSTSYNCH TSTSC TSTENERG AENMODE MENMODE

Close status for CB and disconnector connected to bus2 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to line1 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2 Close status for CB and disconnector connected to line2 Bus1 voltage transformer OK Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure Bus2 voltage transformer OK Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure Line1 voltage transformer OK Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure Line2 voltage transformer OK Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure Start synchronizing Set synchronizing in test mode Set synchro check in test mode Set energizing check in test mode Input for setting of automatic energizing mode Input for setting of manual energizing mode

Table 258: Output signals for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block
Signal Description

SYNOK AUTOSYOK AUTOENOK MANSYOK MANENOK TSTSYNOK TSTAUTSY TSTMANSY TSTENOK VSELFAIL B1SEL B2SEL L1SEL L2SEL SYNPROGR SYNFAIL

Synchronizing OK output Auto synchronism-check OK Automatic energizing check OK Manual synchronism-check OK Manual energizing check OK Synchronizing OK test output Auto synchronism-check OK test output Manual synchronism-check OK test output Energizing check OK test output Selected voltage transformer fuse failed Bus1 selected Bus2 selected Line1 selected Line2 selected Synchronizing in progress Synchronizing failed

477

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

Signal

Description

VOKSYN VDIFFSYN FRDIFSYN FRDIFFOK FRDERIVA VOKSC VDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFM VDIFFME FRDIFFME PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN

Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing Frequency difference in band for synchronizing Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing Voltage amplitudes above set limits Voltage difference out of limit Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation Calculated difference in voltage Calculated difference in frequency Calculated difference of phase angle Selected mode for automatic energizing Selected mode for manual energizing

478

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

1.5

Setting parameters
Table 259: Basic parameter group settings for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation SelPhaseBus1

Disabled Enabled Phase A Phase B Phase C Phase AB Phase BC Phase CA Phase A Phase B Phase C Phase AB Phase BC Phase CA Phase A Phase B Phase C Phase AB Phase BC Phase CA Phase A Phase B Phase C Phase AB Phase BC Phase CA No voltage sel. Double bus 1 1/2 bus CB 1 1/2 bus alt. CB Tie CB 0.001 - 9999.999 -180 - 180 0.20 - 5.00 Disabled Enabled 50.0 - 120.0

Disabled Phase B

Disable/Enable Operation Select phase for bus1

SelPhaseBus2

Phase B

Select phase for bus2

SelPhaseLine1

Phase B

Select phase for line1

SelPhaseLine2

Phase B

Select phase for line2

CBConfig

No voltage sel.

Select CB configuration

VBase PhaseShift VRatio OperationSynch VHighBusSynch

0.001 5 0.01 1.0

400.000 0 1.00 Disabled 80.0

kV Deg %VB

Base voltage in kV Phase shift Voltage ratio Operation for synchronizing function Off/On Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing in % of VBase Voltage high limit line for synchronizing in % of VBase Voltage difference limit for synchronizing in % of VBase

VHighLineSynch

50.0 - 120.0

1.0

80.0

%VB

VDiffSynch

2.0 - 50.0

1.0

10.0

%VB

479

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

FreqDiffMin

0.003 - 0.250

0.001

0.010

Hz

Minimum frequency difference limit for synchronizing Maximum frequency difference limit for synchronizing Maximum allowed frequency rate of change Closing time of the breaker Breaker closing pulse duration Resets synch if no close has been made before set time Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions Operation for synchronism-check function Off/On Live bus voltage pickup for synchronism-check in % of VBase Live line voltage pickup for synchronism-check in % of VBase Voltage difference limit in % of VBase Frequency difference limit between bus and line Auto Frequency difference limit between bus and line Manual Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Auto Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Manual Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto Time delay output for synchrocheck Manual Automatic energizing check mode

FreqDiffMax

0.050 - 0.250

0.001

0.200

Hz

FreqRateChange tBreaker tClosePulse tMaxSynch

0.000 - 0.500 0.000 - 60.000 0.050 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01

0.300 0.080 0.200 600.00

Hz/s s s s

tMinSynch OperationSC

0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Enabled 50.0 - 120.0

0.001 -

2.000 Enabled

s -

VHighBusSC

1.0

80.0

%VB

VHighLineSC

50.0 - 120.0

1.0

80.0

%VB

VDiffSC FreqDiffA

2.0 - 50.0 0.003 - 1.000

1.0 0.001

15.0 0.010

%VB Hz

FreqDiffM

0.003 - 1.000

0.001

0.010

Hz

PhaseDiffA

5.0 - 90.0

1.0

25.0

Deg

PhaseDiffM

5.0 - 90.0

1.0

25.0

Deg

tSCA tSCM AutoEnerg

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Disabled DLLB DBLL Both

0.001 0.001 -

0.100 0.100 DBLL

s s -

480

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

ManEnerg

Disabled DLLB DBLL Both Disabled Enabled 50.0 - 120.0

Both

Manual energizing check mode

ManEnergDBDL VLiveBusEnerg

1.0

Disabled 80.0

%VB

Manual dead bus, dead line energizing Live bus voltage pickup for energizing check in % of VBase Live line voltage pickup for energizing check in % of VBase Dead bus voltage pickup for energizing check in % of VBase Dead line voltage pickup for energizing check in % of VBase Maximum voltage for energizing in % of VBase Time delay for automatic energizing check Time delay for manual energizing check

VLiveLineEnerg

50.0 - 120.0

1.0

80.0

%VB

VDeadBusEnerg

10.0 - 80.0

1.0

40.0

%VB

VDeadLineEnerg

10.0 - 80.0

1.0

40.0

%VB

VMaxEnerg tAutoEnerg tManEnerg

80.0 - 140.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

1.0 0.001 0.001

115.0 0.100 0.100

%VB s s

1.6

Technical data
Table 260: Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)
Function Range or value Accuracy

Phase shift, line - bus Voltage ratio, Vbus/Vline Voltage high limit for synchronism check Reset ratio, synchronism check Frequency difference limit between bus and line Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Voltage difference limit between bus and line Time delay output for synchronism check Voltage high limit for energizing check

(-180 to 180) degrees (0.20-5.00)% of Vbase (50.0-120.0)% of Vbase > 95% (0.003-1.000) Hz (5.0-90.0) degrees (2.0-50.0)% of Vbase (0.000-60.000) s (50.0-120.0)% of Vbase

1.0% of Vn at V Vn 1.0% of V at V > Vn

2.0 mHz 2.0 degrees 1.0% of Vn 0.5% 10 ms 1.0% of Vn at V Vn 1.0% of V at V > Vn

481

Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Chapter 11 Control

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Reset ratio, voltage high limit Voltage low limit for energizing check Reset ratio, voltage low limit Maximum voltage for energizing

> 95% (10.0-80.0)% of Vbase < 105% (80.0-140.0)% of Vbase (0.000-60.000) s 160 ms typically 80 ms typically

1.0% of Vn

1.0% of Vn at V Vn 1.0% of V at V > Vn 0.5% 10 ms

Time delay for energizing check Operate time for synchronism check function Operate time for energizing function

482

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Function block name: ARx-ANSI number: 79 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

SMBRREC

O->I

2.1

Introduction
The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing for single or multi-breaker applications. Up to five reclosing attempts can be programmed. The first attempt can be single-, two and/or three pole for single phase or multi-phase faults respectively. Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if the fault proved to be transient. Each autoreclosing function can be configured to co-operate with a synchronism check function.

2.2
2.2.1

Principle of operation
Logic Diagrams The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of the functionality. Auto-reclosing operation Off and On Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters and through external control. With the setting Operation=ON, the function is activated while with the setting Operation=OFF the function is deactivated. With the setting Operation=External ctrl, the activation/deactivation is made by input signal pulses, for example from a control system.

2.2.2

When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high). Other input conditions such as 52a and CBREADY must also be fulfilled. At this point the automatic recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output signal READY on the AR function block is activated (high).
2.2.3 Auto-reclosing mode selection The Auto-reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode=3phase(0),1/2/3ph(1),1/2ph(2),1ph+1*2ph(3),1/2ph+1*3ph(4)1ph+1*2+3ph(5) The selected mode can be read as integer as per above list on output MODE.

As an alternative to setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, e.g. from function block B16I (BAxx respBBxx) to input MODEINT

483

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

Following integers shall be used. 1=3phase,2=1/2/3ph,3=1/2ph,4=1ph+1*2ph,5=1/2ph+1*3ph or 5=1ph+1*2/3ph. When INTZERO from Fixed signal function block is connected to the input MODEINT the parameter setting selected will be valid.
2.2.4 Initiate auto-reclosing and conditions for initiation of a reclosing cycle The usual way in which to initiate a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to initiate it when a line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the RI input. Should it be necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for different power system configurations or during tripping at different protection stages, the input RI_HS (reclose initiation of high-speed reclosing) can also be used.

For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be met. They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are: a) CBREADY, CB ready for a reclosing cycle, e.g. charged operating gear, b) 52a to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and initiation was applied, c) No blocking or inhibit signal shall be present. After the initiation has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal. To initiate auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals, one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs 52a and RI and set a parameter StartByCBOpen = ON and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally closed, 52b). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip commands to input INHIBIT. The logic for switching the auto-recloser Enable/Disable and the starting of the reclosing is shown in figure 231. The following should be considered. Setting Operation can be set to Off, External ctrl or ON. External ctrl offers the possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF, communication commands to the same inputs etc. Autoreclose AR is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and Communication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function. RI makes a first attempt with synchronism-check, RI_HS makes its first attempt without synchronism-check. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5. Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs 52a and CBREADY.

484

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

Operation:On Operation:Off
Operation:External Ctrl

ON OFF RI RI_HS
autoInitiate

AND AND OR

OR AND OR S R

SETON

OR Additional conditions AND

initiate

TRSOTF CBREADY 52a

PICKUP
0 0-t120

AND

AND

S R

AND

CB Closed

0-tCBClosedMin 0

AND
Blocking conditions

OR Inhibit conditions count 0

AND

READY

en05000782_ansi.vsd

Figure 231: Auto-reclosing Disable/Enable and start

2.2.5 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1 It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one extension time. There are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase auto-reclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied, and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto-reclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated in connection with the start, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three-phase reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is activated by input RI_HS.

An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended t1 = On and the input PLCLOST.
2.2.6 Long trip signal In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the auto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off. A long trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.

485

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

Extended t1

PLCLOST initiate pickup

AND 0-tTrip 0

OR

AND

AND

Extend t1

AND

AND

long duration (block AR)

en05000783_ansi.vsd

Figure 232: Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection
Reclosing checks and the reset timer When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In three-phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to use a synchronism check function in the same physical device or an external one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can be set to TRUE (set high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchronism check function to a permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchronism check, or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At single-phase, two-phase reclosing and at three-phase high-speed reclosing started by RI_HS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input is disregarded.

By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing command. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be complied with after the tripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is prepared for a Close-Open sequence. The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval, tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked. The reset timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault. The reset timer is started when the CB closing command is given. A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in the reclosing sequence.

486

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

0-t1 1Ph 0 From logic for reclosing programs 1P2PTO 3PHSTO 3PT1TO 3PT2TO 3PT3TO 3PT4TO 3PT5TO SYNC initiate CBREADY AND AND 0-t1 3Ph HS 0 0-t1 3Ph 0 OR AND 0-t1 2Ph 0

"AR Open time" timers OR 1P2PTO

3PHSTO

3PT1TO Pulse AR

OR

AND

OR

Blocking AR State Control COUNTER CL 0 1 2 3

AND

0-tSync 0

Shot 0 Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5

Pulse AR (above) OR TR2P TR3P PICKUP RI Shot 0 Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3 Shot 4 Shot 5 LOGIC reclosing programs

AND

0-tReset 0 Reset Timer On

4 5

1PT1 2PT1 3PHS 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 1 PERMIT1P PREP3P Inhibit Y OR INPROGR

Y INHIBIT

Blocking OR

0 tInhibit

en05000784_ansi.vsd

Figure 233: Reclosing Reset and Inhibit timers

Pulsing of the CB closing command The CB closing command, CLOSECMD is a pulse with a duration set by parameter tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter CutPulse=On. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut (interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 234

487

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number of reclosing commands issued.

pulse initiate

tPulse ** AND ) 50 ms O R CLOSECMD

1PT1

AND

counter

COUNT1P

2PT1

AND

counter

COUNT2P

3PT1

AND

counter

COUNT3P1

3PT2

AND

counter

COUNT3P2

3PT3

AND

counter

COUNT3P3

3PT4

AND

counter

COUNT3P4

3PT5

AND

counter counter

COUNT3P5 COUNTAR

RSTCOUNT **) Only if "CutPulse" = On

en05000785_ansi.vsd

Figure 234: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters
Transient fault After the reclosing command the reset timer tReset starts running for the set time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset. Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal RI or TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing shots, further shots

488

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

may be made or the reclosing sequence will be ended. After the reset time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the 52a input will be missing. Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle. Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and initiate is received after the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The signal resets once the reset time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can also be made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not respond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.

initiate block start

AND

OR

AND

UNSUCCL

shot 0 UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck

Pulse AR (Closing) 52a

OR AND 0-tUnsucCl 0

AND

CBclosed

en05000786_ansi.vsd

Figure 235: Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing

Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing shots (if selected) even if the initiate signals are not received from the protection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter AutoCont = On and to the required delay for the function to proceed without a new initiate.

489

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

0-tAutoContWait 0 AND

CLOSECMD
AND

S Q R

AND

52a

CBClosed

OR

RI

OR

initiate

en05000787_ansi.vsd

Figure 236: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5

Initiation of reclosing from CB open information If a user wants to apply initiation of auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to block reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically one also set CBAuxContType = NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed, 52b) to inputs 52a and START. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open an auto-reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and latched in the function, subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.

490

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

PickupByCBOpen = On
NOT

RI

AND

RI_HS

AND 100 ms AND 100 ms AND

PICKUP

en05000788_ansi.vsd

Figure 237: Pulsing of the start inputs at "StartByCBOpen=On"

2.2.7 Time sequence diagrams Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and permanent faults are shown below in figures 238 to 241.

Fault
CB POS
Closed Open Closed

CB READY RECL. INT. (Trip) SYNC READY INPROG 1PT1 ACTIVE CLOSE CMD PREP3P SUCCL
Time t1 1Ph tPulse tReset

en04000196_ansi.vsd

Figure 238: Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing

491

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

Fault
CB POS
Closed Open C Open C

CB READY RECL. INT. (Trip) TR3P SYNC READY INPROGR 3PT1 3PT2 ACTIVE CLOSE CMD PREP3P UNSUCCL
Time
en04000197_ansi.vsd

t1 3Ph t2 3Ph tReset tPulse tPulse

Figure 239: Permanent fault. Three-pole trip. Two-shot reclosing

492

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED AR01-CBREADY(CO) AR01-RI AR01-TR3P AR01-SYNC AR01-READY AR01-INPROGR AR01-1PT1 AR01-T1 AR01-T2 AR01-CLOSECMD AR01-P3P AR01-UNSUC
tReset t1s

en04000198_ansi.vsd

Figure 240: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase single-shot reclosing

493

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED AR01-CBREADY(CO) AR01-RI AR01-TR3P AR01-SYNC AR01-READY AR01-INPROGR AR01-1PT1 AR01-T1 AR01-T2 AR01-CLOSECMD AR01-P3P AR01-UNSUC
tReset t1s t2

en04000199_ansi.vsd

Figure 241: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph, two-shot reclosing

494

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

2.3

Function block
AR01SMBRREC_79 ON BLOCKED OFF SETON BLKON READY BLKOFF ACTIVE RESET SUCCL INHIBIT UNSUCCL RI INPROGR RI_HS 1PT1 TRSOTF 2PT1 SKIPHS 3PT1 ZONESTEP 3PT2 TR2P 3PT3 TR3P 3PT4 THOLHOLD 3PT5 CBREADY PERMIT1P 52A PREP3P PLCLOST CLOSECMD SYNC WFMASTER WAIT COUNT1P RSTCOUNT COUNT2P MODEINT COUNT3P1 COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR MODE

Figure 242: AR function block

2.4

Input and output signals

Table 261: Input signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block
Signal Description

ON OFF BLKON BLKOFF RESET INHIBIT RI RI_HS TRSOTF SKIPHS ZONESTEP TR2P TR3P THOLHOLD

Switches the AR On (at Operation = ExternalCtrl) Switches the AR Off (at Operation = ExternalCtrl) Sets the AR in blocked state Releases the AR from the blocked state Resets the AR to initial conditions Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal Start High Speed reclosing without Synchronism-Check: t13PhHS Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed shots Coordination between local AR and down stream devices Signal to the AR that a two-pole tripping occurred Signal to the AR that a three-pole tripping occurred Holds the AR in wait state

495

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

Signal

Description

CBREADY 52a PLCLOST SYNC WAIT RSTCOUNT MODEINT

CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start / close Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open Power line carrier or other form of permissive signal lost Synchronism-check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts) Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements) Resets all counters Integer input used to set the reclosingMode, alternative to setting

Table 262: Output signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block
Signal Description

BLOCKED SETON READY ACTIVE SUCCL UNSUCCL INPROGR 1PT1 2PT1 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 PERMIT1P PREP3P CLOSECMD WFMASTER COUNT1P COUNT2P COUNT3P1 COUNT3P2 COUNT3P3 COUNT3P4 COUNT3P5 COUNTAR MODE

The AR is in blocked state The AR operation is switched on, operative Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new sequence Reclosing sequence in progress Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim time Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open reset Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1 Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5 Permit single-pole trip, inverse signal to PREP3P Prepare three-pole trip, control of the next trip operation Closing command for CB Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential reclosing Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 2 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 3 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 4 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 5 Counting total number of reclosing shots Integer output for reclosing mode

496

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

2.5

Setting parameters
Table 263: Basic parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

Operation

Disabled External ctrl Enabled 3 phase 1/2/3ph 1/2ph 1ph+1*2ph 1/2ph+1*3ph 1ph+1*2/3ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00

External ctrl

Off, ExternalCtrl, On

ARMode

1/2/3ph

The AR mode selection e.g. 3ph, 1/3ph

t1 1Ph t1 3Ph t1 3PhHS tReset tSync tTrip tPulse tCBClosedMin

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.01

1.000 6.000 0.400 60.00 30.00 0.200 0.200 5.00

s s s s s s s s

Open time for shot 1, single-phase Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing 3ph Open time for shot 1, high speed reclosing 3ph Duration of the reset time Maximum wait time for synchronism-check OK Maximum trip pulse duration Duration of the circuit breaker closing pulse Minimum time that CB must be closed before new sequence allows Wait time for CB before indicating Unsuccessful/Successful Priority selection between adjacent terminals None/Low/High Maximum wait time for release from Master

tUnsucCl

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

30.00

Priority

None Low High 0.00 - 6000.00

None

tWaitForMaster

0.01

60.00

497

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

Table 264: Advanced parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description

NoOfShots

1 2 3 4 5 Disabled Enabled NormClosed NormOpen CO OCO 0.000 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 0.00 - 6000.00 Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000

Max number of reclosing shots 1-5

StartByCBOpen

Off

To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB open position Select the CB aux contact type NC/NO for 52a input Select type of circuit breaker ready signal CO/OCO Open time for shot 1, two-phase Open time for shot 2, three-phase Open time for shot 3, three-phase Open time for shot 4, three-phase Open time for shot 5, three-phase Extended open time at loss of permissive channel Off/On 3Ph Dead time is extended with this value at loss of perm ch Inhibit reclosing reset time Shorten closing pulse at a new trip Off/On Advance to next shot if CB has been closed during dead time

CBAuxContType

NormOpen

CBReadyType

CO

t1 2Ph t2 3Ph t3 3Ph t4 3Ph t5 3Ph Extended t1

0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 -

1.000 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 Off

s s s s s -

tExtended t1

0.001

0.500

tInhibit CutPulse Follow CB

0.000 - 60.000 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled

0.001 -

5.000 Off Off

s -

498

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

Parameter

Range

Step

Default

Unit

Description

AutoCont

Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000

Off

Continue with next reclosing-shot if breaker did not close Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by checking CB position Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing Coordination of down stream devices to local prot unit's AR

tAutoContWait

0.001

2.000

UnsucClByCBChk

NoCBCheck CB check Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled

NoCBCheck

BlockByUnsucCl ZoneSeqCoord

Off Off

2.6

Technical data
Table 265: Autorecloser (RREC, 79)
Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of autoreclosing shots Number of autoreclosing programs

1-5 8

499

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Chapter 11 Control

Function

Range or value

Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms

Autoreclosing open time: shot 1 - t1 1Ph shot 1 - t1 2Ph shot 1 - t1 3PhHS shot 1 - t1 3PhDld shot 2 - t2 shot 3 - t3 shot 4 - t4 shot 5 - t5 Extended autorecloser open time Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync Maximum trip pulse duration Inhibit reset time Reset time Minimum time CB must be closed before AR becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle Circuit breaker closing pulse length CB check time before unsuccessful Wait for master release Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot (0.000-60.000) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.000-60.000) s

(0.000-60.000) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.00-6000.00) s (0.000-60.000) s

500

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3
3.1

Apparatus control (APC)

Introduction
The apparatus control is a function for control and supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchronism check, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

3.2

Principle of operation
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences. Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function module that handles the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process information used by higher-level control functions. Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by one software module (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals connected to a breaker and a disconnector are almost the same, the same software is used to handle these two types of apparatuses. The software module is connected to the physical process in the switchyard via an interface module by means of a number of digital inputs and outputs. One type of interface module is intended for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and another type is intended for a disconnector or grounding switch (SXSWI). Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration. These four types are: Bay control QCBAY Switch controller SCSWI Circuit breaker SXCBR Circuit switch SXSWI

The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl, to handle the local/remote switch, and the function blocks QCRSV and RESIN, for the reservation function, also belong to the apparatus control function. The principles of operation, function block, input and output signals and setting parameters for all these functions are described below.

501

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3.3
3.3.1

Bay control (QCBAY)

Introduction This function is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. The bay control function also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay. Principle of operation The functionality of the bay control function is not defined in the IEC 6185081 standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node. The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and blocking conditions to other functions within the bay e.g. switch control functions, voltage control functions and measurement functions. Local panel switch The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote level and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is normally situated on the control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately on the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards. When the local panel switch is in Off position all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate. To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl are needed and connected to QCBAY. For more information, see section 3.4 "Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)". Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position according to table 266. In addition, there is one configuration parameter that affects the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), i.e. it is permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of switch, i.e. 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.

3.3.2

502

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

Table 266: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel switch positions PSTO value AllPSTOValid (configuration parameter) 0 1 5 2 5 3 -FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE -Possible locations that shall be able to operate

0 = Off 1 = Local 1 = Local 2 = Remote 2 = Remote 3 = Faulty

Not possible to operate Local Panel Local or Remote level without any priority Remote level Local or Remote level without any priority Not possible to operate

Blockings The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a complete bay. The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following: Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay. Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all configured functions within the bay. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 6185081). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the UMT. 3.3.3 Function block
CB01QCBAY LR_OFF LR_LOC LR_REM LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD

en05000796_ansi.vsd

Figure 243: CB function block

503

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3.3.4

Input and output signals

Table 267: Input signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block
Signal LR_OFF LR_LOC LR_REM LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD Description External Local/Remote switch is in Off position External Local/Remote switch is in Local position External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position Data representing the L/R switch position is valid Steady signal to block the position updates Steady signal to block the command

Table 268: Output signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block
Signal PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD Description The value for the operator place allocation The update of position is blocked The function is blocked for commands

3.3.5

Setting parameters
Table 269: General settings for the QCBAY (CB01-) function
Parameter AllPSTOValid Range Priority No priority Step Default Priority Unit Description The priority of originators

3.4
3.4.1

Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)

Introduction The signals from the local LCD HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl to the Bay control QCBAY function block. A parameter in function block LocalRemote is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local LCD HMI or from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs. Principle of operation The function block LocalRemote handles the signals coming from the local/remote switch. The connections are seen in figure 244, where the inputs on function block LocalRemote are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When a local LCD HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the configuration. The outputs from the LocalRemote function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on QCBAY.

3.4.2

504

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

LR01LocalRemote CTRLOFF OFF LOCCTRL LOCAL REMCTRL REMOTE LHMICTRL VALID

CB01QCBAY LR_OFF PSTO LR_LOC UPD_BLKD LR_REM CMD_BLKD LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD CB02QCBAY LR_OFF PSTO LR_LOC UPD_BLKD LR_REM CMD_BLKD LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD

LR02LocalRemote CTRLOFF OFF LOCCTRL LOCAL REMCTRL REMOTE LHMICTRL VALID

LRC1LocRemControl PSTO1 HMICTR1 PSTO2 HMICTR2 PSTO3 HMICTR3 PSTO4 HMICTR4 PSTO5 HMICTR5 PSTO6 HMICTR6 PSTO7 HMICTR7 PSTO8 HMICTR8 PSTO9 HMICTR9 PSTO10 HMICTR10 PSTO11 HMICTR11 PSTO12 HMICTR12 en05000250.vsd

Figure 244: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local LCD HMI with two bays and two screen pages If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be different for the included bays. When the local LCD HMI is used the position of the local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block LocRemControl controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay and screen page. The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the UMT.

505

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3.4.3

Function block
LR01LocalRemote CT RLOFF OFF LOCCT RL LOCAL REMCT RL REMOT E LHMICT RL VALID en05000360.vsd

Figure 245: LR function block

LRC1LocRemControl PST O1 HMICT R1 PST O2 HMICT R2 PST O3 HMICT R3 PST O4 HMICT R4 PST O5 HMICT R5 PST O6 HMICT R6 PST O7 HMICT R7 PST O8 HMICT R8 PST O9 HMICT R9 PST O10 HMICT R10 PST O11 HMICT R11 PST O12 HMICT R12 en05000361.vsd

Figure 246: LRC function block 3.4.4 Input and output signals
Table 270: Input signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block
Signal CTRLOFF LOCCTRL REMCTRL LHMICTRL Description Disable control Local in control Remote in control LHMI control

Table 271: Output signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block
Signal OFF LOCAL REMOTE VALID Description Control is disabled Local control is activated Remote control is activated Outputs are valid

506

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

Table 272: Input signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block
Signal PSTO1 PSTO2 PSTO3 PSTO4 PSTO5 PSTO6 PSTO7 PSTO8 PSTO9 PSTO10 PSTO11 PSTO12 Description PSTO input channel 1 PSTO input channel 2 PSTO input channel 3 PSTO input channel 4 PSTO input channel 5 PSTO input channel 6 PSTO input channel 7 PSTO input channel 8 PSTO input channel 9 PSTO input channel 10 PSTO input channel 11 PSTO input channel 12

Table 273: Output signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block
Signal HMICTR1 HMICTR2 HMICTR3 HMICTR4 HMICTR5 HMICTR6 HMICTR7 HMICTR8 HMICTR9 HMICTR10 HMICTR11 HMICTR12 Description Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

3.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 274: Basic general settings for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function
Parameter ControlMode Range Step Default Internal LR-switch Unit Description Control mode for internal/external LR-switch

Internal LR-switch External LR-switch

507

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3.5
3.5.1

Switch controller (SCSWI)

Introduction The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase switching devices. Principle of operation The function is provided with verification checks for the select - execute sequence, i.e. checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and synchronism-check. Command handling Two types of command models can be used. The two command models are "direct with enhanced security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". Which one of these two command models that are used is defined by the parameter CtlModel. The meaning with "direct with enhanced security" model is that no select is required. The meaning with "SBO with enhanced security" model is that a select is required before execute. In this function only commands with enhanced security is supported regarding changing of the position. With enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated variable "cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC61850 communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function block and used for example at commissioning. The meaning of the cause signals can be found in table 2.

3.5.2

Note!
There is not any relation between the command direction and the actual position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to execute a close command. Before an executing command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no executing command is send. If the parameter is false the execution command is send independent of the position value. Evaluation of position In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one-phase switches, following principles will be applied:

508

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

All switches in open position: All switches in close position: One switch =open, two switches= close (or inversely): Any switch in intermediate position: Any switch in bad state:

switch control position = open switch control position = close switch control position = intermediate switch control position = intermediate switch control position = bad state

The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the time stamp of the last changed phase when it goes to end position. When it goes to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase. In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discrepancy and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discrepancy situation, i.e. the position of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set. In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from the switch modules XCBR/XSWI. At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown. Blocking principles The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and via the IEC61850 communication from the operator place. The different blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

Note!
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this function, i.e. no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory. Interaction with synchronism-check and synchronizing functions The switch controller works in conjunction with the synchronism-check and the synchronizing function SECRSYN. It is assumed that the synchronism-check function is continuously in operation and gives the result to the SCSWI. The result from the synchronism-check function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator performs an override of the synchronism-check, the evaluation of the synchronism-check state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchronism-check function, the switch controller SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function SXCBR.

509

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

When there is no positive confirmation from the synchronism-check function, the SCSWI will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the closing command to the SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see figure 247. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the synchronizing function. The SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-synchronism-check" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 251.

SCSWI EXE_CL OR

SXCBR CLOSE

SYNC_OK START_SY SY_INPRO SECRSYN . CB CLOSE Synchro Check Synchronizing function

en05000091.vsd

Figure 247: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SECRSYN (synchronism check and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function Time diagrams The SCSWI function has timers for evaluating different time supervision conditions. These timers are explained here. The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute command signal, i.e. the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the object to operate.

510

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

select execute command tSelect timer t1 t1>tSelect, then longoperation-time in 'cause' is set

en05000092.vsd

Figure 248: tSelect The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the reservation, i.e. the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.

select reservation request RES_RQ reservation granted RES_GRT command termination tResResponse timer t1 t1>tResResponse, then 1-of-n-control in 'cause' is set
en05000093.vsd

Figure 249: tResResponse The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the command termination, see figure 250.

511

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

execute command phase A open close phase B open close phase C open close command termination phase A command termination phase B command termination phase C command termination circuit breaker open close tExecutionFB timer t1>tExecutionFB, then long-operation-time in 'cause' is set *

t1

* The command termination will be delayed one execution sample.

en05000094_ansi.vsd

Figure 250: tExecutionFB The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchronism-check conditions are not fulfilled.

512

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

execute command SYNC_OK tSynchrocheck START_SY SY_INPRO tSynchronizing t2 t2>tSynchronizing, then blocked-by-synchronism check in 'cause' is set t1

en05000095_ansi.vsd

Figure 251: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing Error handling Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 275 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 275: Values for "cause" signal in priority order
Apparatus control function 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 Description wrongCTLModel blockedForCommand blocked-for-open-command blocked-for-close-command longOperationTime switch-not-start-moving persistent-intermediate-state switch-returned-to-initial-position switch-in-bad-state not-expected-final-position

513

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3.5.3

Function block
CS01SCSWI BLOCK PSTO L_SEL L_OPEN L_CLOSE AU_OPEN AU_CLOSE BL_CMD RES_GRT RES_EXT SY_INPRO SYNC_OK EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE XPOS1 XPOS2 XPOS3 EXE_OP EXE_CL SELECTED RES_RQ START_SY POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE XOUT

en05000337.vsd

Figure 252: CS function block 3.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 276: Input signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block
Signal BLOCK PSTO L_SEL L_OPEN L_CLOSE AU_OPEN AU_CLOSE BL_CMD RES_GRT RES_EXT SY_INPRO SYNC_OK EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE XPOS1 XPOS2 XPOS3 Description Block of function Operator place selection Select signal from local panel Open signal from local panel Close signal from local panel Used for local automation function Used for local automation function Steady signal for block of the command Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made Reservation is made externally Synchronizing function in progress Closing is permitted by the synchronism-check Enables open operation Enables close operation Group signal for XCBR input Group signal for XCBR input Group signal for XCBR input

514

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

Table 277: Output signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block
Signal EXE_OP EXE_CL SELECTED RES_RQ START_SY POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE XOUT Description Execute Open command Execute Close command The select conditions are fulfilled Request signal to the reservation function Starts the synchronizing function Position indication Open position indication Closed position indication The positions for poles A, B and C are not equal after a set time Commands are blocked Latest value of the error indication during command Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

3.5.5

Setting parameters
Table 278: Basic general settings for the SCSWI (CS01-) function
Parameter CtlModel Range Dir Norm SBO Enh (ABB) Dir Norm (ABB) SBO Enh Always permitted Not perm at 00/11 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default SBO Enh Unit Description Specifies the type for control model according to IEC 61850

PosDependent

Always permitted

Permission to operate depending on the position Max time between select and execute signals Allowed time from reservation request to reservation granted Allowed time for synchronism-check to fulfil close conditions Supervision time to get the signal synchronizing in progress Max time from command execution to termination Allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles

tSelect tResResponse

0.001 0.001

30.000 5.000

s s

tSynchrocheck

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

10.00

tSynchronizing

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

tExecutionFB tPoleDiscord

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

30.000 2.000

s s

515

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3.6
3.6.1

Circuit breaker (SXCBR)

Introduction The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position. Principle of operation The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value. The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place. Local/Remote switch One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 253.

3.6.2

TR

UE

Local= Operation at switch yard level

From I/O

switchLR
FAL SE

Remote= Operation at IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd

Figure 253: Local/Remote switch Blocking principles The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure etc. The blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command.

516

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command. Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory. Substitution The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.

Note!
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory. Time diagrams There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 254 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

517

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

EXE_CL Close pulse duration

AdaptivePulse = TRUE

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

tStartMove timer t1 tStartMove

if t1 > tStartMove then "switch-not-start-moving" attribute in 'cause' is set

tIntermediate timer t2 tIntermediate

if t2 > tIntermediate then "persisting-intermediate-state" attribute in 'cause' is set

en05000097.vsd

Figure 254: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 255 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000098.vsd

Figure 255: Execute output pulse

518

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse. The execute output pulses are reset when: the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has elapsed.

Note!
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has elapsed. There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed. An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 256 .

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP tOpenPulse

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_OP tOpenPulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd

Figure 256: Open command with open position indication

519

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

Error handling Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 279 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 279: Vendor specific cause values for Apparatus control in priority order
Apparatus control function 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 Description wrongCTLModel blockedForCommand blocked-for-open-command blocked-for-close-command longOperationTime switch-not-start-moving persistent-intermediate-state switch-returned-to-initial-position switch-in-bad-state not-expected-final-position

3.6.3

Function block
XC01SXCBR GRPConABS1 EXE_OP GRPConABS2 EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS TR_POS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE

BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN TERVALUE OSEVALUE PENVALUE

en05000338_ansi.vsd

Figure 257: XC function block

520

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3.6.4

Input and output signals

Table 280: Input signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block
Signal BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN Description Block of function Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch Signal to block the open command Signal to block the close command Steady signal for block of the position updating Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O Signal for open position of truck from I/O Signal for close position of truck from I/O Resets the operation counter Execution information from CSWI

Table 281: Output signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block
Signal XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS TR_POS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE Description Group signal for XCBR output Executes the command for open direction Executes the command for close direction Indication that the position is substituted Indication that the function is blocked for open commands Indication that the function is blocked for close commands The update of position indication is blocked Apparatus position indication Apparatus open position Apparatus closed position Truck position indication The value of the operation counter Latest value of the error indication during command

521

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3.6.5

Setting parameters
Table 282: Basic general settings for the SXCBR (XC01-) function
Parameter tStartMove Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.100 Unit s Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position The output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command

tIntermediate AdaptivePulse

0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 -

0.150 Not adaptive

s -

tOpenPulse tClosePulse

0.001 0.001

0.200 0.200

s s

3.7
3.7.1

Circuit switch (SXSWI)

Introduction The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or grounding switches via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position. Principle of operation The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or a 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value. The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place. Local/Remote switch One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 258.

3.7.2

522

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

TR

UE

Local= Operation at switch yard level

From I/O

switchLR
FAL SE

Remote= Operation at IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd

Figure 258: Local/Remote switch Blocking principles The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure etc. The blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command. Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command. Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory. Substitution The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.

Note!
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

523

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

Time diagrams There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 259 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL Close pulse duration

AdaptivePulse = TRUE

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

tStartMove timer t1 tStartMove

if t1 > tStartMove then "switch-not-start-moving" attribute in 'cause' is set

tIntermediate timer t2 tIntermediate

if t2 > tIntermediate then "persisting-intermediate-state" attribute in 'cause' is set

en05000097.vsd

Figure 259: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 260 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.

524

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000098.vsd

Figure 260: Execute output pulse If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse. The execute output pulses are reset when: the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has elapsed.

Note!
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has elapsed. There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed. An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 261.

525

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP tOpenPulse

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_OP tOpenPulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd

Figure 261: Open command with open position indication Error handling Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 283 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 283: Values for "cause" signal in priority order
Apparatus control function 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 Description wrongCTLModel blockedForCommand blocked-for-open-command blocked-for-close-command longOperationTime switch-not-start-moving persistent-intermediate-state switch-returned-to-initial-position switch-in-bad-state not-expected-final-position

526

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3.7.3

Function block
XS01SXSWI BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE RS_CNT XIN XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE en05000339.vsd

Figure 262: XS function block 3.7.4 Input and output signals

Table 284: Input signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block
Signal BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE RS_CNT XIN Description Block of function Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch Signal to block the open command Signal to block the close command Steady signal for block of the position updating Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O Resets the operation counter Execution information from CSWI

Table 285: Output signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block
Signal XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD Description Group signal for XSWI output Executes the command for open direction Executes the command for close direction Indication that the position is substituted Indication that the function is blocked for open commands Indication that the function is blocked for close commands The update of position indication is blocked

527

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

Signal POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE

Description Apparatus position indication Apparatus open position Apparatus closed position The value of the operation counter Latest value of the error indication during command

3.7.5

Setting parameters
Table 286: Basic general settings for the SXSWI (XS01-) function
Parameter tStartMove Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 3.000 Unit s Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position The output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command Switch Type

tIntermediate AdaptivePulse

0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Load Break Disconnector Earthing Switch HS Earthing Switch

0.001 -

15.000 Not adaptive

s -

tOpenPulse tClosePulse SwitchType

0.001 0.001 -

0.200 0.200 Disconnector

s s -

3.8
3.8.1

Bay reserve (QCRSV)

Introduction The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or complete substation. Principle of operation The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. The function starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller SCWI. The signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.

3.8.2

528

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no reservation request RES_BAYS is created. Reservation request of own bay If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED. If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal. Reservation of other bays When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by activating the output RES_BAYS. When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI (tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal. Reservation request from another bay When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent. Blocking and overriding of reservation If the function QCRSV is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent operations from another operator place at the same time. The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE input signal, i.e. reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge. Bay with more than eight apparatuses If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay i.e. use of up to eight apparatuses, the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.

529

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional QCRSV. The both functions QCRSV have to communicate and this is done through the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to figure 10. If more then one QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.

CR01QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_GRT1 RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2 RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4 RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5 RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8 RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS BLK_RES ACK_TO_B OVERRIDE RESERVED RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

CR02QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_GRT1 RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2 RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4 RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5 RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8 RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS BLK_RES ACK_TO_B OVERRIDE RESERVED RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

OR

RES_BAYS

OR

ACK_TO_B

OR

RESERVED

en05000088_ansi.vsd

Figure 263: Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

530

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3.8.3

Function block
CR01QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DAT A RES_GRT 1 RES_GRT 2 RES_GRT 3 RES_GRT 4 RES_GRT 5 RES_GRT 6 RES_GRT 7 RES_GRT 8 RES_BAYS ACK_T O_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT en05000340.vsd

Figure 264: CR function block 3.8.4 Input and output signals

Table 287: Input signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block
Signal EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DATA Description Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks Signal for apparatus 1 that requests to do a reservation Signal for apparatus 2 that requests to do a reservation Signal for apparatus 3 that requests to do a reservation Signal for apparatus 4 that requests to do a reservation Signal for apparatus 5 that requests to do a reservation Signal for apparatus 6 that requests to do a reservation Signal for apparatus 7 that requests to do a reservation Signal for apparatus 8 that requests to do a reservation Reservation is not possible and the output signals are reset Signal to override the reservation Reservation data coming from function block ResIn

Table 288: Output signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block
Signal RES_GRT1 RES_GRT2 RES_GRT3 RES_GRT4 RES_GRT5 RES_GRT6 RES_GRT7 Description Reservation is made and the apparatus 1 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the apparatus 2 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the apparatus 3 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the apparatus 4 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the apparatus 5 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the apparatus 6 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the apparatus 7 is allowed to operate

531

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

Signal RES_GRT8 RES_BAYS ACK_TO_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT

Description Reservation is made and the apparatus 8 is allowed to operate Request for reservation of other bays Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved Indicates that the bay is reserved Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks

3.8.5

Setting parameters
Table 289: General settings for the QCRSV (CR01-) function
Parameter tCancelRes ParamRequest1 Range 0.000 - 60.000 Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Other bays res. Only own bay res. Step 0.001 Default 10.000 Only own bay res. Unit s Description Supervision time for canceling the reservation Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 1 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 2 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 3 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 4 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 5 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 6 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 7 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 8

ParamRequest2

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest3

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest4

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest5

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest6

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest7

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest8

Only own bay res.

3.9
3.9.1

Reservation input (RESIN)

Introduction The function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances are available).

532

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3.9.2

Principle of operation The reservation input function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The logic diagram in figure 265 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals transferred over the station bus from another bay.

EXCH_IN

INT BIN

AND FutureUse OR

ACK_F_B

BAY_ACK

OR

ANY_ACK

AND BAY_VAL OR

VALID_TX

OR

RE_RQ_B

BAY_RES

AND OR V _RE_RQ

BIN INT

EXCH_OUT

INT..Integer BIN..Binary

en05000089_ansi.vsd

Figure 265: Logic diagram for RESIN Figure 266 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions block are connected to the module QCRSV that handles the reservation function in the own bay. The value to the input EXCH_IN

533

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

on the first RESIN module in the chain has the integer value 5. This is provided by the use of instance number one of the function block RESIN (RE01-), where the input EXCH_IN is set to #5, but is hidden for the user.

Bay 1

RE01RESIN BAY_ACK ACK_F_B BAY_VAL ANY_ACK BAY_RES VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

Bay 2

RE02RESIN EXCH_IN ACK_F_B BAY_ACK ANY_ACK BAY_VAL VALID_TX BAY_RES RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT REnnRESIN EXCH_IN ACK_F_B BAY_ACK ANY_ACK BAY_VAL VALID_TX BAY_RES RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

Bay n

CR01QCRSV RES_DATA

en05000090.vsd

Figure 266: Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN 3.9.3 Function block
RE01RESIN BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT en05000341.vsd

Figure 267: RE function block

534

Apparatus control (APC)

Chapter 11 Control

3.9.4

Input and output signals

Table 290: Input signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block
Signal BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES Description Another bay has acknowledged the reservation request from this bay The reservervation and acknowledge signals from another bay are valid Request from other bay to reserve this bay

Table 291: Output signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block
Signal ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT Description All other bays have acknowledged the reservation request from this bay Any other bay has acknowledged the reservation request from this bay The reservation and acknowledge signals from other bays are valid Request from other bay to reserve this bay Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks

3.9.5

Setting parameters
Table 292: Basic general settings for the RESIN (RE01-) function
Parameter FutureUse Range Bay in use Bay future use Step Default Bay in use Unit Description The bay for this ResIn block is for future use

535

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4
4.1

Interlocking
Introduction
The interlocking function blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury. Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each handling the interlocking of one bay. The function is distributed to each control IED and not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs. The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the installation at any given time.

4.2

Principle of operation
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus. The reservation function (see section 3 "Apparatus control (APC)") is used to ensure that HV apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is performed. After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices that may affect it. The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or breaker-and-a-half bays have different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking signals can include the following kind of information: Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase) Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module) External release (to add special conditions for release) Line voltage (to block operation of line grounding switch) Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown in figure 268.

536

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Interlocking modules in other bays

Apparatus control modules

SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

Apparatus control modules Interlocking module

SCILO SCSWI SXCBR

152

Apparatus control modules

SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

en04000526_ansi.vsd

Figure 268: Interlocking module on bay level. Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the following: Ungrounding busbars Busbars connected together Other bays connected to a busbar Received data from other bays is valid

Figure 269 illustrates the data exchange principle.

537

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Station bus
Bay 1 Disc 189 and 289 closed Bay n Disc 189 and 289 closed Bus coupler WA1 ungrounded WA1 ungrounded WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

WA1 not grounded WA2 not grounded WA1 and WA2 interconn

... ..

WA1 not grounded WA2 not grounded WA1 and WA2 interconn

WA1 WA2 189 289 189 289 189 152 152 989 152 289 189G 289G

989

en05000494_ansi.vsd

Figure 269: Data exchange between interlocking modules. When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control terminal, or input board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the function will not be given. On the station HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid. For all interlocking modules these general rules apply: The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and grounding switches are always identical. Grounding switches on the line feeder end, e.g. rapid grounding switches, are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating. Grounding switches can only be operated on isolated sections e.g. without load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, i.e. the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the grounding switch operation is concerned. Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed con-

538

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

nections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or if they are grounding on both sides. Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and grounding switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB and transformer. Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar transfer is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking conditions are available: Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC Busbar grounding switch, BB_ES Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B Breaker-and-a-half diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customers specific requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM 600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions. The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.

4.3
4.3.1

Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)

Introduction The function SCILO is used to enable a switching operation if the interlocking conditions permit. The function itself does not provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic. Principle of operation The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end position e.g. open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/switch SXCBR/SXSWI and the enable signals come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller SCSWI. One instance per switching device is needed.

4.3.2

539

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

POSOPEN POSCLOSE

SCILO
XOR NOT AND

EN_OPEN OR

AND

OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN
AND

EN_CLOSE OR

AND
en04000525_ansi.vsd

Figure 270: SCILO function logic diagram 4.3.3 Function block

CI01SCILO POSOPEN POSCLOSE OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE

en05000359.vsd

Figure 271: CI function block 4.3.4 Input and output signals

Table 293: Input signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block
Signal POSOPEN POSCLOSE OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN Description Open position of switch device Closed position of switch device Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Table 294: Output signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block
Signal EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE Description Open operation at closed or intermediate or bad position is enabled Close operation at open or intermediate or bad position is enabled

540

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.4
4.4.1

Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE)

Introduction The interlocking module ABC_LINE is used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 272. The module can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) 189 289 189G 789

152 289G 989

989G

en04000478_ansi.vsd

Figure 272: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

541

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.4.2

Function block
IF01ABC_LINE 152_OP 152_CL 989_OP 989_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 789_OP 789_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL 7189G_OP 7189G_CL BB7_D_OP BC_12_CL BC_17_OP BC_17_CL BC_27_OP BC_27_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_89G EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC 989_EX1 989_EX2 189_EX1 189_EX2 189_EX3 289_EX1 289_EX2 289_EX3 789_EX1 789_EX2 789_EX3 789_EX4 152CLREL 152CLITL 989REL 989ITL 189REL 189ITL 289REL 289ITL 789REL 789ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 989GREL 989GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR 289OPTR 289CLTR 789OPTR 789CLTR 1289OPTR 1289CLTR VP189TR VP289TR VP789TR VP1289TR

en05000357_ansi.vsd

Figure 273: IF function block

542

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.4.3

Logic diagram

152_OP 152_CL 989_OP 989_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 789_OP 789_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL 7189G_OP 7189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP152 VP189G VP289G VP989G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 989G_OP 989_EX1 VP289G VP989G 289G_CL 989G_CL 989_EX2

ABC_LINE
XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND

VP152 VP989 VP189 VP289 VP789 VP189G VP289G VP989G VP1189G VP2189G VP7189G VPVOLT
OR
NOT

AND

NOT

152CLREL 152CLITL

989REL 989ITL

AND

en04000527_ansi.vsd

543

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP152 VP289 VP189G VP289G VP1189G 152_OP 289_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 1189G_OP EXDU_89G 189_EX1

AND

OR
NOT

189REL 189ITL

VP289 VP_BC_12 289_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC 189_EX2

AND

VP189G VP1189G 189G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G 189EX3

AND

en04000528_ansi.vsd

544

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP152 VP189 VP189G VP289G VP2189G 152_OP 189_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 2189G_OP EXDU_89G

AND

OR
NOT

289REL 289ITL

289_EX1

VP189 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC 289_EX2

AND

VP189G VP2189G 189G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G 289_EX3

AND

en04000529_ansi.vsd

545

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

546

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP989G VP7189G VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 989G_OP 7189G_OP EXDU_89G BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_OP BC_27_OP EXDU_BC 789_EX1 VP152 VP189 VP989G VP989 VP7189G VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 152_CL 189_CL 989G_OP 989_CL 7189G_OP EXDU_89G BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_CL EXDU_BC 789_EX2

AND

OR
NOT

789REL 789ITL

AND

en04000530_ansi.vsd

547

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP152 VP289 VP989G VP989 VP7189G VP_BB7_D VP_BC_27 152_CL 289_CL 989G_OP 989_CL 7189G_OP EXDU_89G BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_27_CL EXDU_BC 789_EX3 VP989G VP7189G 989G_CL 7189G_CL EXDU_89G 789_EX4 VP189 VP289 VP989 189_OP 289_OP 989_OP VP789 VP989 VPVOLT 789_OP 989_OP VOLT_OFF

AND

OR

AND

AND

NOT

NOT

189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL

AND
NOT

989GREL 989GITL

en04000531_ansi.vsd

548

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

189_OP 189_CL VP189 289_OP 289_CL VP289 789_OP 789_CL VP789 189_OP 289_OP VP189 VP289
OR AND

189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR 289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR 789OPTR 789CLTR VP789TR 1289OPTR 1289CLTR VP1289TR

NOT

en04000532_ansi.vsd

4.4.4

Input and output signals

Table 295: Input signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block
Signal 152_OP 152_CL 989_OP 989_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 789_OP 789_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL Description 152 is in open position 152 is in closed position 989 is in open position 989 is in closed position 189 is in open position 189 is in closed position 289 is in open position 289 is in closed position 789 is in open position 789 is in closed position 189G is in open position 189G is in closed position 289G is in open position 289G is in closed position 989G is in open position 989G is in closed position Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position

549

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Signal 7189G_OP 7189G_CL BB7_D_OP BC_12_CL BC_17_OP BC_17_CL BC_27_OP BC_27_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_89G EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC 989_EX1 989_EX2 189_EX1 189_EX2 189_EX3 289_EX1 289_EX2 289_EX3 789_EX1 789_EX2 789_EX3 789_EX4

Description Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in open position Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in closed position Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are open A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between WA1 and WA2 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid No transm error from any bay containing grounding switches No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 289 External condition for apparatus 289 External condition for apparatus 289 External condition for apparatus 789 External condition for apparatus 789 External condition for apparatus 789 External condition for apparatus 789

550

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Table 296: Output signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block
Signal 152CLREL 152CLITL 989REL 989ITL 189REL 189ITL 289REL 289ITL 789REL 789ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 989GREL 989GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR 289OPTR 289CLTR 789OPTR 789CLTR 1289OPTR 1289CLTR VP189TR VP289TR VP789TR VP1289TR Description Closing of 152 is allowed Closing of 152 is not allowed Switching of 989 is allowed Switching of 989 is not allowed Switching of 189 is allowed Switching of 189 is not allowed Switching of 289 is allowed Switching of 289 is not allowed Switching of 789 is allowed Switching of 789 is not allowed Switching of 189G is allowed Switching of 189G is not allowed Switching of 289G is allowed Switching of 289G is not allowed Switching of 989G is allowed Switching of 989G is not allowed 189 is in open position 189 is in closed position 289 is in open position 289 is in closed position 789 is in open position 789 is in closed position 189 or 289 or both are in open position 189 and 289 are not in open position Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of 789 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)

4.5
4.5.1

Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)

Introduction The interlocking module ABC_BC is used for a bus-coupler bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 274. The module can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.

551

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) 189 289 2089 789

189G

152

289G

en04000514_ansi.vsd

Figure 274: Switchyard layout ABC_BC

552

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.5.2

Function block
IG01ABC_BC 152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 789_OP 789_CL 2089_OP 2089_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL 7189G_OP 7189G_CL BBTR_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBTR VP_BC_12 EXDU_89G EXDU_12 EXDU_BC 152O_EX1 152O_EX2 152O_EX3 189_EX1 189_EX2 189_EX3 289_EX1 289_EX2 289_EX3 2089_EX1 2089_EX2 789_EX1 789_EX2 152OPREL 152OPITL 152CLREL 152CLITL 189REL 189ITL 289REL 289ITL 789REL 789ITL 2089REL 2089ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR 22089OTR 22089CTR 789OPTR 789CLTR 1289OPTR 1289CLTR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VP189TR V22089TR VP789TR VP1289TR VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR

en05000350_ansi.vsd

Figure 275: IG function block

553

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.5.3

Logic diagram

152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 2089_OP 2089_CL 789_OP 789_CL 289_OP 289_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL 7189G_OP 7189G_CL VP189 189_OP 152O_EX1 VP2089 2089_OP 152O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 152O_EX3 VP189 VP289 VP789 VP2089

ABC_BC
XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND OR

VP152 VP189 VP2089 VP789 VP289 VP189G VP289G VP1189G VP2189G VP7189G 152OPREL 152OPITL

NOT

AND

AND

AND

NOT

152CLREL 152CLITL

en04000533_ansi.vsd

554

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP152 VP289 VP189G VP289G VP1189G 152_OP 289_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 1189G_OP EXDU_89G 189_EX1 VP289 VP_BC_12 289_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC 189_EX2 VP189G VP1189G 189G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G 189_EX3

AND

OR
NOT

189REL 189ITL

AND

AND

en04000534_ansi.vsd

555

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP152 VP189 VP189G VP289G VP2189G 152_OP 189_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 2189G_OP EXDU_89G 289_EX1 VP189 VP_BC_12 189_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC 289_EX2 VP189G VP2189G 189G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G 289_EX3

AND

OR
NOT

289REL 289ITL

AND

AND

en04000535_ansi.vsd

556

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP152 VP2089 VP189G VP289G VP7189G 152_OP 2089_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 7189G_OP EXDU_89G 789_EX1 VP289G VP7189G 289G_CL 7189G_CL EXDU_89G 789_EX2 VP152 VP789 VP189G VP289G VP2189G 152_OP 789_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 2189G_OP EXDU_89G 2089_EX1 VP289G VP2189G 289G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G 2089_EX2

AND

OR
NOT

789REL 789ITL

AND

AND

OR
NOT

2089REL 2089ITL

AND

en04000536_ansi.vsd

557

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP189 VP2089 VP789 VP289 189_OP 2089_OP 789_OP 289_OP 189_OP 189_CL VP189 2089_OP 289_OP VP2089 VP289 789_OP 789_CL VP789 189_OP 289_OP VP189 VP289 152_OP 189_OP 2089_OP VP152 VP189 VP2089 152_OP 189_OP 789_OP VP152 VP189 VP789 152_OP 289_OP 789_OP VP152 VP289 VP789

AND

NOT

NOT

189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL

AND AND

NOT

189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR 22089OTR 22089CTR V22089TR 789OPTR 789CLTR VP789TR 1289OPTR 1289CLTR VP1289TR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR VPBC12TR

OR
NOT

AND OR

NOT

AND

OR

BC17OPTR BC17CLTR NOT VPBC17TR

AND

OR

NOT

BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPBC27TR

AND

en04000537_ansi.vsd

558

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.5.4

Input and output signals

Table 297: Input signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block
Signal 152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 789_OP 789_CL 2089_OP 2089_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL 7189G_OP 7189G_CL BBTR_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBTR VP_BC_12 EXDU_89G EXDU_12 EXDU_BC 152O_EX1 152O_EX2 152O_EX3 189_EX1 189_EX2 189_EX3 289_EX1 289_EX2 Description 152 is in open position 152 is in closed position 189 is in open position 189 is in closed position 289 is in open position 289 is in closed position 789 is in open position 789 is in closed position 2089 is in open position 2089 is in closed position 189G is in open position 189G is in closed position 289G is in open position 289G is in closed position Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in open position Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in closed position No busbar transfer is in progress A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between WA1 and WA2 are valid No transm error from any bay containing grounding switches No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2 busbars No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay External open condition for apparatus 152 External open condition for apparatus 152 External open condition for apparatus 152 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 289 External condition for apparatus 289

559

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Signal 289_EX3 2089_EX1 2089_EX2 789_EX1 789_EX2

Description External condition for apparatus 289 External condition for apparatus 2089 External condition for apparatus 2089 External condition for apparatus 789 External condition for apparatus 789

Table 298: Output signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block
Signal 152OPREL 152OPITL 152CLREL 152CLITL 189REL 189ITL 289REL 289ITL 789REL 789ITL 2089REL 2089ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR 22089OTR 22089CTR 789OPTR 789CLTR 1289OPTR 1289CLTR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR Description Opening of 152 is allowed Opening of 152 is not allowed Closing of 152 is allowed Closing of 152 is not allowed Switching of 189 is allowed Switching of 189 is not allowed Switching of 289 is allowed Switching of 289 is not allowed Switching of 789 is allowed Switching of 789 is not allowed Switching of 2089 is allowed Switching of 2089 is not allowed Switching of 189G is allowed Switching of 189G is not allowed Switching of 289G is allowed Switching of 289G is not allowed 189 is in open position 189 is in closed position 289 and 2089 are in open position 289 or 2089 or both are not in open position 789 is in open position 789 is in closed position 189 or 289 or both are in open position 189 and 289 are not in open position No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2 Connection exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2 No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7 Connection exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7

560

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Signal BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VP189TR V22089TR VP789TR VP1289TR VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR

Description No connection via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7 Connection exists via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7 Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of 289 and 2089 are valid (open or closed) Switch status of 789 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed) Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between WA1 and WA2 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid

4.6
4.6.1

Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)

Introduction The interlocking module AB_TRAFO is used for a transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 276. The module is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the module ABC_LINE can be used. This module can also be used in single busbar arrangements.

561

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) 189 289

189G AB_TRAFO 289G

152

389G

252 489G 389 489

252 and 489G are not used in this interlocking

en04000515_ansi.vsd

Figure 276: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

562

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.6.2

Function block
IE01AB_TRAFO 152_OP 152CLREL 152_CL 152CLITL 189_OP 189REL 189_CL 189ITL 289_OP 289REL 289_CL 289ITL 189G_OP 189GREL 189G_CL 189GITL 289G_OP 289GREL 289G_CL 289GITL 389_OP 189OPTR 389_CL 189CLTR 489_OP 289OPTR 489_CL 289CLTR 389G_OP 1289OPTR 389G_CL 1289CLTR 1189G_OP VP189TR 1189G_CL VP289TR 2189G_OP VP1289TR 2189G_CL BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_89G EXDU_BC 152_EX1 152_EX2 152_EX3 189_EX1 189_EX2 189_EX3 289_EX1 289_EX2 289_EX3 en05000358_ansi.vsd

Figure 277: IE function block

563

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.6.3

Logic diagram

152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389_OP 389_CL 489_OP 489_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL VP189 VP289 VP189G VP289G VP389 VP489 VP389G 152_EX2 389G_OP 152_EX3 189G_CL 289G_CL 389G_CL 152_EX1

AB_TRAFO
XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND

VP152 VP189 VP289 VP189G VP289G VP389 VP489 VP389G VP1189G VP2189G 152CLREL 152CLITL
NOT

OR AND

en04000538_ansi.vsd

564

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP152 VP289 VP189G VP289G VP389G VP1189G 152_OP 289_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 1189G_OP EXDU_89G 189_EX1 VP289 VP389G VP_BC_12 289_CL 389G_OP BC_12_CL EXDU_BC 189_EX2 VP189G VP289G VP389G VP1189G 189G_CL 289G_CL 389G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G 189_EX3

AND

OR
NOT

189REL 189ITL

AND

AND

en04000539_ansi.vsd

565

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP152 VP189 VP189G VP289G VP389G VP2189G 152_OP 189_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 2189G_OP EXDU_89G 289_EX1 VP189 VP389G VP_BC_12 189_CL 389G_OP BC_12_CL EXDU_BC 289_EX2 VP189G VP289G VP389G VP2189G 189G_CL 289G_CL 389G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G 289_EX3

AND

OR
NOT

252REL 252ITL

AND

AND

en04000540_ansi.vsd

566

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP189 VP289 VP389 VP489 189_OP 289_OP 389_OP 489_OP 189_OP 189_CL VP189 289_OP 289_CL VP289 189_OP 289_OP VP189 VP289

AND

NOT

NOT

189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL

189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR 289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR 1289OPTR 1289CLTR VP1289TR

en04000541_ansi.vsd

OR
NOT

AND

4.6.4

Input and output signals

Table 299: Input signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block
Signal 152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389_OP 389_CL 489_OP 489_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL Description 152 is in open position 152 is in closed position 189 is in open position 189 is in closed position 289 is in open position 289 is in closed position 189G is in open position 189G is in closed position 289G is in open position 289G is in closed position 389 is in open position 389 is in closed position 489 is in open position 489 is in closed position 389G is in open position 389G is in closed position 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position

567

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Signal 2189G_OP 2189G_CL BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_89G EXDU_BC 152_EX1 152_EX2 152_EX3 189_EX1 189_EX2 189_EX3 289_EX1 289_EX2 289_EX3

Description 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between WA1 and WA2 are valid No transm error from any bay containing grounding switches No transmission error from any bus coupler bay External condition for breaker 152 External condition for breaker 152 External condition for breaker 152 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 289 External condition for apparatus 289 External condition for apparatus 289

Table 300: Output signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block
Signal 152CLREL 152CLITL 189REL 189ITL 289REL 289ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR 289OPTR 289CLTR 1289OPTR 1289CLTR VP189TR VP289TR VP1289TR Description Closing of 152 is allowed Closing of 152 is not allowed Switching of 189 is allowed Switching of 189 is not allowed Switching of 289 is allowed Switching of 289 is not allowed Switching of 189G is allowed Switching of 189G is not allowed Switching of 289G is allowed Switching of 289G is not allowed 189 is in open position 189 is in closed position 289 is in open position 289 is in closed position 189 or 289 or both are in open position 189 and 289 are not in open position Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)

568

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.7
4.7.1

Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)

Introduction The interlocking module A1A2_BS is used for one bus-section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 278. The module can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.

WA1 (A1)

WA2 (A2)

189G

189 152

289

289G

389G

489G

A1A2_BS
en04000516_ansi.vsd

Figure 278: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

569

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.7.2

Function block
IH01A1A2_BS 152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL S189G_OP S189G_CL S289G_OP S289G_CL BBTR_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 EXDU_89G 152O_EX1 152O_EX2 152O_EX3 189_EX1 189_EX2 289_EX1 289_EX2 152OPREL 152OPITL 152CLREL 152CLITL 189REL 189ITL 289REL 289ITL 389GREL 389GITL 489GREL 489GITL S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR 189OPTR 189CLTR 289OPTR 289CLTR VPS1S2TR VP189TR VP289TR

en05000348_ansi.vsd

Figure 279: IH function block

570

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.7.3

Logic diagram

571

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL S1189G_OP S1189G_CL S2289G_OP S2289G_CL VP189 189_OP 152O_EX1 VP289 289_OP 152O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 152O_EX3 VP189 VP289 VP152 VP389G VP489G VPS1189G 152_OP 389G_OP 489G_OP S1189G_OP EXDU_89G 189_EX1 VP389G VPS1189G 389G_CL S1189G_CL EXDU_89G 189_EX2

A1A2_BS
XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND OR
NOT

VP152 VP189 VP289 VP389G VP489G VPS1189G VPS2289G 152OPREL 152OPITL

AND

AND

AND AND OR

NOT

152CLREL 152CLITL 189REL 189ITL

NOT

AND

en04000542_ansi.vsd

572

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP152 VP389G VP489G VPS2289G 152_OP 389G_OP 489G_OP S2289G_OP EXDU_89G 289_EX1 VP489G VPS2289G 489G_CL S2289G_CL EXDU_89G 289_EX2 VP189 VP289 189_OP 289_OP 189_OP 189_CL VP189 289_OP 289_CL VP289 189_OP 289_OP 152_OP VP189 VP289 VP152

AND

OR

289REL 289ITL NOT

AND

AND

NOT

NOT

389GREL 389GITL 489GREL 489GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR 289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR

OR

NOT

S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR VPS1S2TR

AND

en04000543_ansi.vsd

573

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.7.4

Input and output signals

Table 301: Input signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block
Signal 152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 289_OP 289_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL S189G_OP S189G_CL S289G_OP S289G_CL BBTR_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 EXDU_89G 152O_EX1 152O_EX2 152O_EX3 189_EX1 189_EX2 289_EX1 289_EX2 Description 152 is in open position 152 is in closed position 189 is in open position 189 is in closed position 289 is in open position 289 is in closed position 389G is in open position 389G is in closed position 489G is in open position 489G is in closed position S189G on bus section 1 is in open position S189G on bus section 1 is in closed position S289G on bus section 2 is in open position S289G on bus section 2 is in closed position No busbar transfer is in progress Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2 No transm error from bays containing ground sw. S189G or S289G External open condition for apparatus 152 External open condition for apparatus 152 External open condition for apparatus 152 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 289 External condition for apparatus 289

Table 302: Output signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block
Signal 152OPREL 152OPITL 152CLREL 152CLITL 189REL 189ITL 289REL Description Opening of 152 is allowed Opening of 152 is not allowed Closing of 152 is allowed Closing of 152 is not allowed Switching of 189 is allowed Switching of 189 is not allowed Switching of 289 is allowed

574

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Signal 289ITL 389GREL 389GITL 489GREL 489GITL S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR 189OPTR 189CLTR 289OPTR 289CLTR VPS1S2TR VP189TR VP289TR

Description Switching of 289 is not allowed Switching of 389G is allowed Switching of 389G is not allowed Switching of 489G is allowed Switching of 489G is not allowed No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2 Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2 exists 189 is in open position 189 is in closed position 289 is in open position 289 is in closed position Status of the apparatuses between bus section 1 and 2 are valid Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

4.8
4.8.1

Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)

Introduction The interlocking module A1A2_DC is used for one bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 280. The module can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.

WA1 (A1)

WA2 (A2)

52
189G 289G

A1A2_DC

en04000492_ansi.vsd

Figure 280: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

575

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.8.2

Function block
II01A1A2_DC 089_OP 089_CL S189G_OP S189G_CL S289G_OP S289G_CL S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_89G EXDU_BB 089C_EX1 089C_EX2 089O_EX1 089O_EX2 089O_EX3 089OPREL 089OPITL 089CLREL 089CLITL DCOPTR DCCLTR VPDCTR

en05000349_ansi.vsd

Figure 281: II function block

576

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.8.3

Logic diagram

A1A2_DC 89_OP 89_CL S1189G_OP S1189G_CL S2289G_OP S2289G_CL VPS1189G VPS2289G VPS1_DC S1189G_OP S2289G_OP S1DC_OP EXDU_89G EXDU_BB QBOP_EX1 VPS1189 VPS2289G VPS2_DC S1189G_OP S2289G_OP S2DC_OP EXDU_89G EXDU_BB QBOP_EX2 VPS1189G VPS2289G S1189G_CL S2289G_CL EXDU_89G QBOP_EX3
XOR

VPQB

VPDCTR DCOPTR DCCLTR

XOR XOR

VPS1189G VPS2289G

AND

OR
NOT

89OPREL 89OPITL

AND

AND

en04000544_ansi.vsd

577

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.8.4

Input and output signals

Table 303: Input signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block
Signal 089_OP 089_CL S189G_OP S189G_CL S289G_OP S289G_CL S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_89G EXDU_BB 089C_EX1 089C_EX2 089O_EX1 089O_EX2 089O_EX3 Description 089 is in open position 089 is in closed position S189G on bus section 1 is in open position S189G on bus section 1 is in closed position S289G on bus section 2 is in open position S289G on bus section 2 is in closed position All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid No transm error from bays containing ground sw. S189G or S289G No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1 and 2 External close condition for section disconnector 089 External close condition for section disconnector 089 External open condition for section disconnector 089 External open condition for section disconnector 089 External open condition for section disconnector 089

578

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Table 304: Output signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block
Signal 089OPREL 089OPITL 089CLREL 089CLITL DCOPTR DCCLTR VPDCTR Description Opening of 089 is allowed Opening of 089 is not allowed Closing of 089 is allowed Closing of 089 is not allowed The bus section disconnector is in open position The bus section disconnector is in closed position Switch status of 089 is valid (open or closed)

4.9
4.9.1

Interlocking for busbar grounding switch (BB_ES)

Introduction The interlocking module BB_ES is used for one busbar grounding switch on any busbar parts according to figure 282.

89G

en04000504.vsd

Figure 282: Switchyard layout BB_ES 4.9.2 Function block

IJ01BB_ES 89G_OP 89G_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB 89GREL 89GITL BBGSOPTR BBGSCLTR

en05000347_ansi.vsd

Figure 283: IJ function block

579

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.9.3

Logic diagram

BB_ES VP_BB_DC BB_DC_OP EXDU_BB 89G_OP 89G_CL 89GREL 89GITL BBGSOPTR BBGSCLTR
en04000546_ansi.vsd

AND

NOT

4.9.4

Input and output signals

Table 305: Input signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block
Signal 89G_OP 89G_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB Description Busbar earthing switch 89G is in open position Busbar earthing switch 89G is in closed position All disconnectors on this busbar part are open Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part

Table 306: Output signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block
Signal 89GREL 89GITL BBGSOPTR BBGSCLTR Description Switching of 89G is allowed Switching of 89G is not allowed 89G on this busbar part is in open position 89G on this busbar part is in closed position

4.10
4.10.1

Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)

Introduction The interlocking modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and DB_BUS_B are used for a line connected to a double circuit breaker arrangement according to figure 284.

580

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) 189 289

189G

489G

DB_BUS_A

152 289G

252 589G

DB_BUS_B

6189

6289 389G

989 989G

DB_LINE

en04000518_ansi.vsd

Figure 284: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker. Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined. DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are connected to the busbars. DB_BUS_A and DB_BUS_B are the connections from the line to the busbars. 4.10.2 Function block
IB01DB_BUS_A 152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 6189_OP 6189_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL EXDU_89G 6189_EX1 6189_EX2 189_EX1 189_EX2 152CLREL 152CLITL 6189REL 6189ITL 189REL 189ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR

en05000354_ansi.vsd

Figure 285: IB function block

581

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

IA01DB_LINE 152_OP 152_CL 252_OP 252_CL 6189_OP 6189_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL 589G_OP 589G_CL 989_OP 989_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON 989_EX1 989_EX2 989_EX3 989_EX4 989_EX5 989REL 989ITL 389GREL 389GITL 989GREL 989GITL

en05000356_ansi.vsd

Figure 286: IA function block

IC01DB_BUS_B 252_OP 252_CL 289_OP 289_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL 589G_OP 589G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL EXDU_89G 6289_EX1 6289_EX2 289_EX1 289_EX2 252CLREL 252CLITL 6289REL 6289ITL 289REL 289ITL 489GREL 489GITL 589GREL 589GITL 289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR

en05000355_ansi.vsd

Figure 287: IC function block

582

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.10.3

Logic diagrams

583

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

584

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

152_OP 152_CL 6189_OP 6189_CL 189_OP 189_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL VP6189 VP189 VP152 VP189G VP289G VP389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 6189_EX1 VP289G VP389G 289G_CL 389G_CL 6189_EX2 VP152 VP189G VP289G VP1189G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 1189G_OP EXDU_89G 189_EX1 VP189G VP1189G 189G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G 189_EX2

DB_BUS_A
XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND AND OR
NOT NOT

VP152 VP6189 VP189 VP189G VP289G VP389G VP1189G 152CLREL 152CLITL 6189REL 6189ITL

AND

AND

OR
NOT

189REL 189ITL

AND

en04000547_ansi.vsd

585

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP6189 VP189 6189_OP 189_OP 189_OP 189_CL VP189

AND

NOT NOT

189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR

en04000548_ansi.vsd

586

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

152_OP 152_CL 252_OP 252_CL 6189_OP 6189_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL 589G_OP 589G_CL 989_OP 989_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP152 VP252 VP189G VP289G VP389G VP489G VP589G VP989G 152_OP 252_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 489G_OP 589G_OP 989G_OP 989_EX1

DB_LINE
XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND OR
NOT

VP152 VP252 VP6189 VP189G VP289G VP6289 VP489G VP589G VP989 VP389G VP989G VPVOLT 989REL 989ITL

AND
en04000549_ansi.vsd

587

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP152 VP189G VP289G VP389G VP989G VP6289 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 989G_OP 6289_OP 989_EX2 VP252 VP6189 VP389G VP489G VP589G VP989G 252_OP 6189_OP 389G_OP 489G_OP 589G_OP 989G_OP 989_EX3 VP389G VP989G VP6189 VP6289 389G_OP 989G_OP 6189_OP 6289_OP 989_EX4 VP389G VP989G 389G_CL 989G_CL 989_EX5

AND

OR

AND

AND

AND

en04000550_ansi.vsd

588

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP6189 VP6289 VP989 6189_OP 6289_OP 989_OP VP989 VPVOLT 989_OP VOLT_OFF

AND
NOT

389GREL 389GITL

AND
NOT

989GREL 989GITL

en04000551_ansi.vsd

589

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

590

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

252_OP 252_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 289_OP 289_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL 589G_OP 589G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL VP6289 VP289 VP252 VP489G VP589G VP389G 252_OP 489G_OP 589G_OP 389G_OP 6289_EX1 VP589G VP389G 589G_CL 389G_CL 6289_EX2 VP252 VP489G VP589G VP2189G 252_OP 489G_OP 589G_OP 2189G_OP EXDU_89G 289_EX1 VP489G VP2189G 489G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G 289_EX2

DB_BUS_B
XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND AND OR
NOT NOT

VP252 VP6289 VP289 VP489G VP589G VP389G VP2189G 252CLREL 252CLITL 6289REL 6289ITL

AND

AND

OR
NOT

289REL 289ITL

AND

en04000552_ansi.vsd

591

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP6289 VP289 6289_OP 289_OP 289_OP 289_CL VP289

AND

NOT NOT

489GREL 489GITL 589GREL 589GITL 289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR

en04000553_ansi.vsd

4.10.4

Input and output signals

Table 307: Input signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block
Signal 152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 6189_OP 6189_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL EXDU_89G 6189_EX1 6189_EX2 189_EX1 189_EX2 Description 152 is in open position 152 is in closed position 189 is in open position 189 is in closed position 6189 is in open position 6189 is in closed position 189G is in open position 189G is in closed position 289G is in open position 289G is in closed position 389G is in open position 389G is in closed position Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position No transm error from bay containing grounding switch 1189G External condition for apparatus 6189 External condition for apparatus 6189 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 189

592

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Table 308: Output signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block
Signal 152CLREL 152CLITL 6189REL 6189ITL 189REL 189ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR Description Closing of 152 is allowed Closing of 152 is not allowed Switching of 6189 is allowed Switching of 6189 is not allowed Switching of 189 is allowed Switching of 189 is not allowed Switching of 189G is allowed Switching of 189G is not allowed Switching of 289G is allowed Switching of 289G is not allowed 189 is in open position 189 is in closed position Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)

Table 309: Input signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block
Signal 152_OP 152_CL 252_OP 252_CL 6189_OP 6189_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL 589G_OP 589G_CL 989_OP 989_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 989G_OP Description 152 is in open position 152 is in closed position 252 is in open position 252 is in closed position 6189 is in open position 6189 is in closed position 189G is in open position 189G is in closed position 289G is in open position 289G is in closed position 6289 is in open position 6289 is in closed position 489G is in open position 489G is in closed position 589G is in open position 589G is in closed position 989 is in open position 989 is in closed position 389G is in open position 389G is in closed position 989G is in open position

593

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Signal 989G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON 989_EX1 989_EX2 989_EX3 989_EX4 989_EX5

Description 989G is in closed position There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989

Table 310: Output signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block
Signal 989REL 989ITL 389GREL 389GITL 989GREL 989GITL Description Switching of 989 is allowed Switching of 989 is not allowed Switching of 389G is allowed Switching of 389G is not allowed Switching of 989G is allowed Switching of 989G is not allowed

Table 311: Input signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block
Signal 252_OP 252_CL 289_OP 289_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 489G_OP 489G_CL 589G_OP 589G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL Description 252 is in open position 252 is in closed position 289 is in open position 289 is in closed position 6289 is in open position 6289 is in closed position 489G is in open position 489G is in closed position 589G is in open position 589G is in closed position 389G is in open position 389G is in closed position Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position

594

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Signal EXDU_89G 6289_EX1 6289_EX2 289_EX1 289_EX2

Description No transm error from bay containing grounding switch 2189G External condition for apparatus 6289 External condition for apparatus 6289 External condition for apparatus 289 External condition for apparatus 289

Table 312: Output signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block
Signal 252CLREL 252CLITL 6289REL 6289ITL 289REL 289ITL 489GREL 489GITL 589GREL 589GITL 289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR Description Closing of 252 is allowed Closing of 252 is not allowed Switching of 6289 is allowed Switching of 6289 is not allowed Switching of 289 is allowed Switching of 289 is not allowed Switching of 489G is allowed Switching of 489G is not allowed Switching of 589G is allowed Switching of 589G is not allowed 289 is in open position 289 is in closed position Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

4.11
4.11.1

Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter (BH)

Introduction The interlocking modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and BH_LINE_B are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter according to figure 288.

595

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) 189 189G 289 189G

152 289G

152 289G

689 BH_LINE_A 389G

689 389G BH_LINE_B

6189

152

6289

989 189G 989G 289G

989 989G

BH_CONN
en04000513_ansi.vsd

Figure 288: Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker and a half switchyard layout.

596

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.11.2

Function blocks
IL01BH_LINE_A 152_OP 152CLREL 152_CL 152CLITL 689_OP 689REL 689_CL 689ITL 189_OP 189REL 189_CL 189ITL 189G_OP 189GREL 189G_CL 189GITL 289G_OP 289GREL 289G_CL 289GITL 389G_OP 389GREL 389G_CL 389GITL 989_OP 989REL 989_CL 989ITL 989G_OP 989GREL 989G_CL 989GITL C152_OP 189OPTR C152_CL 189CLTR C6189_OP VP189TR C6189_CL C189G_OP C189G_CL C289G_OP C289G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_89G 689_EX1 689_EX2 189_EX1 189_EX2 989_EX1 989_EX2 989_EX3 989_EX4 989_EX5 989_EX6 989_EX7 en05000352_ansi.vsd

Figure 289: IL function block

597

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

IM01BH_LINE_B 152_OP 152CLREL 152_CL 152CLITL 689_OP 689REL 689_CL 689ITL 289_OP 289REL 289_CL 289ITL 189G_OP 189GREL 189G_CL 189GITL 289G_OP 289GREL 289G_CL 289GITL 389G_OP 389GREL 389G_CL 389GITL 989_OP 989REL 989_CL 989ITL 989G_OP 989GREL 989G_CL 989GITL C152_OP 289OPTR C152_CL 289CLTR C6289_OP VP289TR C6289_CL C189G_OP C189G_CL C289G_OP C289G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_89G 689_EX1 689_EX2 289_EX1 289_EX2 989_EX1 989_EX2 989_EX3 989_EX4 989_EX5 989_EX6 989_EX7 en05000353_ansi.vsd

Figure 290: IM function block

598

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

IK01BH_CONN 152_OP 152_CL 6189_OP 6189_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 1389G_OP 1389G_CL 2389G_OP 2389G_CL 6189_EX1 6189_EX2 6289_EX1 6289_EX2 152CLREL 152CLITL 6189REL 6189ITL 6289REL 6289ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL

en05000351_ansi.vsd

Figure 291: IK function block

599

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.11.3

Logic diagrams
BH_LINE_A XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND
NOT

152_OP 152_CL 189_OP 189_CL 689_OP 689_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL 989_OP 989_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL C152_OP C152_CL C189G_OP C189G_CL C289G_OP C289G_CL C6189_OP C6189_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP189 VP689 VP989 VP152 VP189G VP289G VP389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 689_EX1 VP289G VP389G 289G_CL 389G_CL 689_EX2

VP152 VP189 VP689 VP989G VP989 VP189G VP289G VP389G VPC152 VPC189G VPC289G VPC6189 VP1189G VPVOLT 152CLREL 152CLITL

AND

OR
NOT

689REL 689ITL

AND

en04000554_ansi.vsd

600

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

601

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP152 VP189G VP289G VP1189G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 1189G_OP EXDU_89G 189_EX1 VP189G VP1189G 189G_CL 1189G_CL EXDU_89G 189_EX2 VP189 VP689 189_OP 689_OP VP689 VP989 VPC6189 689_OP 989_OP C6189_OP VP152 VP689 VP989G VP189G VP289G VP389G VPC152 VPC6189 VPC189G VPC289G 989_EX1 689_OP 989_EX2 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 989_EX3

AND

OR
NOT

189REL 189ITL

AND

AND

NOT NOT

189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 389GREL 389GITL

AND
NOT

AND

OR

NOT

989REL 989ITL

OR
AND

en04000555_ansi.vsd

602

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

C6189_OP 989_EX4 C152_OP C189G_OP C289G_OP 989_EX5 989G_OP 389G_OP 989_EX6 VP989G VP389G 989G_CL 389G_CL 989_EX7 VP989 VPVOLT 989_OP VOLT_OFF 189_OP 189_CL VP189

OR AND

AND

OR

AND

AND

NOT

989GREL 989GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR

en04000556_ansi.vsd

603

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

152_OP 152_CL 289_OP 289_CL 689_OP 689_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL 989_OP 989_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL C152_OP C152_CL C189G_OP C189G_CL C289G_OP C289G_CL C6289_OP C6289_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP289 VP689 VP989 VP152 VP189G VP289G VP389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 389G_OP 689_EX1 VP289G VP389G 289G_CL 389G_CL 689_EX2

BH_LINE_B
XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND
NOT

VP152 VP289 VP689 VP989G VP989 VP189G VP289G VP389G VPC152 VPC189G VPC289G VPC6289 VP2189G VPVOLT 152CLREL 152CLITL 689REL 689ITL

AND

OR
NOT

AND

en04000557_ansi.vsd

604

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

605

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

VP152 VP189G VP289G VP2189G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 2189G_OP EXDU_89G 289_EX1 VP189G VP2189G 189G_CL 2189G_CL EXDU_89G 289_EX2 VP289 VP689 289_OP 689_OP VP689 VP989 VPC6289 689_OP 989_OP C6289_OP VP152 VP689 VP989G VP189G VP289G VP389G VPC152 VPC6289 VPC189G VPC289G 989_EX1 689_OP 989_EX2 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 989_EX3

AND

OR
NOT

289REL 289ITL

AND

AND

NOT NOT

189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 389GREL 389GITL

AND
NOT

989REL
AND OR
NOT

989ITL

OR AND

en04000558_ansi.vsd

606

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

C6289_OP 989_EX4 C152_OP C189G_OP C289G_OP 989_EX5 989G_OP 389G_OP 989_EX6 VP989G VP389G 989G_CL 389G_CL 989_EX7 VP989 VPVOLT 989_OP VOLT_OFF 289_OP 289_CL VP289

OR AND

AND

OR

AND

AND

NOT

989GREL 989GITL 289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR

en04000559_ansi.vsd

607

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

608

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

152_OP 152_CL 6189_OP 6189_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 1389G_OP 1389G_CL 2389G_OP 2389G_CL VP6189 VP6289 VP152 VP189G VP289G VP1389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 1389G_OP 6189_EX1 VP189G VP1389G 189G_CL 1389G_CL 6189_EX2 VP152 VP189G VP289G VP2389G 152_OP 189G_OP 289G_OP 2389G_OP 6289_EX1 VP289G VP2389G 289G_CL 2389G_CL 6289_EX2 VP6189 VP6289 6189_OP 6289_OP

BH_CONN
XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND AND OR
NOT

VP152 VP6189 VP6289 VP189G VP289G VP1389G VP2389G 152CLREL 152CLITL NOT 6189REL 61891ITL

AND

AND

OR
NOT

6289REL 6289ITL

AND

AND

NOT NOT

189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL

en04000560_ansi.vsd

609

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.11.4

Input and output signals

Table 313: Input signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block
Signal 152_OP 152_CL 689_OP 689_CL 189_OP 189_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 989_OP 989_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL C152_OP C152_CL C6189_OP C6189_CL C189G_OP C189G_CL C289G_OP C289G_CL 1189G_OP 1189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_89G 689_EX1 689_EX2 189_EX1 189_EX2 989_EX1 989_EX2 Description 152 is in open position 152 is in closed position 689 is in open position 689 is in closed position 189 is in open position 189 is in closed position 189G is in open position 189G is in closed position 289G is in open position 289G is in closed position 389G is in open position 389G is in closed position 989 is in open position 989 is in closed position 989G is in open position 989G is in closed position 152 in module BH_CONN is in open position 152 in module BH_CONN is in closed position 6189 in module BH_CONN is in open position 6189 in module BH_CONN is in closed position 189G in module BH_CONN is in open position 189G in module BH_CONN is in closed position 289G in module BH_CONN is in open position 289G in module BH_CONN is in closed position Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure No transm error from bay containing grounding switch 1189G External condition for disconnector 689 External condition for disconnector 689 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 189 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989

610

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Signal 989_EX3 989_EX4 989_EX5 989_EX6 989_EX7

Description External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989

Table 314: Output signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block
Signal 152CLREL 152CLITL 689REL 689ITL 189REL 189ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 389GREL 389GITL 989REL 989ITL 989GREL 989GITL 189OPTR 189CLTR VP189TR Description Closing of 152 is allowed Closing of 152 is not allowed Switching of 689 is allowed Switching of 689 is not allowed Switching of 189 is allowed Switching of 189 is not allowed Switching of 189G is allowed Switching of 189G is not allowed Switching of 289G is allowed Switching of 289G is not allowed Switching of 389G is allowed Switching of 389G is not allowed Switching of 989 is allowed Switching of 989 is not allowed Switching of 989G is allowed Switching of 989G is not allowed 189 is in open position 189 is in closed position Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)

Table 315: Input signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block
Signal 152_OP 152_CL 689_OP 689_CL 289_OP 289_CL 189G_OP Description 152 is in open position 152 is in closed position 689 is in open position 689 is in closed position 289 is in open position 289 is in closed position 189G is in open position

611

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Signal 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 389G_OP 389G_CL 989_OP 989_CL 989G_OP 989G_CL C152_OP C152_CL C6289_OP C6289_CL C189G_OP C189G_CL C289G_OP C289G_CL 2189G_OP 2189G_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_89G 689_EX1 689_EX2 289_EX1 289_EX2 989_EX1 989_EX2 989_EX3 989_EX4 989_EX5 989_EX6 989_EX7

Description 189G is in closed position 289G is in open position 289G is in closed position 389G is in open position 389G is in closed position 989 is in open position 989 is in closed position 989G is in open position 989G is in closed position 152 in module BH_CONN is in open position 152 in module BH_CONN is in closed position 6289 in module BH_CONN is in open position 6289 in module BH_CONN is in closed position 189G in module BH_CONN is in open position 189G in module BH_CONN is in closed position 289G in module BH_CONN is in open position 289G in module BH_CONN is in closed position Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure No transm error from bay containing grounding switch 2189G External condition for disconnector 689 External condition for disconnector 689 External condition for apparatus 289 External condition for apparatus 289 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989 External condition for apparatus 989

612

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Table 316: Output signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block
Signal 152CLREL 152CLITL 689REL 689ITL 289REL 289ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL 389GREL 389GITL 989REL 989ITL 989GREL 989GITL 289OPTR 289CLTR VP289TR Description Closing of 152 is allowed Closing of 152 is not allowed Switching of 689 is allowed Switching of 689 is not allowed Switching of 289 is allowed Switching of 289 is not allowed Switching of 189G is allowed Switching of 189G is not allowed Switching of 289G is allowed Switching of 289G is not allowed Switching of 389G is allowed Switching of 389G is not allowed Switching of 989 is allowed Switching of 989 is not allowed Switching of 989G is allowed Switching of 989G is not allowed 289 is in open position 289 is in closed position Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

Table 317: Input signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block
Signal 152_OP 152_CL 6189_OP 6189_CL 6289_OP 6289_CL 189G_OP 189G_CL 289G_OP 289G_CL 1389G_OP 1389G_CL 2389G_OP Description 152 is in open position 152 is in closed position 6189 is in open position 6189 is in closed position 6289 is in open position 6289 is in closed position 189G is in open position 189G is in closed position 289G is in open position 289G is in closed position 1389G on line 1 is in open position 1389G on line 1 is in closed position 2389G on line 2 is in open position

613

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Signal 2389G_CL 6189_EX1 6189_EX2 6289_EX1 6289_EX2

Description 2389G on line 2 is in closed position External condition for apparatus 6189 External condition for apparatus 6189 External condition for apparatus 6289 External condition for apparatus 6289

Table 318: Output signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block
Signal 152CLREL 152CLITL 6189REL 6189ITL 6289REL 6289ITL 189GREL 189GITL 289GREL 289GITL Description Closing of 152 is allowed Closing of 152 is not allowed Switching of 6189 is allowed Switching of 6189 is not allowed Switching of 6289 is allowed Switching of 6289 is not allowed Switching of 189G is allowed Switching of 189G is not allowed Switching of 289G is allowed Switching of 289G is not allowed

614

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.12
4.12.1

Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

Function block
GR01IntlReceive BLOCK INSTNAME RESRENAM RESGRNAM APP1NAME APP2NAME APP3NAME APP4NAME APP5NAME APP6NAME APP7NAME APP8NAME APP9NAME APP10NAM APP11NAM APP12NAM APP13NAM APP14NAM APP15NAM RESREQ RESGRANT APP1_OP APP1_CL APP1VAL APP2_OP APP2_CL APP2VAL APP3_OP APP3_CL APP3VAL APP4_OP APP4_CL APP4VAL APP5_OP APP5_CL APP5VAL APP6_OP APP6_CL APP6VAL APP7_OP APP7_CL APP7VAL APP8_OP APP8_CL APP8VAL APP9_OP APP9_CL APP9VAL APP10_OP APP10_CL APP10VAL APP11_OP APP11_CL APP11VAL APP12_OP APP12_CL APP12VAL APP13_OP APP13_CL APP13VAL APP14_OP APP14_CL APP14VAL APP15_OP APP15_CL APP15VAL COM_VAL en07000048.vsd

Figure 292: GR function block

615

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

4.12.2

Input and output signals

Table 319: Input signals for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function block
Signal BLOCK Description Block of output signals

Table 320: Output signals for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function block
Signal RESREQ RESGRANT APP1_OP APP1_CL APP1VAL APP2_OP APP2_CL APP2VAL APP3_OP APP3_CL APP3VAL APP4_OP APP4_CL APP4VAL APP5_OP APP5_CL APP5VAL APP6_OP APP6_CL APP6VAL APP7_OP APP7_CL APP7VAL APP8_OP APP8_CL APP8VAL APP9_OP APP9_CL APP9VAL APP10_OP APP10_CL APP10VAL Description Reservation request Reservation granted Apparatus 1 position is open Apparatus 1 position is closed Apparatus 1 position is valid Apparatus 2 position is open Apparatus 2 position is closed Apparatus 2 position is valid Apparatus 3 position is open Apparatus 3 position is closed Apparatus 3 position is valid Apparatus 4 position is open Apparatus 4 position is closed Apparatus 4 position is valid Apparatus 5 position is open Apparatus 5 position is closed Apparatus 5 position is valid Apparatus 6 position is open Apparatus 6 position is closed Apparatus 6 position is valid Apparatus 7 position is open Apparatus 7 position is closed Apparatus 7 position is valid Apparatus 8 position is open Apparatus 8 position is closed Apparatus 8 position is valid Apparatus 9 position is open Apparatus 9 position is closed Apparatus 9 position is valid Apparatus 10 position is open Apparatus 10 position is closed Apparatus 10 position is valid

616

Interlocking

Chapter 11 Control

Signal APP11_OP APP11_CL APP11VAL APP12_OP APP12_CL APP12VAL APP13_OP APP13_CL APP13VAL APP14_OP APP14_CL APP14VAL APP15_OP APP15_CL APP15VAL COM_VAL

Description Apparatus 11 position is open Apparatus 11 position is closed Apparatus 11 position is valid Apparatus 12 position is open Apparatus 12 position is closed Apparatus 12 position is valid Apparatus 13 position is open Apparatus 13 position is closed Apparatus 13 position is valid Apparatus 14 position is open Apparatus 14 position is closed Apparatus 14 position is valid Apparatus 15 position is open Apparatus 15 position is closed Apparatus 15 position is valid Receive communication status is valid

4.12.3

Setting parameters
Table 321: Basic general settings for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function
Parameter Operation Range Disabled Enabled Step Default Disabled Unit Description Operation Disabled/Enabled

617

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)
Function block name: SLxx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SLGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

5.1

Introduction
The SLGGIO function block (or the selector switch function block) is used within the CAP tool in order to get a selector switch functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate all these problems.

5.2

Principle of operation
The SLGGIO has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also, depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output activation. Besides the inputs visible in CAP configuration tool, there are other executable inputs that will allow an user to set the desired position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected. The SLGGIO function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names instead of a number.

618

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

5.2.1

Functionality and behaviour

From the menu:

REC 670 1.1 Control Measurements Events Disturbance records Settings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language REC 670/Control Single Line Diagram Commands

REC 670/Ctrl/Com Single Command Selector Switch (GGIO)

1
../Ctrl/Com/Sel Sw SL01 SL02 .. .. SL15

2
../Com/Sel Sw/SL03 Damage ctrl

3 4
../Com/Sel Sw/SL03 Damage ctrl

P:Disc All OK

N: Disc Fe Cancel

4 5
../Com/Sel Sw/ DmgCtrl Damage ctrl:

The dialog window that appears shows the present position (P:) and the new position (N:), both in clear names, given by the user (max. 13 characters).

E
Modify the position with arrows. The pos will not be modified (outputs will not be activated) until you press the E-button for O.K.
en06000420.vsd

1 The SLGGIO instances in CAP configuration tool 2 Switch name given by the user (max 13 characters) 3 Position number, up to 32 positions 4 Change position 5 New position

Figure 293: Example 1 on handling the switch from the local HMI.

619

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

5.2.2

Graphical display There are two possibilities for the SLGGIO: if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters); if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but only the first three letters of the name will be used;

In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the following sequence of commands will ensue:

620

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

From the graphical display:

REC 670 1.1 Control Measurements Events Disturbance records Settings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language REC 670 1.1/Control Single Line Diagram Commands

Change to the "Switches" page of the SLD by left-right arrows. Select switch by up-down arrows

../Control/SLD/Switch AR control WFM Pilot setup OFF Damage control DAL

Open

Close

../Control/SLD/Switch AR control WFM Pilot setup OFF P: Disc OK N: Disc Fe Cancel

Select switch. Press the Open or Close key. A dialog box appears.

E
The pos will not be modified (outputs will not be activated) until you press the E-button for O.K.

../Control/SLD/Switch AR control WFM Pilot setup OFF Damage control DFW

en06000421_ansi.vsd

Figure 294: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.

621

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

5.3

Function block

622

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

SL01SLGGIO BLOCK PSTO UP DOWN SWPOS01 SWPOS02 SWPOS03 SWPOS04 SWPOS05 SWPOS06 SWPOS07 SWPOS08 SWPOS09 SWPOS10 SWPOS11 SWPOS12 SWPOS13 SWPOS14 SWPOS15 SWPOS16 SWPOS17 SWPOS18 SWPOS19 SWPOS20 SWPOS21 SWPOS22 SWPOS23 SWPOS24 SWPOS25 SWPOS26 SWPOS27 SWPOS28 SWPOS29 SWPOS30 SWPOS31 SWPOS32 SWPOSN INSTNAME NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 NAME17 NAME18 NAME19 NAME20 NAME21 NAME22 NAME23 NAME24 NAME25 NAME26 NAME27 NAME28 NAME29 NAME30 NAME31 NAME32

en05000658_ansi.vsd

623

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

Figure 295: SL function block, example for SL01-SL20

5.4

Input and output signals

Table 322: Input signals for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function block
Signal BLOCK PSTO UP DOWN Description Block of function Operator place selection Binary "UP" command Binary "DOWN" command

Table 323: Output signals for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function block
Signal SWPOS01 SWPOS02 SWPOS03 SWPOS04 SWPOS05 SWPOS06 SWPOS07 SWPOS08 SWPOS09 SWPOS10 SWPOS11 SWPOS12 SWPOS13 SWPOS14 SWPOS15 SWPOS16 SWPOS17 SWPOS18 SWPOS19 SWPOS20 SWPOS21 SWPOS22 SWPOS23 SWPOS24 SWPOS25 SWPOS26 Description Selector switch position 1 Selector switch position 2 Selector switch position 3 Selector switch position 4 Selector switch position 5 Selector switch position 6 Selector switch position 7 Selector switch position 8 Selector switch position 9 Selector switch position 10 Selector switch position 11 Selector switch position 12 Selector switch position 13 Selector switch position 14 Selector switch position 15 Selector switch position 16 Selector switch position 17 Selector switch position 18 Selector switch position 19 Selector switch position 20 Selector switch position 21 Selector switch position 22 Selector switch position 23 Selector switch position 24 Selector switch position 25 Selector switch position 26

624

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

Signal SWPOS27 SWPOS28 SWPOS29 SWPOS30 SWPOS31 SWPOS32 SWPOSN

Description Selector switch position 27 Selector switch position 28 Selector switch position 29 Selector switch position 30 Selector switch position 31 Selector switch position 32 Switch position (integer)

5.5

Setting parameters
Table 324: Basic general settings for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function
Parameter Operation NrPos OutType tPulse tDelay StopAtExtremes Range Disabled Enabled 2 - 32 Pulsed Steady 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60000.000 Disabled Enabled Step 1 0.001 0.010 Default Disabled 32 Steady 0.200 0.000 Disabled Unit s s Description Operation Enable/Disable Number of positions in the switch Output type, steady or pulse Operate pulse duration, in [s] Time delay on the output, in [s] Stop when min or max position is reached

625

Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)

Function block name: VS ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VSGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

6.1

Introduction
The VSGGIO function block (or the versatile switch function block) is a multipurpose function used within the CAP tool for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch. The switch can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the SLD of the LHMI.

6.2

Principle of operation
This function can be used for double purpose, in the same way as the switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used: for indication, receiving position through the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributing it in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs or to IEC61850 through reporting or GOOSE for command, receiving commands via the HMI. HMI symbols Select button or Indication button from menu (Control / Commands / Versatile Switch) or IEC61850 and sending them in the configuration and especially to the outputs (through a SMBO function block)

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators place , operation from local HMI (Local pos) or through IEC 61850 (Remote pos). An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block will allow operation from any operators place. As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result:
POS2 0 0 1 1 POS1 0 1 0 1 RESULT intermediate POS1 POS2 bad state POS (integer output) 0 1 2 3

626

Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

6.3

Function block
VS01VSGGIO BLOCK PSTO IPOS1 IPOS2 NAME_UND NAM_POS1 NAM_POS2 NAME_BAD BLOCKED POSITION POS1 POS2 CMDPOS12 CMDPOS21

en06000508.vsd

Figure 296: VS function block

6.4

Input and output signals

Table 325: Input signals for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function block
Signal BLOCK PSTO IPOS1 IPOS2 Description Block of function Operator place selection Position 1 indicating input Position 2 indicating input

Table 326: Output signals for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function block
Signal BLOCKED POSITION POS1 POS2 CMDPOS12 CMDPOS21 Description The function is active but the functionality is blocked Position indication, integer Position 1 indication, logical signal Position 2 indication, logical signal Execute command from position 1 to position 2 Execute command from position 2 to position 1

627

Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

6.5

Setting parameters
Table 327: Basic general settings for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function
Parameter Operation CtlModel Range Disabled Enabled Dir Norm SBO Enh Steady Pulsed 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Disabled Dir Norm Unit Description Disable/Enable Operation Specifies the type for control model according to IEC 61850 Operation mode Max time between select and execute signals Command pulse lenght

Mode tSelect tPulse

0.001 0.001

Pulsed 30.000 0.200

s s

628

Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO)

Function block name: SCx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SPC8GGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

7.1

Introduction
The SC function block is a collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) or LOCAL (HMI) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need complicated function blocks that have the capability to receive commands (for example SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and SPGGIO function blocks.

7.2

Principle of operation
The PSTO input will determine which the allowed position for the operator (LOCAL, REMOTE, ALL) is. Upon sending a command from an allowed operator position, one of the 8 outputs will be activated. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.

7.3

Function block
SC01SPC8GGIO BLOCK PSTO OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 en07000143.vsd

Figure 297: SPC function block

629

Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO)

Chapter 11 Control

7.4

Input and output signals

Table 328: Input signals for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function block
Signal BLOCK PSTO Description Blocks the function operation Operator place selection

Table 329: Output signals for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function block
Signal OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 Description Output 1 Output2 Output3 Output4 Output5 Output6 Output7 Output8

630

About this chapter

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

About this chapter This chapter describes the scheme communication logic that is used in distance and ground fault protection function to obtain almost instantaneous fault clearance for faults on the protected line. The chapter considers scheme communication logic (ZCOM), current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (ZCAL) for the distance protection function and scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC) and current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (EFC) for the residual overcurrent function. Also Local acceleration logic (ZCLC) is discussed which is a function that can generate instantaneous tripping as a result of remote end faults without any telecommunication. The chapter contains a short description of the design, simplified logical block diagrams, figure of the function block, input and output signals and setting parameters.

631

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Function block name: ZCOMANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZCPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

1.1

Introduction
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, a scheme communication logic is provided. All types of communication schemes e.g. permissive underreach, permissive overreach, blocking, intertrip etc. are available. The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme communication signalling when included. Phase segregated communication is also available for correct operation at simultaneous faults when three distance protection communication channels are available between the line ends

1.2

Principle of operation
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive schemes, respectively. A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.

1.2.1

Blocking scheme The principal of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote terminal. The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input PLTR_CRD, see figure 298. In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 298. The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by activating the input BLKTR, Block of carrier send by activating the input BLKCS.

632

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

PLTR-CRD CR

AND

0-tCoord 0

TRIP

en05000512_ansi.vsd

Figure 298: Basic logic for trip carrier in blocking scheme Channels for communication in each direction must be available. 1.2.2 Permissive underreach scheme In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive underreach schemes is normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 299.

PLTR-CRD CR

AND

0-tCoord 0

TRIP

en05000513_ansi.vsd

Figure 299: Logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme The permissive underreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for blocking scheme above. 1.2.3 Permissive overreach scheme In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element (normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive overreach schemes is normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is the same as for permissive underreach, i.e. figure 299. The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for blocking scheme above. 1.2.4 Unblocking scheme In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CR_GUARD, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CR_GUARD signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 300. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission.

633

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.

CR NOT CR_GUARD 200 ms 0 AND OR 150 ms 0 AND LCG 0-tSecurity 0 OR CRL

en05000746_ansi.vsd

Figure 300: Carrier guard logic with unblocking scheme The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off: No restart: The unblocking function is out of operation Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored If CR_GUARD disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG) Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CR_GUARD signal The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure

If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent signalling

1.2.5

Intertrip scheme In the direct inter-trip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone that is tripping the line. The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic. In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.

1.2.6

Simplified logic diagram The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 301.

634

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Unblock = Off CR Unblock = NoRestart Unblock = Restart CR_GUARD CRL CRL

AND

OR

NOT

0-tSecurity 0 OR AND 150ms 0

AND AND
LCG

200ms 0
SchemeType = Intertrip CSUR tSendMin

OR

AND

BLOCK CS_STOP CRL Schemetype = Permissive UR

OR

AND

AND

OR

CS

AND
PLTR_CRD Schemetype = Permissive OR CSOR

OR

0-tCoord 0

0 25ms

TRIP

OR

AND

AND
tSendMin

OR AND
SchemeType = Blocking BLKCS

AND

en05000515_ansi.vsd

Figure 301: Scheme communication logic for distance protection, simplified logic diagram

635

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

1.3

Function block
ZCOMZCPSCH_85 BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CS_STOP PLTR_CRD CSOR CSUR CR CR_GUARD TRIP CS CRL LCG

en06000286_ansi.vsd

Figure 302: ZCOM function block

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 330: Input signals for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function block
Signal BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CS_STOP PLTR_CRD CSOR CSUR CR CR_GUARD Description Block of function Block pilot (communication assisted) trip Block pilot channel start Block of channel start (CS) due to reverse fault detection Signal to be used for coordinating local pilot tripping with the channel receive (CR) signal Signal to be used for channel start with overreaching pilot schemes Signal to be used for channel start with underreaching pilot schemes Channel receive input signal from communications apparatus/module for pilot communication scheme logic Carrier channel guard input signal

Table 331: Output signals for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function block
Signal TRIP CS CRL LCG Description Trip by pilot communication scheme logic Pilot channel start signal Channel receive signal output from communication scheme logic Loss of channel guard signal output from communication scheme logic

636

Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

1.5

Setting parameters
Table 332: Basic parameter group settings for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function
Parameter Operation SchemeType Range Disabled Enabled Disabled Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Permissive UR Unit Description Disable/Enable Operation Scheme type

tCoord

0.001

0.035

Communication scheme channel coordination time Minimum duration of a carrier send signal (carrier continuation)

tSendMin

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Table 333: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function
Parameter Unblock Range Disabled NoRestart Restart 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode of unblocking logic Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection

tSecurity

0.001

0.035

1.6

Technical data
Table 334: Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Scheme type Range or value Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking Co-ordination time for blocking communication scheme Minimum duration of a carrier send signal (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms Accuracy -

Security timer for loss of carrier guard (0.000-60.000) s detection Operation mode of unblocking logic Off NoRestart Restart

637

Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function block name: ZCIPANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZC1PPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

2.1

Introduction
Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault clearance for all faults on a power line. All possible types of communication schemes e.g. permissive underreach, permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available. To manage problems with simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase segregated communication is needed. This will then replace the standard scheme communication module (ZCOM) on important lines where three communication channels (in each subsystem) are available for the distance protection communication. The main purpose of the ZC1P scheme communication logic is to supplement the distance protection function such that: fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for which the faults are on the part of the line not covered by its underreaching zone. correct phase selection can be maintained to support single-pole tripping for faults occurring anywhere on the entire length of a double circuit line.

To accomplish this, three separate communication channels, i.e. one per phase, each capable of transmitting a signal in each direction are required. The Phase segregated communication logic can be completed with the current reversal and WEI logic for phase segregated communication, when found necessary in Blocking and Permissive overreaching schemes.

2.2

Principle of operation
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive schemes, respectively. A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme. The ZC1P function is a logical function built-up from logical elements. It is a supplementary function to the distance protection, requiring for its operation inputs from the distance protection and the communication equipment. The type of communication-aided scheme to be used can be selected by way of the settings.

638

Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

The ability to select which distance protection zone is assigned to which input of the scheme communication logic makes this logic able to support practically any scheme communication requirements regardless of their basic operating principle. The outputs to initiate tripping and sending of the teleprotection signal are given in accordance with the type of communication-aided scheme selected and the zone(s) and phase(s) of the distance protection which have operated. When power line carrier communication channels are used for permissive schemes communication, unblocking logic which uses the loss of guard signal as a receive criteria is provided. This logic compensates for the lack of dependability due to the transmission of the command signal over the faulted line. 2.2.1 Blocking scheme The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote terminal. The received signal (sent by a reverse looking element in the remote IED), which shall be connected to CRLx, is used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACCLx, see figure 303. In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CRLx) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent an unneccesary trip, see figure 303. The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip is achieved by activating the input BLKTRLx, Block of carrier send is done by activating the input BLKCSLx.

CACCLx CRLx

AND

0-tCoord 0

0 25 ms

TRLx

en06000310_ansi.vsd

Figure 303: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a blocking scheme 2.2.2 Permissive underreach scheme In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an overreaching zone (connected to CACCLx) to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is in permissive underreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 304. Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.

CACCLx CRLx

AND

0-tCoord 0

0 25 ms

TRLx

en07000088_ansi.vsd

Figure 304: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a permissive underreach scheme

639

Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

2.2.3

Permissive overreach scheme In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element (normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is in permissive overreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is the same as for permissive underreach, see figure 303. The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for blocking scheme above. The blocking inputs are activated from the current reversal logic when this function is included. Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.

2.2.4

Unblocking scheme In an unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. As phase segregated communication schemes uses phases individually and the PLC is typically connected single phase or phase to phase it is not possible to evaluate which of the phases to release and the unblocking scheme has thus not been supported. Intertrip scheme In the direct intertrip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone that is tripping the line. The received signal per phase is directly transferred to the trip function block for tripping without local criteria. The signal is not further processed in the phase segregated communication logic. In case of single-pole tripping the phase selection and logic for tripping the three phases is performed in the trip function block.

2.2.5

2.2.6

Simplified logic diagram The simplified logic diagram for one phase (Lx) is shown in figure 305.

640

Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

SchemeType = Intertrip CSURLx tSendMin OR AND

BLOCK CSBLKLx CRLx Schemetype = Permissive UR

OR

AND

AND

OR

CSLx

AND CACCLx Schemetype = Permissive OR CSORLx OR AND

OR

0-tCoord 25

TRLx

AND tSendMin OR AND SchemeType = Blocking BLKCSx AND

CSL1 CSL2 AND

CSL2 CSL3 AND OR CSMPH

CSL3 CSL1 AND

CSL1 CSL2 CSL3 OR GENERAL

en06000311_ansi.vsd

Figure 305: Simplified logic diagram for one phase (Lx)

641

Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

2.3

Function block
ZC1PZC1PPSCH_85 BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRL1 BLKTRL2 BLKTRL3 CACCL1 CACCL2 CACCL3 CSURL1 CSURL2 CSURL3 CSORL1 CSORL2 CSORL3 CSBLKL1 CSBLKL2 CSBLKL3 BLKCSL1 BLKCSL2 BLKCSL3 CRL1 CRL2 CRL3 CRMPH TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C CSL1 CSL2 CSL3 CSMPH CRLL1 CRLL2 CRLL3

en06000427_ansi.vsd

Figure 306: ZC1P function block

2.4

Input and output signals

Table 335: Input signals for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function block
Signal BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRL1 BLKTRL2 BLKTRL3 CACCL1 CACCL2 CACCL3 CSURL1 CSURL2 CSURL3 CSORL1 CSORL2 Description Block of function Common signal for block of trip output from communication logic in all phases Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in Phase L1 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in Phase L2 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in Phase L3 Accelerated Distance protection zone start in Phase L1 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L2 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L3 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L2 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L3 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L2

642

Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Signal CSORL3 CSBLKL1 CSBLKL2 CSBLKL3 BLKCSL1 BLKCSL2 BLKCSL3 CRL1 CRL2 CRL3 CRMPH

Description Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L3 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L1 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L2 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L3 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase L1 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase L2 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase L3 Carrier signal received in Phase L1 Carrier signal received in Phase L2 Carrier signal received in Phase L3 Carrier Signal received for multiphase fault

Table 336: Output signals for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function block
Signal TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C CSL1 CSL2 CSL3 CSMPH CRLL1 CRLL2 CRLL3 Description Common trip output in any of the phase Trip output in Phase L1 Trip output in Phase L2 Trip output in Phase L3 Carrier Send in phase L1 Carrier Send in phase L2 Carrier Send in phase L3 carrier Send for mulitphase fault Carrier signal received in Phase L1 Carrier signal received in Phase L2 Carrier signal received in Phase L3

643

Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

2.5

Setting parameters
Table 337: Parameter group settings for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function
Parameter Operation Scheme Type Range Off On Off Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Permissive UR Unit Description Operation On / Off Scheme type

tCoord tSendMin

0.001 0.001

0.000 0.100

s s

Trip coordinate time Minimum duration of Carrier Send signal

2.6

Technical data
Table 338: Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Scheme type Range or value Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking Co-ordination time for blocking communication scheme Minimum duration of a carrier send signal (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms Accuracy -

Security timer for loss of carrier guard (0.000-60.000) s detection Operation mode of unblocking logic Off NoRestart Restart

644

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function block name: ZCALANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZCRWPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3.1

Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line. The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated, received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to accelerate the sending end. Three phase or phase segregated scheme logic is available.

3.2
3.2.1

Principle of operation
Current reversal logic The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRLVLx to recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev. This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see figure 307.

Figure 307: Current reversal logic The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLx and activating of the TRIPLx in the scheme communication block ZCOM is carried out by connecting the IRVL signal to input BLOCK in the ZCOM function.

645

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero. 3.2.2 Weak end infeed logic The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition that no fault has been detected on the weak end by different fault detection elements (distance protection in forward and reverse direction). The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 308, when: No active signal present on the input BLOCK. The functional input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRL output on the scheme communication logic ZCOM. The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLKL1 functional input or to theLOVBZfunctional input. The later is usually configured to the BLOCK functional output of the fuse-failure function. No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.

BLOCK WTSZ WEIBLK1 CRL

OR ECHO - cont. 0-tWEI 0 0 200ms AND 0 50 ms 200ms 0 AND ECHO

WEIBLKn

en06000324_ansi.vsd

Figure 308: Echo of a received carrier signal by the WEI function When an echo function is used in both terminals (should generally be avoided), a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms. An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip, together with the WEI function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 309.

646

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Figure 309: Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram

3.3

Function block
ZCALZCRWPSCH_85 V3P BLOCK IFWD IREV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 LOVBZ CBOPEN CRL IRVL TRWEI TRWEI_A TRWEI_B TRWEI_C ECHO

en06000287_ansi.vsd

Figure 310: ZCAL function block

647

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

3.4

Input and output signals

Table 339: Input signals for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function block
Signal V3P BLOCK IFWD Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function A signal that indicates a forward fault has been detected and will block tripping if there was a pre-existing reverse fault condition (IREV) A signal that indicates a reverse fault has been detected and activates current reverasl logic Block of WEI logic Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections that would effect a pilot trip or the detection of reverse faults that will be tripped by an external device Block of trip from WEI logic through the loss of voltage (fuse-failure) function Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker POTT or Unblock carrier receive for WEI logic

IREV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2

LOVBZ CBOPEN CRL

Table 340: Output signals for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function block
Signal IRVL TRWEI TRWEI_A TRWEI_B TRWEI_C ECHO Description Operation of current reversal logic Trip of WEI logic Trip of WEI logic in phase A Trip of WEI logic in phase B Trip of WEI logic in phase C A signal that indicates channel start (CS) by WEI logic

648

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

3.5

Setting parameters
Table 341: Basic parameter group settings for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function
Parameter CurrRev tPickUpRev tDelayRev Range Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 Default Off 0.020 0.060 Unit s s Description Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic Pickup time for current reversal logic Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip Operating mode of WEI logic Coordination time for the WEI logic Base setting for voltage level Phase to Phase voltage for detection of fault condition Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of fault condition

WEI

Disabled Echo Echo & Trip 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 2000.00 10 - 90

Off

tPickUpWEI VBase PU27PP

0.001 0.05 1

0.010 400.00 70

s kV %UB

PU27PN

10 - 90

70

%UB

3.6

Technical data
Table 342: Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Detection pickup phase to neutral voltage Detection pickup phase to phase voltage Reset ratio Operate time for current reversal Delay time for current reversal Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic Range or value (10-90)% of Vbase (10-90)% of Vbase <105% (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Vn 1.0% of Vn 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

649

Local acceleration logic (PLAL)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Local acceleration logic (PLAL)

Function block name: ZCLCANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZPLAL IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

4.1

Introduction
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel is available, local acceleration logic (ZCLC) can be used. This logic enables fast fault clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a communication channel. The logic can be controlled either by the auto re-closer (zone extension) or by the loss of load current (loss-of-load acceleration).

4.2
4.2.1

Principle of operation
Zone extension The overreaching zone is connected to the input -EXACC. For this reason, configure the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used auto-reclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing device, see figure 311. This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.

Figure 311: Simplified logic diagram for local acceleration logic

650

Local acceleration logic (PLAL)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

After the auto-recloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state, there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step distance time functions. In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an unwanted auto-reclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed. On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous". The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss of load acceleration). 4.2.2 Loss-of-load acceleration When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss of load, the overreaching zone used for "acceleration" connected to LLACC is not allowed to trip "instantaneously" during normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been above the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone will be allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault condition when one or two of the phase currents will become low due to a three phase trip at the opposite terminal, see figure 312. The current measurement is performed internally and the STILL signal becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite terminal. Note that this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase currents will be low when the opposite terminal is tripped.

Figure 312: Loss of load acceleration - simplified logic diagram Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during normal closing.

651

Local acceleration logic (PLAL)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

4.3

Function block
ZCLCZCLCPLAL I3P BLOCK ARREADY NDST EXACC BC LLACC TRZE TRLL

en05000333.vsd

Figure 313: ZCLC function block

4.4

Input and output signals

Table 343: Input signals for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function block
Signal I3P BLOCK ARREADY NDST EXACC BC LLACC Description Group signal for current input Block of function Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for fast trip Non directional criteria used to prevent instantaneous trip Connected to function used for tripping at zone xtension Breaker Close Connected to function used for tripping at loss of load

Table 344: Output signals for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function block
Signal TRZE TRLL Description Trip by zone extension Trip by loss of load

652

Local acceleration logic (PLAL)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

4.5

Setting parameters
Table 345: Basic parameter group settings for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function
Parameter Operation IBase LoadCurr LossOfLoad ZoneExtension MinCurr Range Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 1 - 100 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled 1 - 100 Step 1 1 1 Default Off 3000 10 Off Off 5 Unit A %IB %IB Description Disable/Enable Operation Base setting for current values Load current before disturbance in % of IBase Enable/Disable operation of Loss of load. Enable/Disable operation of Zone extension Lev taken as curr loss due to remote CB trip in % of IBase Time delay on pick-up for MINCURR value Time delay on pick-up for load current release Time delay on drop off for load current release

tLowCurr tLoadOn tLoadOff

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.200 0.000 0.300

s s s

653

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Function block name: EFC-ANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ECPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

5.1

Introduction
To achieve fast fault clearance of ground faults on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication channels. In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, an operate time of the protection of 50 60 ms including a channel transmission time of 20 ms, can be achieved. This short operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance. The communication logic module for directional residual current protection enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreach schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end-infeed and current reversal, included in the EFCA function.

5.2

Principle of operation
The directional residual overcurrent protection (TEF) is configured to give input information, i.e. directional fault detection signals, to the EFC logic: PLTR_CRD: Signal to be used for tripping of the communication scheme, normally the pickup signal of a forward overreach step of STFW. CS_STOP: Signal to be used for sending block signal in the blocking communication scheme, normally thepickup signal of a reverse overreach step of STRV. CSUR: Signal to be used for sending permissive signal in the underreach permissive communication scheme, normally the pickup signal of a forward underreach step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underacting step. CSOR: Signal to be used for sending permissive signal in the overreach permissive communication scheme, normally the pickup signal of a forward overreach step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreach step.

In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to the BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.

654

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

5.2.1

Blocking scheme In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element detects a ground fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the other line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin. One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the impedance-measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The power line carrier communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will occur due to the fault. Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is no zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to current reversals because the received carrier signal is maintained long enough to avoid unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-end-infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme. If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (carrier receive) the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.

Figure 314: Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme. 5.2.2 Permissive under/overreach scheme In the permissive scheme the forward directed ground fault measuring element sends a permissive signal to the other end, if a ground fault is detected in the forward direction. The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive signal before activating an operation signal. Independent channels must be available for the communication in each direction.

655

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

An impedance measuring relay which works in the same type of permissive mode, with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring relay works in the permissive overreach mode, common channels can be used in single-line applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance measuring and the directionalground-fault current system of the healthy line may detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping. Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end-infeed function is used in the distance or ground fault protection. In case of an internal earth fault, the forward directed measuring element operates and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (carrier send). Local tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates and a permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (carrier receive). The permissive scheme can of either underreach or overreach type. In the underreach alternative an underreach directional residual overcurrent measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal CSUR. In the overreach alternative an overreach directional residual overcurrent measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal CSOR. Also the underreach signal CSUR can initiate sending.

5.2.3

Unblocking scheme In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.

656

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CR_GUARD, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CR_GUARD signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 315. This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.

CR 1 CRG 200 ms t AND OR tSecurity t 150 ms t AND LCG >1 CRL

en05000746.vsd

Figure 315: Carrier guard logic with unblocking scheme The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Off: No restart: The unblocking function is out of operation Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored If CR_GUARD disappeares a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG) Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecure will be ignored It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CR_GUARD signal The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure

If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent signalling

657

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

5.3

Function block
EFC1ECPSCH_85 BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CSBLK CACC CSOR CSUR CR CRG TRIP CS CRL LCG

en06000288.vsd

Figure 316: EFC function block

5.4

Input and output signals

Table 346: Input signals for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function block
Signal BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CS_STOP PLTR_CRD CSOR CSUR CR CR_GUARD Description Block of function Block pilot (communication assisted) trip Block pilot channel start Block of channel start (CS) due to reverse fault detection Signal to be used for coordinating local pilot tripping with the channel receive (CR) signal Signal to be used for channel start with overreaching pilot schemes Signal to be used for channel start with underreaching pilot schemes Channel receive input signal from communications apparatus/module for pilot communication scheme logic Carrier channel guard input signal

Table 347: Output signals for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function block
Signal TRIP CS CRL LCG Description Trip by pilot communication scheme logic Pilot channel start signal Channel receive signal output from communication scheme logic Loss of channel guard signal output from communication scheme logic

658

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

5.5

Setting parameters
Table 348: Basic parameter group settings for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function
Parameter Operation SchemeType Range Disabled Enabled Disabled Intertrip Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Permissive UR Unit Description Disable/Enable Operation Scheme type, Mode of Operation

tCoord

0.001

0.035

Communication scheme channel coordination time Minimum duration of a carrier send signal (carrier continuation)

tSendMin

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Table 349: Advanced parameter group settings for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function
Parameter Unblock Range Disabled NoRestart Restart 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode of unblocking logic Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection

tSecurity

0.001

0.035

5.6

Technical data
Table 350: Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Communication scheme coordination time Scheme type Range or value (0.000-60.000) s Permissive UR Permissive OR Blocking Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms -

659

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Function block name: EFCAANSI number: 85 IEC 61850 logical node name: ECRWPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

6.1

Introduction
The EFCA additional communication logic is a supplement to the EFC scheme communication logic for the residual overcurrent protection. To achieve fast fault clearing for all ground faults on the line, the directional ground-fault protection function can be supported with logic, that uses communication channels. REx670 terminals have for this reason available additions to scheme communication logic. If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection between the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current-reversal logic (transient blocking logic) can be used. Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection, can basically operate only when the protection in the remote terminal can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this terminal. The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high positive and/or zero sequence source impedance behind this terminal. To overcome these conditions, weak end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used.

6.2
6.2.1

Principle of operation
Directional comparison logic function The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreach and permissive overreach schemes. The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for current reversal and weak end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking overreach scheme. Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional ground-fault protection module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic. Figure 317 and figure 318 show the logic circuits. Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of the directional comparison scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle, to the BLOCK input of the directional comparison module.

660

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

6.2.2

Fault current reversal logic The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to IREV, which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the reverse direction element is activated during the tPickUp time, the IRVL signal is activated, see figure 317. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without tripping. IRVL will be connected to the block input on the permissive overreach scheme. When the fault current is reversed on the non faulty line, IREV is deactivated and IFWD is activated. The reset of IRVL is delayed by the tDelay time, see figure 317. This ensures the reset of the carrier receive CR signal.

Figure 317: Simplified logic diagram, current reversal 6.2.3 Weak and infeed logic The weak end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Trip). See figure 318 and figure 319. The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element, connected to WEIBLK via an OR-gate. See figure 318. If neither the forward nor the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms. The weak-end-infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal. See figure 318. If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the ground-fault function that is in operation.

Figure 318: Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - echo. With the Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further, it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate value for 3V0Pickup

661

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the ground-fault function that is in operation.

Figure 319: Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - Trip. The weak end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the weak end echo is selected for both line ends.

6.3

Function block
EFCAECRWPSCH_85 U3P BLOCK IRVBLK IRV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 VTSZ CBOPEN CRL IRVL TRWEI ECHO CR

en06000289.vsd

Figure 320: EFCA function block

662

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

6.4

Input and output signals

Table 351: Input signals for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function block
Signal V3P BLOCK IFWD Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function A signal that indicates a forward fault has been detected and will block tripping if there was a pre-existing reverse fault condition (IREV) A signal that indicates a reverse fault has been detected and activates current reverasl logic Block of WEI Logic Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections that would effect a pilot trip or the detection of reverse faults that will be tripped by an external device Block of trip from WEI logic through the loss of voltage (fuse-failure) function Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker POTT or Unblock carrier receive for WEI logic

IREV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2

LOVBZ CBOPEN CRL

Table 352: Output signals for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function block
Signal IRVL TRWEI ECHO CR Description Operation of current reversal logic Trip of WEI logic A signal that indicates channel start (CS) by WEI logic POR Carrier signal received from remote end

6.5

Setting parameters
Table 353: Basic parameter group settings for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function
Parameter CurrRev tPickUpRev Range Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default Off 0.020 Unit s Description Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic Pickup time for current reversal logic

663

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Parameter tDelayRev

Range 0.000 - 60.000

Step 0.001

Default 0.060

Unit s

Description Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip Operating mode of WEI logic Coordination time for the WEI logic Base setting for voltage level Neutral voltage setting for fault conditions measurement

WEI

Disabled Echo Echo & Trip 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 2000.00 5 - 70

Off

tPickUpWEI VBase 3V0PU

0.001 0.05 1

0.000 400.00 25

s kV %UB

6.6

Technical data
Table 354: Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Operate voltage 3Vo for WEI trip Reset ratio Operate time for current reversal Delay time for current reversal Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic Range or value (5-70)% of Vbase >95% (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.00060.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Vn 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

664

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (PSCH)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (PSCH)
Function block name: ZC1WANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZC1WPSCH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

7.1

Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line. The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated, received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to accelerate the sending end.

7.2
7.2.1

Principle of operation
Current reversal logic The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRVLx to recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev. This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see figure 321.

IRVLn IRVBLKLn

tPickUpRev 10 ms t t

tPickUpRev t & tDelayRev t IRVOPLn

en06000474.vsd

Figure 321: Current reversal logic The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLn and activating of the TRIPLn in the scheme communication block ZCOM is carried out by connecting the IRVOPLn signal to input BLOCKLn in the ZCOM function.

665

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (PSCH)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero. Weak end infeed logic The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition that no fault has been detected at the weak end by different fault detection elements (distance protection in forward and reverse direction).

VTSZ BLOCK CRLLn

OR

ECHOLn - cont.
0-tWEI 0

AND

0 50ms

200ms 0

AND

ECHOLn

WEIBLK1

0 200ms

WEIBLK2

0 200ms
en07000085_ansi.vsd

Figure 322: Weak end infeed logic The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 322, when: The functional input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRLx output on the scheme communication logic ZCOM. The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLKLx functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is usually configured to the STGEN functional output of the fuse-failure function. No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.

When an echo function is used in both terminals (should generally be avoided), a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms. An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo &Trip, together with the WEI function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 323.

666

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (PSCH)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

WEI = Echo&Trip ECHOLn - cont. CBOPEN STUL1N STUL2N STUL3N AND

0 15ms

AND

100ms 0

OR

OR

TRWEI

TRWEIL1

AND

0 15ms

TRWEIL2

AND

0 15ms

TRWEIL3

en00000551_ansi.vsd

Figure 323: Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram

7.3

Function block
ZC1WZC1WPSCH_85 V3P BLOCK BLKZ CBOPEN CRL1 CRL2 CRL3 IRVL1 IRVL2 IRVL3 IRVBLKL1 IRVBLKL2 IRVBLKL3 WEIBLK WEIBLKL1 WEIBLKL2 WEIBLKL3 WEIBLKOP WEIBLKO1 WEIBLKO2 WEIBLKO3 TRPWEI TRPWEI_A TRPWEI_B TRPWEI_C IRVOP IRVOP_A IRVOP_B IRVOP_C ECHO ECHO_A ECHO_B ECHO_C

en06000477_ansi.vsd

Figure 324: ZC1W function block

667

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (PSCH)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

7.4

Input and output signals

Table 355: Input signals for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function block
Signal V3P BLOCK BLKZ CBOPEN CRL1 CRL2 CRL3 IRVL1 IRVL2 IRVL3 IRVBLKL1 IRVBLKL2 IRVBLKL3 WEIBLK WEIBLKL1 WEIBLKL2 WEIBLKL3 WEIBLKOP WEIBLKO1 WEIBLKO2 WEIBLKO3 Description Voltage Block of function Block of trip from WEI logic by the fuse-failure function Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L1 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L2 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L3 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L1 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L2 Activation of current reversal logic in phase L3 Block of current reversal function in Phase L1 Block of current reversal function in Phase L2 Block of current reversal function in Phase L3 Block of WEI logic Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protection Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 due to operation of other protection Block of WEI logic in Phase L2 due to operation of other protections Block of WEI logic in Phase L3 due to operation of other protections

Table 356: Output signals for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function block
Signal TRPWEI TRPWEI_A TRPWEI_B TRPWEI_C IRVOP IRVOP_A IRVOP_B Description Trip of WEI logic Trip of WEI logic in Phase A Trip of WEI logic in Phase B Trip of WEI logic in Phase C Operation of current reversal logic Operation of current reversal logic in Phase A Operation of current reversal logic in Phase B

668

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (PSCH)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Signal IRVOP_C ECHO ECHO_A ECHO_B ECHO_C

Description Operation of current reversal logic in Phase C Carrier Send by WEI logic Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase A Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase B Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase C

7.5

Setting parameters
Table 357: Basic parameter group settings for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function
Parameter VBase OperCurrRev tPickUpRev tDelayRev Range 0.05 - 2000.00 Disabled Enabled 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.05 0.001 0.001 Default 400.00 Off 0.020 0.060 Unit kV s s Description Base setting for Voltage level Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic Pickup time for current reversal logic Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip Operating mode of WEI logic Phase to Ground voltage for detection of fault condition Phase to Phase voltage for detection of fault condition Coordination time for the WEI logic

OperationWEI

Disabled Echo Echo & Trip 10 - 90

Off

VPGPickup

70

%VB

PU27PP

10 - 90

70

%VB

tPickUpWEI

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.010

7.6

Technical data
Table 358: Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (PSCH, 85)
Function Detection pickup phase to neutral voltage Range or value (10-90)% of Vbase Accuracy 1.0% of Vn

669

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (PSCH)

Chapter 12 Scheme communication

Function Detection pickup phase to phase voltage Reset ratio Operate time for current reversal Delay time for current reversal Coordination time for weak-end infeed logic

Range or value (10-90)% of Vbase <105% (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s

Accuracy 1.0% of Vn 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

670

About this chapter

Chapter 13 Logic

Chapter 13 Logic
About this chapter This chapter describes primarily tripping and trip logic functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

671

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Chapter 13 Logic

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Function block name: TRPxANSI number: 94 IEC 61850 logical node name: SMPPTRC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

I->O

1.1

Introduction
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides the pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions. The trip function block includes functionality for evolving faults and breaker lock-out.

1.2

Principle of operation
The duration of a trip output signal from the TRPx function is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening. For three-pole tripping, TRPx function has a single input (TRINP_3P) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.

BLOCK TRINP_3P
AND tTripMin t OR

TRIP

Operation Mode = On Program = 3Ph

en05000789_ansi.vsd

Figure 325: Simplified logic diagram for three pole trip The TRPx function for single- and two-pole tripping has additional phase segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs enable single- and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through

672

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Chapter 13 Logic

the phase segregated trip inputs of the expanded TRPx function. Examples of such protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded TRPx function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (e.g. carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for ground fault tripping (e.g. tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection). Additional logic secures a three-pole final trip command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals. The expanded TRPx function has three trip outputs TR_A, TR_B, TR_C (besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single pole, two pole or three pole trip. These signals are important for cooperation with the auto-reclosing function. The expanded TRPx function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input is also provided which disables single- and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to be three-pole. In multi-breaker arrangements, one TRPx function block is used for each breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and auto-reclosing is used. The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three pole trip, if desired. It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing only the choice is by setting TripLockout. 1.2.1 Logic diagram

TRINP -A TRINP -B TRINP -C 1 PTRZ 1 PTRGF TRINP -3P Program= 3 p

OR OR OR AND
. INTL_ABCTRIP - cont

en 05000517 _ ansi . vsd

Figure 326: Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram

673

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Chapter 13 Logic

TRINP_3P TRINP_A PS_A

AND

OR

ATRIP

TRINP_B PS_B

AND

OR

BTRIP

TRINP_C PS_C

AND OR

OR

CTRIP

OR
-loop

OR
-loop

OR AND
1PTRGF 1PTRZ

AND AND OR
50 ms 0

AND

en05000518_ansi.vsd

Figure 327: Phase segregated front logic

674

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Chapter 13 Logic

ATRIP

150 ms

OR OR

t
0 2000 ms

INTL_ATRIP

OR

AND

BTRIP

150 ms

OR OR

t
0 2000 ms

INTL_BTRIP

OR

AND

CTRIP

150 ms

OR OR

t
0 2000 ms

INTL_CTRIP

OR

AND

OR

P3PTR

OR OR
-loop

AND

en05000519_ansi.vsd

Figure 328: Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

675

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Chapter 13 Logic

ATRIP - cont.

150 ms

t
0 2000 ms

OR

OR

INTL_ATRIP

AND

BTRIP

150 ms

t
0 2000 ms

OR

OR

INTL_BTRIP

AND AND

CTRIP

150 ms

t
0 2000 ms

OR

OR

INTL_CTRIP

AND

OR

TRIP

OR OR
-loop

AND

en05000520_ansi.vsd

Figure 329: Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

676

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Chapter 13 Logic

BLOCK INTL_ATRIP TR_A

OR
INTL_BTRIP

AND

OR
INTL_CTRIP

AND

TR_B

OR
ABC_TRIP

AND

TR_C

OR

TRIP

AND

OR

AND

TR3P

-loop

AND AND AND AND AND OR

10 ms 0 5 ms 0

TR1P

TR2P

-loop
en05000521_ansi.vsd

Figure 330: Final tripping circuits

677

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Chapter 13 Logic

1.3

Function block
TRP1SMPPTRC_94 BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRINP_3P TRINP_A TRINP_B TRINP_C PS_A PS_B PS_C 1PTRZ 1PTRGF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT

en05000707_ansi.vsd

Figure 331: TRP function block

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 359: Input signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block
Signal BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRINP_3P TRINP_A TRINP_B TRINP_C PS_A PS_B PS_C 1PTRZ 1PTRGF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT Description Block of function Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT) Trip all phases Trip phase A Trip phase B Trip phase C Input from phase selection, phase A Input from phase selection, phase B Input from phase selection, phase C Zone Trip with a separate phase selection Single phase Directional Ground Fault Overcurrent Trip with phase selection Prepare all tripping to be three-phase Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function

678

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Chapter 13 Logic

Table 360: Output signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block
Signal TRIP TR_A TR_B TR_C TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT Description General trip output signal Trip signal from phase A Trip signal from phase B Trip signal from phase C Tripping single-pole Tripping two-pole Tripping three-pole Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

1.5

Setting parameters
Table 361: Basic parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function
Parameter Operation Program Range Disabled Enabled 3 phase 1p/3p 1Ph/2Ph/3Ph 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default On 1ph/3ph Unit Description Disable/Enable Operation Three pole; single or three pole; single, two or three pole trip Minimum duration of trip output signal

tTripMin

0.001

0.150

Table 362: Advanced parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function
Parameter TripLockout Range Disabled Enabled Step Default Off Unit Description If TripLockout is set to On, it will activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip latch. If set to Off it will activate only CLLKOUT If AutoLock is set to On i will activate lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and trip, If set to Off it will activate only from SETLKOUT

AutoLock

Disabled Enabled

Off

679

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Chapter 13 Logic

1.6

Technical data
Table 363: Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)
Function Trip action Minimum trip pulse length Timers Range or value 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

680

Trip matrix logic (GGIO)

Chapter 13 Logic

Trip matrix logic (GGIO)

Function block name: TRxxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: TRMGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

2.1

Introduction
Twelve trip matrix logic blocks are included in the IED. The function blocks are used in the configuration of the IED to route trip signals and/or other logical output signals to the different output relays. The matrix and the physical outputs will be seen in the PCM 600 engineering tool and this allows the user to adapt the signals to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.

2.2

Principle of operation
Tripping matrix logic block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide the necessary grouping of connected input signals (e.g. for tripping and alarming purposes) to the three output signals from the function block. Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules: 1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the first output signal (i.e. OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT1 via setting parameters "PulseTime1", "OnDelayTime1" & "OffDelayTime1". 2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the second output signal (i.e. OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT2 via setting parameters "PulseTime2", "OnDelayTime2" & "OffDelayTime2" 3. when any one of all 32 input signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the third output signal (i.e. OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT3 via setting parameters "PulseTime3", "OnDelayTime3" & "OffDelayTime3". Detailed logical diagram is shown in see figure 332

681

Trip matrix logic (GGIO)

Chapter 13 Logic

Pulse Time 1

& Pulse Input 1 Input 2 Input 16 AND Output 1

OR

On Delay Time 1 0

0 Off Delay Time 1

&

Pulse Time 2

& Pulse Input 17 Input 18 Input 32 AND Output 2

OR

On Delay Time 2 0

0 Off Delay Time 2

&

Pulse Time 3

& Pulse AND Output 3

OR

On Delay Time 3 0

0 Off Delay Time 3

&

en06000514_ansi.vsd

Figure 332: Tripping Matrix Internal Logic. Output signals from this function block are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly to output contacts from the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the pulse time delay on that output signal shall be set to approximately 0,150s in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils. Twelve such function blocks are available in the IED.

682

Trip matrix logic (GGIO)

Chapter 13 Logic

2.3

Function block
TR01TRMGGIO INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3

en05000370_ansi.vsd

Figure 333: TR function block

2.4

Input and output signals

Table 364: Input signals for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function block
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 Description Binary input 1 Binary input 2 Binary input 3 Binary input 4 Binary input 5 Binary input 6 Binary input 7 Binary input 8 Binary input 9 Binary input 10 Binary input 11

683

Trip matrix logic (GGIO)

Chapter 13 Logic

Signal INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32

Description Binary input 12 Binary input 13 Binary input 14 Binary input 15 Binary input 16 Binary input 17 Binary input 18 Binary input 19 Binary input 20 Binary input 21 Binary input 22 Binary input 23 Binary input 24 Binary input 25 Binary input 26 Binary input 27 Binary input 28 Binary input 29 Binary input 30 Binary input 31 Binary input 32

Table 365: Output signals for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function block
Signal OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 Description OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16 OR function between inputs 17 to 32 OR function between inputs 1 to 32

684

Trip matrix logic (GGIO)

Chapter 13 Logic

2.5

Setting parameters
Table 366: Basic parameter group settings for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function
Parameter Operation PulseTime OnDelay OffDelay ModeOutput1 ModeOutput2 ModeOutput3 Range Disabled ON 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Steady Pulsed Steady Pulsed Steady Pulsed Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default ON 0.000 0.000 0.000 Steady Steady Steady Unit s s s Description Operation Off / On Output pulse time Output on delay time Output off delay time Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed

685

Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

Chapter 13 Logic

3
3.1

Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

Introduction
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for user to adapt the configuration to the specific application needs.

3.2

Inverter function block (INV)

I001INV INPUT OUT en04000404.vsd

Figure 334: INV function block

Table 367: Input signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Signal INPUT Description Input

Table 368: Output signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Signal OUT Description Output

3.3

OR function block (OR)

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

O001OR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 OUT NOUT

en04000405.vsd

Figure 335: OR function block

686

Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

Chapter 13 Logic

Table 369: Input signals for the OR (O001-) function block

Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 Description Input 1 to OR gate Input 2 to OR gate Input 3 to OR gate Input 4 to OR gate Input 5 to OR gate Input 6 to OR gate

Table 370: Output signals for the OR (O001-) function block

Signal OUT NOUT Description Output from OR gate Inverted output from OR gate

3.4

AND function block (AND)

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the inputs and one of the outputs are inverted.

A001AND INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4N OUT NOUT

en04000406.vsd

Figure 336: AND function block

Table 371: Input signals for the AND (A001-) function block
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4N Description Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 inverted

Table 372: Output signals for the AND (A001-) function block
Signal OUT NOUT Description Output Output inverted

687

Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

Chapter 13 Logic

3.5

Timer function block (Timer)

The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (parameter T).

TM01Timer INPUT T ON OFF

en04000378_ansi.vsd

Figure 337: TM function block

Table 373: Input signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Signal INPUT Description Input to timer

Table 374: Output signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Signal ON OFF Description Output from timer , pickup delay Output from timer, dropout delay

Table 375: General settings for the Timer (TM01-) function

Parameter T Range 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit s Description Time delay of function

3.6

Pulse timer function block (PULSE)

The pulse function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.

TP01Pulse INPUT T OUT en04000407_ansi.vsd

Figure 338: PULSE function block

Table 376: Input signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Signal INPUT Description Input to pulse timer

688

Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

Chapter 13 Logic

Table 377: Output signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Signal OUT Description Output from pulse timer

Table 378: General settings for the Pulse (TP01-) function

Parameter T Range 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.010 Unit s Description Time delay of function

3.7

Exclusive OR function block (XOR)

The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The function block XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal.

XO01XOR INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OUT NOUT en04000409.vsd

Figure 339: XOR function block

Table 379: Input signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 Description Input 1 to XOR gate Input 2 to XOR gate

Table 380: Output signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Signal OUT NOUT Description Output from XOR gate Inverted output from XOR gate

3.8

Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)

The Set-Reset function SRM is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRM function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.

689

Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

Chapter 13 Logic

Table 381: Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRM) function block
SET 1 0 1 0 RESET 0 1 1 0 OUT 1 0 0 0 NOUT 0 1 1 1

SM01SRM SET RESET OUT NOUT en04000408.vsd

Figure 340: SM function block

Table 382: Input signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Signal SET RESET Description Set input Reset input

Table 383: Output signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Signal OUT NOUT Description Output Output inverted

Table 384: Parameter group settings for the SRM (SM01-) function
Parameter Memory Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operating mode of the memory function

3.9

Controllable gate function block (GT)

The GT function block is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

690

Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

Chapter 13 Logic

GT 01GT INPUT OUT en04000410.vsd

Figure 341: GT function block

Table 385: Input signals for the GT (GT01-) function block
Signal INPUT Description Input to gate

Table 386: Output signals for the GT (GT01-) function block

Signal OUT Description Output from gate

Table 387: Parameter group settings for the GT (GT01-) function

Parameter Operation Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Off/On

3.10

Settable timer function block (TS)

The function block TS timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation setting On, Off that controls the operation of the timer.

TS01TimerSet INPUT ON OFF

en04000411_ansi.vsd

Figure 342: TS function block

Table 388: Input signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Signal INPUT Description Input to timer

691

Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

Chapter 13 Logic

Table 389: Output signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Signal ON OFF Description Output from timer, pickup delay Output from timer, dropout delay

Table 390: Parameter group settings for the TimerSet (TS01-) function
Parameter Operation t Range Off On 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default Off 0.000 Unit s Description Operation Off/On Delay for settable timer n

3.11

Technical data
Table 391: Configurable logic blocks
Logic block Quantity with update rate fast LogicAND LogicOR LogicXOR LogicInverter LogicSRMemory LogicGate LogicTimer LogicPulseTimer LogicTimerSet LogicLoopDelay 60 60 10 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 medium 60 60 10 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 normal 160 160 20 80 20 20 20 20 20 20 (0.00090000.00 0) s (0.00090000.00 0) s (0.00090000.00 0) s (0.00090000.00 0) s 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms Range or value Accuracy

692

Fixed signal function block (FIXD)

Chapter 13 Logic

Fixed signal function block (FIXD)

Function block name: FIXDANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: FixedSignals IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

4.1

Introduction
The fixed signals function block generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in the other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating a certain logic.

4.2

Principle of operation
There are eight outputs from the FIXD function block: OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value; ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value; INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0; INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1; REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value; STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value; ZEROSMPL is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; GRP_OFF is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; The function does not allow any settings and therefore its not present in PCM 600. For examples on how to use each type of output in the configuration, please read the Application Manual.

4.3

Function block
FIXDFixedSignals OFF ON INTZERO INTONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF en05000445.vsd

Figure 343: FIXD function block

693

Fixed signal function block (FIXD)

Chapter 13 Logic

4.4

Input and output signals

Table 392: Output signals for the FixedSignals (FIXD-) function block
Signal OFF ON INTZERO INTONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF Description Boolean signal fixed off Boolean signal fixed on Integer signal fixed zero Integer signal fixed one Real signal fixed zero String signal with no characters Channel id for zero sample Group signal fixed off

4.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

694

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

Chapter 13 Logic

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

Function block name: BB-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

5.1

Introduction
The B16I function block (or the Boolean 16 to Integer conversion function block) is used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.

5.1.1

Principle of operation The B16I function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B1I6 function block is designed for receiving the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value. Function block
BB01B16I BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 OUT

5.1.2

en07000128.vsd

Figure 344: The B16I function block.

695

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

Chapter 13 Logic

5.1.3

Input and output signals

Table 393: Input signals for the B16I (BB01-) function block
Signal BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 Description Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16

Table 394: Output signals for the B16I (BB01-) function block
Signal OUT Description Output value

5.1.4

Setting parameters The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

696

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation (B16IGGIO)

Chapter 13 Logic

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation (B16IGGIO)

Function block name: BA-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: B16IGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

6.1

Introduction
The B16IGGIO function block (or the Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function block) is used within CAP tool to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals. TheIB16IGGIO can receive it's value from remote like IEC61850 depending on the PSTO input.

6.2

Principle of operation
The B16IGGIO function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B16IGGIO can receive an integer from a station computer for example, over IEC61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value. The PSTO input determines the operator place. The integer number can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Off or Local then no change is applied to the outputs.

6.3

Function block
BA01B16IGGIO BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 OUT

en07000129.vsd

Figure 345: The B16IGGIO function block.

697

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation (B16IGGIO)

Chapter 13 Logic

6.4

Input and output signals

Table 395: Input signals for the B16IGGIO (BA01-) function block
Signal BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 Description Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16

Table 396: Output signals for the B16IGGIO (BA01-) function block
Signal OUT Description Output value

6.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

698

Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)

Chapter 13 Logic

Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)

Function block name: IY- ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

7.1

Introduction
The IB16 function block (or the integer to Boolean 16 conversion function block) is used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.

7.2

Principle of operation
The IB16 function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The IB16 function block is designed for receiving the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

7.3

Function block
IY01IB16 BLOCK IN OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 en06000501.vsd

Figure 346: The BI16 function block.

7.4

Input and output signals

Table 397: Input signals for the IB16 (IY01-) function block
Signal BLOCK IN Description Block of function input

699

Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)

Chapter 13 Logic

Table 398: Output signals for the IB16 (IY01-) function block
Signal OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 Description Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16

7.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

700

Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation (IB16GGIO)

Chapter 13 Logic

Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation (IB16GGIO)

Function block name: IX-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IB16GGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

8.1

Introduction
The IB16GGIO function block (or the integer to Boolean conversion with logic node representation function block) is used within CAP tool to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals. The IB16GGIO can receive it's value from remote like IEC61850 depending on the PSTO input.

8.2

Function block
IX01IB16GGIO BLOCK PSTO OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 en06000502.vsd

Figure 347: The BI16GGIO function block.

8.3

Input and output signals

Table 399: Input signals for the IB16GGIO (IX01-) function block
Signal BLOCK PSTO Description Block of function Operator place selection

701

Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation (IB16GGIO)

Chapter 13 Logic

Table 400: Output signals for the IB16GGIO (IX01-) function block
Signal OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 Description Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16

8.4

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

702

About this chapter

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Chapter 14 Monitoring
About this chapter This chapter describes the functions that handle measurements, events and disturbances. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

703

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Measurements (MSQI)
Function block name: SVRxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CVMMXU
P, Q, S, I, U, f

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: CPxx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CMMXU

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: VPxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VMMXU

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: CSQx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CMSQI

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

I1, I2, I0

704

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Function block name: VSQx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VMSQI

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

U1, U2, U0

1.1

Introduction
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level e.g.via IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system. Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.

Note!
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in the inputs. Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting. The measuring function, SVR (CVMMXU), provides the following power system quantities: P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power PF: power factor V: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude I: phase current magnitude F: power system frequency

The measuring functions CP (CMMXU), VN (VNMMWU) and VP (VMMXU) provides physical quantities:

705

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU) V: voltages (phase and phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) (VMMXU, VNMMXU)

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5 presentation. This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

Note!
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600. The measuring functions CSQ (CMSQI) and VSQ (VMSQI) provides sequential quantities: I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle) V: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).

The SVR function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental frequency phasors (i.e. DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either as instantaneously calculated quantities or averaged values over a period of time (i.e. low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.

1.2
1.2.1

Principle of operation
Measurement supervision The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in options. The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations: Locally by means of the local HMI Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM 600 or over the station bus Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report function

Phase angle reference All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section 1. Zero point clamping Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, V, I, F, IA, IB, IC, VA, VB, VC, VAB, VBC, VCA, I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2 or 3V0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the service values within SVR.

706

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block by means of four built-in operating thresholds, see figure 348. The monitoring has two different modes of operating: Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 348.

Y
X_RANGE = 3 High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 High limit X_RANGE=0

Hysteresis

X_RANGE=0 Low limit X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit X_RANGE=4

en05000657.vsd

Figure 348: Presentation of operating limits Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binary signals. The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 348. The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.

707

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Actual value of the measured quantity The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement is continuous for each measured separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes are available:
Cyclic reporting (Cyclic) Magnitude dead-band supervision (Dead band) Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of magnitude or integral dead-band reporting.

Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Value Reported Value Reported

Y3 Y2 Y4

Value Reported

Y1

Y5

t (*)

t (*)

t (*)

t (*)

Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt

en05000500.vsd

Figure 349: Periodic reporting

Magnitude dead-band supervision If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger than the Y predefined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new measured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 350 shows an example with the magnitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

708

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Y3 Y2 Y Y Y Y

Value Reported Value Reported Y Y

Y1

t
99000529.vsd

Figure 350: Magnitude dead-band supervision reporting After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the Y set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit (XZeroDb), figure 351, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 351 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5). The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

709

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Y A >= pre-set value

A1 >= pre-set value Y3 Y2 A1 Value Reported

A2 >= pre-set value A2 Y4 Value Reported A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >= pre-set value

A4 A3 A5
A6

Value Reported (1st) A Y1

A7

Value Reported

Y5 Value Reported t
99000530.vsd

Figure 351: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

1.2.2

Service values (MMXU, SVR) Mode of operation The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:

710

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Set value Formula used for complex, for parame- three-phase power calculation ter Mode
1 A, B, C
* * * S = VA I A + VB I B + VC I C

Formula used for voltage and current magnitude calculation

Comment

V = VA + VB + VC
A

( I =( I

+ IB + IC

)/ )/3

Used when three phase-to-ground voltages are available

Arone

S = VAB I A VBC I C
* *

V = VAB + VBC / 2
A

( I =( I

+ IC / 2

Used when three two phase-to-phase voltages are available Used when only symmetrical three phase power shall be measured Used when only VAB phase-to-phase voltage is available Used when only VBC phase-to-phase voltage is available

PosSeq

S = 3 VPosSeq I PosSeq
*

V =

3 VPosSeq

I = I PosSeq
4 AB

S = VAB I A I B
* *

) )

V = VAB I = IA + IB / 2

BC

S = VBC I B I C
* *

V = VBC I = I B + IC / 2

711

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Set value Formula used for complex, for parame- three-phase power calculation ter Mode
6 CA

Formula used for voltage and current magnitude calculation

Comment

S = VCA I C I A
* *

V = VCA I = IC + I A / 2

Used when only VCA phase-to-phase voltage is available Used when only VA phase-to-ground voltage is available Used when only V phase-to-ground voltage is available Used when only VC phase-to-ground voltage is available

S = 3 VA I A
*

V =

3 VA

I = IA
8 B

S = 3 VB I B
*

V = I = IB

3 VB

S = 3 VC I C
*

V = I = IC

3 VC

* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes (i.e. 1 & 3) the measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes (i.e. from 3 to 9) it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:

P = Re( S )
(Equation 99)

Q = Im( S )
(Equation 100)

S = S =

P +Q
2

(Equation 101)

712

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

PF = cos = P S
(Equation 102)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor. Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section 1.2.1 "Measurement supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs Measured currents and voltages used in the SVR function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 352.

% of In -10 IMagComp5 IMagComp30 IMagComp100

Magnitude compensation

Measured current 5 30 0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant 100 % of In

-10

Degrees -10 IAngComp30 IAngComp5 IAngComp100

Angle compensation

Measured current 5 -10 30 100 % of In

en05000652_ansi.vsd

Figure 352: Calibration curves

713

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the magnitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filtering In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, V, I & power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
X = k X Old + (1 k ) X Calculated
(Equation 103)

where: X XOld XCalculated k is a new measured value (i.e. P, Q, S, V, I or PF) to be given out from the function is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not present, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitude IGenZeroDb level for current and voltage measurement VGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power (i.e. P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement supervision functionality, included in the SVR function, is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see section 1.2.1 "Measurement supervision"). Compensation facility In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete measurement chain (i.e. CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors etc.) it is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude (i.e. setting parameter PowMagFact, default value 1.000) and angle (i.e. setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (i.e. complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (e.g. around rated power) can be done at site. However to perform this calibration it is necessary to have external power meter of the high accuracy class available.

714

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Directionality In CT grounding parameter is set as described in section 1 "Analog inputs", active and reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown in the following figure 353.

Busbar

52

Protected Object
en05000373_ansi.vsd

Figure 353: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

That practically means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar. In some application, like for example when power is measured on the secondary side of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.

715

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

1.2.3

Current Phasors (MMXU, CP) The CP function must be connected to three-phase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 352 above.
Phase currents (magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each magnitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section 1.2.1 "Measurement supervision".

1.2.4

Voltage phasors (MMXU, VN and VP) The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.
The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each magnitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (Vxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section 1.2.1 "Measurement supervision".

1.2.5

Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ) The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CSQ) or voltage (VSQ) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, but XRANG, are calculated within the measuring block and it is not possible to calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs (voltage and current, magnitude and angle). Each magnitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section 1.2.1 "Measurement supervision".

1.3

Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.

716

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

SVR1CVMMXU I3P V3P S S_RANGE P_INST P P_RANGE Q_INST Q Q_RANGE PF PF_RANGE ILAG ILEAD V V_RANGE I I_RANGE F F_RANGE

en05000772_ansi.vsd

Figure 354: SVR function block

CP01CMMXU I3P I_A IA_RANGE IA_ANGL I_B IB_RANGE IB_ANGL I_C IC_RANGE IC_ANGL

Figure 355: CP function block

VP01VMMXU V3P V_AB V_ABRANG V_BC V_BCRANG V_CA V_CARANG en05000701_ansi.vsd

Figure 356: VP function block

717

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

CSQ1CMSQI I3P 3I0 3I0RANG I1 I1RANG I2 I2RANG en05000703.vsd

Figure 357: CS function block

VSQ1VMSQI U3P 3U0 3U0RANG U1 U1RANG U2 U2RANG en05000704.vsd

VSQ1VMSQI V3P 3V0 3V0RANG V1 V1RANG V2 V2RANG en05000704_ansi.vsd

Figure 358: VS function block

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 401: Input signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block
Signal
I3P V3P

Description
Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input

Table 402: Output signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block
Signal
S S_RANGE P_INST P P_RANGE

Description
Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value Apparent Power range Active Power Active Power magnitude of deadband value Active Power range

718

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Signal
Q_INST Q Q_RANGE PF PF_RANGE ILAG ILEAD V V_RANGE I I_RANGE F F_RANGE

Description
Reactive Power Active Power magnitude of deadband value Reactive Power range Power Factor magnitude of deadband value Power Factor range Current is lagging voltage Current is leading voltage Calculate voltage magnitude of deadband value Calcuate voltage range Calculated current magnitude of deadband value Calculated current range System frequency magnitude of deadband value System frequency range

Table 403: Input signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block
Signal
I3P

Description
Group connection abstract block 1

Table 404: Output signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block
Signal
I_A IA_RANGE IA_ANGL I_B IB_RANGE IB_ANGL I_C IC_RANGE IC_ANGL

Description
Phase A current magnitude of reported value Phase A current magnitude range Phase A current magnitude angle Phase B current magnitude of reported value Phase B current magnitude range Phase B current magnitude angle Phase C current magnitude of reported value Phase C current magnitude range Phase C current magnitude angle

Table 405: Input signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block
Signal
V3P

Description
Group connection abstract block 2

719

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Table 406: Output signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block
Signal
V_AB VAB_RANG V_BC VBC_RANG V_CA VCA_RANG

Description
VAB Reported magnitude value VAB Magnitude range VBC Reported magnitude value VBC Magnitude range VCA Reported magnitude value VCA Magnitude range

Table 407: Input signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block
Signal
I3P

Description
Group connection abstract block 3

Table 408: Output signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block
Signal
3I0 3I0RANG I1 I1RANG I2 I2RANG

Description
3I0 magnitude of reported value 3I0 Magnitude range I1magnitude of reported value I1 Magnitude range I2 Magnitude of reported value I2 Magnitude range

Table 409: Input signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block
Signal
V3P

Description
Group connection abstract block 4

Table 410: Output signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block
Signal
3V0 3V0RANG V1 V1RANG V2 V2RANG

Description
3V0 Reported magnitude value 3V0 Magnitude range V1 Reported magnitude value V1 Magnitude range V2 Reported magnitude value V2 Magnitude range

720

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

1.5

Setting parameters
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
Table 411: Basic general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function
Parameter
SLowLim SLowLowLim SMin SMax SRepTyp

Range
0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Step
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 -

Default
0.000 0.000 0.000 1000000000.000 Cyclic

Unit
VA VA VA VA -

Description
Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type

PMin

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -

-1000000000.000

Minimum value

PMax

1000000000.000

Maximum value

PRepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

QMin

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 1

-1000000000.000

VAr

Minimum value

Operation IBase QMax

Off 3000 1000000000.000

A VAr

Disable/Enable Operation Base setting for current level in A Maximum value

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.05 - 2000.00 -

QRepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

VBase

0.05

400.00

kV

Base setting for voltage level in kV

721

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
Mode

Range
A, B, C Arone Pos Seq AB BC L3L1 A B C 0.000 - 6.000 -180.0 - 180.0

Step
-

Default
L1, L2, L3

Unit
-

Description
Selection of measured current and voltage

PowMagFact PowAngComp

0.001 0.1

1.000 0.0

Deg

Magnitude factor to scale power calculations Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & V Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, V and I Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type

0.00 - 1.00

0.01

0.00

PFMin PFMax PFRepTyp

-1.000 - 0.000 0.000 - 1.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

0.001 0.001 -

-1.000 1.000 Cyclic

VMin

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -

0.000

Minimum value

VMax

400000.000

Maximum value

VRepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

IMin

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000

0.000

Minimum value

722

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
IMax

Range

Step

Default
1000.000

Unit
A

Description
Maximum value

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -

IRepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

FrMin

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -

0.000

Hz

Minimum value

FrMax

70.000

Hz

Maximum value

FrRepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

Table 412: Advanced general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function
Parameter
SDbRepInt

Range
1 - 300

Step
1

Default
10

Unit
Type

Description
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

SZeroDb SHiHiLim SHiLim SLimHyst

0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001 0.001 0.001

0 900000000.000 800000000.000 5.000

m% VA VA %

PDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

PZeroDb PHiHiLim

0 - 100000

0 900000000.000

m% W

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000

PHiLim

800000000.000

PLowLim

-800000000.000

Low limit (physical value)

723

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
PLowLowLim

Range

Step

Default
-900000000.000

Unit
W

Description
Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 0.001

PLimHyst

5.000

QDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

QZeroDb QHiHiLim

0 - 100000

0 900000000.000

m% VAr

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 0.001

QHiLim

800000000.000

VAr

QLowLim

-800000000.000

VAr

Low limit (physical value)

QLowLowLim

-900000000.000

VAr

Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range Zero point clamping in % of VBase High High limit (physical value) Zero point clamping in % of IBase High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

QLimHyst

5.000

PFDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

PFZeroDb VGenZeroDb PFHiHiLim IGenZeroDb PFHiLim PFLowLim PFLowLowLim PFLimHyst

0 - 100000 1 - 100 -3.000 - 3.000 1 - 100 -3.000 - 3.000 -3.000 - 3.000 -3.000 - 3.000 0.000 - 100.000

1 1 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

0 5 3.000 5 2.000 -2.000 -3.000 5.000

m% % % %

VDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

724

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
VZeroDb VHiHiLim

Range
0 - 100000

Step
1

Default
0 460000.000

Unit
m% V

Description
Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 0.001

VHiLim

450000.000

VLowLim

380000.000

Low limit (physical value)

VLowLowLim

350000.000

Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

VLimHyst

5.000

IDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

IZeroDb IHiHiLim

0 - 100000

0 900.000

m% A

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 0.001

IHiLim

800.000

ILowLim

-800.000

Low limit (physical value)

ILowLowLim

-900.000

Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

ILimHyst

5.000

FrDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

FrZeroDb FrHiHiLim

0 - 100000

0 65.000

m% Hz

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000

FrHiLim

63.000

Hz

725

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
FrLowLim

Range

Step

Default
47.000

Unit
Hz

Description
Low limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 0.001

FrLowLowLim

45.000

Hz

Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Vn Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Vn Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Vn Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of In Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of In Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of In Angle calibration for current at 5% of In Angle calibration for current at 30% of In Angle calibration for current at 100% of In

FrLimHyst

5.000

VMagComp5 VMagComp30

-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000

% %

VMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IMagComp5 IMagComp30 IMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000 0.000

% % %

IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000 0.000

Deg Deg Deg

Table 413: Basic general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function
Parameter
IA_DbRepInt

Range
1 - 300

Step
1

Default
10

Unit
Type

Description
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Disbled/Enabled operation Base setting for current level in A Maximum value Reporting type

Operation IBase IA_Max IA_RepTyp

Disabled Enabled 1 - 99999 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

1 0.001 -

Off 3000 1000.000 Cyclic

A A -

726

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
IA_AngDbRepInt

Range
1 - 300

Step
1

Default
10

Unit
Type

Description
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value Reporting type

IB_DbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

IB_Max IB_RepTyp

0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

0.001 -

1000.000 Cyclic

A -

IB_AngDbRepInt

10

Type

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value Reporting type

IC_DbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

IC_Max IC_RepTyp

0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

0.001 -

1000.000 Cyclic

A -

IC_AngDbRepInt

10

Type

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

Table 414: Advanced general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function
Parameter
IA_ZeroDb IA_HiHiLim IA_HiLim IMagComp5 IMagComp30 IA_LowLim IA_LowLowLim IMagComp100

Range
0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000

Step
1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

Default
0 900.000 800.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

Unit
m% A A % % A A %

Description
Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of In Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of In Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of In

727

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
IAngComp5 IA_Min IAngComp30 IAngComp100 IA_LimHys

Range
-10.000 - 10.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 0.000 - 100.000

Step
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

Default
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000

Unit
Deg A Deg Deg %

Description
Angle calibration for current at 5% of In Minimum value Angle calibration for current at 30% of In Angle calibration for current at 100% of In Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits

IB_ZeroDb IB_HiHiLim IB_HiLim IB_LowLim IB_LowLowLim IB_Min IB_LimHys

0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

0 900.000 800.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000

m% A A A A A %

IC_ZeroDb IC_HiHiLim IC_HiLim IC_LowLim IC_LowLowLim IC_Min IC_LimHys

0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

0 900.000 800.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000

m% A A A A A %

728

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Table 415: Basic general settings for the VMMXU (VP01-) function
Parameter
VAB_DbRepInt

Range
1 - 300

Step
1

Default
10

Unit
s,%,% s -

Description
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Disbled/Enabled operation

Operation VAB_ZeroDb VBase VAB_HiHiLim

Disabled Enabled 0 - 100000 0.05 - 2000.00

1 0.05

On 0 400.00 460000.000

1/1000 Zero point clamping in % 0.001% of range kV V Base setting for voltage level in kV High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.001

VAB_HiLim

450000.000

VMagComp5 VMagComp30

0.000 0.000

% %

Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Vn Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Vn Low limit (physical value)

VAB_LowLim

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001

380000.000

VAB_LowLowLim

350000.000

Low Low limit (physical value) Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Vn Minimum value

VMagComp100

0.000

VAB_Min

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 -

0.000

VAB_Max

450000.000

Maximum value

VAB_RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

VAB_LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

VAB_AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%,% s -

VAB_AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

729

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
VBC_DbRepInt

Range
1 - 300

Step
1

Default
10

Unit
s,%,% s

Description
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

VBC_ZeroDb VBC_HiHiLim

0 - 100000

0 460000.000

1/1000 Zero point clamping in % 0.001% of range V High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 -

VBC_HiLim

450000.000

VBC_LowLim

380000.000

Low limit (physical value)

VBC_LowLowLim

350000.000

Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

VBC_Min

0.000

VBC_Max

450000.000

Maximum value

VBC_RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

VBC_LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

VBC_AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%,% s -

VBC_AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Cyclic

VCA_DbRepInt

10

s,%,% s

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

VCA_ZeroDb VCA_HiHiLim

0 - 100000

0 460000.000

1/1000 Zero point clamping in % 0.001% of range V High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000

VCA_HiLim

450000.000

730

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
VCA_LowLim

Range

Step

Default
380000.000

Unit
V

Description
Low limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 -

VCA_LowLowLim

350000.000

Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

VCA_Min

0.000

VCA_Max

450000.000

Maximum value

VCA_RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

VCA_LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

VCA_AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%,% s -

VCA_AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

Table 416: Basic general settings for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function
Parameter
3I0DbRepInt

Range
1 - 300

Step
1

Default
10

Unit
s,%,% s

Description
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

3I0ZeroDb 3I0HiHiLim

0 - 100000

0 900.000

1/1000 Zero point clamping in % 0.001% of range A High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000

3I0HiLim

800.000

3I0LowLim

-800.000

Low limit (physical value)

3I0LowLowLim

-900.000

Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

3I0Min

0.000

731

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
3I0Max

Range

Step

Default
1000.000

Unit
A

Description
Maximum value

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 -

3I0RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

3I0LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Disbled/Enabled operation Reporting type

3I0AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%,% s -

Operation 3I0AngRepTyp

Disabled Enabled Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Off Cyclic

I1DbRepInt

10

s,%,% s

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

I1ZeroDb I1HiHiLim

0 - 100000

0 900.000

1/1000 Zero point clamping in % 0.001% of range A High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 -

I1HiLim

800.000

I1LowLim

-800.000

Low limit (physical value)

I1LowLowLim

-900.000

Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

I1Min

0.000

I1Max

1000.000

Maximum value

I1RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

I1LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits

732

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
I1AngDbRepInt

Range
1 - 300

Step
1

Default
10

Unit
s,%,% s -

Description
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

I1AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Cyclic

I2DbRepInt

10

s,%,% s

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

I2ZeroDb I2HiHiLim

0 - 100000

0 900.000

1/1000 Zero point clamping in % 0.001% of range A High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 -

I2HiLim

800.000

I2LowLim

-800.000

Low limit (physical value)

I2LowLowLim

-900.000

Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

I2Min

0.000

I2Max

1000.000

Maximum value

I2RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

I2LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

I2AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%,% s -

I2AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

733

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Table 417: Basic general settings for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function
Parameter
3V0DbRepInt

Range
1 - 300

Step
1

Default
10

Unit
s,%,% s

Description
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

3V0ZeroDb 3V0HiHiLim

0 - 100000

0 460000.000

1/1000 Zero point clamping in % 0.001% of range V High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 -

3V0HiLim

450000.000

3V0LowLim

380000.000

Low limit (physical value)

3V0LowLowLim

350000.000

Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

3V0Min

0.000

3V0Max

450000.000

Maximum value

3V0RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

3V0LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Disbled/Enabled operation Reporting type

3V0AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%,% s -

Operation 3V0AngRepTyp

Disabled Enabled Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Off Cyclic

V1DbRepInt

10

s,%,% s

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

V1ZeroDb V1HiHiLim

0 - 100000

0 460000.000

1/1000 Zero point clamping in % 0.001% of range V High High limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000

734

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
V1HiLim

Range

Step

Default
450000.000

Unit
V

Description
High limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 -

V1LowLim

380000.000

Low limit (physical value)

V1LowLowLim

350000.000

Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

V1Min

0.000

V1Max

450000.000

Maximum value

V1RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

V1LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

V1AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%,% s -

V1AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Cyclic

V2DbRepInt

10

s,%,% s

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

V2ZeroDb V2HiHiLim

0 - 100000

0 460000.000

1/1000 Zero point clamping in % 0.001% of range V High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000

V2HiLim

450000.000

V2LowLim

380000.000

Low limit (physical value)

V2LowLowLim

350000.000

Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

V2Min

0.000

735

Measurements (MSQI)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
V2Max

Range

Step

Default
450000.000

Unit
V

Description
Maximum value

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 -

V2RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

V2LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

V2AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%,% s -

V2AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

1.6

Technical data
Table 418: Measurements (MMXU)
Function
Frequency Voltage

Range or value
(0.95-1.05) fn (0.1-1.5) Vn (0.2-4.0) In 0.1 x Vn< V < 1.5 x Vn 0.2 x In < I < 4.0 x In 0.1 x Vn< V < 1.5 x Vn 0.2 x In < I < 4.0 x In 0.1 x Vn < V < 1.5 x Vn 0.2 x I n< I < 4.0 x In 0.1 x Vn < V < 1.5 x Vn 0.2 x I n< I < 4.0 x In

Accuracy
2.0 mHz 0.5% of Vn at V Vn 0.5% of V at V > Vn 0.5% of In at I In 0.5% of I at I > In 1.0% of Sn at S Sn 1.0% of S at S > Sn 1.0% of Sn at S Sn 1.0% of S at S > Sn 1.0% of Sn at S Sn 0.02

Connected current

Active power, P

Reactive power, Q

Apparent power, S Power factor, cos ()

736

Event counter (GGIO)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

2
2.1

Event counter (GGIO)

Function block
CNT1CNTGGIO BLOCK COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 RESET en05000345.vsd

Figure 359: CNT function block

2.2

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

737

Event function (EV)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Event function (EV)

Function block name: EVxxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name:
Event

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3.1

Introduction
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function block. The event function block is used for remote communication. Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the event block.

3.2

Principle of operation
The main purpose of the event function block is to generate events when the state or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition, for which event generation is enabled. Each event function block has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a name from the CAP configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single events, but are also intended for double indication events. The function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events. The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of the event function block. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution of 1 ms. The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended to be used by the station level. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears. The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The event mask can be set individually for each input channel. These settings are available: NoEvents

738

Event function (EV)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of the event function block that shall generate events. This can be performed individually for the LON and SPA communication respectively. For each communication type these settings are available: Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16

For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input channel. To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel equals 3 times the configurable setting MaxEvPerSec.

739

Event function (EV)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

3.3

Function block
EV01Event BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 en05000697.vsd

3.4

Input and output signals

Table 419: Input signals for the Event (EV01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11

Description
Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11

740

Event function (EV)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Signal
INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16

Description
Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16

3.5

Setting parameters
Table 420: Basic general settings for the Event (EV01-) function
Parameter
SPAChannelMask

Range
Disabled Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16 Disabled Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect

Step
-

Default
Disabled

Unit
-

Description
SPA channel mask

LONChannelMask

Disabled

LON channel mask

EventMask1

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 1

EventMask2

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 2

EventMask3

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 3

EventMask4

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 4

EventMask5

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 5

741

Event function (EV)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
EventMask6

Range
NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect

Step
-

Default
AutoDetect

Unit
-

Description
Reporting criteria for input 6

EventMask7

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 7

EventMask8

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 8

EventMask9

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 9

EventMask10

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 10

EventMask11

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 11

EventMask12

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 12

EventMask13

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 13

EventMask14

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 14

742

Event function (EV)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
EventMask15

Range
NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600

Step
-

Default
AutoDetect

Unit
-

Description
Reporting criteria for input 15

EventMask16

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 16

MinRepIntVal1 MinRepIntVal2 MinRepIntVal3 MinRepIntVal4 MinRepIntVal5 MinRepIntVal6 MinRepIntVal7 MinRepIntVal8 MinRepIntVal9 MinRepIntVal10 MinRepIntVal11 MinRepIntVal12 MinRepIntVal13 MinRepIntVal14 MinRepIntVal15 MinRepIntVal16

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s

Minimum reporting interval input 1 Minimum reporting interval input 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3 Minimum reporting interval input 4 Minimum reporting interval input 5 Minimum reporting interval input 6 Minimum reporting interval input 7 Minimum reporting interval input 8 Minimum reporting interval input 9 Minimum reporting interval input 10 Minimum reporting interval input 11 Minimum reporting interval input 12 Minimum reporting interval input 13 Minimum reporting interval input 14 Minimum reporting interval input 15 Minimum reporting interval input 16

743

Fault locator (RFLO)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Fault locator (RFLO)

Function block name: FLO-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name:
LMBRFLO

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

4.1

Introduction
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line. The built-in fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the fault as a relative (in%) or an absolute value. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero sequence effect on double circuit lines. The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current, together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to further increase the accuracy. Specially on heavily loaded long lines (where the fault locator is most important) where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault locator.

4.2

Principle of operation
The Fault Locator (FL) in the IED is an essential complement to other monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with great accuracy. When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are selected from the Trip Value Recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The analog configuration (channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool within PCM 600. The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and additional fault resistance.

744

Fault locator (RFLO)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

R0L+jX0L R1L+jX1L R1A+jX1A Z0m=Z0m+jX0m R0L+jX0L R1L+jX1L

DRP FL en05000045_ansi.vsd

R1B+jX1B

Figure 360: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for settings of the fault location-measuring function.
If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order etc.), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. Its also possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be achieved. The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. The fault location is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600.

4.2.1

Measuring principle For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of additional fault resistance.
The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.

4.2.2

Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault Figure 361 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume, that the fault occurs at a distance F from terminal A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of the algorithm.

745

Fault locator (RFLO)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

L F

ZA

A IA

pZL IF

IB

(1-p).ZL

ZB

VA

RF

xx01000171_ansi.vsd

Figure 361: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends.

From figure 361 it is evident that:

VA = IA p ZL + IF RF
(Equation 104)

Where: IA IF
p

is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault, is the fault current and is a relative distance to the fault

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

IF A IF = ------DA
(Equation 105)

Where: IFA DA is the change in current at the point of measurement, terminal A and is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and the total fault current.

For a single line, the value is equal to:

746

Fault locator (RFLO)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

( 1 p ) Z L + ZB DA = ----------------------------------------Z A + Z L + ZB
(Equation 106)

Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:

VA = IA p ZL +

IFA DA

RF
(Equation 107)

Table 421: Expressions for VA, IA and IFA for different types of faults
Fault type:
AG

VA
VAA

IA
IAA + KN x INA

IFA

3 2

(IAA I0 A )
(IBA I0 A )

BG

VBA

IBA + KN x INA
3 2

CG

VCA

ICA + KN x INA
3 2

(ICA I0 A )

ABC, AB, ABG BC, BCG CA, CAG

VAA-VBA VBA-VCA VCA-VAA

IAA - IBA IBA - ICA ICA - IAA

IABA ICBA ICAA

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal to:
Z0L Z 1L K N = ----------------------3 Z1L
(Equation 108)

I is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before the fault.
In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm. For double lines, the fault equation is:

747

Fault locator (RFLO)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

VA = IA p Z1L +

IFA DA

RF + I0P Z0M
(Equation 109)

Where: I0P Z0M DA is a zero sequence current of the parallel line, is a mutual zero sequence impedance and is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

( 1 p ) ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B DA = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------2 ZA + Z L + 2 Z B

(Equation 110)

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z 0M I 0P Z0L Z 1L - + ---------------- ------K N = ----------------------3 Z1L 3 Z1L I 0A
(Equation 111)

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two cases. Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 107 or 110 is a function of p, the general equation 109 can be written in the form:
2

p p K1 + K2 K3 RF = 0
(Equation 112)

Where:

K1 =

VA IA ZL

ZB ZL + Z ADD

+1
(Equation 113)

K2 =

VA

IA ZL ZL + Z ADD

ZB

+ 1

(Equation 114)

748

Fault locator (RFLO)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

IF A ZA + ZB - -------------------------- + 1 K 3 = -------------- I A Z L Z 1 + ZA DD
(Equation 115)

and: ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines. IA, IFA and VA are given in the above table. KN is calculated automatically according to equation 111. ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 112 applies to both single and parallel lines. Equation 112 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:
p p Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) R F Re ( K 3 ) = 0
(Equation 116)
2

p Im ( K1 ) + Im ( K 2 ) R F Im ( K3 ) = 0
(Equation 117)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 117, and then inserted to equation 116. According to equation 116, the relative distance to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation. Equation 116 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, that gives an unequivocal figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be selected. If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the relative distance to the fault.

4.2.3

The non-compensated impedance model In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault current:

VA = p Z1L IA + RF IA
(Equation 118)

Where: IA is according to table 421.

749

Fault locator (RFLO)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only used if the load compensated models do not function.

4.2.4

IEC 60870-5-103 The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location information from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). There are two outputs that must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis, FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX output.

4.3

Function block
FLO1LMBRFLO PHSEL_A PHSEL_B PHSEL_C CALCDIST FLTDISTX CALCMADE BCD_80 BCD_40 BCD_20 BCD_10 BCD_8 BCD_4 BCD_2 BCD_1 en05000679_ansi.vsd

Figure 362: FLO function block

4.4

Input and output signals

Table 422: Input signals for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function block
Signal
PHSEL_A PHSEL_B PHSEL_C CALCDIST

Description
Phase selection phase A Phase selection phase B Phase selection phase C Input signal to initiate fault distance calculation

Table 423: Output signals for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function block
Signal
FLTDISTX CALCMADE BCD_80 BCD_40 BCD_20

Description
Reactive distance to fault Fault calculation made Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80% Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 40% Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 20%

750

Fault locator (RFLO)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Signal
BCD_10 BCD_8 BCD_4 BCD_2 BCD_1

Description
Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 10% Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 8% Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 4% Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 2% Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 1%

4.5

Setting parameters
Table 424: Basic general settings for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function
Parameter
DrepChNoI_A

Range
1 - 30

Step
1

Default
1

Unit
Ch

Description
Recorder Input number recording phase current, IA Recorder Input number recording phase current, IB Recorder Input number recording phase current, IC Recorder input number recording residual current, IN Recorder input number recording 3I0 on parallel line Recorder Input number recording phase voltage, VA Recorder Input number recording phase voltage, VB Recorder Input number recording phase voltage, VC

DrepChNoI_B

1 - 30

Ch

DrepChNoI_C

1 - 30

Ch

DrepChNoIN

0 - 30

Ch

DrepChNoIP

0 - 30

Ch

DrepChNoV_A

1 - 30

Ch

DrepChNoV_B

1 - 30

Ch

DrepChNoV_C

1 - 30

Ch

751

Fault locator (RFLO)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Table 425: Basic parameter group settings for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function
Parameter
R1A X1A R1B X1B R1L X1L R0L X0L R0M X0M LineLength

Range
0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 - 1500.000 0.000 - 1500.000 0.000 - 1500.000 0.0 - 10000.0

Step
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1

Default
2.000 12.000 2.000 12.000 2.000 12.500 8.750 50.000 0.000 0.000 40.0

Unit
ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p ohm/p -

Description
Source resistance A (near end) Source reactance A (near end) Source resistance B (far end) Source reactance B (far end) Positive sequence line resistance Positive sequence line reactance Zero sequence line resistance Zero sequence line reactance Zero sequence mutual resistance Zero sequence mutual reactance Length of line

4.6

Technical data
Table 426: Fault locator (RFLO)
Function
Reactive and resistive reach

Value or range
(0.001-1500.000) /phase

Accuracy
2.0% static accuracy 2.0% degrees static angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn Current range: (0.5-30) x In

Phase selection Maximum number of fault locations

According to input signals 100

752

Measured value expander block

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Measured value expander block

Function block name: XP ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name:
RANGE_XP

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

5.1

Introduction
The functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO (MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced to be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic.

5.2

Principle of operation
The input signal must be connected to the RANGE-output of a measuring function block (MMXU, MSQI or MVGGIO). The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to table 427.
Table 427: Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Measured supervised value is: Output:
LOWLOW LOW NORMAL HIGH HIGHHIGH High High High High High

below low-low limit

between low-low and low limit

between low between above and high limit high-high high-high and high limit limit

753

Measured value expander block

Chapter 14 Monitoring

5.3

Function block
XP01RANGE_XP HIGHHIGH HIGH NORMAL LO W LOWLOW en05000346.vsd

RANGE

Figure 363: XP function block

5.4

Input and output signals

Table 428: Input signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block
Signal
RANGE

Description
Measured value range

Table 429: Output signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block
Signal
HIGHHIGH HIGH NORMAL LOW LOWLOW

Description
Measured value is above high-high limit Measured value is between high and high-high limit Measured value is between high and low limit Measured value is between low and low-low limit Measured value is below low-low limit

754

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Function block name: DRP--, DRA1- DRA4-, IEC 60617 graphical symbol: DRB1- DRB6ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name:
ABRDRE

6.1

Introduction
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report functionality. The disturbance report, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block i.e. maximum 40 analog and 96 binary signals. The disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions: Sequential Of Events (SOE) Indications (IND) Event recorder (ER) Trip Value recorder (TVR) Disturbance recorder (DR) Fault Locator (FL)

The function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, initiating conditions, recording times and large storage capacity. A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input in the DRAx or DRBy function blocks which is set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time, will be included in the recording. Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to get information about the recordings, but the disturbance report files may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.

6.2

Principle of operation
The disturbance report (DRP) is a common name for several facilities to supply the operator, analysis engineer, etc. with sufficient information about events in the system. The facilities included in the disturbance report are:

755

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

General disturbance information Indications (IND) Event recorder (ER) Event list (EL) Trip values (phase values) (TVR) Disturbance recorder (DR) Fault locator (FL)

Figure 364 shows the relations among Disturbance Report, included functions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binary input function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (DRA1-3) which is used by FL after estimation by TVR. The DR function acquires information from both DRAx and DRBx.

DRA1-- 4-

Disturbance Report DRP- FL01 FL Fault Locator

A4RADR Analog signals

RDRE Trip Value Rec

DRB1-- 6-

Disturbance Recorder

Binary signals

B6RBDR Event List Event Recorder Indications

en05000124.vsd

Figure 364: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time etc. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.

756

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Disturbance report

Record no. N

Record no. N+1

Record no. N+100

General dist. information

Indications

Trip values

Event recordings

Disturbance recording

Fault locator

Event list (SOE)

en05000125_ansi.vsd

Figure 365: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is over-written by the new one. The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. The figure 366 shows number of recordings vs total recording time tested for a typical configuration, i.e. in a 60 Hz system its possible to record 80 where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (IND, ER, EL and TVR).

757

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Number of recordings 100

3.4s

80

3.4s 40 analog 96 binary

20 analog 96 binary

60
6.3s 6.3s 60 Hz 50 Hz

6.3s

40

Total recording time 250 300 350 400 s

en05000488_ansi.vsd

Figure 366: Number of recordings.

Disturbance information Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values are available on the local human-machine interface (LHMI). To acquire a complete disturbance report the use of a PC and PCM600 is required. The PC may be connected to the IED-front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports). Indications (IND) Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the disturbance (not time-tagged). (See section 8 "Indications (RDRE)" for more detailed information.) Event recorder (ER) The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the LHMI or PCM 600. (See section 9 "Event recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.) Event list (EL) The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via LHMI or PCM 600. (See section 7 "Sequence of events (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)

758

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Trip value recorder (TVR) The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and during the fault. (See section 10 "Trip value recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.) Disturbance recorder (DR) The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault. (See section 11 "Disturbance recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.) Fault locator (FL) The fault location function calculates the distance to fault. (See section 4 "Fault locator (RFLO)" for more detailed information) Time tagging The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging within the disturbance report Recording times The disturbance report (DRP) records information about a disturbance during a settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. The disturbance recorder (DR), the event recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

759

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Trig point TimeLimit PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

3
en05000487.vsd

Table 430: Definitions

PreFaultRecT, 1 tFault, 2 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time. Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time). Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time. Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances.Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.

PostFaultRecT, 3 TimeLimit

Figure 367: The recording times definition

Analog signals Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external analog signals, i.e. signals from the analog input modules (TRM) and line differential communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (Sum3Ph). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents etc.).

760

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

PRxxSMAI External analog signals TRM, LDCM SUxx GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

DRA1A1RADR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 ... A4RADR INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 ... INPUT40
en05000653.vsd

DRA2A2RADR DRA3A3RADR

Internal analog signals T2Dx, T3Dx, REFx, HZDx, L3D, L6D, LT3D, LT6D SVRx, CPxx, VP0x, CSQx, VSQx, MVxx

Figure 368: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration) available as an input signal on the DRAx- function block via the PRxx function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, the Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available. If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used. The preprocessor function block (PRxx) calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). PRxx makes the information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as a input signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the PRxx-block. Connect the signals to the DRAx accordingly. For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

761

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Binary signals Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by the disturbance report.The signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be recorded when:
the corresponding function block is included in the configuration the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation>TrigDR=ON/OFF). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI (setLED=On/Off). The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with the LHMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

Trigger signals The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type: Manual trigger Binary-signal trigger Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, from PCM600 or via station bus (IEC61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to Operators manual for procedure. Binary-signal trigger Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger (Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report. Analog-signal trigger All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.

762

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name. If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is separately performed for each channel. This method of checking the analog trigger conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this initiation is typically in the range of one cycle, 16 2/3 ms for a 60 Hz network. All under/over trig signal information is available on the LHMI and PCM600, see table 431 "Output signals for the RDRE (DRP--) function block".

Post Retrigger The disturbance report function does not respond to any new trig condition, during a recording. Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig = On)during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording. When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new complete recording will be fetched. The disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.

6.3

Function block
DRP-RDRE DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED MEMUSED en05000406.vsd

Figure 369: DRP function block

763

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

DRA1A1RADR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 en05000430.vsd

Figure 370: DRA1 function block, analog inputs, example for DRA1DRA3

DRA4A4RADR INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 NAME31 NAME32 NAME33 NAME34 NAME35 NAME36 NAME37 NAME38 NAME39 NAME40 en05000431.vsd

Figure 371: DRA4 function block, derived analog inputs

764

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

DRB1B1RBDR INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 en05000432.vsd

Figure 372: DRB1 function block, binary inputs, example for DRB1DRB6

6.4

Input and output signals

Table 431: Output signals for the RDRE (DRP--) function block
Signal
DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED MEMUSED

Description
Disturbance report function turned off Disturbance recording started Disturbance recording made All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared More than 80% of memory used

765

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Table 432: Input signals for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function block
Signal
INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10

Description
Group signal for input 1 Group signal for input 2 Group signal for input 3 Group signal for input 4 Group signal for input 5 Group signal for input 6 Group signal for input 7 Group signal for input 8 Group signal for input 9 Group signal for input 10

Table 433: Input signals for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function block
Signal
INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40

Description
Analog channel 31 Analog channel 32 Analog channel 33 Analog channel 34 Analog channel 35 Analog channel 36 Analog channel 37 Analog channel 38 Analog channel 39 Analogue channel 40

Table 434: Input signals for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function block
Signal
INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10

Description
Binary channel 1 Binary channel 2 Binary channel 3 Binary channel 4 Binary channel 5 Binary channel 6 Binary channel 7 Binary channel 8 Binary channel 9 Binary channel 10

766

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Signal
INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16

Description
Binary channel 11 Binary channel 12 Binary channel 13 Binary channel 14 Binary channel 15 Binary channel 16

6.5

Setting parameters
Table 435: Basic general settings for the RDRE (DRP--) function
Parameter
Operation PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT TimeLimit PostRetrig ZeroAngleRef OpModeTest

Range
Disabled Enabled 0.05 - 1.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.5 - 10.0 Disabled Enabled 1 - 30 Disabled Enabled

Step
0.01 0.1 0.1 1 -

Default
Off 0.10 0.5 1.0 Off 1 Off

Unit
s s s Ch -

Description
Operation Enable/Disable Pre-fault recording time Post-fault recording time Fault recording time limit Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off) Trip value recorder, phasor reference channel Operation mode during test mode

Table 436: Basic general settings for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function
Parameter
Operation01 NomValue01 UnderTrigOp01

Range
Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Step
0.1 -

Default
Disabled 0.0 Disabled

Unit
-

Description
Operation On/Off Nominal value for analog channel 1 Use under level trig for analog cha 1 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 1 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 1 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 1 in % of signal Operation On/Off

UnderTrigLe01

50

OverTrigOp01

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled

Disabled

OverTrigLe01 Operation02

1 -

200 Disabled

% -

767

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
NomValue02 UnderTrigOp02

Range
0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Step
0.1 -

Default
0.0 Disabled

Unit
-

Description
Nominal value for analog channel 2 Use under level trig for analog cha 2 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 2 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 2 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 2 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analog channel 3 Use under level trig for analog cha 3 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 3 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 3 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analog cha 3 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analog channel 4 Use under level trig for analog cha 4 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 4 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 4 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 4 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analog channel 5

UnderTrigLe02

50

OverTrigOp02

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Disabled

OverTrigLe02 Operation03 NomValue03 UnderTrigOp03

1 0.1 -

200 Disabled 0.0 Disabled

% -

UnderTrigLe03

50

OverTrigOp03

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Disabled

OverTrigLe03 Operation04 NomValue04 UnderTrigOp04

1 0.1 -

200 Disabled 0.0 Disabled

% -

UnderTrigLe04

50

OverTrigOp04

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9

Disabled

OverTrigLe04 Operation05 NomValue05

1 0.1

200 Disabled 0.0

% -

768

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
UnderTrigOp05

Range
Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Step
-

Default
Disabled

Unit
-

Description
Use under level trig for analog cha 5 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 5 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 5 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 5 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analog channel 6 Use under level trig for analog cha 6 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 6 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 6 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 6 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analog channel 7 Use under level trig for analog cha 7 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 7 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 7 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 7 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analog channel 8

UnderTrigLe05

50

OverTrigOp05

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Disabled

OverTrigLe05 Operation06 NomValue06 UnderTrigOp06

1 0.1 -

200 Disabled 0.0 Disabled

% -

UnderTrigLe06

50

OverTrigOp06

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Disabled

OverTrigLe06 Operation07 NomValue07 UnderTrigOp07

1 0.1 -

200 Disabled 0.0 Disabled

% -

UnderTrigLe07

50

OverTrigOp07

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9

Disabled

OverTrigLe07 Operation08 NomValue08

1 0.1

200 Disabled 0.0

% -

769

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
UnderTrigOp08

Range
Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Step
-

Default
Disabled

Unit
-

Description
Use under level trig for analog cha 8 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 8 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 8 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 8 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analog channel 9 Use under level trig for analog cha 9 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 9 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 9 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 9 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analog channel 10 Use under level trig for analog cha 10 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 10 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 10 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 10 in % of signal

UnderTrigLe08

50

OverTrigOp08

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Disabled

OverTrigLe08 Operation09 NomValue09 UnderTrigOp09

1 0.1 -

200 Disabled 0.0 Disabled

% -

UnderTrigLe09

50

OverTrigOp09

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Disabled

OverTrigLe09 Operation10 NomValue10 UnderTrigOp10

1 0.1 -

200 Disabled 0.0 Disabled

% -

UnderTrigLe10

50

OverTrigOp10

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000

Disabled

OverTrigLe10

200

770

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Table 437: Basic general settings for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function
Parameter
Operation31 NomValue31 UnderTrigOp31

Range
Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Step
0.1 -

Default
Disabled 0.0 Disabled

Unit
-

Description
Operation On/off Nominal value for analog channel 31 Use under level trig for analog cha 31 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 31 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 31 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 31 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analog channel 32 Use under level trig for analog cha 32 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 32 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 32 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 32 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analog channel 33 Use under level trig for analog cha 33 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 33 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 33 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analog cha 33 in % of signal

UnderTrigLe31

50

OverTrigOp31

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Disabled

OverTrigLe31 Operation32 NomValue32 UnderTrigOp32

1 0.1 -

200 Disabled 0.0 Disabled

% -

UnderTrigLe32

50

OverTrigOp32

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Disabled

OverTrigLe32 Operation33 NomValue33 UnderTrigOp33

1 0.1 -

200 Disabled 0.0 Disabled

% -

UnderTrigLe33

50

OverTrigOp33

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000

Disabled

OverTrigLe33

200

771

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
Operation34 NomValue34 UnderTrigOp34

Range
Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Step
0.1 -

Default
Disabled 0.0 Disabled

Unit
-

Description
Operation On/off Nominal value for analog channel 34 Use under level trig for analog cha 34 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 34 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 34 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 34 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analog channel 35 Use under level trig for analog cha 35 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 35 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 35 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 35 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analog channel 36 Use under level trig for analog cha 36 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 36 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 36 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 36 in % of signal Operation On/off

UnderTrigLe34

50

OverTrigOp34

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Disabled

OverTrigLe34 Operation35 NomValue35 UnderTrigOp35

1 0.1 -

200 Disabled 0.0 Disabled

% -

UnderTrigLe35

50

OverTrigOp35

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Disabled

OverTrigLe35 Operation36 NomValue36 UnderTrigOp36

1 0.1 -

200 Disabled 0.0 Disabled

% -

UnderTrigLe36

50

OverTrigOp36

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled

Disabled

OverTrigLe36 Operation37

1 -

200 Disabled

% -

772

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
NomValue37 UnderTrigOp37

Range
0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Step
0.1 -

Default
0.0 Disabled

Unit
-

Description
Nominal value for analog channel 37 Use under level trig for analog cha 37 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 37 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 37 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 37 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analog channel 38 Use under level trig for analog cha 38 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 38 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 38 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 38 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analog channel 39 Use under level trig for analog cha 39 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 39 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 39 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 39 in % of signal Operation On/off

UnderTrigLe37

50

OverTrigOp37

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Disabled

OverTrigLe37 Operation38 NomValue38 UnderTrigOp38

1 0.1 -

200 Disabled 0.0 Disabled

% -

UnderTrigLe38

50

OverTrigOp38

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled 0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Disabled

OverTrigLe38 Operation39 NomValue39 UnderTrigOp39

1 0.1 -

200 Disabled 0.0 Disabled

% -

UnderTrigLe39

50

OverTrigOp39

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000 Disabled Enabled

Disabled

OverTrigLe39 Operation40

1 -

200 Disabled

% -

773

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
NomValue40 UnderTrigOp40

Range
0.0 - 999999.9 Disabled Enabled 0 - 200

Step
0.1 -

Default
0.0 Disabled

Unit
-

Description
Nominal value for analog channel 40 Use under level trig for analog cha 40 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog cha 40 in % of signal Use over level trig for analog cha 40 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog cha 40 in % of signal

UnderTrigLe40

50

OverTrigOp40

Disabled Enabled 0 - 5000

Disabled

OverTrigLe40

200

Table 438: Basic general settings for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function
Parameter
Operation01 TrigLevel01

Range
Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled

Step
-

Default
Disabled Trig on 1

Unit
-

Description
Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 1 Indication mask for binary channel 1 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 1 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 2 Indication mask for binary channel 2 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 2 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 3 Indication mask for binary channel 3 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 3 Trigger operation On/Off

IndicationMa01 SetLED01 Operation02 TrigLevel02

Hide Disabled Disabled Trig on 1

IndicationMa02 SetLED02 Operation03 TrigLevel03

Hide Disabled Disabled Trig on 1

IndicationMa03 SetLED03 Operation04

Hide Disabled Disabled

774

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
TrigLevel04

Range
Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled

Step
-

Default
Trig on 1

Unit
-

Description
Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 4 Indication mask for binary channel 4 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 4 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 5 Indication mask for binary channel 5 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 5 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 6 Indication mask for binary channel 6 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 6 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 7 Indication mask for binary channel 7 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 7 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 8 Indication mask for binary channel 8 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 8 Trigger operation On/Off

IndicationMa04 SetLED04 Operation05 TrigLevel05

Hide Disabled Disabled Trig on 1

IndicationMa05 SetLED05 Operation06 TrigLevel06

Hide Disabled Disabled Trig on 1

IndicationMa06 SetLED06 Operation07 TrigLevel07

Hide Disabled Disabled Trig on 1

IndicationMa07 SetLED07 Operation08 TrigLevel08

Hide Disabled Disabled Trig on 1

IndicationMa08 SetLED08 Operation09

Hide Disabled Disabled

775

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
TrigLevel09

Range
Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled

Step
-

Default
Trig on 1

Unit
-

Description
Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 9 Indication mask for binary channel 9 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 9 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 10 Indication mask for binary channel 10 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 10 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 11 Indication mask for binary channel 11 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 11 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 12 Indication mask for binary channel 12 Set red-LED on HMI for binary input 12 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 13 Indication mask for binary channel 13 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 13 Trigger operation On/Off

IndicationMa09 SetLED09 Operation10 TrigLevel10

Hide Disabled Disabled Trig on 1

IndicationMa10 SetLED10 Operation11 TrigLevel11

Hide Disabled Disabled Trig on 1

IndicationMa11 SetLED11 Operation12 TrigLevel12

Hide Disabled Disabled Trig on 1

IndicationMa12 SetLED12 Operation13 TrigLevel13

Hide Disabled Disabled Trig on 1

IndicationMa13 SetLED13 Operation14

Hide Disabled Disabled

776

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
TrigLevel14

Range
Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Disabled Enabled 0 - 255

Step
-

Default
Trig on 1

Unit
-

Description
Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 14 Indication mask for binary channel 14 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 14 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 15 Indication mask for binary channel 15 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 15 Trigger operation On/Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 16 Indication mask for binary channel 16 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 16 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103)

IndicationMa14 SetLED14 Operation15 TrigLevel15

Hide Disabled Disabled Trig on 1

IndicationMa15 SetLED15 Operation16 TrigLevel16

Hide Disabled Disabled Trig on 1

IndicationMa16 SetLED16 FUNT1

Hide Disabled 0

FunT

FUNT2

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT3

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT4

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT5

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT6

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT7

0 - 255

FunT

777

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
FUNT8

Range
0 - 255

Step
1

Default
0

Unit
FunT

Description
Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FUNT9

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT10

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT11

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT12

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT13

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT14

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT15

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT16

0 - 255

FunT

INFNO1

0 - 255

INFNO Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103)

INFNO2

0 - 255

INFNO3

0 - 255

INFNO4

0 - 255

INFNO5

0 - 255

INFNO6

0 - 255

INFNO7

0 - 255

778

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Parameter
INFNO8

Range
0 - 255

Step
1

Default
0

Unit

Description

INFNO Information number for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) INFNO Information number for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)

INFNO9

0 - 255

INFNO10

0 - 255

INFNO11

0 - 255

INFNO12

0 - 255

INFNO13

0 - 255

INFNO14

0 - 255

INFNO15

0 - 255

INFNO16

0 - 255

6.6

Technical data
Table 439: Disturbance report (RDRE)
Function
Pre-fault time Post-fault time Limit time Maximum number of recordings Time tagging resolution Maximum number of analog inputs

Range or value
(0.050.30) s (0.15.0) s (0.56.0) s 100 1 ms 30 + 10 (external + internally derived)

Accuracy
See Table 28: "Time synchronization, time tagging". -

Maximum number of binary inputs 96 Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording 30

Maximum number of indications in 96 a disturbance report

779

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

Function

Range or value

Accuracy
-

Maximum number of events in the 150 Event recording per recording Maximum number of events in the 1000, first in - first out Event list Maximum total recording time (3.4 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80 records recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value) ings) at 60 Hz Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz 1.2 kHz at 60 Hz Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz

780

Sequence of events (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

7
7.1

Sequence of events (RDRE)

Introduction
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring of the system from an overview perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions. The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. The list may contain of up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer. The event list information is available in the IED and is reported to higher control systems via the station bus together with other logged events in the IED. In absence of any software tool the information seeker may use the local HMI to view the event list.

7.2

Principle of operation
When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the event list function stores input name, status and time in the event list in chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new event arrives. The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the LHMI. The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function, which is only active during a disturbance. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and the event recorder function (ER). The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).

7.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.

7.4

Input signals
The event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance Report function.

781

Sequence of events (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

7.5

Technical data
Table 440: Event list (RDRE)
Function
Buffer capacity Resolution Accuracy Maximum number of events in the list

Value
1000 1 ms Depending on time synchronizing

782

Indications (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

8
8.1

Indications (RDRE)
Introduction
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system it is important to know e.g. binary signals that have changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspective to get information via the LHMI in a straightforward way. There are three LEDs on the LHMI (green, yellow and red), which will display status information about the IED and the Disturbance Report function (trigged). The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function that have changed status during a disturbance. The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the information.

8.2

Principle of operation
The LED indications display this information: Green LED:
Steady light Flashing light Dark In Service Internal fail No power supply

Yellow LED:
Steady light Flashing light A disturbance report is triggered The IED is in test mode or in configuration mode

Red LED:
Steady light Trigged on binary signal N with SetLEDN=On

Indication list: The possible indicated signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance report function and disturbance recorder

783

Indications (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of indications the: the signal must be connected to binary input (DRB1-6) function block the DRP parameter Operation must be set On the DRP must be trigged (binary or analog) the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.

Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when configuring the binary inputs. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-defined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function (ER).

8.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.

8.4

Input signals
The indication function may log the same binary input signals as the Disturbance Report function.

8.5

Technical data
Table 441: Indications
Function
Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single disturbance

Value
96

Maximum number of recorded distur- 100 bances

784

Event recorder (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

9
9.1

Event recorder (RDRE)

Introduction
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system is vital e.g. time tagged events logged during disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (e.g. corrective actions) and in the long term (e.g. Functional Analysis). The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events. The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED. The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool. The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).

9.2

Principle of operation
When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance report flash memory at the end of each recording. In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = On and a new trig signal appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function (ER). The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600.

9.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.

9.4

Input signals
The event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance Report function.

785

Event recorder (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

9.5

Technical data
Table 442: Event recorder (RDRE)
Function
Buffer capacity

Value
Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150 Maximum number of disturbance reports 100 1 ms Depending on time synchronizing

Resolution Accuracy

786

Trip value recorder (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

10
10.1

Trip value recorder (RDRE)

Introduction
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for the disturbance evaluation. The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase angle before and during the fault for each analog input signal. The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED. The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool. The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).

10.2

Principle of operation
The trip value recorder (TVR) calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault magnitudes as well as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference. The calculated data is input information to the fault locator (FL). When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number. When a fault interception point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the signals. If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault values. The name of the analog input signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the Disturbance recorder function (DR). The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FLOC) and managed in via the LHMI or PCM 600.

10.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.

787

Trip value recorder (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

10.4

Input signals
The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to DRA1-3 (not DRA4).

10.5

Technical data
Table 443: Trip value recorder (RDRE)
Function
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of disturbance reports

Value
30 100

788

Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

11
11.1

Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

Introduction
The Disturbance Recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (e.g. corrective actions) and long perspective (e.g. Functional Analysis). The Disturbance Recorder acquires sampled data from all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the Disturbance Report function (maximum 40 analog and 96 binary signals). The binary signals are the same signals as available under the event recorder function. The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions. The disturbance recorder information for the last 100 disturbances are saved in the IED and the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to view the list of recordings. The disturbance recording information can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.

11.2

Principle of operation
Disturbance recording (DR) is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM), Line Differential communication Module (LDCM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI) and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally derived analog signals. For details, refer to section 6 "Disturbance report (RDRE)". DR collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuously be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time. Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault time and it can be set in the disturbance report. The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory, intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldest recording is overwritten. The last 100 recordings are stored in the IED. The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog inputs (over-/underlevel trig).

789

Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for all functions within the disturbance report functionality.

11.2.1

Memory and storage When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.
This post-recording processing comprises: Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance Handling tool (part of PCM 600) Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation. The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT). The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the disturbance i.e. information from the Disturbance Report functions (ER, TVR and FL). The Disturbance Handling tool use this information and present the recording in a user-friendly way. General: Station name, object name and unit name Date and time for the trig of the disturbance Record number Sampling rate Time synchronization source Recording times Activated trig signal Active setting group

Analog: Signal names for selected analog channels Information e.g. trig on analog inputs Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating Over- or Undertrig: level and operation Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig CT direction

Binary: Signal names Status of binary input signals

790

Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret the data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency, channel info etc. The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence number and time stamp for each set of samples.

11.2.2

IEC 60870-5-103 The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll disturbance recordings from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). The standard describes how to handle 8 disturbance recordings, 8 analog channels (4 currents and 4 voltages) using the public range and binary signals.
The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master. When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED will appear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED). To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the first 8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the private range. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according to table 444.
Table 444: Configuration of analog channels
Signal
IA IB IC IN VA VB VC VN

Disturbance recorder
DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8

The binary signals connected to DRB1-DRB6 are reported by polling. The function blocks include function type and information number.

11.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP-, DRAx and DRBxblock.

11.4

Input and output signals

For signals see section, in Disturbance report, 6.4.

791

Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

Chapter 14 Monitoring

11.5

Setting parameters
For Setting parameters see table 435 - table 438.

11.6

Technical data
Table 445: Disturbance recorder (RDRE)
Function
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of binary inputs Maximum number of disturbance reports Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value)

Value
40 96 100 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz

792

About this chapter

Chapter 15 Metering

Chapter 15 Metering
About this chapter This chapter describes among others, Pulse counter logic which is a function used to meter externally generated binary pulses. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

793

Pulse counter logic (GGIO)

Chapter 15 Metering

Pulse counter logic (GGIO)

Function block name: PCx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name:
PCGGIO

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

1.1

Introduction
The pulse counter logic function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the pulse counter function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality.

1.2

Principle of operation
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset. The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60 minutes and is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI) or IEC 61850. The pulse counter in REx670 supports unidirectional incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED. The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Value, Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of: Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error) Wrapped around Blocked Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. The pulse counter function updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and ac-

794

Pulse counter logic (GGIO)

Chapter 15 Metering

tivates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function.

Note!
The pulse counter function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that is specially adapted to the pulse counter function.

Figure 373 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs and outputs.

SingleCmdFunc OUTx SingleCmdFunc OUTx I/Omodule Pulse INPUT OUT Pulse length >1s Reset counter

PulseCounter BLOCK INVALID RESTART READ_VAL BLOCKED NEW_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT NAME SCAL_VAL

EVENT INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4

IEC EVENT

SMS settings 1.Operation = Off/On 2.tReporting = 0s...60min 3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events 4.Scale = 1-90000

Database Pulse counter value: 0...2147483647

en05000744_ansi.vsd

Figure 373: Overview of the pulse counter function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command blocks, which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second. The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input Module (BIM). The NAME input is used for a user-defined name with up to 13 characters. The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter. Each pulse counter function block has four binary output signals that can be connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function block.

795

Pulse counter logic (GGIO)

Chapter 15 Metering

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration. The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle. The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two reasons why the counter is blocked: The BLOCK input is set, or The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since last report. The SCAL_VAL signal consists of value, time and status information.

1.3

Function block
PC01PCGGIO BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT NAME INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL SCAL_VAL en05000709.vsd

Figure 374: PC function block

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 446: Input signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT

Description
Block of function Initiates an additional pulse counter reading Connect binary input channel for metering Resets pulse counter value

796

Pulse counter logic (GGIO)

Chapter 15 Metering

Table 447: Output signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block
Signal
INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL SCAL_VAL

Description
The pulse counter value is invalid The reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle The pulse counter function is blocked A new pulse counter value is generated Scaled value with time and status information

1.5

Setting parameters
Table 448: Basic general settings for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function
Parameter
Operation EventMask

Range
Disabled Enabled NoEvents ReportEvents Disabled RisingEdge Falling edge OnChange 1.000 - 90000.000

Step
-

Default
Disabled NoEvents

Unit
-

Description
Operation Enable/Disable Report mask for analog events from pulse counter Pulse counter criteria

CountCriteria

RisingEdge

Scale

0.001

1.000

Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit per counted value Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output

Quantity

Count ActivePower ApparentPower ReactivePower ActiveEnergy ApparentEnergy ReactiveEnergy 0 - 3600

Count

tReporting

60

Cycle time for reporting of counter value

1.6

Technical data
Table 449: Pulse counter logic (GGIO)
Function
Input frequency Cycle time for report of counter value

Setting range
See Binary Input Module (BIM) (03600) s

Accuracy
-

797

Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)

Chapter 15 Metering

Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)

Function block name: ETPx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name:
ETPMMTR

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

2.1

Introduction
Outputs from measurement function (MMXU) can be used to calculate energy. Active as well as reactive values are calculated in import respectively export direction. Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also calculated by the function.

2.2

Principle of operation
The instantaneous values outputs of active and reactive power from the Measurements (CVMMXU) function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the integrated energy. The energy values are presented as communication outputs but also as pulsed output which can be connected to a pulse counter. Values are in Ws resp Vars. Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset from the HMI reset menu or with input RSTACC. The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time tEnergy and the maximum value is stored in a register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXRAFD, MAXRARD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction until reset with input RSTDMD or from the LHMI reset menu.

SVR1 CVMMXU

ETP1 ETPMMTR
PINST QINST P Q

TRUE FALSE FALSE

STACC RSTACC RSTDMD

en07000121.vsd

Figure 375: Connection of the energy metering function to the outputs of the measuring function

798

Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)

Chapter 15 Metering

2.3

Function block
ETP1ETPMMTR P Q STACC RSTACC RSTDMD ACCST EAFPULSE EARPULSE ERFPULSE ERRPULSE EAFALM EARALM ERFALM ERRALM EAFACC EARACC ERFACC ERRACC MAXPAFD MAXPARD MAXPRFD MAXPRRD en07000120.vsd

Figure 376: ETP function block

2.4

Input and output signals

Table 450: Input signals for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function block
Signal
P Q STACC RSTACC RSTDMD

Description
Measured active power Measured reactive power Start to accumulate energy values Reset accumulated energy values. Level sensitive used by ch: reset maximum demand

Table 451: Output signals for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function block
Signal
ACCST EAFPULSE EARPULSE ERFPULSE ERRPULSE EAFALM EARALM ERFALM

Description
Start of accumulating energy values. Accumulated forward active energy pulse Accumulated reverse active energy pulse Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval

799

Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)

Chapter 15 Metering

Signal
ERRALM EAFACC EARACC ERFACC ERRACC MAXPAFD MAXPARD MAXPRFD MAXPRRD

Description
Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval Accumulated forward active energy value in KWh Accumulated reverse active energy value in kWh Accumulated forward reactive energy value in kVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in kVArh Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set interval Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse direction

2.5

Setting parameters
Table 452: Basic general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function
Parameter
Operation StartAcc tEnergy

Range
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled 1 Minute 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 180 Minutes 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 - 10000.000

Step
-

Default
Disabled Disabled 1 Minute

Unit
-

Description
Operation Enable/Disable Activate the accumulation of energy values Time interval for energy calculation

tEnergyOnPls tEnergyOffPls EAFAccPlsQty

0.001 0.001 0.001

1.000 0.500 100.000

s s MWh

Energy accumulated pulse ON time in secs Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in secs Pulse quantity for active forward accumulated energy value Pulse quantity for active reverse accumulated energy value

EARAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

0.001

100.000

MWh

ERFAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

0.001

100.000

MVArh Pulse quantity for reactive forward accumulated energy value MVArh Pulse quantity for reactive reverse accumulated energy value

ERVAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

0.001

100.000

800

Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)

Chapter 15 Metering

Table 453: Advanced general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function
Parameter
EALim ERLim DirEnergyAct DirEnergyReac

Range
0.001 10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Disabled Enabled 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000

Step
0.001 0.001 -

Default
1000000.000 1000.000 Forward Forward

Unit
MWh

Description
Active energy limit

MVArh Reactive energy limit Direction of active energy flow Forward/Reverse Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/Reverse Enable of zero point clamping detection function Zero point clamping level at active Power Zero point clamping level at reactive Power Preset Initial value for forward active energy Preset Initial value for reverse active energy

EnZeroClamp

Enabled

LevZeroClampP LevZeroClampQ EAFPrestVal EARPrestVal ERFPresetVal ERVPresetVal

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

10.000 10.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

MW MVAr MWh MWh

MVArh Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy MVArh Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy

801

Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)

Chapter 15 Metering

802

About this chapter

Chapter 16 Station communication

Chapter 16 Station communication

About this chapter This chapter describes the functions and protocols used on the interfaces to the substation automation and substation monitoring buses. The way these work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

803

Overview

Chapter 16 Station communication

Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus. Following communication protocols are available: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol LON communication protocol SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol DNP3.0 communication protocol

Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

804

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

2
2.1

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Introduction
Single or double optical Ethernet ports for the new substation communication standard IEC61850-8-1 for the station bus are provided. IEC61850-8-1 allows intelligent devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and simplifies SA engineering. Peer- to peer communication according to GOOSE is part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.

2.2
2.2.1

Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)

Introduction The SPGGIO function block is used to send one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. Principle of operation Upon receiving a signal at its input, the SPGGIO function block will send the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests this signal. To be able to get the signal, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: Engineering of the IED and define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information. Function block
SP01SPGGIO BLOCK IN NAME en07000124.vsd

2.2.2

2.2.3

Figure 377: SP function block

805

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

MP01SP16GGIO BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 NAMEOR

en07000125.vsd

Figure 378: MP function block

2.2.4

Input and output signals

Table 454: Input signals for the SPGGIO (SP01-) function block
Signal
IN

Description
Input status

2.2.5

Setting parameters The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

2.3
2.3.1

Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)

Introduction The DPGGIO function block is used to send three logical signals to other systems or equipment in the substation. It is especially conceived to be used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.

806

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

2.3.2

Principle of operation Upon receiving the input signals, the DPGGIO function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: Engineering of the IED and define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information. Function block
DP01DPGGIO OPEN CLOSE VALID en05000771.vsd

2.3.3

Figure 379: DP function block

2.3.4

Input and output signals

Table 455: Input signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block
Signal
OPEN CLOSE VALID

Description
Open indication Close indication Valid indication

2.3.5

Setting parameters The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

2.4
2.4.1

Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)

Introduction The MVGGIO function block is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value. Principle of operation Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, the MVGGIO block will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC61850-8-1 the value and the deadband, to other equipment or systems in the substation.

2.4.2

807

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

2.4.3

Function block
MV01MVGGIO IN VALUE RANGE en05000408.vsd

Figure 380: MV function block

2.4.4

Input and output signals

Table 456: Input signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK IN

Description
Block of function Analogue input value

Table 457: Output signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block
Signal
VALUE RANGE

Description
Magnitude of deadband value Range

2.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 458: Basic general settings for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function
Parameter
MV db

Range
1 - 300

Step
1

Default
10

Unit
Type

Description
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range High High limit

MV zeroDb MV hhLim

0 - 100000

500 90.000

m% -

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000

MV hLim

80.000

High limit

MV lLim

-80.000

Low limit

808

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Parameter
MV llLim

Range

Step

Default
-90.000

Unit
-

Description
Low Low limit

-10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 -10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 -

MV min

-100.000

Minimum value

MV max

100.000

Maximum value

MV dbType

Dead band

Reporting type

MV limHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)

2.5

Setting parameters
Table 459: Basic general settings for the IEC61850-8-1 (IEC1-) function
Parameter
Operation GOOSE

Range
Disabled ON Front OEM311_AB OEM311_CD

Step
-

Default
Off OEM311_AB

Unit
-

Description
Operation Off/On Port for GOOSE communication

2.6

Technical data
Table 460: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
Function
Protocol Communication speed for the IEDs

Value
IEC 61850-8-1 100BASE-FX

809

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

3
3.1

LON communication protocol

Introduction
An optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. This enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals. The LON protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International Standardization Organization (ISO). In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available. Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section 1.5 "Related documents". It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the LON communication protocol in general.

3.2

Principle of operation
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With protection and control devices, fiber optic media is used, which enables the use of the maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet). The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example, interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master. The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages, such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals. Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and explicit read and write messages to access device data. The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of network variables.

Introduction of LON protocol For more information see LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control, Users manual and Technical description, 1MRS 750035-MTD EN.

810

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

LON protocol
Configuration of LON Lon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks network is easily accessible on a single tool program. For details see the Operators manual. Activate LONCommunication Activate LON communication in the PST Parameter Setting Tool under Settings -> General settings > Communication > SLM configuration > Rear optical LON, where ADE should be set to ON. Add LON Device Types LNT A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with the SLDT IED 670 package version 1p2 r03. LON net address To be able to establish a LON connection with the 670IEDs, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED. Vertical communication Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using explicit messages. Events and indications Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code 44H) with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is changed in the 670IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from terminal. Binary events Binary events are generated in event function blocks EV01 to EV20 in the 670IEDs. The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. table 461 shows the LON addresses to the first input on the event function blocks. The addresses to the other inputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example, input 15 on event block EV17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.

For double indications only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can be used for other type of events at the same event block. As basic, 3 event function blocks EV01-EV03 running with a fast loop time (3 ms) is available in the 670IEDS. The remaining event function blocks EV04-EV09 runs with a loop time on 8 ms and EV10-EV20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals. 16 pulse counter value function blocks PC01 to PC16 and 24 mA input service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the 670IEDs.

811

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 461
Table 461: LON adresses for Event functions
Function block
EV01 EV02 EV03 EV04 EV05 EV06 EV07 EV08 EV09 EV10 EV11 EV12 EV13 EV14 EV15 EV16 EV17 EV18 EV19 EV20

First LON address in function block

1024 1040 1056 1072 1088 1104 1120 1136 1152 1168 1184 1200 1216 1232 1248 1264 1280 1296 1312 1328

Event masks The event mask for each input can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) Under: Settings > General Settings > Monitoring > Event function as.

No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event function block.

812

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Single indication Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event masked in the event function block. Double indications Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is done in the event function block.

Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for the first 8 inputs on an event function block. 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0 01 generates an open event with the read status 1 10 generates a close event with the read status 2 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Analog value All analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from the connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the event function block.

813

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Figure 381: Connection of protection signals for event handling.

Command handling Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport service.

Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message. For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, i.e. the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18and SXSWI 1 to 28; the SPA addresses are according to table 462

Horizontal communication Network variables are used for communication between REx 5xx and 670IEDs. The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.

814

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

The multiple command send function block (MTxx) is used to pack the information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the application by a multiple command function block (CMxx). At horizontal communication the input BOUND on the event function block (MTxx) must be set to 1. There are 10 MT and 60 CM function blocks available. The MT and CM function blocks are connected using Lon Network Tool (LNT 505). This tool also defines the service and addressing on LON. This is an overview description how to configure the network variables for 670IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variables Configure the Network variables according to your application from the LON network Tool. For more details see LNT 505 in Operators manual. The following is an example of how to configure network variables concerning e.g. interlocking between two 670IEDs.

LON

BAY E1

BAY E3

BAY E4

MT07

CM09

CM09

en05000718.vsd

Figure 382: Examples connections between MT and CM function blocks in three terminals.
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT window select Connections -> NVConnections -> New

815

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

en05000719.vsd

Figure 383: The network variables window in LNT.

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either you use the drag-and-drop method where you select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there. Or the traditional menu selection, Configuration -> Download...

816

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

en05000720.vsd

Figure 384: The download configuration window in LNT.

Communication ports The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Main Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
Table 462: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Name
BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD

Function block
SCSWI01 SCSWI02 SCSWI02 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08

SPA address
1 I 5115 1 I 5139 1 I 5161 1 I 5186 1 I 5210 1 I 5234 1 I 5258 1 I 5283

Description
SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command

817

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Name
BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL

Function block
SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SCSWI01 SCSWI02 SCSWI03 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14

SPA address
1 I 5307 1 I 5331 1 I 5355 1 I 5379 1 I 5403 1 I 5427 1 I 5451 1 I 5475 1 I 5499 1 I 5523 1 I 5545 1 I 5571 1 I 5594 1 I 5619 1 I 5643 1 I 5667 1 I 5691 1 I 5715 1 I 5739 1 I 5763 1 I 5787 1 I 5811 1 I 5835 1 I 5859 1 I 5107 1 I 5131 1 I 5153 1 I 5178 1 I 5202 1 I 5226 1 I 5250 1 I 5275 1 I 5299 1 I 5323 1 I 5347 1 I 5371 1 I 5395 1 I 5419

Description
SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command

818

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Name
CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, SELOpen+ILO=10, SELClose+ILO=11, SELOpen+SCO=20, SELClose+SCO=21, SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30, SELClose+ILO+SCO=31 SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc.

Function block
SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SCSWI01

SPA address
1 I 5443 1 I 5467 1 I 5491 1 I 5515 1 I 5537 1 I 5563 1 I 5586 1 I 5611 1 I 5635 1 I 5659 1 I 5683 1 I 5707 1 I 5731 1 I 5755 1 I 5779 1 I 5803 1 I 5827 1 I 5851 1 I 5105

Description
SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command Note: Send select command before operate command

SCSWI02 SCSWI03 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09

1 I 5129 1 I 5151 1 I 5176 1 I 5200 1 I 5224 1 I 5248 1 I 5273 1 I 5297

SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command

819

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Name
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc.

Function block
SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30

SPA address
1 I 5321 1 I 5345 1 I 5369 1 I 5393 1 I 5417 1 I 5441 1 I 5465 1 I 5489 1 I 5513 1 I 5535 1 I 5561 1 I 5584 1 I 5609 1 I 5633 1 I 5657 1 I 5681 1 I 5705 1 I 5729 1 I 5753 1 I 5777 1 I 5801

Description
SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command

820

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Name
SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, ExcOpen+ILO=10, ExcClose+ILO=11, ExcOpen+SCO=20, ExcClose+SCO=21, ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30, ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31 ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc.

Function block
SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SCSWI01

SPA address
1 I 5825 1 I 5849 1 I 5106

Description
SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command Note: Send select command before operate command

SCSWI02 SCSWI02 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17

1 I 5130 1 I 5152 1 I 5177 1 I 5201 1 I 5225 1 I 5249 1 I 5274 1 I 5298 1 I 5322 1 I 5346 1 I 5370 1 I 5394 1 I 5418 1 I 5442 1 I 5466 1 I 5490

SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command

821

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Name
ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value

Function block
SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SXCBR01 SXCBR02 SXCBR03 SXCBR04 SXCBR05 SXCBR06 SXCBR07 SXCBR08 SXCBR09 SXCBR10 SXCBR11

SPA address
1 I 5514 1 I 5536 1 I 5562 1 I 5585 1 I 5610 1 I 5634 1 I 5658 1 I 5682 1 I 5706 1 I 5730 1 I 5754 1 I 5778 1 I 5802 1 I 5826 1 I 5850 2 I 7854 2 I 7866 2 I 7884 2 I 7904 2 I 7923 2 I 7942 2 I 7961 2 I 7980 3I7 3 I 26 3 I 45

Description
SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command SPA parameter for position to be substituted Note: Send the value before Enable SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted

822

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Name
Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Enable

Function block
SXCBR12 SXCBR13 SXCBR14 SXCBR15 SXCBR16 SXCBR17 SXCBR18 SXSWI01 SXSWI02 SXSWI03 SXSWI04 SXSWI05 SXSWI06 SXSWI07 SXSWI08 SXSWI09 SXSWI10 SXSWI11 SXSWI12 SXSWI13 SXSWI14 SXSWI15 SXSWI16 SXSWI17 SXSWI18 SXSWI19 SXSWI20 SXSWI21 SXSWI22 SXSWI23 SXSWI24 SXSWI25 SXSWI26 SXSWI27 SXSWI28 SXCBR01

SPA address
3 I 56 3 I 74 3 I 94 3 I 120 3 I 133 3 I 158 3 I 179 3 I 196 3 I 216 3 I 235 3 I 254 3 I 272 3 I 292 3 I 310 3 I 330 3 I 348 3 I 359 3 I 378 3 I 397 3 I 416 3 I 435 3 I 454 3 I 473 3 I 492 3 I 511 3 I 530 3 I 549 3 I 568 3 I 587 3 I 606 3 I 625 3 I 644 3 I 663 3 I 682 3 I 701 2 I 7855

Description
SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for substitute enable command Note: Send the Value before Enable

823

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Name
Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable

Function block
SXCBR02 SXCBR03 SXCBR04 SXCBR05 SXCBR06 SXCBR07 SXCBR08 SXCBR09 SXCBR10 SXCBR11 SXCBR12 SXCBR13 SXCBR14 SXCBR15 SXCBR16 SXCBR17 SXCBR18 SXSWI01 SXSWI02 SXSWI03 SXSWI04 SXSWI05

SPA address
2 I 7865 2 I 7885 2 I 7903 2 I 7924 2 I 7941 2 I 7962 2 I 7979 3I8 3 I 25 3 I 46 3 I 55 3 I 75 3 I 93 3 I 121 3 I 132 3 I 159 3 I 178 3 I 197 3 I 215 3 I 234 3 I 252 3 I 271

Description
SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command

824

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Name
Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable

Function block
SXSWI06 SXSWI07 SXSWI08 SXSWI09 SXSWI10 SXSWI11 SXSWI12 SXSWI13 SXSWI14 SXSWI15 SXSWI16 SXSWI17 SXSWI18 SXSWI19 SXSWI20 SXSWI21 SXSWI22 SXSWI23 SXSWI24 SXSWI25 SXSWI26 SXSWI27

SPA address
3 I 290 3 I 309 3 I 328 3 I 347 3 I 360 3I 379 3 I 398 3 I 417 3 I 436 3 I 455 3 I 474 3 I 493 3 I 512 3 I 531 3 I 550 3 I 569 3 I 588 3 I 607 3 I 626 3 I 645 3 I 664 3 I 683

Description
SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command

825

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Name
Sub Enable Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block

Function block
SXSWI28 SXCBR01 SXCBR02 SXCBR03 SXCBR04 SXCBR05 SXCBR06 SXCBR07 SXCBR08 SXCBR09 SXCBR10 SXCBR11 SXCBR12 SXCBR13 SXCBR14 SXCBR15 SXCBR16 SXCBR17 SXCBR18 SXSWI01 SXSWI02 SXSWI03 SXSWI04 SXSWI05 SXSWI06 SXSWI07 SXSWI08 SXSWI09 SXSWI10 SXSWI11 SXSWI12 SXSWI13 SXSWI14 SXSWI15 SXSWI16 SXSWI17 SXSWI18

SPA address
3 I 702 2 I 7853 2 I 7864 2 I 7883 2 I 7905 2 I 7922 2 I 7943 2 I 7960 2 I 7981 3I6 3 I 27 3 I 44 3 I 57 3 I 73 3 I 92 3 I 122 3 I 131 3 I 160 3 I 177 3 I 198 3 I 214 3 I 236 3 I 253 3 I 273 3 I 291 3 I 311 3 I 329 3 I 349 3 I 358 3 I 377 3 I 396 3 I 415 3 I 434 3 I 453 3 I 472 3 I 491 3 I 510

Description
SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command

826

LON communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Name
Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block

Function block
SXSWI19 SXSWI20 SXSWI21 SXSWI22 SXSWI23 SXSWI24 SXSWI25 SXSWI26 SXSWI27 SXSWI28

SPA address
3 I 529 3 I 548 3 I 567 3 I 586 3 I 605 3 I 624 3 I 643 3 I 662 3 I 681 3 I 700

Description
SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command

3.3

Setting parameters
Table 463: General settings for the NVLON (NV---) function
Parameter
Operation

Range
Off On

Step
-

Default
Off

Unit
-

Description
Operation

Table 464: General settings for the LON (ADE1-) function

Parameter
Operation TimerClass

Range
Off On Slow Normal Fast

Step
-

Default
Off Slow

Unit
-

Description
Operation Timer class

3.4

Technical data
Table 465: LON communication protocol
Function
Protocol Communication speed

Value
LON 1.25 Mbit/s

827

SPA communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

4
4.1

SPA communication protocol

Introduction
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section 1.5 "Related documents". It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.

4.2

Principle of operation
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. Recommended baud rate for each type of terminal will be found in the Technical reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.

Introduction of SPA protocol The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (e.g. for event information) or only on demand.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical "1".

SPA protocol The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an IED 670 with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MI03-MI16) are found in table466
Table 466: SPA addresses for the MIM (MI03-MI16) function
Function block
MI03-CH1 MI03-CH2 MI03-CH3 MI03-CH4 MI03-CH5 MI03-CH6 MI04-CH1 MI04-CH2 MI04-CH3 MI04-CH4 MI04-CH5 MI04-CH6

SPA address
4-O-6508 4-O-6511 4-O-6512 4-O-6515 4-O-6516 4-O-6519 4-O-6527 4-O-6530 4-O-6531 4-O-6534 4-O-6535 4-O-6538

828

SPA communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Function block
MI05-CH1 MI05-CH2 MI05-CH3 MI05-CH4 MI05-CH5 MI05-CH6 MI06-CH1 MI06-CH2 MI06-CH3 MI06-CH4 MI06-CH5 MI06-CH6 MI07-CH1 MI07-CH2 MI07-CH3 MI07-CH4 MI07-CH5 MI07-CH6 MI08-CH1 MI08-CH2 MI08-CH3 MI08-CH4 MI08-CH5 MI08-CH6 MI09-CH1 MI09-CH2 MI09-CH3 MI09-CH4 MI09-CH5 MI09-CH6 MI10-CH1 MI10-CH2 MI10-CH3 MI10-CH4 MI10-CH5 MI10-CH6 MI11-CH1 MI11-CH2 MI11-CH3

SPA address
4-O-6546 4-O-6549 4-O-6550 4-O-6553 4-O-6554 4-O-6557 4-O-6565 4-O-6568 4-O-6569 4-O-6572 4-O-6573 4-O-6576 4-O-6584 4-O-6587 4-O-6588 4-O-6591 4-O-6592 4-O-6595 4-O-6603 4-O-6606 4-O-6607 4-O-6610 4-O-6611 4-O-6614 4-O-6622 4-O-6625 4-O-6626 4-O-6629 4-O-6630 4-O-6633 4-O-6641 4-O-6644 4-O-6645 4-O-6648 4-O-6649 4-O-6652 4-O-6660 4-O-6663 4-O-6664

829

SPA communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Function block
MI11-CH4 MI11-CH5 MI11-CH6 MI12-CH1 MI12-CH2 MI12-CH3 MI12-CH4 MI12-CH5 MI12-CH6 MI13-CH1 MI13-CH2 MI13-CH3 MI13-CH4 MI13-CH5 MI13-CH6 MI14-CH1 MI14-CH2 MI14-CH3 MI14-CH4 MI14-CH5 MI14-CH6 MI15-CH1 MI15-CH2 MI15-CH3 MI15-CH4 MI15-CH5 MI15-CH6 MI16-CH1 MI16-CH2 MI16-CH3 MI16-CH4 MI16-CH5 MI16-CH6

SPA address
4-O-6667 4-O-6668 4-O-6671 4-O-6679 4-O-6682 4-O-6683 4-O-6686 4-O-6687 4-O-6690 4-O-6698 4-O-6701 4-O-6702 4-O-6705 4-O-6706 4-O-6709 4-O-6717 4-O-6720 4-O-6721 4-O-6724 4-O-6725 4-O-6728 4-O-6736 4-O-6739 4-O-6740 4-O-6743 4-O-6744 4-O-6747 4-O-6755 4-O-6758 4-O-6759 4-O-6762 4-O-6763 4-O-6766

The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PC01 PC16 are found in table 467

830

SPA communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 467: SPA addresses for the PCGGIO (PC01-PC16 function)

Function block
PC01 PC02 PC03 PC04 PC05 PC06 PC07 PC08 PC09 PC10 PC11 PC12 PC13 PC14 PC15 PC16

SPA address CNT_VAL

3-O-5834 3-O-5840 3-O-5846 3-O-5852 3-O-5858 3-O-5864 3-O-5870 3-O-5876 3-O-5882 3-O-5888 3-O-5894 3-O-5900 3-O-5906 3-O-5912 3-O-5918 3-O-5924

SPA address NEW_VAL

3-O-5833 3-O-5839 3-O-5845 3-O-5851 3-O-5857 3-O-5863 3-O-5869 3-O-5875 3-O-5881 3-O-5887 3-O-5893 3-O-5899 3-O-5905 3-O-5911 3-O-5917 3-O-5923

I/O modules To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block are used, i.e. the addresses for BI1 BI16. The SPA addresses are found in a separate document, refer to section 1.5 "Related documents". Single command function The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used.

The single command function consists of three function blocks; CD01 CD03 for 16 binary output signals each. The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. The SPA addresses for the single command function (CD) are shown in Table 3. For the single command function block, CD01 to CD03, the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the CD02 function block has the 5O533 address. The SPA addresses for the single command functions CD01 CD03 are found in table 468

831

SPA communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 468: SPA addresses for the SingleCmd (CD01-CD03) function

Function block
CD01-Cmd1 CD01-Cmd2 CD01-Cmd3 CD01-Cmd4 CD01-Cmd5 CD01-Cmd6 CD01-Cmd7 CD01-Cmd8 CD01-Cmd9 CD01-Cmd10 CD01-Cmd11 CD01-Cmd12 CD01-Cmdt13 CD01-Cmd14 CD01-Cmd15 CD01-Cmd16 CD02-Cmd1 CD02-Cmd2 CD02-Cmdt3 CD02-Cmd4 CD02-Cmd5 CD02-Cmd6 CD02-Cmd7 CD02-Cmd8 CD02-Cmd9 CD02-Cmd10 CD02-Cmd11 CD02-Cmd12 CD02-Cmd13 CD02-Cmd14 CD02-Cmd15 CD02-Cmd16 CD03-Cmd1 CD03-Cmd2 CD03-Cmd3 CD03-Cmd4 CD03-Cmd5 CD03-Cmd6

SPA address CMD Input

4-S-4639 4-S-4640 4-S-4641 4-S-4642 4-S-4643 4-S-4644 4-S-4645 4-S-4646 4-S-4647 4-S-4648 4-S-4649 4-S-4650 4-S-4651 4-S-4652 4-S-4653 4-S-4654 4-S-4672 4-S-4673 4-S-4674 4-S-4675 4-S-4676 4-S-4677 4-S-4678 4-S-4679 4-S-4680 4-S-4681 4-S-4682 4-S-4683 4-S-4684 4-S-4685 4-S-4686 4-S-4687 4-S-4705 4-S-4706 4-S-4707 4-S-4708 4-S-4709 4-S-4710

SPA address CMD output

5-O-511 5-O-512 5-O-513 5-O-514 5-O-515 5-O-516 5-O-517 5-O-518 5-O-519 5-O-520 5-O-521 5-O-522 5-O-523 5-O-524 5-O-525 5-O-526 5-O-527 5-O-528 5-O-529 5-O-530 5-O-531 5-O-532 5-O-533 5-O-534 5-O-535 5-O-536 5-O-537 5-O-538 5-O-539 5-O-540 5-O-541 5-O-542 5-O-543 5-O-544 5-O-545 5-O-546 5-O-547 5-O-548

832

SPA communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Function block
CD03-Cmd7 CD03-Cmd8 CD03-Cmd9 CD03-Cmd10 CD03-Cmd11 CD03-Cmd12 CD03-Cmd13 CD03-Cmd14 CD03-Cmd15 CD03-Cmd16

SPA address CMD Input

4-S-4711 4-S-4712 4-S-4713 4-S-4714 4-S-4715 4-S-4716 4-S-4717 4-S-4718 4-S-4719 4-S-4720

SPA address CMD output

5-O-549 5-O-550 5-O-551 5-O-552 5-O-553 5-O-554 5-O-555 5-O-556 5-O-557 5-O-558

Table 468 SPA addresses for the signals on the single command functions Figure 385 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection terminal for control of a circuit breaker. A pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal normally performs this type of command control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in CD01 are shown in table 468

Figure 385: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker.
The MODE input defines if the output signals from CD01 shall be off, steady or pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting > General Settings > Control > Commands > Single Command.

833

SPA communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Event function This event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (e.g. operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. All must The internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the terminal, Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51). The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting > General Setting > Monitoring > Event Function as. No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 469

834

SPA communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 469: Status and event codes

Single indication1) Event block
EV01 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 22O1 22O2 22O3 22O4 22O5 22O6 22O7 22O8 22O9 22O10 22O11 22O12 22O13 22O14 22O15 22O16 22E33 22E35 22E37 22E39 22E41 22E43 22E45 22E47 22E49 22E51 22E53 22E55 22E57 22E59 22E61 22E63 22E32 22E34 22E36 22E38 22E40 22E42 22E44 22E46 22E48 22E50 22E52 22E54 22E56 22E58 22E60 22E62 22E0 22E4 22E8 22E12 22E16 22E20 22E24 22E28 22E1 22E5 22E9 22E13 22E17 22E21 22E25 22E29 22E2 22E6 22E10 22E14 22E18 22E22 22E26 22E30 22E3 22E7 22E11 22E15 22E19 22E23 22E27 22E31 -

Double indication Intermediate 00 Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined 11

Status

Set event

Reset event

EV02 EV03 EV20

230.. 240.. 410..

23E.. 24E.. 41E..

23E.. 24E.. 41E..

23E.. 24E.. 41E..

23E.. 23E.. 41E..

23E.. 24E.. 41E..

23E.. 24E.. 41E..

1) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF.
Connection of signals as events Signals coming from different protection and control functions and shall be sent as events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Event function block according to figure 386

835

SPA communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Figure 386: Connection of protection signals for event handling.

Note that corresponding Event mask must be set to an applicable value via the Parameter Setting Tool (PST), under: Settings > General Settings > Monitoring > Event Function as. No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

4.2.1

Communication ports The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber.

836

SPA communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module. The procedure to set the transfer rate and slave number can be found in the Installation and commissioning manual for respective IED.

4.3

Design
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the station, using the rear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is: Optical fibres Opto/electrical converter for the PC PC

When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardware is needed plus telephone modems. The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM 600. When communicating between the LHMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a front-connection cable.

4.4

Setting parameters
Table 470: General settings for the SPA (SPA1-) function
Parameter
SlaveAddress BaudRate

Range
1 - 899 300 Bd 1200 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 38400 Bd 57600 Bd

Step
1 -

Default
30 9600 Bd

Unit
-

Description
Slave address Baudrate on serial line

Table 471: General settings for the SPAviaSLM (SPA1-) function

Parameter
SlaveAddress BaudRate

Range
1 - 899 300 Bd 1200 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 38400 Bd

Step
1 -

Default
30 9600 Bd

Unit
-

Description
Slave address Baudrate on serial line

837

SPA communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 472: General settings for the SPAviaLON (SPA4-) function

Parameter
Operation SlaveAddress

Range
Off On 1 - 899

Step
1

Default
Off 30

Unit
-

Description
Operation Slave address

4.5

Technical data
Table 473: SPA communication protocol
Function
Protocol Communication speed Slave number

Value
SPA 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd 1 to 899

838

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

5
5.1

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Introduction
The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection terminal communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

5.2
5.2.1

Principle of operation
General The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages. Introduction of IEC 608705103 protocol The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in IED 670 consists of these functions:
Event handling Report of analog service values (measurements) Fault location Command handling - Autorecloser ON/OFF - Teleprotection ON/OFF - Protection ON/OFF - LED reset - Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups) File transfer (disturbance files) Time synchronization

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.

IEC 60870-5-103 The tables in the following sections specify the information types supported by the IED 670 products with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the protection and control IED.

839

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Commands in control direction Terminal commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD Command block in control direction with defined terminal signals.

Number of instances: 1 Command block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no
19 23 24 25 26

Message
LED Reset Activate setting group 1 Activate setting group 2 Activate setting group 3 Activate setting group 4

Supported
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no.
16 17 18

Message
Auto-recloser on/off Teleprotection on/off Protection on/off

Supported
Yes Yes Yes

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.

Number of instances: 4 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 1 - 4. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.

840

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Info. no.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Message
Output signal 01 Output signal 02 Output signal 03 Output signal 04 Output signal 05 Output signal 06 Output signal 07 Output signal 08

Supported
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Status Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined terminal functions.

Number of instances: 1 Indication block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signals.
Info. no.
19 23 24 25 26 21

Message
LED reset Setting group 1 active Setting group 2 active Setting group 3 active Setting group 4 active Test mode active

Supported
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.

Number of instances: 20 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 5 - 24. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each input signal. Default values are defined in range 1 - 8

841

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Info. no.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Message
Input signal 01 Input signal 02 Input signal 03 Input signal 04 Input signal 05 Input signal 06 Input signal 07 Input signal 08

Supported
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103Superv Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for output signals.
Info. no.
32 33 37 38 46 47

Message
Measurand supervision I Measurand supervision U I>>back-up operation VT fuse failure Group warning Group alarm

Supported
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.
Info. no.
51 52

Message
Earth fault forward Earth fault reverse

Supported
Yes Yes

842

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for distance protection function. FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal. Number of instances: 1
Info. no.
64 65 66 67 84 69 70 71 68 74 75 78 79 80 81 82 76 77 73

Message
Start L1 Start L2 Start L3 Start IN General start Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 General trip Fault forward/line Fault reverse/busbar Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Signal transmitted Signal received SCL, Fault location in ohm

Supported
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for linediff, transformerdiff, overcurrent and earthfault protection functions. FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal. Number of instances: 1

843

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Info. no.
64 65 66 67 84 69 70 71 68 74 75 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93

Message
Start L1 Start L2 Start L3 Start IN General start Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 General trip Fault forward/line Fault reverse/busbar Breaker failure Trip measuring system L1 Trip measuring system L2 Trip measuring system L3 Trip measuring system N Over current trip I> Over current trip I>> Earth fault trip IN> Earth fault trip IN>>

Supported
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.
Info. no.
16 128 130

Message
Autorecloser active CB on by Autorecloser Autorecloser blocked

Supported
Yes Yes Yes

Measurands Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXU.

844

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Measurands in public range, I103Meas Number of instances: 1

The IED will report all valid measuring types depending on connected signals. Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value. Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
Info. no.
148 144, 145, 148 148 147 148 148 148 145, 146 147 146, 148 146, 148 148

Message
IL1 IL2 IL3 IN, Neutral current UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1-UL2 UN, Neutral voltage P, active power Q, reactive power f, frequency

Supported
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr Number of instances: 3

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 25 27. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each block. Default value 1.
Info. no.
-

Message
Meas1 Meas2 Meas3 Meas4 Meas5 Meas6 Meas7 Meas8 Meas9

Supported
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

845

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Disturbance recordings The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) defined in the standard.

Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified. Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with: IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block DRA1 IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block DRA1 IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block DRA1 IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block DRA1 VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block DRA1

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range 64 to 95. Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.

Disturbance Upload All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder will be reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be reported to the master again. When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances will be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. I.e. when a disturbance is deleted (by other client e.g. SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance. Deviations from the standard Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in Rex67x. This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard. ASDU23 In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether: Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted

846

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test mode. Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than start/pick-up

The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is always set (hard coded) to:
TP TM OTEV Recorded fault with trip. [1] Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0] Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. In Rex67x FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance. ASDU26 When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), the protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number should indicate fault number in the power system, i.e. a fault in the power system with several trip and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN should be incremented). NOF is in Rex67x, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number. To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on the disturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whatever he connects to the corresponding input.
Interoperability, physical layer
Supported
Electrical Interface EIA RS-485 number of loads Optical interface glass fibre plastic fibre Transmission speed 96000 bit/s 19200 bit/s Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

847

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Supported
Link Layer DFC-bit used Connectors connector F-SMA connector BFOC/2.5 No Yes Yes

Interoperability, application layer

Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction ASDU 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 Time-tagged message Time-tagged message with rel. time Measurands I Time-tagged message with rel. time Identification Time synchronization End of general interrogation Measurands II Generic data Generic identification List of recorded disturbances Ready for transm. of disturbance data Ready for transm. of a channel Ready for transm of tags Transmission of tags Transmission fo disturbance data End of transmission Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction ASDU 6 7 10 20 21 24 25 Time synchronization General interrogation Generic data General command Generic command Order for disturbance data transmission Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes

Selection of basic application functions

848

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Supported
Test mode Blocking of monitoring direction Disturbance data Private data Generic services No Yes Yes Yes No

5.2.2

Communication ports The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber.
The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

5.3

Function block
ICMAI103IEDCMD 19-LEDRS 23-GRP1 24-GRP2 25-GRP3 26-GRP4 en05000689.vsd

BLOCK

ICMDI103CMD BLOCK 16-AR 17-DIFF 18-PROT en05000684.vsd

BLOCK

ICM1I103UserCMD OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 en05000693.vsd

849

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

IEV1I103IED BLOCK 19_LEDRS 23_GRP1 24_GRP2 25_GRP3 26_GRP4 21_TESTM en05000688.vsd

IS01I103UsrDef BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 en05000694.vsd

ISU1I103Superv BLOCK 32_MEASI 33_MEASU 37_IBKUP 38_VTFF 46_GRWA 47_GRAL en05000692.vsd

ISEFI103EF BLOCK 51_EFFW 52_EFREV en05000685.vsd

850

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

IZ01I103FltDis BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 78_ZONE1 79_ZONE2 80_ZONE3 81_ZONE4 82_ZONE5 76_TRANS 77_RECEV 73_SCL FLTLOC ARINPROG en05000686.vsd

IFL1I103FltStd BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 85_BFP 86_MTRL1 87_MTRL2 88_MTRL3 89_MTRN 90_IOC 91_IOC 92_IEF 93_IEF ARINPROG en05000687.vsd

IAR1I103AR BLOCK 16_ARACT 128_CBON 130_UNSU en05000683.vsd

851

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

IMM1I103Meas BLOCK I_A I_B I_C IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1L2 UN P Q F FUNTYPE en05000690_ansi.vsd

IMU1I103MeasUsr BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 en05000691.vsd

5.4

Input and output signals

Table 474: Input signals for the I103AR (IAR1-) function block
Signal
BLOCK 16_ARACT 128_CBON 130_UNSU

Description
Block of status reporting Information number 16, auto-recloser active Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-recloser Information number 130, unsuccessful reclosing

Table 475: Input signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block
Signal
BLOCK

Description
Block of commands

Table 476: Input signals for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function block
Signal
BLOCK

Description
Block of commands

852

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 477: Input signals for the I103IED (IEV1-) function block
Signal
BLOCK 19_LEDRS 23_GRP1 24_GRP2 25_GRP3 26_GRP4 21_TESTM

Description
Block of status reporting Information number 19, reset LEDs Information number 23, setting group 1 is active Information number 24, setting group 2 is active Information number 25, setting group 3 is active Information number 26, setting group 4 is active Information number 21, test mode is active

Table 478: Input signals for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function block
Signal
BLOCK

Description
Block of commands

Table 479: Input signals for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8

Description
Block of status reporting Binary signal Input 1 Binary signal input 2 Binary signal input 3 Binary signal input 4 Binary signal input 5 Binary signal input 6 Binary signal input 7 Binary signal input 8

Table 480: Input signals for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function block
Signal
BLOCK 32_MEASI 33_MEASU 37_IBKUP 38_VTFF 46_GRWA 47_GRAL

Description
Block of status reporting Information number 32, measurand supervision of I Information number 33, measurand supervision of U Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection Information number 38, fuse failure VT Information number 46, group warning Information number 47, group alarm

853

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 481: Input signals for the I103EF (ISEF-) function block
Signal
BLOCK 51_EFFW 52_EFREV

Description
Block of status reporting Information number 51, earth-fault forward Information number 52, earth-fault reverse

Table 482: Input signals for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 78_ZONE1 79_ZONE2 80_ZONE3 81_ZONE4 82_ZONE5 76_TRANS 77_RECEV 73_SCL FLTLOC ARINPROG

Description
Block of status reporting Information number 64, start phase L1 Information number 65, start phase L2 Information number 66, start phase L3 Information number 67, start residual current IN Information number 84, start general Information number 69, trip phase L1 Information number 70, trip phase L2 Information number 71, trip phase L3 Information number 68, trip general Information number 74, forward/line Information number 75, reverse/bus Information number 78, zone 1 Information number 79, zone 2 Information number 79, zone 3 Information number 79, zone 4 Information number 79, zone 5 Information number 76, signal transmitted Information number 77, signal recevied Information number 73, fault location in ohm Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE) Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

Table 483: Input signals for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function block
Signal
BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN

Description
Block of status reporting Information number 64, start phase L1 Information number 65, start phase L2 Information number 66, start phase L3 Information number 67, start residual curent IN

854

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Signal
84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 85_BFP 86_MTRL1 87_MTRL2 88_MTRL3 89_MTRN 90_IOC 91_IOC 92_IEF 93_IEF ARINPROG

Description
Information number 84, start general Information number 69, trip phase L1 Information number 70, trip phase L2 Information number 71, trip phase L3 Information number 68, trip general Information number 74, forward/line Information number 75, reverse/bus Information number 85, breaker failure Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase L2 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase L3 Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N Information number 90, over current trip, stage low Information number 91, over current trip, stage high Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

Table 484: Input signals for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function block
Signal
BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9

Description
Block of service value reporting Service value for measurement on input 1 Service value for measurement on input 2 Service value for measurement on input 3 Service value for measurement on input 4 Service value for measurement on input 5 Service value for measurement on input 6 Service value for measurement on input 7 Service value for measurement on input 8 Service value for measurement on input 9

855

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 485: Input signals for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function block
Signal
BLOCK I_A I_B I_C IN V_A V_B V_C V_AB V_N P Q F

Description
Block of service value reporting Service value for current phase A Service value for current phase B Service value for current phase C Service value for residual current IN Service value for voltage phase A Service value for voltage phase B Service value for voltage phase C Service value for voltage phase-phase A-B Service value for residual voltage VN Service value for active power Service value for reactive power Service value for system frequency

Table 486: Output signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block
Signal
19-LEDRS 23-GRP1 24-GRP2 25-GRP3 26-GRP4

Description
Information number 19, reset LEDs Information number 23, activate setting group 1 Information number 24, activate setting group 2 Information number 25, activate setting group 3 Information number 26, activate setting group 4

Table 487: Output signals for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function block
Signal
16-AR 17-DIFF 18-PROT

Description
Information number 16, block of autorecloser Information number 17, block of differential protection Information number 18, block of protection

Table 488: Output signals for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function block
Signal
OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3

Description
Command output 1 Command output 2 Command output 3

856

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Signal
OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8

Description
Command output 4 Command output 5 Command output 6 Command output 7 Command output 8

5.5

Setting parameters
Table 489: General settings for the I103SLM (IECC-) function
Parameter
SlaveAddress BaudRate RevPolarity CycMeasRepTime

Range
0 - 255 9600 Bd 19200 Bd Off On 1.0 - 3600.0

Step
1 0.1

Default
30 9600 Bd On 5.0

Unit
-

Description
Slave address Baudrate on serial line Invert polarity Cyclic reporting time of measurments

Table 490: General settings for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function

Parameter
FUNTYPE

Range
1 - 255

Step
1

Default
255

Unit
FunT

Description
Function type (1-255)

Table 491: General settings for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function

Parameter
FUNTYPE

Range
1 - 255

Step
1

Default
1

Unit
FunT

Description
Function type (1-255)

Table 492: General settings for the I103IED (IEV1-) function

Parameter
FUNTYPE

Range
1 - 255

Step
1

Default
1

Unit
FunT

Description
Function type (1-255)

857

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 493: General settings for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function

Parameter
PULSEMOD T FUNTYPE INFNO_1 INFNO_2 INFNO_3 INFNO_4 INFNO_5 INFNO_6 INFNO_7 INFNO_8

Range
0-1 0.200 - 60.000 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255

Step
1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Default
1 0.400 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Unit
Mode s FunT InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo

Description
Pulse mode 0=Steady, 1=Pulsed Pulse length Function type (1-255) Information number for output 1 (1-255) Information number for output 2 (1-255) Information number for output 3 (1-255) Information number for output 4 (1-255) Information number for output 5 (1-255) Information number for output 6 (1-255) Information number for output 7 (1-255) Information number for output 8 (1-255)

Table 494: General settings for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function

Parameter
FUNTYPE INFNO_1 INFNO_2 INFNO_3 INFNO_4 INFNO_5 INFNO_6 INFNO_7 INFNO_8

Range
1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255

Step
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Default
5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Unit
FunT InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo

Description
Function type (1-255) Information number for binary input 1 (1-255) Information number for binary input 2 (1-255) Information number for binary input 3 (1-255) Information number for binary input 4 (1-255) Information number for binary input 5 (1-255) Information number for binary input 6 (1-255) Information number for binary input 7 (1-255) Information number for binary input 8 (1-255)

858

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 495: General settings for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function

Parameter
FUNTYPE

Range
1 - 255

Step
1

Default
1

Unit
FunT

Description
Function type (1-255)

Table 496: General settings for the I103EF (ISEF-) function

Parameter
FUNTYPE

Range
1 - 255

Step
1

Default
160

Unit
FunT

Description
Function type (1-255)

Table 497: General settings for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function

Parameter
FUNTYPE

Range
1 - 255

Step
1

Default
128

Unit
FunT

Description
Function type (1-255)

Table 498: General settings for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function

Parameter
FUNTYPE

Range
1 - 255

Step
1

Default
1

Unit
FunT

Description
Function type (1-255)

Table 499: General settings for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function

Parameter
FUNTYPE INFNO RatedMeasur1 RatedMeasur2 RatedMeasur3 RatedMeasur4 RatedMeasur5 RatedMeasur6 RatedMeasur7 RatedMeasur8 RatedMeasur9

Range
1 - 255 1 - 255 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00

Step
1 1 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05

Default
25 1 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00 1000.00

Unit
FunT InfNo -

Description
Function type (1-255) Information number for measurands (1-255) Rated value for measurement on input 1 Rated value for measurement on input 2 Rated value for measurement on input 3 Rated value for measurement on input 4 Rated value for measurement on input 5 Rated value for measurement on input 6 Rated value for measurement on input 7 Rated value for measurement on input 8 Rated value for measurement on input 9

859

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 500: Basic general settings for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function
Parameter
RatedI_A RatedI_B RatedI_C RatedI_N RatedV_A RatedV_B RatedV_C RatedV_AB RatedV_N RatedP RatedQ RatedF FUNTYPE

Range
1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.00 - 2000.00 0.00 - 2000.00 50.0 - 60.0 1 - 255

Step
1 1 1 1 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 10.0 1

Default
3000 3000 3000 3000 230.00 230.00 230.00 400.00 230.00 1200.00 1200.00 50.0 1

Unit
A A A A kV kV kV kV kV MW MVA Hz FunT

Description
Rated current phase A Rated current phase B Rated current phase C Rated residual current IN Rated voltage for phase A Rated voltage for phase B Rated voltage for phase C Rated voltage for phase-phase A-B Rated residual voltage VN Rated value for active power Rated value for reactive power Rated system frequency Function type (1-255)

5.6

Technical data
Table 501: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function
Protocol Communication speed

Value
IEC 60870-5-103 9600, 19200 Bd

860

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

6
6.1

Automation bits (AUBI)

Introduction
The AUBI function block (or the automation bits function block) is used within the CAP tool in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the DNP3.0 protocol. In this respect, this function block plays the same role as the BinGOOSEReceive (for IEC61850) or MultiCmdReceive (for LON).

6.2

Principle of operation
The AUBI function block have 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate a AUBI output point you send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give you 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart. There is a BLOCK inputs signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that upon activation of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set on 0. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receiving data from the DNP master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP master again, momentarily. For the AUBI, the PSTO input determines the operator place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs.

861

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

6.3

Function block
ABI1AutoBits BLOCK PSTO NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 NAME17 NAME18 NAME19 NAME20 NAME21 NAME22 NAME23 NAME24 NAME25 NAME26 NAME27 NAME28 NAME29 NAME30 NAME31 NAME32 CMDBIT1 CMDBIT2 CMDBIT3 CMDBIT4 CMDBIT5 CMDBIT6 CMDBIT7 CMDBIT8 CMDBIT9 CMDBIT10 CMDBIT11 CMDBIT12 CMDBIT13 CMDBIT14 CMDBIT15 CMDBIT16 CMDBIT17 CMDBIT18 CMDBIT19 CMDBIT20 CMDBIT21 CMDBIT22 CMDBIT23 CMDBIT24 CMDBIT25 CMDBIT26 CMDBIT27 CMDBIT28 CMDBIT29 CMDBIT30 CMDBIT31 CMDBIT32

en06000504.vsd

Figure 387: AUBI function block

6.4

Input and output signals

Table 502: Input signals for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function block
Signal
BLOCK PSTO

Description
Block of function Operator place selection

862

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 503: Output signals for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function block
Signal
CMDBIT1 CMDBIT2 CMDBIT3 CMDBIT4 CMDBIT5 CMDBIT6 CMDBIT7 CMDBIT8 CMDBIT9 CMDBIT10 CMDBIT11 CMDBIT12 CMDBIT13 CMDBIT14 CMDBIT15 CMDBIT16 CMDBIT17 CMDBIT18 CMDBIT19 CMDBIT20 CMDBIT21 CMDBIT22 CMDBIT23 CMDBIT24 CMDBIT25 CMDBIT26 CMDBIT27 CMDBIT28 CMDBIT29 CMDBIT30 CMDBIT31 CMDBIT32

Description
Command out bit 1 Command out bit 2 Command out bit 3 Command out bit 4 Command out bit 5 Command out bit 6 Command out bit 7 Command out bit 8 Command out bit 9 Command out bit 10 Command out bit 11 Command out bit 12 Command out bit 13 Command out bit 14 Command out bit 15 Command out bit 16 Command out bit 17 Command out bit 18 Command out bit 19 Command out bit 20 Command out bit 21 Command out bit 22 Command out bit 23 Command out bit 24 Command out bit 25 Command out bit 26 Command out bit 27 Command out bit 28 Command out bit 29 Command out bit 30 Command out bit 31 Command out bit 32

863

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

6.5

Setting parameters
Table 504: Basic general settings for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function
Parameter
Operation

Range
Disabled Enabled

Step
-

Default
Disabled

Unit
-

Description
Disable/Enable Operation

Table 505: Basic general settings for the DNP3 (DNP--) function
Parameter
Operation

Range
Disabled ON

Step
-

Default
Off

Unit
-

Description
Disable/Enable Operation

Table 506: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function
Parameter
Operation BaudRate

Range
Disabled Serial-Mode 300 Bd 600 Bd 1200 Bd 2400 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd Four-wire Two-wire

Step
-

Default
Off 9600 Bd

Unit
-

Description
Operation mode Baud-rate for serial port

WireMode

Two-wire

RS485 wire mode

Table 507: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function
Parameter
DLinkConfirm

Range
Never Sometimes Always 0.000 - 60.000 0 - 255 0.000 - 60.000 5-8 1-2 No Even Odd

Step
-

Default
Never

Unit
-

Description
Data-link confirm

tDLinkTimeout DLinkRetries tRxToTxMinDel DataBits StopBits Parity

0.001 1 0.001 1 1 -

2.000 3 0.000 8 1 Even

s s -

Data-link confirm timeout in s Data-link maximum retries Rx to Tx minimum delay in s Data bits Stop bits Parity

864

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Parameter
RTSEnable tRTSWarmUp tRTSWarmDown tBackOffDelay tMaxRndDelBkOf

Range
No Yes 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

Default
No 0.000 0.000 0.050 0.100

Unit
s s s s

Description
RTS enable RTS warm-up in s RTS warm-down in s RS485 back-off delay in s RS485 maximum back-off random delay in s

Table 508: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch2TCPIP (DNC2-) function
Parameter
Operation

Range
Disabled TCP/IP UDP-Only 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 0 - 65535

Step
-

Default
Off

Unit
-

Description
Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort UDPPortAccData UDPPortInitNUL UDPPortCliMast

1 1 1 1

20000 20000 20000 0

TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP portfor initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master

Table 509: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch3TCPIP (DNC3-) function
Parameter
Operation

Range
Disabled TCP/IP UDP-Only 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 0 - 65535

Step
-

Default
Off

Unit
-

Description
Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort UDPPortAccData UDPPortInitNUL UDPPortCliMast

1 1 1 1

20000 20000 20000 0

TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP port for initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master

865

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 510: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch4TCPIP (DNC4-) function
Parameter
Operation

Range
Disabled TCP/IP UDP-Only 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 0 - 65535

Step
-

Default
Off

Unit
-

Description
Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort UDPPortAccData UDPPortInitNUL UDPPortCliMast

1 1 1 1

20000 20000 20000 0

TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP port for initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master

Table 511: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch5TCPIP (DNC5-) function
Parameter
Operation

Range
Disabled TCP/IP UDP-Only 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 0 - 65535

Step
-

Default
Off

Unit
-

Description
Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort UDPPortAccData UDPPortInitNUL UDPPortCliMast

1 1 1 1

20000 20000 20000 0

TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP port for initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master

Table 512: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function
Parameter
Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar

Range
Disabled ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTime 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTime 1:DIChWithoutTime 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTime

Step
1 1 -

Default
Off 1 1 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTime

Unit
-

Description
Disable/Enable Operation Slave address Master address Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation

Obj4DefVar

3:DIChWithRelTime

Object 4, default variation

866

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Parameter
Obj10DefVar Obj20DefVar

Range
1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF

Step
-

Default
2:BOStatus 5:BinCnt32WoutF

Unit
-

Description
Object 10, default variation Object 20, default variation

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF -

1:BinCnt32EvWout T

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 513: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function
Parameter
ValMasterAddr AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes

Range
No Yes No Yes 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes

Step
0.01 -

Default
Yes Yes 10.00 Yes

Unit
s -

Description
Validate source (master) address Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line

ConfMultFrag UREnable URSendOnline

Yes Yes No

867

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Parameter
UREvClassMask

Range
Disabled Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10

Step
-

Default
Off

Unit
-

Description
Unsolicited response, event class mask

UROfflineRetry

Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout

tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1

0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100

0.01 0.01 1

5.00 30.00 5

s s -

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

DelOldBufFull tSynchTimeout

No Yes 1 - 3600

No 1800

TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout

No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0

0.1

Yes No No Yes 30.0

868

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 514: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast3TCPIP (DNM3-) function
Parameter
Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar

Range
Disabled ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTime 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTime 1:DIChWithoutTime 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTime

Step
1 1 1 1 -

Default
Off 1 1 Yes 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTime

Unit
-

Description
Disable/Enable Operation Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation

Obj4DefVar

3:DIChWithRelTime

Object 4, default variation

869

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Parameter
Obj10DefVar Obj20DefVar

Range
1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF

Step
-

Default
2:BOStatus 5:BinCnt32WoutF

Unit
-

Description
Object 10, default variation Object 20, default variation

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF -

1:BinCnt32EvWout T

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 515: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast3TCPIP (DNM3-) function
Parameter
AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes

Range
No Yes 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes

Step
0.01 -

Default
Yes 10.00 Yes

Unit
s -

Description
Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line

ConfMultFrag UREnable URSendOnline

Yes Yes No

870

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Parameter
UREvClassMask

Range
Disabled Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10

Step
-

Default
Off

Unit
-

Description
Unsolicited response, event class mask

UROfflineRetry

Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED

tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1

0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100

0.01 0.01 1

5.00 30.00 5

s s -

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

DelOldBufFull tSynchTimeout

No Yes 1 - 3600

No 1800

TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime

No Yes No Yes

Yes No

871

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Parameter
Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT

Range
No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600

Step
0.1 1 1

Default
No Yes 30.0 0 10

Unit
s s s

Description
Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer

Table 516: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast4TCPIP (DNM4-) function
Parameter
Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar

Range
Disabled ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTime 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTime 1:DIChWithoutTime 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTime

Step
1 1 1 1 -

Default
Off 1 1 Yes 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTime

Unit
-

Description
Disable/Enable Operation Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation

Obj4DefVar

3:DIChWithRelTime

Object 4, default variation

872

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Parameter
Obj10DefVar Obj20DefVar

Range
1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF

Step
-

Default
2:BOStatus 5:BinCnt32WoutF

Unit
-

Description
Object 10, default variation Object 20, default variation

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout T 2:BinCnt16EvWout T 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF -

1:BinCnt32EvWout T

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithFT 4:AI16IntEvWithFT 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithFT 8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 517: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast4TCPIP (DNM4-) function
Parameter
AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes

Range
No Yes 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes

Step
0.01 -

Default
Yes 10.00 Yes

Unit
s -

Description
Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line

ConfMultFrag UREnable URSendOnline

Yes Yes No

873

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Parameter
UREvClassMask

Range
Disabled Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10

Step
-

Default
Off

Unit
-

Description
Unsolicited response, event class mask

UROfflineRetry

Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED

tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1

0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100

0.01 0.01 1

5.00 30.00 5

s s -

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

DelOldBufFull tSynchTimeout

No Yes 1 - 3600

No 1800

TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime

No Yes No Yes

Yes No

874

Automation bits (AUBI)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Parameter
Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT

Range
No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600

Step
0.1 1 1

Default
No Yes 30.0 0 10

Unit
s s s

Description
Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer

875

Single command, 16 signals (CD)

Chapter 16 Station communication

7
7.1

Single command, 16 signals (CD)

Introduction
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, LHMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

7.2

Principle of operation
The single command function consists of a function block CD for 16 binary output signals. The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters from the CAP configuration tool. The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting is done via the LHMI or PCM 600 and is common for the whole function block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode the function block has a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs. The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

7.3

Function block
CD01SingleCmd BLOCK NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16

en05000698.vsd

876

Single command, 16 signals (CD)

Chapter 16 Station communication

7.4

Input and output signals

Table 518: Input signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK

Description
Block single command function

Table 519: Output signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block
Signal
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16

Description
Single command output 1 Single command output 2 Single command output 3 Single command output 4 Single command output 5 Single command output 6 Single command output 7 Single command output 8 Single command output 9 Single command output 10 Single command output 11 Single command output 12 Single command output 13 Single command output 14 Single command output 15 Single command output 16

7.5

Setting parameters
Table 520: Basic general settings for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function
Parameter
Mode

Range
Disabled Steady Pulsed

Step
-

Default
Disabled

Unit
-

Description
Operation mode

877

Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT)

Chapter 16 Station communication

8
8.1

Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT)

Introduction
The IED may be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with 16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.

8.2

Principle of operation
Two multiple transmit function blocks MT01-MT02 and 8 slow multiple transmit function blocks MT03-MT10 are available in IED 670. Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple command block in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network Tool (LNT). Twelve multiple command function block CM12 with fast execution time and 48 multiple command function blocks CM13-CM60 with slower execution time are available in the IED 670s. The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in one block, which can be controlled from other IEDs. The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the terminal. The command function also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID to 0 if the block did not receive data within set maximum time.

8.3
8.3.1

Design
General The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on the MODE settings, common for the whole block, from the PCM 600 setting tool.
0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway. 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent from the station level. 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer than the execution cycle time for the command function block.

878

Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT)

Chapter 16 Station communication

8.4

Function block
CM01MultiCmd BLOCK ERROR NEWDATA OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16 VALID en06000007.vsd

Figure 388: CM function block

MT01MultiTransm BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 ERROR

en06000008.vsd

Figure 389: MT function block

8.5

Input and output signals

Table 521: Input signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK

Description
Block of function

879

Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Table 522: Input signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block
Signal
BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16

Description
Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16

Table 523: Output signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block
Signal
ERROR NEWDATA OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12

Description
MultiReceive error New data is received Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12

880

Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT)

Chapter 16 Station communication

Signal
OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16 VALID

Description
Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16 Output data is valid

Table 524: Output signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block
Signal
ERROR

Description
MultiSend error

8.6

Setting parameters
Table 525: General settings for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function
Parameter
tMaxCycleTime

Range
0.050 - 200.000

Step
0.001

Default
11.000

Unit
s

Description
Maximum cycle time between receptions of input data Minimum cycle time between receptions of input data Mode for output signals Pulse length for multi command outputs

tMinCycleTime

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

0.000

Mode tPulseTime

Steady Pulsed 0.000 - 60.000

0.001

Steady 0.200

Table 526: General settings for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function

Parameter
tMaxCycleTime

Range
0.000 - 200.000

Step
0.001

Default
5.000

Unit
s

Description
Maximum time interval between transmission of output data Minimum time interval between transmission of output data

tMinCycleTime

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

0.000

881

Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT)

Chapter 16 Station communication

882

About this chapter

Chapter 17 Remote communication

Chapter 17 Remote communication

About this chapter This chapter describes the Binary signal transfer function and associated hardware functionality. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

883

Binary signal transfer to remote end

Chapter 17 Remote communication

Binary signal transfer to remote end

Function block name: BSR--, BST-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name:
BSDGGIO

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: BRx--;BTx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: BSTGGIO

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

1.1

Introduction
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection in RED670, or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other 600 series IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for any purpose e.g. communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals between IEDs. Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an LDCMs (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a 64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs. Each IED can be equipped with up to four LDCMs, thus enabling communication with four remote IEDs.

1.2

Principle of operation
The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated with C37.94).

Start flag 8 bits

Information n x 16 bits

CRC 16 bits

Stop flag 8 bits

en01000134.vsd

Figure 390: Data message structure

884

Binary signal transfer to remote end

Chapter 17 Remote communication

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition. The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing is included in the data field. The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation. When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented as sampled values. When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the capacity of 192 signals.

1.3

Function block Note!

The function blocks are not represented in CAP 531 configuration tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMBI) of the IED670 and used internally in the configuration.

885

Binary signal transfer to remote end

Chapter 17 Remote communication

CRM1LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL en07000043.vsd CRM2LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL en07000044.vsd

Figure 391: CRM function blocks

CRB1LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGT HERR CRCERROR REMCOMF LOWLEVEL en05000451.vsd

Figure 392: CRB function block

886

Binary signal transfer to remote end

Chapter 17 Remote communication

1.4

Input and output signals

Table 527: Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function block
Signal
COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL

Description
Detected error in the differential communication Detected error in remote end with incoming message No carrier is detected in the incoming message No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message Incoming message from a wrong terminal Wrong length of the incoming message Identified error by CRC check in incoming message Transmission time is longer than permitted Indicates when echo synchronication is used Remote terminal indicates problem with received message Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization Link error, values are substituted Low signal level on the receive link

Table 528: Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function block
Signal
COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL

Description
Detected error in the differential communication Detected error in remote end with incoming message No carrier is detected in the incoming message No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message Incoming message from a wrong terminal Wrong length of the incoming message Identified error by CRC check in incoming message Transmission time is longer than permitted Indicates when echo synchronication is used Remote terminal indicates problem with received message Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization Link error, values are substituted Low signal level on the receive link

887

Binary signal transfer to remote end

Chapter 17 Remote communication

Table 529: Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function block
Signal
COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR REMCOMF LOWLEVEL

Description
Detected error in the differential communication Detected error in remote end with incoming message No carrier is detected in the incoming message No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message Incoming message from a wrong terminal Wrong length of the incoming message Identified error by CRC check in incoming message Remote terminal indicates problem with received message Low signal level on the receive link

1.5

Setting parameters
Table 530: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function
Parameter
ChannelMode

Range
Disabled ON OutOfService 0 - 255

Step
-

Default
ON

Unit
-

Description
Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Summation mode for transmitted current values

TerminalNo

RemoteTermNo DiffSync

0 - 255 ECHO GPS Block Echo Slave Master LowPower HighPower CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 5 - 500

1 -

0 ECHO

GPSSyncErr

Block

CommSync

Slave

OptoPower TransmCurr

LowPower CT-GRP1

ComFailAlrmDel

10

ms

Time delay before communication error signal is activated

888

Binary signal transfer to remote end

Chapter 17 Remote communication

Parameter
ComFailResDel

Range
5 - 500

Step
5

Default
10

Unit
ms

Description
Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Max allowed transmission delay Compression range

RedChSwTime RedChRturnTime

5 - 500 5 - 500

5 5

5 100

ms ms

AsymDelay

-20.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

ms

MaxTransmDelay CompRange

0 - 40 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA 200 - 2000 200 - 1000 Disabled ON

1 -

20 0-25kA

ms -

MaxtDiffLevel DeadbandtDiff InvertPolX21

1 1 -

600 300 Off

us us -

Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication

Table 531: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function
Parameter
ChannelMode

Range
Disabled ON OutOfService 0 - 255

Step
-

Default
ON

Unit
-

Description
Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High

TerminalNo

RemoteTermNo DiffSync

0 - 255 ECHO GPS Block Echo Slave Master LowPower HighPower

1 -

0 ECHO

GPSSyncErr

Block

CommSync

Slave

OptoPower

LowPower

889

Binary signal transfer to remote end

Chapter 17 Remote communication

Parameter
TransmCurr

Range
CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 RedundantChannel 5 - 500

Step
-

Default
CT-GRP1

Unit
-

Description
Summation mode for transmitted current values

ComFailAlrmDel

10

ms

Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Max allowed transmission delay Compression range

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

10

ms

RedChSwTime RedChRturnTime

5 - 500 5 - 500

5 5

5 100

ms ms

AsymDelay

-20.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

ms

MaxTransmDelay CompRange

0 - 40 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA 200 - 2000 200 - 1000 Disabled ON

1 -

20 0-25kA

ms -

MaxtDiffLevel DeadbandtDiff InvertPolX21

1 1 -

600 300 Off

us us -

Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication

890

Binary signal transfer to remote end

Chapter 17 Remote communication

Table 532: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function
Parameter
ChannelMode

Range
Disabled Enabled OutOfService 0 - 255

Step
-

Default
Enabled

Unit
-

Description
Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Invert polarization for X21 communication

TerminalNo

RemoteTermNo CommSync

0 - 255 Slave Master LowPower HighPower 5 - 500

1 -

0 Slave

OptoPower ComFailAlrmDel

LowPower 10

ms

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

10

ms

InvertPolX21

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

891

Binary signal transfer to remote end

Chapter 17 Remote communication

892

About this chapter

Chapter 18 Hardware

Chapter 18 Hardware
About this chapter This chapter includes descriptions of the different hardware modules. It includes diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection terminals and modules.

893

Overview

Chapter 18 Hardware

1
1.1

Overview
Variants of case- and HMI display size

Close

Open

xx04000458_ansi.eps

Figure 393: 1/2 19 case with medium HMI display.

Close

Open

xx05000762_ansi.eps

Figure 394: 3/4 19 case with medium HMI display.

894

Overview

Chapter 18 Hardware

Close

Open

xx04000460_ansi.eps

Figure 395: 1/1 19 case with medium HMI display.

1.2

Case from the rear side

Table 533: Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module
PSM BIM, BOM, SOM or IOM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or GSM SLM IRIG-B 1) OEM RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) LDCM 2) TRM

Rear Positions
X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X51 and X52 X51, X52 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X311:A, B, C, D X312 X313 X401

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2 or P31:3 3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2

Note!
1 One LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.

895

Overview

Chapter 18 Hardware

Table 534: Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module
PSM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM, MIM or GSM SLM IRIG-B or LDCM 1) 2) LDCM 2) OEM RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) LDCM 2) TRM

Rear Positions
X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X101 and X102 X101, X102 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X303 X311:A, B, C, D X312 X313 X401

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P30:2 and P30:3 3) RS482 installation, when included in seat P31:2

Note!
2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.

896

Overview

Chapter 18 Hardware

Table 535: Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slot

Module
PSM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM, MIM or GSM SLM IRIG-B or LDCM 1,2) LDCM 2) OEM RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) LDCM 2) LDCM 2) LDCM 2) TRM 1 TRM 2

Rear Positions
X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and X72 X71, X72 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X303 X311:A, B, C, D X312 X313 X322 X323 X401 X411

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P32:2, P32:3, P30:2 and P30:3 3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2

Note!
2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.

897

Overview

Chapter 18 Hardware

Table 536: Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module
PSM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM, MIM or GSM SLM IRIG-B or LDCM 1,2) LDCM 2) OEM RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) LDCM 2) TRM

Rear Positions
X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X161 and X162 X161, X162 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X303 X311:A, B, C, D X312 X313 X401

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P30:2 and P30:3 3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2

Note!
2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.

Table 537: Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots

898

Overview

Chapter 18 Hardware

Module
PSM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM, MIM or GSM SLM IRIG-B or LDCM 1,2) LDCM 2) OEM

Rear Positions
X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X131 and X132 X131, X132 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X303 X311:A, B, C, D

RS485 or LDCM 2) X312 3) LDCM 2) LDCM 2) LDCM 2) TRM 1 TRM 2 X313 X322 X323 X401 X411

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P32:2, P32:3, P30:2 and P30:3 3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2

Note!
2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.

899

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2
2.1

Hardware modules
Overview
Table 538: Basic modules, always included
Module
Combined backplane module (CBM)

Description
A backplane PCB that carries all internal signals between modules in an IED. Only the TRM is not connected directly to this board. A backplane PCB that forms part of the IED backplane with connectors for TRM, ADM etc. Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits. An internal fail alarm output is available.

Universal backplane module (UBM) Power supply module (PSM)

Numerical module (NUM)

Module for overall application control. All information is processed or passed through this module, such as configuration, settings and communication. The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push button keyboard and an ethernet connector used to connect a PC to the IED. Transformer module that galvanically separates the internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12 analog inputs. Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.

Local Human machine interface (LHMI)

Transformer input module (TRM)

Analog digital conversion module (ADM)

Table 539: Application specific modules

Module
Binary input module (BIM) Binary output module (BOM) Binary I/O module (IOM) Line data communication modules (LDCM)

Description
Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole command outputs including supervision function Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs. Modules used for digital communication to remote terminal.

Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103 communication Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103 communication modules (SLM) Optical ethernet module (OEM) mA input module (MIM) GPS time synchronization module (GSM) PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication. Analog input module with 6 independent, galvanically separated channels. Used to provide the IED with GPS time synchronization.

900

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.2
2.2.1

Combined backplane module (CBM)

Introduction The combined backplane module (CBM) carries signals between modules in an IED. Functionality The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The CBM backplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible.
Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be able to communicate with CAN based modules. If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the Internal Fail signal IRF.

2.2.2

2.2.3

Design There are two basic versions of the CBM:

with 3 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and two are used by other PCI modules, for example two ADMs in IEDs with two TRMs. See figure 397 with 2 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and one is used by for example an ADM in IEDs with one TRM. See figure 396

Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors are connected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.

901

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2
en05000516.vsd

Pos
1 2

Description
CAN slots CPCI slots

Figure 396: CBM for 1 TRM.

2 en05000755.vsd

Pos
1 2

Description
CAN slots CPCI slots

Figure 397: CBM for 2 TRM.

902

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

en05000756.vsd

Pos Description
1 CBM

Figure 398: CBM position, rear view.

2.3
2.3.1

Universal backplane module (UBM)

Introduction The Universal Backplane Module (UBM) is part of the IED backplane and is mounted above the CBM. It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM). Functionality The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analog signals from the transformer input module to the analog digital converter module. The Numerical processing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact on the front panel as well as the internal ethernet contacts are connected to the UBM which provides the signal path to the NUM board. Design It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
The UBM exists in 2 versions. for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors and one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 400 for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors and one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 401.

2.3.2

2.3.3

903

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The 48 pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.

TRM

ADM

NUM AD Data
X1 X2 X4

X3

RS485 X10 X10

Front port

Ethernet

LHMI connection
Ethernet X5

en05000489.vsd

Figure 399: UBM block diagram.

en05000757.vsd

Figure 400: UBM for 1 TRM.

904

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

en05000758.vsd

Figure 401: UBM for 2 TRM.

en05000759.vsd

Pos
1

Description
UBM

Figure 402: UBM position, rear view.

905

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.4
2.4.1

Power supply module (PSM)

Introduction The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation between the terminal and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available. Design There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input voltage ranges see table 540. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system. Block diagram

2.4.2

Input connector

Filter

Power supply

Supervision

99000516.vsd

Figure 403: PSM Block diagram.

2.4.3

Technical data
Table 540: PSM - Power supply module
Quantity
Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input)

Rated value
EL = (24 - 60) V EL = (90 - 250) V

Backplane connector

Nominal range
EL 20% EL 20% -

Power consumption Auxiliary DC power in-rush

50 W typically < 5 A during 0.1 s

906

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.5
2.5.1

Numeric processing module (NUM)

Introduction The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection functions and logic.
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.

2.5.2

Functionality The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, standard off-the-shelf compact-PCI CPU module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.
The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted. To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge. The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash file system. The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of the real time clock. No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power dissipation.

907

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.5.3

Block diagram

Compact Flash

Logic

PMC connector PC-MIP

Memory

Ethernet

North bridge PCI-PCIbridge Backplane connector

en04000473.vsd

CPU

Figure 404: Numeric processing module block diagram

2.6

Local human-machine interface (LHMI)

Refer to Chapter 2 for information.

908

UBM connector

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.7
2.7.1

Transformer input module (TRM)

Introduction The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.

2.7.2

Design The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.
Basic versions: 6 current channels and 6 voltage channels 7 current channels and 5 voltage channels 9 current channels and 3 voltage channels 12 current channels 6 current channels

The rated values of the current inputs are selected at order. The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM. Configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section 11.

2.7.3

Technical data
Table 541: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits
Quantity
Current Operative range Permissive overload

Rated value
In = 1 or 5 A (0-100) x In 4 In cont. 100 In for 1 s *) < 150 mVA at In = 5 A < 20 mVa at In = 1 A Vn = 120 V (0340) V 420 V cont. 450 V 10 s

Nominal range
(0.2-40) In

Burden

Ac voltage Operative range Permissive overload

0.5288 V

Burden Frequency
*)

< 0.1 VA at 110 V fn = 60/50 Hz

5%

max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

909

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.8
2.8.1

Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM)

Introduction The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC slot. The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according to table 542. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board. The UBM connects the ADM to the transformer input module (TRM).
Table 542: PC-MIP cards and PMC cards
PC-MIP cards
LDCM LR-LDCM MR-LDCM X21-LDCM IRIG-B RS485

PMC cards
SLM OEM 1 ch OEM 2 ch

2.8.2

Design The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.
Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency. The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

910

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

AD1 AD2
1.2v

AD3 AD4

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12

PMC

level shift

PC-MIP
2.5v

PCI to PCI PC-MIP

en05000474.vsd

Figure 405: The ADM layout

911

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.9
2.9.1

Binary input module (BIM)

Introduction The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits. Design The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level of the binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section 8. A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set. Figure 406 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels. The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.

2.9.2

912

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

[V] 300

176 144 88 72 38 32 19 18 24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V

xx99000517_ansi.vsd

Guaranteed operation

Operation uncertain

No operation

Figure 406: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via the CAN-bus on the backplane. The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown in figure 407 and 408.

913

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

[mA] 30

1 35 70 [ms]
en07000104.vsd

Figure 407: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of BIM.

[mA] 30

1 3.5 7.0 [ms]

en07000105.vsd

Figure 408: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse counting capabilities.

914

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

Opto isolated input

Process connector

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input
Microcontroller

Process connector

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input

99000503.vsd

Figure 409: Block diagram of the Binary input module.

CAN

Opto isolated input

Backplane connector

Memory

915

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.9.3

Technical data
Table 543: BIM - Binary input module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Binary inputs DC voltage, RL

16 24/40 V 48/60 V 125 V 220/250 V

RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20%

Power consumption 24/40 V 48/60 V 125 V 220/250 V Counter input frequency Oscillating signal discriminator max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input 10 pulses/s max Blocking settable 140 Hz Release settable 130 Hz -

Table 544: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Binary inputs DC voltage, RL

16 24/40 V 48/60 V 125 V 220/250 V

RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20%

Power consumption 24/40 V 48/60 V 125 V 220/250 V Counter input frequency max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input 10 pulses/s max -

Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 140 Hz Release settable 130 Hz

2.10
2.10.1

Binary output modules (BOM)

Introduction The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output or any signalling purpose.

916

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.10.2

Design The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 410. This should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED.
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is required. For configuration of the output signals, please refer to section 9.

Output module

3
ANSI_xx00000299.vsd

1 2 3

Output connection from relay 1 Output signal power source connection Output connection from relay 2

Figure 410: Relay pair example

917

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Process connector

Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay

Relay

Microcontroller

Memory

99000505.vsd

Figure 411: Block diagram of the Binary Output Module

918

Backplane connector

Process connector

CAN

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.10.3

Technical data
Table 545: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays

Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos >0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms

24 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms

8A 10 A

30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A

2.11
2.11.1

Static binary output module (SOM)

Introduction The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output relays for use in applications with high speed requirements. Design The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6 electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.
The SOM consists mainly of: An MCU A CAN-driver 6 static relays outputs 6 electromechanical relay outputs A DC/DC converter Connectors interfacing - CAN-bus to backplane CBM - IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)

2.11.2

The following parts are supervised: Interruption in relay coil

919

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

Short circuit of relay coil Driver failure

Drive & Read back

Drive & Read back

Process connector

Drive & Read back

Drive & Read back

Drive & Read back

Codeflash

Drive & Read back

MCU

CANdriver

Drive & Read back

Drive & Read back

Process connector

DC/DC
Drive & Read back

Drive & Read back

Internal_fail_n AC_fail_n RCAN_ID Sync

Drive & Read back

Reset
Drive & Read back

en07000115.vsd

Figure 412: Block diagram of the static output module

920

Backplane connector

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

Figure 413: Connection diagram of the static output module

2.11.3

Technical data
Table 546: SOM - Static output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays

Static binary outputs Electromechanical relay outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Static binary outputs: Making capacity at capacity load with the maximum capacitance of a closing circuit of 0.2 F 0.2 s 1.0 s Electromechanical relay outputs: Making capacity of inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos >0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms

6 6 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms

8A 10 A

30 A 10 A

30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A

Operating time, Static outputs

<1 ms

2.12
2.12.1

Binary input/output module (IOM)

Introduction The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signalling purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for required binary input information.

921

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.12.2

Design The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 407. Inputs are debounced by software. Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply ground faults, see figure 406. The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering. I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by the event recorder if present. The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays. One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see figure 414. The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is connected in parallel to the standard output relay. For configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section 8 "Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)" and section 9 "Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)".

Note!
The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.

922

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

Figure 414: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to rear position X31, X41, etc. and output contacts named XB to rear position X32, X42, etc.

923

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

IOM with MOV The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear of the contacts.

Note!
The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the binary input/output module.

xx04000069.vsd

Figure 415: IOM with MOV protection, relay example

2.12.3

Technical data
Table 547: IOM - Binary input/output module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Binary inputs DC voltage, RL

8 24/40 V 48/60 V 125 V 220/250 V

RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% -

Power consumption 24/40 V 48/60 V 125 V 220/250 V max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input

924

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

Table 548: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay)

Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos > 0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms

10 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms

2 250 V AC, DC 800 V DC

8A 10 A

8A 10 A

30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A

0.4 A 0.4 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A 10 nF

Maximum capacitive load

Table 549: IOM with MOV - contact data (reference standard: IEC 60255-23)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay)

Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min

IOM: 10 250 V AC, DC 250 V rms

IOM: 2 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC

925

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Making capacity at inductive loadwith L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos >0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A Maximum capacitive load 0.4 A 0.4 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A 10 nF 8A 10 A 8A 10 A

2.13
2.13.1

Line data communication module (LDCM)

Introduction The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between the IEDs situated at distances <93 miles or from the IED to optical to electrical converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <1.9 miles away. The LDCM module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/ANSI standard format is used.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 416. Alternatively there can be used a module with built-in X.21 converter see figure 418 The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED communicates. Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm single mode) and Short range (900 nm multi mode) are available.

Note!
Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes. Never look into the laser beam.

2.13.2

Design The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be mounted on:
the ADM the NUM

926

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

ID

ST

IO-connector

ST

32,768 MHz

16.000 MHz

en07000087.vsd

Figure 416: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I/O ST type connector

X1
ADN 2841 2.5V ID

DS 3904

DS 3904

FPGA 256 FBGA

PCI9054 TQ176

MAX 3645

3 2

en06000393.vsd

Figure 417: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC type connector

927

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

X1 Y2 Y2 Y2 Y2 Y2 Y2 Y2 Y2 Y2
3 2

en06000518.eps

Figure 418: The LDCM with built-in X.21 converter layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one D.15 connector

2.13.3

Technical data
Table 550: Line data communication modules (LDCM)
Characteristic Type of LDCM Range or value Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)

Type of fiber

Graded-index mul- Singlemode 8/125 m timode 62.5/125 m or 50/125 m 820 nm 1310 nm 20 dB (typical distance 50 mile *)

Singlemode 8/125 m 1550 nm 26 dB (typical distance 75 mile *)

Wave length Optical budget Graded-index multimode 62.5/125 m,

11 dB (typical distance about 2 mile *) 7 dB (typical distance about 1 mile *)

Graded-index multimode 50/125 m

Optical connector

Type ST

Type FC

Type FC

928

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

Characteristic Type of LDCM

Range or value Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)

Protocol Data transmission Transmission rate / Data rate Clock source

C37.94 Synchronous 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal

C37.94 implementation **) Synchronous 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal

C37.94 implementation **) Synchronous 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal

*) depending on optical budget calculation **) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94

2.14
2.14.1

Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM)

Introduction The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. The module has two communication ports, one for serial communication and one dedicated for LON communication. Design The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations of optical fiber connectors, see figure 419. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.

2.14.2

929

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

A B 1 2

Snap in connector for plastic fiber ST connector for glass fiber LON port SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port

Figure 419: The SLM variants

930

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

1 2 3 4

Receiver, LON Transmitter, LON Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103

Figure 420: The SLM layout overview

2.14.3

Technical data
Table 551: SLM LON port
Quantity Range or value

Optical connector

Glass fiber: type ST Plastic : type HFBR snap-in

Fiber, optical budget

Glass fiber: 11 dB (3000 ft typically *) Plastic fiber: 7 dB (35 ft 10 m typically *) Glass fiber: 62.5/125 m Plastic fiber: 1 mm

Fiber diameter

*) depending on optical budget calculation

931

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

Table 552: SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port

Quantity Range or value

Optical connector

Glass fiber: type ST Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in

Fiber, optical budget

Glass fiber: 11 dB (3000ft/1000 m typically *) Plastic fiber: 7 dB (80ft/25 m typically *) Glass fiber: 62.5/125 m Plastic fiber: 1 mm

diameter

*) depending on optical budget calculation

2.15
2.15.1

Galvanic RS485 communication module

Introduction The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case. Design The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module. The internal structure of the RS485 can be seen in figure 421:

2.15.2

FPGA Wishbone interconnect switch 32 MHz PCI-con Internal bus PCI-bus PCIController PCI-con Local bus to wishbone Status Register ID-chip Control Register Tx UART Isolation RS485 tranceiver Rx 6-pole-connector 2-pole connector Isolation

Isolation
Termination

Info Register Isolated DC/DC Soft ground

Figure 421: The internal structure of the RS485 card

932

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

RS485 connector pinouts The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 422) are presented in table 553:
Table 553: The arrangement for the pins
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Name 2-wire RS485+ RS485 Term N.A. N.A. N.A. Name 4-wire TX+ TX T-Term R-Term RX RX+ Description Receive/transmit high or transmit high Receive/transmit Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver in 2wir case) (connect to TX+) Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+) Receive low Receive high

Angle bracket

Screw terminal X3

Screw terminal X1

1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6

RS485 PWB

Backplane

Figure 422: RS485 connector

2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5 Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6

Soft ground connector pinouts A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be used in two combinations like:
Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part . Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV

933

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.15.3

Technical data
Table 554: Galvanic RS485 communication module
Quantity Communication speed External connectors Range or value 240019200 bauds RS-485 6-pole connector Soft ground 2-pole connector

2.16
2.16.1

Optical ethernet module (OEM)

Introduction The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communication buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. The module has one or two optical ports with ST connectors. Functionality The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according to IEC6185081 have been implemented. Design The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card on the ADM. The OEM is a 100base Fx module and available as a single channel or double channel unit.

2.16.2

2.16.3

PCI - bus Connector EEPROM Ethernet Controller 100Base-FX Receiver PCI - PCI Bridge 100Base-FX Transmitter ST fiber optic connectors

100Base-FX Transmitter ID chip EEPROM IO - bus Connector Ethernet Controller 100Base-FX Receiver ST fiber optic connectors

en04000472.vsd

Figure 423: OEM block diagram.

934

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

ID chip

LED

Ethernet cont.
Transmitter
25MHz oscillator

Receiver
LED

Ethernet cont.

PCI to PCI bridge

Transmitter

25MHz oscillator

en05000472.vsd

Figure 424: OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels

2.16.4

Technical data
Table 555: OEM - Optical ethernet module
Quantity Rated value

Number of channels Standard Type of fiber Wave length Optical connector Communication speed

1 or 2 IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX 62.5/125 m multimode fibre 1300 nm Type ST Fast Ethernet 100 MB

2.17
2.17.1

mA input module (MIM)

Introduction The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to +20 mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure transducers.The module has six independent, galvanically separated channels. Design The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.
For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section 10. The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory on the module.

2.17.2

PCI bus

IO bus

Receiver

935

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range. The module communicates, like the other I/O-modules on the serial CAN-bus.

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Process connector

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Memory

Microcontroller

99000504.vsd

Figure 425: MIM block diagram

936

Backplane connector

CAN

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.17.3

Technical data
Table 556: MIM - mA input module
Quantity: Rated value:
5, 10, 20mA

Nominal range:

Input range

0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA Input resistance Power consumption each mA-board each mA input
4W 0.1 W

Rin = 194 Ohm

2.18
2.18.1

GPS time synchronization module (GSM)

Introduction This module includes the GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has one SMA contact for connection to an antenna. Design The GPS time synchronization module is 6U high and occupies one slot. The slot closest to the NUM shall always be used.
The GSM consists of CAN carrier module (CCM) GPS clock module (GCM) GPS receiver unit

2.18.2

The CCM is a carrier board for the GCM mezzanine PMC card and GPS unit, see figure 427. There is a cable between the external antenna input on the back of the GCM and the GPS-receiver. This is a galvanic connection vulnerable to electro-magnetic interference. The connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to reduce the risk. The second cable is a flat cable that connects the GPS and the GCM. It is used for communication between the GCM and the GPS-receiver. All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the CAN-bus. The CMPPS signal is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at sampling level.

937

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

PMC GPS antenna GPS receiver GPS clock module

CMPPS

CAN controller

CAN

en05000675.vsd

Figure 426: GSM block diagram

938

Backplane CAN connector

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

en07000086.vsd

1 2 3 4

GPS receiver GPS Clock module (GCM) CAN carrier module (CCM) Antenna connector

Figure 427: A CCM with the GCM and GPS mounted with cables

939

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.18.3

Technical data
Table 557: GPS time synchronization module (GSM)
Function Range or value Accuracy
1s relative UTC

Receiver Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new position or after power loss longer than 1 month

<30 minutes

Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer <15 minutes than 48 hours Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter than 48 hours <5 minutes

2.19
2.19.1

GPS antenna
Introduction In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna with applicable cable must be used. Design The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on an antenna mast. See figure 428

2.19.2

940

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2 3

xx04000155.vsd

where: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 GPS antenna TNC connector Console, (2'6.7"x4'11') Mounting holes about 1/5" Tab for securing of antenna cable Vertical mounting position Horizontal mounting position

Figure 428: Antenna with console

Always position the antenna and its console so that a continuous clear line-of-sight visibility to all directions is obtained, preferably more than 75%. A minimum of 50% clear line-of-sight visibility is required for un-interrupted operation.

941

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

99001046.vsd

Figure 429: Antenna line-of-sight

Antenna cable Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GSM. Choose cable type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.

Note!
Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna. When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is connected.

2.19.3

Technical data
Table 558: GPS Antenna and cable
Function Value

Max antenna cable attenuation Antenna cable impedance Lightning protection Antenna cable connector

26 db @ 1.6 GHz 50 ohm Must be provided externally SMA in receiver end TNC in antenna end

942

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

2.20
2.20.1

IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B

Introduction This module includes the IRIG-B time synchronization and the PPS time synchronization. Design The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type ST for PPS to synchronize the time between several protections.

2.20.2

32 MHz

FPGA OPTO_INPUT

PCI-bus PCI-Controller

Registers

PCI-con

4 mm barrier

ID-chip Capture1 Capture2

Amplitude modulator Isolated receiver Zero-cross detector

ZXING

IO-con

MPPS PPS TSU CMPPS Isolated DC/DC 5 to +- 12V

en06000303.vsd

Figure 430: IRIG-B block diagram

BNCconnector

IRIGDecoder

IRIG_INPUT

STconnector

PCI-con

943

Hardware modules

Chapter 18 Hardware

A1

C C

Y2

3 2

en06000304.vsd

Figure 431: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for IRIG-B signal input

2.20.3

Technical data
Table 559: IRIG-B
Quantity Rated value

Number of channels IRIG-B Number of channels PPS Electrical connector IRIG-B Optical connector PPS Type of fibre

1 1 BNC Type ST 62.5/125 m multimode fibre

944

C O O

ST

DC//DC

A1

Dimensions

Chapter 18 Hardware

3
3.1

Dimensions
Case without rear cover

D A

C
xx04000448.vsd

G H

xx04000464.vsd
Figure 432: Case without rear cover Figure 433: Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit

Case size (inches)

6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

10.47 10.47 10.47

8.81 13.23 17.65

7.92 7.92 7.92

9.96 9.96 9.96

8.10 12.52 16.94

7.50 7.50 7.50

8.02 12.44 16.86

18.31

7.39 7.39 7.39

19.00

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit

945

Dimensions

Chapter 18 Hardware

3.2

Case with rear cover

E
K

D A

J
xx05000502.vsd

C
xx05000501.vsd

Figure 434:

Case with rear cover.

Figure 435:

Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit.

xx05000503.vsd

Figure 436:

Rear cover case with details.

Case size (mm)

6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

265.9 265.9 265.9

223.7 336.0 448.3

242.1 242.1 242.1

255.8 255.8 255.8

205.7 318.0 430.3

190.5 190.5 190.5

203.7 316.0 428.3

465.1

228.6 228.6 228.6

482.6

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.

946

Dimensions

Chapter 18 Hardware

Case size (inches)

6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

10.47 10.47 10.47

8.81 13.23 17.65

9.53 9.53 9.53

10.07 10.07 10.07

8.10 12.52 16.86

7.50 7.50 7.50

8.02 12.4 16.86

18.31

9.00 9.00 9.00

19.00

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.

3.3

Flush mounting dimensions

A B

E D
xx04000465.vsd

Cut-out dimensions (inches) Case size Tolerance A +/0.04 B +/0.04 C D

6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

8.27 12.69 17.11

10.01 10.01 10.01

0.160.39 0.160.39 0.160.39

0.49 0.49 0.49

E = 7.43 inches without rear protection cover, 9.04 inches with rear protection cover

Figure 437: Flush mounting

947

Dimensions

Chapter 18 Hardware

3.4

Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions

xx06000182.vsd

Figure 438: A 1/2 x 19 size IED 670 side-by-side with RHGS6.

948

Dimensions

Chapter 18 Hardware

C
xx05000505.vsd

Case size (inches) Tolerance

A
0.04

B
0.04

C
0.04

D
0.04

D
E
0.04

F
0.04

G
0.04

6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

8.42 12.85 17.27

10.21 10.21 10.21

9.46 13.89 18.31

7.50 7.50 7.50

1.35 1.35 1.35

0.52 0.52 0.52

0.25 diam 0.25 diam 0.25 diam

Figure 439: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

949

Dimensions

Chapter 18 Hardware

3.5

Wall mounting dimensions

A B E

C D

en04000471.vsd
Figure 440: Wall mounting

Case size (inches) A

6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

10.50 15.92 20.31

10.52 14.94 19.33

10.74 10.74 10.74

15.36 15.36 15.36

9.57 9.57 9.57

950

Dimensions

Chapter 18 Hardware

3.6
[1.48] [6.97] [4.02]

External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection

[0.33]

[18.31] [18.98]

[0.79]

[7.68]

Dimension mm [inches]

xx06000232.eps

Figure 441: Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit

[10.47]

[7.50]

[1.50]

[0.33]

[18.31] [18.98]

[0.79]

[7.68]

[inches]

en06000234.eps

Figure 442: Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit

951

Mounting alternatives

Chapter 18 Hardware

4
4.1
4.1.1

Mounting alternatives
Flush mounting
Overview All IED sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19 and RHGS6 6U 1/4 x 19, cases, can be flush mounted. Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54 protection.
The flush mounting kit are utilized for IEDs of sizes: 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19 and are also suitable for mounting of RHGS6, 6U 1/4 x 19 cases.

Note!
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.

Note!
To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing must be ordered when ordering the IED.

952

Mounting alternatives

Chapter 18 Hardware

4.1.2

Mounting procedure for flush mounting

1 7

2 6 5 3

xx06000246.vsd

PosNo

Description

Quantity

Type

Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 class. The sealing strip is factory mounted between the case and front plate. Fastener Groove Screw, self tapping

2 3 4 5 6 7

4 4

0.11x1.76 inches M5x25

Joining point of seal- ing strip (rear view) Panel Screw 4

Figure 443: Flush mounting details.

953

Mounting alternatives

Chapter 18 Hardware

4.2
4.2.1

19 panel rack mounting

Overview All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening screws for the angles. The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle.

Note!
Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-side mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be selected so that the total size equals 19.

Note!
When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

954

Mounting alternatives

Chapter 18 Hardware

4.2.2

Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting

2

1a

1b

xx04000452.vsd

PosNo

Description

Quantity

Type

1a, 1b 2

Mounting angels, which can be mounted, either to the left or right side of the case. Screw

2 8

M4x6

Figure 444: 19 panel rack mounting details

4.3
4.3.1

Wall mounting
Overview All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19 and 1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.

Note!
When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

955

Mounting alternatives

Chapter 18 Hardware

4.3.2

Mounting procedure for wall mounting

3 2 1 4

5 6 xx04000453.vsd

PosNo

Description

Quantity

Type

1 2 3 4 5 6

Bushing Screw Screw Mounting bar Screw Side plate

4 8 4 2 6 2

M4x10 M6x12 or corresponding M5x8 -

Figure 445: Wall mounting details.

4.3.3

How to reach the rear side of the IED The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover which is recommended to use with this type of mounting. See figure 446.
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 3.2 inches is required on the unhinged side.

956

Mounting alternatives

Chapter 18 Hardware

View from above 1 3

3.2" (80 mm)

ANSI_en06000135.vsd

PosNo
1 2 3

Description
Screw Screw Rear protection cover

Type
M4x10 M5x8 -

Figure 446: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.

4.4
4.4.1

Side-by-side 19 rack mounting

Overview IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-side up to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately.

Note!
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

957

Mounting alternatives

Chapter 18 Hardware

4.4.2

Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting

2 1

xx04000456.vsd

PosNo
1 2, 3 4

Description
Mounting plate Screw Mounting angle

Quantity
2 16 2

Type
M4x6 -

Figure 447: Side-by-side rack mounting details.

4.4.3

IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case An 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of, for example, a DC-switch or two trip relays.

958

Mounting alternatives

Chapter 18 Hardware

xx06000180.vsd

Figure 448: IED 670 (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base.

4.5
4.5.1

Side-by-side flush mounting

Overview It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required. If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19.

Note!
With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDs separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see section 4.1 "Flush mounting" on page 952.

Note!
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

Note!
Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT switches on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.

959

Mounting alternatives

Chapter 18 Hardware

4.5.2

Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting

1 2

3 4

xx06000181.vsd

PosNo
1 2, 3 4

Description
Mounting plate Screw Mounting angle

Quantity
2 16 2

Type
M4x6 -

Figure 449: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x 19 IED).

960

Technical data

Chapter 18 Hardware

5
5.1

Technical data
Enclosure
Table 560: Case
Material Front plate Surface treatment Finish Steel sheet Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI Aluzink preplated steel Light grey (RAL 7035)

Table 561: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Front Rear, sides, top and bottom IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip) IP20

Table 562: Weight

Case size
6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 3/4 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

Weight
22 lb 33 lb 40 lb

5.2

Connection system
Table 563: CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type
Terminal blocks of feed through type Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals

Rated voltage and current

250 V AC, 20 A 250 V AC, 20 A

Maximum conductor area

4mm2 (12AWG)

961

Technical data

Chapter 18 Hardware

Table 564: Binary I/O connection system

Connector type
Screw compression type

Rated voltage
250 V AC

Maximum conductor area

2.5 mm2
214AWG

or 2x16 AWG

Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals

300 V AC

mm2

Note!
Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered for Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.

5.3

Influencing factors
Table 565: Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter
Ambient temperature, operate value Relative humidity Operative range Storage temperature

Reference value
+20 C 10%-90% 0%-95% -40 C to +70 C

Nominal range
-10 C to +55 C 10%-90%

Influence
0.02% /C -

Table 566: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage Operative range Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate value Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage

Reference value
max. 2% Full wave rectified

Within nominal range

12% of EL
20% of EL

Influence
0.01% /%

0.01% /%

24-60 V DC 20% 90-250 V DC 20%

Interruption interval 050 ms No restart 0 s Correct behaviour at power down <180 s

Restart time

962

Technical data

Chapter 18 Hardware

Table 567: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602556)

Dependence on
Frequency dependence, operate value Harmonic frequency dependence (20% content) Harmonic frequency dependence for distance protection (10% content)

Within nominal range

fn 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz fn 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fn 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fn

Influence
1.0% / Hz 1.0% 6.0%

5.4

Type tests according to standard

Table 568: Electromagnetic compatibility
Test
1 MHz Oscillatory burst disturbance 100 kHz disturbance Surge withstand capability test

Type test values

2.5 kV 2.5 kV 2.5 kV, oscillatory 4.0 kV, fast transient

Reference standards
IEC 60255-22-1, Class III IEC 61000-4-12, Class III ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1

Electrostatic discharge Direct applicaton Indirect application Electrostatic discharge Direct application Indirect application Fast transient disturbance Surge immunity test

15 kV air discharge 8 kV contact discharge 8 kV contact discharge 15 kV air discharge 8 kV contact discharge 8 kV contact discharge 4 kV 1-2 kV, 1.2/50 s high energy

IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV

IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1

IEC 60255-22-4,Class A IEC 60255-22-5

Power frequency immunity test

150-300 V,

IEC 60255-22-7, Class A

Power frequency magnetic field test Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance Conducted electromagnetic field disturbance Radiated emission Conducted emission

1000 A/m, 3 s 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz 20 V/m, 80-2500 MHz 35 V/m 26-1000 MHz 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz 30-1000 MHz 0.15-30 MHz

IEC 61000-4-8, Class V IEC 60255-22-3 EN 61000-4-3 IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2

IEC 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-25 IEC 60255-25

963

Technical data

Chapter 18 Hardware

Table 569: Insulation

Test
Dielectric test Impulse voltage test Insulation resistance

Type test values

2.0 kV AC, 1 min. 5 kV, 1.2/50 s, 0.5 J >100 M at 500 VDC

Reference standard

ANSI C37.90

Table 570: Environmental tests

Test
Cold test Storage test Dry heat test Damp heat test, steady state Damp heat test, cyclic

Type test value

Test Ad for 16 h at -25C Test Ad for 16 h at -40C Test Bd for 16 h at +70C Test Ca for 4 days at +40 C and humidity 93%

Reference standard
IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-78

Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55 C IEC 60068-2-30 and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)

Table 571: CE compliance

Test
Immunity Emissivity Low voltage directive

According to
EN 50263 EN 50263 EN 50178

Table 572: Mechanical tests

Test
Vibration Shock and bump Seismic

Type test values

Class I Class I Class I

Reference standards
IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3

964

About this chapter

Chapter 19 Labels

Chapter 19 Labels
About this chapter This chapter includes descriptions of the different labels and where to find them on the IED.

965

Different labels

Chapter 19 Labels

Different labels

1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7
xx06000574.eps

966

Different labels

Chapter 19 Labels

1 2 3 4 5 6

Product type, description and serial number Order number, dc supply voltage and rated frequency Optional, customer specific information Manufacturer Transformer input module, rated currents and voltages Transformer designations

Ordering and serial number

967

Different labels

Chapter 19 Labels

1 2 3

4
en06000573.eps

1 2 3

Warning label Caution label Class 1 laser product label

Warning label

968

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

This chapter includes diagrams of the IED with all slot, terminal block and optical connector designations. It is a necessary guide when making electrical and optical connections to the IED.

969

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

970

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

971

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

972

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

973

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

974

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

975

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

976

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

977

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

978

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

979

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

980

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

981

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

982

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

983

Chapter 20 Connection diagrams

984

About this chapter

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

About this chapter This chapter describes current dependant time delay functionality. Both ANSI and IEC Inverse time curves and tables are included.

985

Application

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections in different points in the network different time delays for the different relays are normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In more sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections connected in series.

IPickup

IPickup

IPickup

xx05000129_ansi.vsd

Figure 450: Three overcurrent protections connected in series

Stage 3 Time Stage 2 Stage 2

Stage 1

Stage 1

Stage 1

Fault point position

en05000130.vsd

Figure 451: Definite time overcurrent characteristics

986

Application

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

Time

Fault point position

en05000131.vsd

Figure 452: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and still assure the selectivity between protections. To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following factors, in a simple case with two protections in series: Difference between pick-up time of the protections to be co-ordinated Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault Reset time of the protection Margin dependent of the time-delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

987

Application

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

A1

B1

Feeder

51

51

Time axis

t=0

t=t1

t=t2

t=t3
en05000132_ansi.vsd

where: t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3 is The fault occurs is Protection B1 trips is Breaker at B1 opens is Protection A1 resets

Figure 453: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When the fault occurs the protections pickup to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped. In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications: If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults, picks up and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system. Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic reclosing to a permanent fault.

988

Application

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release function.

989

Principle of operation

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

2
2.1

Principle of operation
Mode of operation
The function can operate in a definite time delay mode or in a current dependent inverse time delay mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr. Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen. If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value (here internal signal pickupValue), a timer, according to the selected operate mode, is started. The component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations. In case of definite time the timer will run constantly until the trip time is reached or until the current drops below the reset value (pickup value minus the hysteresis) and the reset time has elapsed. For definite time delay curve index no 5 (ANSI/IEEE Definite time) or 15 (IEC Definite time) are chosen. The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 119.

A t [s ] = P i Pickupn

+ B td
(Equation 119)

where: p, A, B, C Pickupn td i are constants defined for each curve type, is the set pickup current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current.

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set pickup level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:

990

Principle of operation

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

t op B td

P i C = A td Pickupn

(Equation 120)

where: top is the operation time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to equation 121, in addition to the constant time delay:

P i Pickupn 0

C dt A td

(Equation 121)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
i ( j ) P C A td Pickupn j =1
n

(Equation 122)

where: j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected, i.e. when

i Pickupn

>1

is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the protection algorithm, is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation is fulfilled, i.e. when a trip is given and is the fault current at time j

n i (j)

For inverse time operation, the inverse-time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time characteristics are supported. The list of characteristics in table 573 matches the list in the IEC 61850-7-4 spec.

991

Principle of operation

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

Table 573: Curve name and index no.

Curve name
Curve name ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normal Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse ANSI Long Time Very Inverse IEC Normal Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Inverse IEC Extremely. Inverse IEC Short Time Inverse IEC Long Time Inverse

Curve index no.

1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

For the ANSI/IEEE characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to table 574:
Table 574: Inverse time curves for ANSI/IEEE characteristics
Parameter/operationMode
1 = ANSI Extremely inverse 2 = ANSI Very inverse 3 = ANSI Inverse 4 = ANSI Moderately inverse 6 = ANSI Long-time extremely inverse 7 = ANSI Long-time very inverse 8 = ANSI Long-time inverse

A
28.2 19.61 0.0086 0.0515 64.07 28.55 0.086

B
0.1217 0.491 0.0185 0.1140 0.250 0.712 0.185

C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1

p
2.0 2.0 0.02 0.02 2.0 2.0 0.02

For the IEC characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to table 575:
Table 575: Inverse time curves for IEC characteristics
Parameter/operationMode
9 = IEC Normal inverse 10 = IEC Very inverse 11 = IEC Inverse 12 = IEC Extremely inverse 13 = IEC Short-time inverse 14 = IEC Long-time inverse

A()
0.14 13.5 0.14 80.0 0.05 120

B
0 0 0 0 0 0

C
1 1 1 1 1 1

p ()
0.02 1.0 0.02 2.0 0.04 1.0

992

Principle of operation

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time delay of operation, see figure 454.

Operate time

tnMin

Current
en05000133.vsd

Figure 454: Minimum time delay operation for the IEC curves
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse curve for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k. In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional curves available; the 18 = RI time inverse and the 19 = RD time inverse. The 18 = RI time inverse curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 123:

993

Principle of operation

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

td t [s ] = Pickupn 0.339 0.235 i

where: Pickupn td i

(Equation 123)

is the set pickup current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current.

The 19 = RD time inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual ground fault current protection, with ability to detect high resistive ground faults. The curve is described by equation 124:

t s = 5.8 1.35 ln

[ ]

td Pickupn
i
(Equation 124)

where: Pickupn td i is the set pickup current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current

If the curve type is chosen as 17 the user can make a tailor made inverse time curve according to the general equation 125.

A t [s ] = P i Pickupn

+ B td
(Equation 125)

Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. We have the possibility to choose between three different reset type delays. Available alternatives are listed in table 576.

994

Principle of operation

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

Table 576: Reset type delays

Curve name
Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI Reset

Curve index no.

1 2 3

If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis. If IEC reset is chosen the timer is reset the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current drops below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis. If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault clearance (when the current drops below the pickup current level minus the hysteresis). The timer will reset according to equation 126.

tr t[ s ] = i 2 1 in >
(Equation 126)

where: The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.

The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the choice of time delay characteristic. For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1 - 4 and 6 - 8) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9 - 14) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given, see equation 127:

995

Principle of operation

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

tr t[ s ] = i pr cr in >
(Equation 127)

For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics (type 18 and 19) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

996

Inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

Inverse characteristics
Table 577: Inverse time characteristics ANSI
Function
Operate characteristic:

Range or value
td = 0.05-999 in steps of 0.01 unless otherwise stated
+ B td

Accuracy
-

t =

A P ( I 1)

Reset characteristic:

t =

(I

tr
2

td

I = Imeasured/Iset ANSI Extremely Inverse no 1 ANSI Very inverse no 2 ANSI Normal Inverse no 3 ANSI Moderately Inverse no 4 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse no 6 ANSI Long Time Very Inverse no 7 ANSI Long Time Inverse no 8 A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0, tr=29.1 A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0, tr=21.6 A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46 A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85 A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30 A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46 td=(0.01-1.20) in steps of 0.01 A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6 ANSI/IEEE C37.112, class 5 + 30 ms

997

Inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

Table 578: Inverse time characteristics IEC

Function
Operate characteristic:

Range or value
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

Accuracy
-

t =

A P td ( I 1)
(0.000-60.000) s A=0.14, P=0.02 A=13.5, P=1.0 A=0.14, P=0.02 A=80.0, P=2.0 A=0.05, P=0.04 A=120, P=1.0 td=0.5-999 in steps of 0.1 A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 IEC 60255, class 5 + 40 ms
0.5% of set time 10 ms

I = Imeasured/Iset Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time IEC Normal Inverse no 9 IEC Very inverse no 10 IEC Inverse no 11 IEC Extremely inverse no 12 IEC Short-time inverse no 13 IEC Long-time inverse no 14 Customer defined characteristic no 17 Operate characteristic: IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

A = (I P C )

+ B td

B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01 C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1 P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001

Reset characteristic:

t =

(I

TR
PR

CR

TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001 CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1

t =

TR I
PR

CR

td

PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001

I = Imeasured/Iset RI inverse characteristic no 18 td=(0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

t =

0.339

0.236 I

td

I = Imeasured/Iset Logarithmic inverse characteristic no 19 td=(0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

t = 5.8 1.35 In

I td

I = Imeasured/Iset

998

Inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

Table 579: Inverse time characteristics for Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)
Function
Type A curve:

Range or value
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
t = td

Accuracy
Class 5 +40 ms

VPickup V VPickup
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
td 480 + 0.055

V = Vmeasured Type B curve:

t =

VPickup V 32 VPickup

0.5

2.0

V = Vmeasured Programmable curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

t =

td A VPickup V B VPickup

+D P C

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001

V = Vmeasured

999

Inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

Table 580: Inverse time characteristics for Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)
Function
Type A curve:

Range or value
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
t =

Accuracy
Class 5 +40 ms

td

V VPickup VPickup
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
td 480

V = Vmeasured Type B curve:

t =

V VPickup 0.5 32 VPickup

2.0

0.035

Type C curve:

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

td 480

t =

V VPickup 0.5 32 VPickup

3.0

0.035

Programmable curve:

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

td A +D

t =

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001

V VPickup B VPickup

1000

Inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

Table 581: Inverse time characteristics for Two step residual overvoltage protection (POVM, 59N)
Function
Type A curve:

Range or value
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
t =

Accuracy
Class 5 +40 ms

td

V VPickup VPickup
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
td 480

V = Vmeasured Type B curve:

t =

V VPickup 0.5 32 VPickup

2.0

0.035

Type C curve:

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

td 480

t =

V VPickup 0.5 32 VPickup

3.0

0.035

Programmable curve:

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

td A +D

t =

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001

V VPickup B VPickup

1001

Inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

TD= 15 10 7 5 3 2

0.1
0.5

0.01

10

100 I/I Pickup (Multiple of Pickup)

xx05000764_ansi.vsd

Figure 455: ANSI Extremely inverse

1002

Inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

TD= 15 10

7 5 3 2 1

0.1
0.5

0.01

10

100 I/I Pickup (Multiple of Pickup)

xx05000765_ansi.vsd

Figure 456: ANSI Very inverse

1003

Inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

TD= 15 10

7 5 3 2 1

0.1
0.5

0.01

10

100 I/I Pickup (Multiple of Pickup)

xx05000766_ansi.vsd

Figure 457: ANSI Inverse

1004

Inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

TD=

10

15 10 7 5 3 2

1
1 0.5

0.1

0.01

10

100 I/I Pickup (Multiple of Pickup)

xx05000767_ansi.vsd

Figure 458: Moderately inverse

1005

Inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

TD= 1.1 0.9 0.7

0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05

0.1

0.01

10

100 I/I Pickup (Multiple of Pickup)

xx05000768_ansi.vsd

Figure 459: IEC Normal inverse

1006

Inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

1
TD= 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.3

0.1

0.2 0.1 0.05

0.01

10

100 I/I Pickup (Multiple of Pickup)

xx05000769_ansi.vsd

Figure 460: Very inverse

1007

Inverse characteristics

Chapter 21 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

TD=

0.1

1.1 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.3 0.2

0.01

10

0.1 0.05

100 I/I Pickup (Multiple of Pickup)

xx05000770_ansi.vsd

Figure 461: Extremely inverse

1008

About this chapter

Chapter 22 Glossary

Chapter 22 Glossary
About this chapter This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.

1009

Glossary

Chapter 22 Glossary

Glossary

AC A/D converter ADBS ADM ANSI AR AngNegRes ArgDirAngDir ASCT ASD AWG BBP BFP BIM BOM BR BS BSR BST C37.94 CAN CAP 531 CB CBM CCITT

Alternating current Analog to digital converter Amplitude dead -band supervision Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization American National Standards Institute Autoreclosing Setting parameter/ZD/ Setting parameter/ZD/ Auxiliary summation current transformer Adaptive signal detection American Wire Gauge standard Busbar protection Breaker failure protection Binary input module Binary output module External bi-stable relay British standard Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial communication Configuration and programming tool Circuit breaker Combined backplane module Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body within the International Telecommunications Union. CAN carrier module Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI Combined mega pulses per second Close-open cycle

CCM CCVT Class C CMPPS CO cycle

1010

Glossary

Chapter 22 Glossary

Co-directional COMTRADE

Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI C37.111, 1999 / IEC60255-24 Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals Central processor unit Carrier receive Cyclic redundancy check Carrier send Current transformer Capacitive voltage transformer Delayed auto-reclosing Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.) Dead bus dead line Dead bus live line Direct current Discrete Fourier transform Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board Dead line live bus Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std. 1379-2000 Disturbance recorder Dynamic random access memory Disturbance report handler Digital signal processor Direct transfer trip scheme Extra high voltage network Electronic Industries Association Electro magnetic compatibility Electro motive force Electro magnetic interference End fault protection Electrostatic discharge Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and protection signals

Contra-directional

CPU CR CRC CS CT CVT or CCVT DAR DARPA DBDL DBLL DC DFT DIP-switch DLLB DNP DR DRAM DRH DSP DTT EHV network EIA EMC EMF EMI EnFP ESD FOX 20

1011

Glossary

Chapter 22 Glossary

FOX 512/515 FOX 6Plus G.703

Access multiplexer Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and unbalanced lines Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module General interrogation command Gas insulated switchgear Generic object oriented substation event Global positioning system GPS time synchronization module High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard Plastic fiber connector Human machine interface High speed auto reclosing High voltage High voltage direct current Integrating dead band supervision International Electrical Committee IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Substation Automation communication standard Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable PCI Mezzanine card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common mezzanine card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the electrical EMF Electro Motive Force. Intelligent electronic device Intelligent gas insulated switchgear Binary input/output module

GCM GI GIS GOOSE GPS GSM HDLC protocol HFBR connector type HMI HSAR HV HVDC IDBS IEC IEC 60044-6 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 IEEE IEEE 802.12 IEEE P1386.1

IED I-GIS IOM

1012

Glossary

Chapter 22 Glossary

Instance

When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a function is identical to another of the same kind but will have a different number in the IED user interfaces. The word instance is sometimes defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of function. 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation and re-assembly through the data link layer. 2. Ingression protection according to IEC standard

IP

IP 20

Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level IP20- Protected against solidforeign objects of12.5mm diameter andgreater.

IP 40 IP 54

Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level IP40-Protected against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and greater. Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level IP54-Dust-protected,protected againstsplashing water.

IRF IRIG-B: ITU LAN LIB 520 LCD LDCM LDD LED LNT LON MCB MCM MIM MPM MVB NCC NUM OCO cycle OCP OEM

Internal fail signal InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200 International Telecommunications Union Local area network High voltage software module Liquid crystal display Line differential communication module Local detection device Light emitting diode LON network tool Local operating network Miniature circuit breaker Mezzanine carrier module Milli-ampere module Main processing module Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed for use in trains. National Control Centre Numerical module Open-close-open cycle Overcurrent protection Optical ethernet module

1013

Glossary

Chapter 22 Glossary

OLTC OV Overreach

On load tap changer Over voltage A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example a distance relay is over-reaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not have seen it. Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus Pulse code modulation Protection and control IED manager Mezzanine card standard Process interface for sensors & actuators PCI Mezzanine card Permissive overreach transfer trip Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the measured and/or controlled components Power supply module Parameter setting tool Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio Permissive underreach transfer trip Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX Relay characteristic angle Evaluation software Resistance for phase-to-phase faults Resistance for phase-to-ground faults

PCI PCM PCM 600 PC-MIP PISA PMC POTT Process bus PSM PST PT ratio PUTT RASC RCA REVAL RFPP

RISC RMS value RS422 RS485 RTC RTU SA SC SCS SCT SLM SMA connector

Reduced instruction set computer Root mean square value A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-point connections Serial link according to EIA standard RS485 Real time clock Remote terminal unit Substation Automation Switch or push-button to close Station control system System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850 Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC communication. Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant impedance.

1014

Glossary

Chapter 22 Glossary

SMS SNTP

Station monitoring system Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required accuracy. Strmberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Switch for CB ready condition Switch or push-button to trip Neutral/Wye point of transformer or generator Static VAr compensation Trip coil Trip circuit supervision Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet. Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for internet working and encompasses both network layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP. Time delayed gound-fault protection function Threaded Neill Concelman, A threaded constant impedance version of a BNC connector Current transformer class according to IEC A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example a distance relay is under-reaching when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The relay does not see the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach. Process interface components that deliver measured voltage and current values Coordinated universal time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth"s orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth"s irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where it also sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu time". "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands for "Z" which stands for longitude zero. Undervoltage

SPA SRY ST Starpoint SVC TC TCS TCP TCP/IP

TEF TNC connector TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Underreach

U/I-PISA UTC

UV

1015

Glossary

Chapter 22 Glossary

WEI VT X.21 3IO

Weak end infeed logic Voltage transformer A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the residual or the -fault current Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

1016

ABB Inc 3450 Harvester Road Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada Phone: (905) 639-8840 Fax: (905) 333-7565 ABB Inc 7036 Snowdrift Road Allentown, PA 18106, USA Phone: (610) 395-7333 Toll Free: (800) 634-6005 Fax: (610) 395-1055 Internet: www.abb.com/substationautomation Printed on recycled and ecolabelled paper at Elanders Novum

1MRK 506 275-UUS